NextERP/documentation
5
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
e48fa83b20
documentation/locale/sources/inventory_and_mrp.pot
Tiffany Chang (tic) 143b74336c [I18N] *: export latest terms 
As per usual, leave off developer.pot and contributing.pot since we
don't translate them (not useful, can't really contribute to/dev in
Odoo without knowing English)

closes odoo/documentation#9583

X-original-commit: f1d8cb8f16
Signed-off-by: Louis Wicket (wil) <wil@odoo.com>
Signed-off-by: Tiffany Chang (tic) <tic@odoo.com>
2024-06-03 08:28:56 +00:00

22977 lines
1.5 MiB
Raw Blame History

This file contains ambiguous Unicode characters

This file contains Unicode characters that might be confused with other characters. If you think that this is intentional, you can safely ignore this warning. Use the Escape button to reveal them.

# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
# Copyright (C) Odoo S.A.
# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package.
# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
#
#, fuzzy
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 17.0\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2024-05-31 09:59+0000\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp.rst:5
msgid "Supply Chain"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:8
msgid "Barcode"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Barcode** allows users to assign barcodes to individual products and product categories, and track inventory movements using those barcodes. By connecting a barcode scanner, certain inventory processes can be triggered by scanning barcodes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode.rst:15
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Barcode <https://www.odoo.com/slides/barcode-30>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations.rst:5
msgid "Daily operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3
msgid "Apply inventory adjustments with barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5
msgid "In a warehouse, the recorded inventory counts in the database might not always match the actual, real inventory counts. In such cases, inventory adjustments can be made to reconcile the differences, and ensure that the recorded counts in the database match the actual counts in the warehouse. In Odoo, the *Barcode* app can be used to make these adjustments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:10
msgid "These adjustments can be done in real time using an Odoo-compatible barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:14
msgid "For a list of Odoo-compatible barcode mobile scanners, and other hardware for the *Inventory* and *Barcode* apps, refer to the `Odoo Inventory • Hardware page <https://www.odoo.com/app/inventory-hardware>`_."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:19
msgid ":doc:`../../inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:22
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:13
msgid "Enable Barcode app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24
msgid "To use the *Barcode* app to create and apply inventory adjustments, it **must** be installed by enabling the feature from the settings of the *Inventory* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:27
msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, and click the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:24
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:22
msgid "Once the checkbox is ticked, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the page to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:33
msgid "After saving, a new drop-down menu appears under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` option, labeled :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature`, where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected. Each nomenclature option determines how scanners interpret barcodes in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:38
msgid "There is also a :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` internal link arrow, along with a set of :guilabel:`Print` buttons for printing barcode commands and a barcode demo sheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Barcode feature in Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:46
msgid "For more information on setting up and configuring the :guilabel:`Barcode` app, refer to the :doc:`Set up your barcode scanner <../setup/hardware>` and :doc:`Activate the Barcodes in Odoo <../setup/software>` docs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:51
msgid "Perform an inventory adjustment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:53
msgid "Begin by navigating to the :menuselection:`Barcode app --> Barcode Scanning` dashboard, where different options will be displayed, including :guilabel:`Operations`, :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments`, and :guilabel:`Batch Transfers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:57
msgid "To create and apply inventory adjustments, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` button at the bottom of the screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:60
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:123
msgid "Doing so navigates to the *Barcode Inventory Client Action* page, labeled as :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment` in the top header section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Barcode app start screen with scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:67
msgid "To begin the adjustment, first scan the *source location*, which is the current location in the warehouse of the product whose count should be adjusted. Then, scan the product barcode(s)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:70
msgid "The barcode of a specific product can be scanned multiple times to increase the quantity of that product in the adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:74
msgid "If the warehouse *multi-location* feature is **not** enabled in the database, a source location does not need to be scanned. Instead, simply scan the product barcode to start the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:78
msgid "Alternatively, the quantity can be changed by clicking the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` icon on the far right of the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:81
msgid "Doing so opens a separate window with a keypad. Edit the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` line to change the quantity. Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the number keys can be used to add quantity, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:86
msgid "In the below inventory adjustment, the source location `WH/Stock/Shelf/2` was scanned, assigning the location. Then, the barcode for the product `[FURN_7888] Desk Stand with Screen` was scanned 3 times, increasing the units in the adjustment. Additional products can be added to this adjustment by scanning the barcodes for those specific products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0
msgid "Barcode Inventory Client Action page with inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:95
msgid "To complete the inventory adjustment, click the green :guilabel:`✅ Apply` button with the check mark at the bottom of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:98
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:150
msgid "Once applied, Odoo navigates back to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen. A small green banner appears in the top right corner, confirming validation of the adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:101
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:180
msgid "Did you know?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:103
msgid "Odoo's *Barcode* application provides demo data with barcodes to explore the features of the app. These can be used for testing purposes, and can be printed from the home screen of the app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:106
msgid "To access this demo data, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app` and click :guilabel:`stock barcodes sheet` and :guilabel:`commands for Inventory` (bolded and highlighted in blue) in the information pop-up window above the scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:0
msgid "Demo data prompt pop-up on Barcode app main screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:115
msgid "Manually add products to inventory adjustment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:117
msgid "When the barcodes for the location or product are not available, Odoo *Barcode* can still be used to perform inventory adjustments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:120
msgid "To do this, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app --> Barcode Scanning --> Inventory Adjustments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:126
msgid "To manually add products to this adjustment, click the white :guilabel:`➕ Add Product` button at the bottom of the screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:129
msgid "This navigates to a new, blank page where the desired product, quantity, and source location must be chosen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:0
msgid "Keypad to add products on Barcode Inventory Client Action page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:136
msgid "First, click the :guilabel:`Product` line, and choose the product whose stock count should be adjusted. Then, manually enter the quantity of that product, either by changing the `1` in the :guilabel:`Quantity` line, or by clicking the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons to add or subtract quantity of the product. The number pad can be used to add quantity, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:141
msgid "Below the number pad is the :guilabel:`location` line, which should read `WH/Stock` by default. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of locations to choose from, and choose the :guilabel:`source location` for this inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:145
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:147
msgid "To apply the inventory adjustment, click the green :guilabel:`✅ Apply` button with the check mark, at the bottom of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3
msgid "Default barcode nomenclature"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:10
msgid "*Barcode nomenclatures* define how barcodes are recognized and categorized. When a barcode is scanned, it is associated to the **first** rule with a matching pattern. The pattern syntax is described in Odoo's nomenclature list using a regular expression, and a barcode is successfully read by Odoo if its prefix and/or length matches the one defined in the barcode's rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15
msgid "Odoo *Barcode* supports UPC (Universal Product Code), EAN (European Article Number), and GS1 encoding. The pre-configured nomenclatures in Odoo are *Default Nomenclature* and *Default GS1 Nomenclature*. The default nomenclature uses |UPC| and |EAN| encoding, and supports |UPC|/|EAN| conversion."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:21
msgid "|UPC| and |EAN| barcodes **must** be `purchased from GS1 <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_ to use these barcodes. GS1 is the **only** official provider of |UPC|/|EAN| and GS1 |GTINs| in the world."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:32
msgid "Set up barcode nomenclature"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:30
msgid "To use default nomenclature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, click the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` to enable barcodes. Doing so installs the *Barcode* app in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:34
msgid "Next, ensure that the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` setting is selected in the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` field. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled barcode setting with Default Nomenclature selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:41
msgid "Once the nomenclature is saved and selected, the :menuselection:`Barcode Nomenclatures` settings can be accessed, via a hidden menu that is **only** discoverable after enabling :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:45
msgid "Once developer mode is enabled, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures` menu, and select :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48
msgid "From this page, the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` is specified at the top as the `Default Nomenclature`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:51
msgid "Under that, the :guilabel:`UPC/EAN Conversion` field is set to :guilabel:`Always`, by default. This setting determines if a |UPC|/|EAN| barcode should be automatically converted one way or another when trying to match a rule with the other encoding."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:55
msgid "The other available options for this field are :guilabel:`Never`, :guilabel:`EAN-13 to UPC-A`, and :guilabel:`UPC-A to EAN-13`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:59
msgid "For |UPC|/|EAN| conversion to work for every barcode scanned, the setting in the :guilabel:`UPC/EAN Conversion` field **must** be set to :guilabel:`Always`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:62
msgid "The last field at the top of the page is the :guilabel:`Is GS1 Nomenclature` field. For the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature`, this field should remain unchecked. This is because the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` uses |UPC| and |EAN| encoding, *not* GS1 encoding."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1
msgid "Default Nomenclature page setting fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:70
msgid "Further down the page, there is a list showcasing the :guilabel:`Rule Name`, :guilabel:`Type`, :guilabel:`Encoding`, and :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` for the *rules* and *barcode patterns* that Odoo supports for the default nomenclature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74
msgid "The :ref:`default nomenclature list <barcode/operations/default-nomenclature-list>` contains all the information that can be condensed with a |UPC|/|EAN| barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80
msgid "Use UPC/EAN barcodes in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82
msgid "For product identification using |UPC|/|EAN| barcodes in Odoo, businesses **must** obtain `barcodes <https://www.gs1us.org/upcs-barcodes-prefixes/how-to-get-a-upc-barcode>`_ purchased directly from GS1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86
msgid "The |UPC| and |EAN| barcode formats are predominantly used in their own regions. |UPC| is used only in the United States and Canada, while |EAN| is used everywhere else globally."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:89
msgid "A |UPC| is usually a 12-digit barcode used to identify most products, while |EAN| barcodes use 13-digit barcodes to identify products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92
msgid "|UPC| codes can be converted to |EAN| by prefixing them with a zero. In Odoo, by default, |UPC|/|EAN| barcodes are automatically converted one way or another when trying to match a rule with the other encoding."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:96
msgid "Refer to the :ref:`default nomenclature list <barcode/operations/default-nomenclature-list>` to see a comprehensive list of all barcode patterns and rules to follow."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:100
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:96
msgid "Create rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:102
msgid "|UPC| and |EAN| barcodes contain specific information in the barcode. Scanning these codes from the :ref:`default nomenclature list <barcode/operations/default-nomenclature-list>` automatically fills corresponding data in the Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:106
msgid "Adding new barcode rules to this list ensures that non-standard (:dfn:`user-created`) formats are interpreted accurately."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:109
msgid "To create new rules, first activate :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`. Then, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures`. Select the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` list item."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:113
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` page, select :guilabel:`Add a line` at the bottom of the table, which opens a :guilabel:`Create Rules` pop-up window to create a new rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:-1
msgid "Create Rules pop-up window on Default Nomenclature page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:120
msgid "The :guilabel:`Rule Name` field is used internally to identify what the barcode represents."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:122
msgid "The :guilabel:`Sequence` field represents the priority of the rule; meaning the smaller the value, the higher the rule appears on the table."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:125
msgid "The barcode :guilabel:`Type` field represents different classifications of information that can be understood by the system (e.g., :guilabel:`Package`, :guilabel:`Lot`, :guilabel:`Location`, :guilabel:`Coupon`, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:129
msgid "The :guilabel:`Encoding` field specifies which encoding the barcode uses; this rule **only** applies if the barcode uses this specific encoding. The available :guilabel:`Encoding` options are: :guilabel:`EAN-13`, :guilabel:`EAN-8`, :guilabel:`UPC-A`, and :guilabel:`GS1-28`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:133
msgid "The :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` field represents how the sequence of letters or numbers is recognized by the system to contain information about the product. Odoo follows the sequential order of this table, and uses the first rule it matches, based on the sequence."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:138
msgid "Barcode patterns can also define how numerical values, such as weight or price, are encoded in the barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:141
msgid "They are indicated by **{NNN}**, where `N` defines where the number's digits are encoded. *Floats* are also supported with the decimals, indicated by `D`, such as **{NNNDD}**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:144
msgid "In this case, the barcode field on the associated records **must** show these digits as zeros."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:146
msgid "After filling in the information, click the :guilabel:`Save & New` button to save the rule, and instantly start creating another rule. Or, click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to save the rule, and return to the table of rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:151
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` field contains `.*`, it means it can contain **any** number of characters - those characters being **any** number or type of character."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:157
msgid "Default nomenclature list"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:159
msgid "The table below contains Odoo's list of :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` rules. Barcode patterns are written in regular expressions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:166
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166
msgid "Rule Name"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:167
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173
msgid "Type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:168
msgid "Encoding"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:169
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166
msgid "Barcode Pattern"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:170
msgid "Price Barcodes 2 Decimals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:171
msgid "Priced Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:172
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:180
msgid "EAN-13"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:173
msgid "23.....{NNNDD}"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:174
msgid "Discount Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:175
msgid "Discounted Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:176
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:184
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:188
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:192
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:196
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:200
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:204
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:208
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:212
msgid "Any"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:177
msgid "22{NN}"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:178
msgid "Weight Barcodes 3 Decimals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:179
msgid "Weighted Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:181
msgid "21.....{NNDDD}"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:182
msgid "Customer Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:183
msgid "Client"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:185
msgid "042"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:186
msgid "Coupon & Gift Card Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:187
msgid "Coupon"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:189
msgid "043|044"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:190
msgid "Cashier Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:191
msgid "Cashier"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:193
msgid "041"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:194
msgid "Location barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:195
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:20
msgid "Location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:197
msgid "414"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:198
msgid "Package barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:199
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175
msgid "Package"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:201
msgid "PACK"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:202
msgid "Lot barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:203
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194
msgid "Lot"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:205
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:143
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:39
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:41
msgid "10"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:206
msgid "Magnetic Credit Card"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:207
msgid "Credit Card"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:209
msgid "%.*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:210
msgid "Product Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:211
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180
msgid "Unit Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:213
msgid ".*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:216
msgid ":doc:`gs1_nomenclature`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:3
msgid "GS1 barcode nomenclature"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:12
msgid "`GS1 nomenclature <https://www.gs1us.org/>`_ consolidates various product and supply chain data into a single barcode. Odoo takes in `unique Global Trade Item Numbers <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_ (GTIN), purchased by businesses, to enable global shipping, sales, and eCommerce product listing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:17
msgid "Configure GS1 nomenclature to scan barcodes of sealed boxes and identify essential product information, such as |GTIN|, lot number, quantity information, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:21
msgid "|GTINs| are unique product identification that **must** be `purchased from GS1 <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_ to use GS1 barcodes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:25
msgid "`All GS1 barcodes <https://www.gs1.org/standards/barcodes/application-identifiers>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:26
msgid ":ref:`Odoo's default GS1 rules <barcode/operations/default-gs1-nomenclature-list>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:27
msgid ":ref:`Why's my barcode not working? <barcode/operations/troubleshooting>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:34
msgid "To use GS1 nomenclature, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then under the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, check the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` box. Next, select :menuselection:`Barcode Nomenclature --> Default GS1 Nomenclature` from the default barcode nomenclature options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:-1
msgid "Choose GS1 from dropdown and click the external link to see the list of GS1 rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:43
msgid "The list of GS1 *rules* and *barcode patterns* Odoo supports by default is accessible by clicking the :guilabel:`➡️ (arrow)` icon to the right of the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` selection."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:46
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Nomenclature` pop-up table, view and edit the GS1 :guilabel:`Rule Names` available in Odoo. The table contains all the information that can be condensed with a GS1 barcode, along with the corresponding :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:51
msgid "After setting GS1 as the barcode nomenclature, the :menuselection:`Barcode Nomenclatures` settings can also be accessed by a hidden menu that's discoverable after enabling :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`. Once enabled, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures` menu and finally, select :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:60
msgid "Use GS1 barcodes in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:62
msgid "For product identification using GS1 barcodes in Odoo, businesses obtain a `unique GTIN <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_ as an internationally distinct product identifier purchased from GS1. This |GTIN| is combined with specific product details following GS1's designated *barcode pattern*. The barcode pattern's arrangement of numbers and letters must adhere to GS1 conventions for accurate interpretation by global systems along the supply chain."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:68
msgid "Every barcode starts with a 2-4 digit `application identifier <https://www.gs1.org/standards/barcodes/application-identifiers>`_ (A.I.). This required prefix universally indicates what kind of information the barcode contains. Odoo follows GS1 rules for identifying information, as detailed in the :ref:`default GS1 rules list <barcode/operations/default-gs1-nomenclature-list>`. Including the relevant |AI| from the list enables Odoo to correctly interpret GS1 barcodes. While most barcode patterns have a fixed length requirement, certain ones, such as lots and serial numbers, have flexible length."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:77
msgid "For flexible-length barcode patterns not placed at the end of the GS1 barcode, use the FNC1 separator (`\\\\x1D`) to end the barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:80
msgid "Example: The barcode pattern for lot numbers is 20 characters long. Instead of creating a 20-character lot number barcode, like `LOT00000000000000001`, use the FNC1 separator to make it shorter: `LOT001\\x1D`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:84
msgid "Refer to the :ref:`GS1 nomenclature list <barcode/operations/default-gs1-nomenclature-list>` to see a comprehensive list of all barcode patterns and rules to follow. Otherwise, refer to :ref:`this GS1 usage doc <barcode/operations/gs1_usage>` for specific examples of combining |GTIN| to product information and configuring the workflow."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:90
msgid ":ref:`Lots workflow <barcode/operations/gs1-lots>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:91
msgid ":ref:`Non-unit quantities workflow <barcode/operations/quantity-ex>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:98
msgid "GS1 rules are a specific format of information contained in the barcode, beginning with an |AI| and containing a defined length of characters. Scanning GS1 barcodes from the :ref:`default GS1 list <barcode/operations/default-gs1-nomenclature-list>` auto-fills corresponding data in the Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:103
msgid "Adding GS1 barcode rules in Odoo ensures accurate interpretation of unique, non-standard GS1 formats."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:106
msgid "To do so, begin by turning on :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>` and navigating to the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclatures` list in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclatures`. Then, select the :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` list item."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:110
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` page, select :guilabel:`Add a line` at the bottom of the table, which opens a window to create a new rule. The :guilabel:`Rule Name` field is used internally to identify what the barcode represents. The barcode :guilabel:`Types` are different classifications of information that can be understood by the system (e.g. product, quantity, best before date, package, coupon). The :guilabel:`Sequence` represents the priority of the rule; this means the smaller the value, the higher the rule appears on the table. Odoo follows the sequential order of this table and will use the first rule it matches based on the sequence. The :guilabel:`Barcode Pattern` is how the sequence of letters or numbers is recognized by the system to contain information about the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:120
msgid "After filling in the information, click the :guilabel:`Save & New` button to make another rule or click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to save and return to the table of rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:126
msgid "Barcode troubleshooting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:128
msgid "Since GS1 barcodes are challenging to work with, here are some checks to try when the barcodes are not working as expected:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:131
msgid "Ensure that the :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` setting is set as :menuselection:`Default GS1 Nomenclature`. Jump to the :ref:`nomenclature setup section <barcode/operations/set-up-barcode-nomenclature>` for more details."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:134
msgid "Ensure that the fields scanned in the barcode are enabled in Odoo. For example, to scan a barcode containing lots and serial numbers, make sure the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is enabled in :ref:`Odoo's settings <barcode/operations/lot-setup>` and :ref:`on the product <barcode/operations/lot-setup-on-product>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:138
msgid "Omit punctuation such as parentheses `()` or brackets `[]` between the :abbr:`A.I. (Application Identifier)` and the barcode sequence. These are typically used in examples for ease of reading and should **not** be included in the final barcode. For more details on building GS1 barcodes, go to :ref:`this section <barcode/operations/create-GS1-barcode>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:142
msgid "When a single barcode contains multiple encoded fields, Odoo requires all rules to be listed in the barcode nomenclature for Odoo to read the barcode. :ref:`This section <barcode/operations/create-new-rules>` details how to add new rules in the barcode nomenclature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:146
msgid "Test barcodes containing multiple encoded fields, piece by piece, to figure out which field is causing the issue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:150
msgid "When testing a barcode containing the |GTIN|, lot number, and quantity, start by scanning the |GTIN| alone. Then, test the |GTIN| with the lot number, and finally, try scanning the whole barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:154
msgid "After diagnosing the encoded field is unknown, :ref:`add new rules <barcode/operations/create-new-rules>` to Odoo's default list to recognize GS1 barcodes with unique specifications."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:159
msgid "While the new field will be read, the information won't link to an existing field in Odoo without developer customizations. However, adding new rules is necessary to ensure the rest of the fields in the barcode are interpreted correctly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:166
msgid "GS1 nomenclature list"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:168
msgid "The table below contains Odoo's default list of GS1 rules. Barcode patterns are written in regular expressions. Only the first three rules require a `check digit <https://www.gs1.org/services/check-digit-calculator>`_ as the final character."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173
msgid "GS1 Content Type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:173
msgid "Odoo field"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175
msgid "Serial Shipping Container Code"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175
msgid "(00)(\\\\d{18})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189
msgid "Numeric identifier"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:175
msgid "Package name"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168
msgid "Global Trade Item Number (GTIN)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168
msgid "(01)(\\\\d{14})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168
msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode` field on product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180
msgid "GTIN of contained trade items"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180
msgid "(02)(\\\\d{14})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:180
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:3
msgid "Packaging"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183
msgid "Ship to / Deliver to global location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186
msgid "Destination location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:183
msgid "(410)(\\\\d{13})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186
msgid "Ship / Deliver for forward"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186
msgid "(413)(\\\\d{13})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:186
msgid "Source location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189
msgid "I.D. of a physical location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:189
msgid "(414)(\\\\d{13})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45
msgid "Batch or lot number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191
msgid "(10) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:191
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225
msgid "Alpha-numeric name"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194
msgid "Serial number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:194
msgid "(21) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197
msgid "Packaging date (YYMMDD)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197
msgid "Packaging Date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197
msgid "(13)(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203
msgid "Date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:197
msgid "Pack date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200
msgid "Best before date (YYMMDD)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200
msgid "Best before Date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200
msgid "(15)(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:200
msgid "Best before date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203
msgid "Expiration date (YYMMDD)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203
msgid "Expiration Date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203
msgid "(17)(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:203
msgid "Expiry date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171
msgid "Variable count of items"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43
msgid "Quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43
msgid "(30)(\\\\d{0,8})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223
msgid "Measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:206
msgid "UoM: Units"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208
msgid "Count of trade items"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208
msgid "(37)(\\\\d{0,8})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:208
msgid "Qty in units for containers (AI 02)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211
msgid "Net weight: kilograms (kg)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171
msgid "(310[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:211
msgid "Qty in kg"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213
msgid "Length in meters (m)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213
msgid "(311[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:213
msgid "Qty in m"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215
msgid "Net volume: liters (L)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215
msgid "(315[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:215
msgid "Qty in L"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217
msgid "Net volume: cubic meters (m\\ :sup:`3`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217
msgid "(316[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:217
msgid "Qty in m\\ :sup:`3`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219
msgid "Length in inches (in)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219
msgid "(321[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:219
msgid "Qty in inches"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221
msgid "Net weight/volume: ounces (oz)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221
msgid "(357[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:221
msgid "Qty in oz"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223
msgid "Net volume: cubic feet (ft\\ :sup:`3`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223
msgid "(365[0-5])(\\\\d{6})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:223
msgid "Qty in ft\\ :sup:`3`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225
msgid "Packaging type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225
msgid "Packaging Type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225
msgid "(91) ([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,90})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_nomenclature.rst:225
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:115
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:77
msgid "Package type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:3
msgid "GS1 barcode usage"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:10
msgid "GS1 barcodes provide a standardized format that barcode scanners can interpret. They encode information in a :ref:`specific structure recognized globally <barcode/operations/gs1>`, allowing scanners to understand and process supply chain data consistently."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:14
msgid "Odoo *Barcode* interprets and prints GS1 barcodes, automating product identification and tracking in warehouse operations such as receiving, picking, and shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:17
msgid "The following sections contain examples of how Odoo uses GS1 barcodes provided by the business to identify common warehouse items and automate certain warehouse workflows."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:21
msgid "Odoo **does not** create GS1 barcodes. Businesses must purchase a unique Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) from GS1. Then, they can combine their existing GS1 barcodes with product and supply chain information (also provided by GS1) to create barcodes in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:26
msgid "`Purchase GTINs <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:27
msgid ":ref:`GS1 nomenclature <barcode/operations/gs1>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:32
msgid "Configure barcodes for product, quantity, and lots"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:34
msgid "To build a GS1 barcode that contains information about a product, its quantities, and the lot number, the following barcode patterns and Application Identifiers (A.I.) are used:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166
msgid "Name"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166
msgid "A.I."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:166
msgid "Field in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:78
msgid "Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:135
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:168
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:204
msgid "01"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:139
msgid "30"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:43
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171
msgid ":guilabel:`Units` field on transfer form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45
msgid "Lot Number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45
msgid "(10)([!\"%-/0-9:-?A-Z_a-z]{0,20})"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot` on Detailed Operations pop-up"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:41
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:53
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:19
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:22
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:19
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:104
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:49
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:22
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:48
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:104
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:27
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:46
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:20
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:65
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:24
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:23
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:41
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:26
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:31
msgid "Configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:54
msgid "First, :ref:`enable product tracking using lots <inventory/management/track_products_by_lots>` by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and checking the box for :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` under the :guilabel:`Traceability` heading."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:58
msgid "Then, set up the product barcode by navigating to the intended product form in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and selecting the product. On the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`. Then, in the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, fill in the :guilabel:`Barcode` field with the unique 14-digit `Global Trade Item Number (GTIN) <https://www.gs1.org/standards/get-barcodes>`_, which is a universally recognized identifying number that is provided by GS1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:66
msgid "On the product form, omit the |AI| `01` for |GTIN| product barcode pattern, as it is only used to encode multiple barcodes into a single barcode that contains detailed information about the package contents."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:72
msgid "To record the GS1 barcode for the product, `Fuji Apple`, enter the 14-digit |GTIN| `20611628936004` in the :guilabel:`Barcode` field on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "Enter 14-digit GTIN into the Barcode field on product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:80
msgid "To view a list of *all* products and their corresponding barcodes in the Odoo database, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Barcode` heading, click on the :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` button under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` section. Enter the 14-digit |GTIN| into the :guilabel:`Barcode` column, then click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "View the Product Barcodes page from inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:92
msgid "After activating tracking by lots and serial numbers from the settings page, specify that this feature is to be applied on each product by navigating to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on the product form. Under :guilabel:`Tracking`, choose the :guilabel:`By Lots` radio button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:-1
msgid "Enable product tracking by lots in the \"Inventory\" tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:101
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:176
msgid "Scan barcode on receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:103
msgid "To ensure accurate lot interpretation in Odoo on product barcodes scanned during a receipt operation, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode` app to manage the :ref:`receipt picking process <barcode/operations/scan-received-products>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:107
msgid "From the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` dashboard, click the :guilabel:`Operations` button, then the :guilabel:`Receipts` button to view the list of vendor receipts to process. Receipts generated from :abbr:`POs (Purchase Orders)` are listed, but new receipt operations can also be created directly through the :menuselection:`Barcode` app using the :guilabel:`Create` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:112
msgid "On the list of receipts, click on the warehouse operation (`WH/IN`) and scan product barcodes and lot numbers with a barcode scanner. The scanned product then appears on the list. Use the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` button to open a window and manually enter quantities for specific lot numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:118
msgid "After placing a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` for fifty apples, navigate to the associated receipt in the *Barcode* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:121
msgid "Scan the barcode containing the |GTIN|, quantity, and lot number. For testing with a barcode scanner, below is an example barcode for the fifty Fuji apples in Lot 2."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:129
msgid "50 Fuji apples in Lot0002"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:131
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:200
msgid "2D Matrix"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "2D matrix of GS1 barcode of 50 fuji apples with an assigned lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:134
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:203
msgid "|AI| (product)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:136
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:205
msgid "GS1 Barcode (product)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:137
msgid "20611628936004"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:138
msgid "|AI| (quantity)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:140
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:209
msgid "GS1 Barcode (quantity)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:141
msgid "00000050"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:142
msgid "|AI| (lot)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:144
msgid "GS1 Barcode (lot #)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:145
msgid "LOT0002"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:146
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:211
msgid "Full GS1 barcode"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:147
msgid "0120611628936004 3000000050 10LOT0002"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:149
msgid ":ref:`If the configuration is correct <barcode/operations/troubleshooting>`, `50/50` :guilabel:`Units` processed will be displayed and the :guilabel:`Validate` button turns green. Click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to complete the reception."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "Scan the barcode for a product on the reception picking page in the *Barcode* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:160
msgid "Configure barcode for product and non-unit quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:162
msgid "To build a GS1 barcode that contains products measured in a non-unit quantity, like kilograms, for example, the following barcode patterns are used:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171
msgid "Quantity in kilograms"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:171
msgid "310[0-5]"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:178
msgid "To confirm that quantities are correctly interpreted in Odoo, place an order in the *Purchase* app using the appropriate unit of measure (:guilabel:`UoM`) for the quantity of products to be purchased."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:183
msgid ":ref:`Simplify vendor unit conversions with UoMs <inventory/product_replenishment/unit-conversion>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:186
msgid "After the order is placed, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode` app to :ref:`receive the vendor shipment <barcode/operations/scan-received-products>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:190
msgid "On the receipt in the *Barcode* app, receive an order for `52.1 kg` of peaches by scanning the barcode containing the |GTIN| and quantity of peaches in kilograms."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:198
msgid "52.1 kg of Peaches"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "2D matrix of GS1 barcode of 52.1 kg of peaches."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:206
msgid "00614141000012"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:207
msgid "|AI| (kg, 1 decimal point)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:208
msgid "3101"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:210
msgid "000521"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:212
msgid "0100614141000012 3101000521"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:214
msgid ":ref:`If the configuration is correct <barcode/operations/troubleshooting>`, `52.1 / 52.1` :guilabel:`kg` will be displayed and the :guilabel:`Validate` button turns green. Finally, press :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the validation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:0
msgid "Scan barcode screen for a reception operation in the Barcode app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:223
msgid "Verify product moves"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:225
msgid "For additional verification, the quantities of received products are also recorded on the :guilabel:`Product Moves` report, accessible by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Product Moves`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:229
msgid "The items on the :guilabel:`Product Moves` report are grouped by product by default. To confirm the received quantities, click on a product line to open its collapsible drop-down menu, which displays a list of *stock move lines* for the product. The latest stock move matches the warehouse reception reference number (e.g. `WH/IN/00013`) and quantity processed in the barcode scan, demonstrating that the records processed in the *Barcode* app were properly stored in *Inventory*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/gs1_usage.rst:-1
msgid "Reception stock move record for 52.1 kg of peaches."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:3
msgid "Process receipts and deliveries with barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:7
msgid "The *Barcode* app can be used to process receipts, deliveries, and other types of operations in real time using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:10
msgid "This makes it possible to process operations on the warehouse floor when they happen, instead of having to wait to validate transfers from a computer. Processing operations this way can help to properly attribute barcodes to the appropriate products, pickings, locations, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:15
msgid "To use the *Barcode* app to process transfers, it must be installed by enabling the feature from the settings of the *Inventory* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:20
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:18
msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Barcode` section, and click the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:26
msgid "Once the page has refreshed, new options will be displayed under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature: :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` (with a corresponding drop-down menu), where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:29
msgid "There is also a :guilabel:`Configure Product Barcodes` internal link arrow, and a set of :guilabel:`Print` buttons for printing barcode commands and a barcode demo sheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:36
msgid "For more on setting up and configuring the :guilabel:`Barcode` app, refer to the :doc:`Set up your barcode scanner <../setup/hardware>` and :doc:`Activate the Barcodes in Odoo <../setup/software>` documentation pages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:44
msgid "Scan barcodes for receipts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:46
msgid "To process warehouse receipts for incoming products, there first needs to be a purchase order (PO) created, and a receipt operation to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:49
msgid "To create a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:52
msgid "From the blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form, click the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field to add a vendor. Then, on the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:57
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form, then click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` to a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
msgid "Completed purchase order for barcode product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:64
msgid "To process and scan barcodes for warehouse receipts, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:66
msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented. To process receipts, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :menuselection:`Operations` overview page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:74
msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Receipts` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding receipts. Then, select the desired receipt operation to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:79
msgid "If *only* using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app, the barcodes for each transfer of a corresponding operation type can be scanned to be processed easily. Once scanned, the products that are part of an existing transfer can be scanned, and new products can be added to the transfer, as well. Once all products have been scanned, validate the transfer to proceed with the stock moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:85
msgid "From this screen, an overview of all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/IN/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of receipts in transfer to scan."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:94
msgid "To process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+#` button (in this case, :guilabel:`+10`) can be clicked to indicate receipt of that product, or the :guilabel:`pencil` icon can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:98
msgid "From this screen, the product that's being received is listed. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Either change the `0` in the line to the desired quantity, or click the :guilabel:`/# Units` button (in this case, :guilabel:`/10 Units`) to automatically fill the quantity ordered from the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:104
msgid "In the reception operation `WH/IN/00019`, `10 Units` of the `Barcode Product` is expected to be received. `[BARCODE_PROD]` is the :guilabel:`Internal Reference` set on the product form. Scan the barcode of the `Barcode Product` to receive one unit. Afterwards, click the :guilabel:`pencil` icon to manually enter the received quantities."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:0
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:0
msgid "Product line editor for individual transfer in Barcode app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:113
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:179
msgid "Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the :guilabel:`number keys` can be used to add quantity, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:116
msgid "Below the :guilabel:`number keys` is the :guilabel:`location` line, which reads `WH/Stock` by default, unless another *location* is listed on the product itself. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:120
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:194
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:158
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:211
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the changes made to the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:122
msgid "Then, from the overview page with all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/IN/000XX**), click the :guilabel:`+#` button on the product line for the products being received, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. The receipt has now been processed, and the :guilabel:`Barcode app` can be closed out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of receipts in transfer to validate."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:132
msgid "Scan barcodes for delivery orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:134
msgid "To process warehouse deliveries for outgoing products, there first needs to be a sales order (SO) created, and a delivery operation to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:137
msgid "To create a :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:140
msgid "From the blank quotation form, click the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Customer` field to add a customer. Then, on the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:144
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the quotation to a :abbr:`SO (sales order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
msgid "Completed sales order for barcode product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:151
msgid "To process and scan barcodes for warehouse deliveries, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:153
msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented. To process deliveries, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :guilabel:`Operations` overview page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:157
msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding deliveries. Then, select the desired delivery order to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
msgid "Operations overview page in Barcode app dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:165
msgid "From this screen, an overview of all deliveries to process within that transfer (**WH/OUT/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:170
msgid "To process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+1` button can be clicked to indicate delivery of that product, or the :guilabel:`pencil icon` can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:174
msgid "From this screen, the product that's being delivered is listed. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Either change the `0` in the line to the desired quantity, or click the :guilabel:`/# Units` button (in this case, :guilabel:`/10 Units`) to automatically fill the quantity ordered from the :abbr:`SO (sales order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:182
msgid "Below the :guilabel:`number keys` is the :guilabel:`location` line, which reads `WH/Stock` by default, unless another location is listed on the product itself."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:185
msgid "This is the location that the product is being pulled from for delivery. Click this line to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from (if this product is stored in multiple locations in the warehouse)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:190
msgid "For warehouses that have multiple different storage locations, putaway rules, and removal strategies, additional steps can be added for various operation types, while using the *Barcode* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:196
msgid "Then, from the overview page with all receipts to process within that transfer (**WH/OUT/000XX**), click the :guilabel:`+#` button on the product line for the products being received, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. The delivery has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/receipts_deliveries.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of deliveries in transfer to validate."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3
msgid "Create and process transfers with barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5
msgid "The *Barcode* app can be used to process internal transfers for all types of products, including transfers for products tracked using lots or serial numbers. Transfers can be created from scratch in real time using an Odoo-compatible barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:9
msgid "For a list of Odoo-compatible barcode mobile scanners, and other hardware for the *Inventory* app, refer to the `Odoo Inventory • Hardware page <https://www.odoo.com/app/inventory-hardware>`_."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:24
msgid "When the page has refreshed, new options are displayed under the :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` feature: :guilabel:`Barcode Nomenclature` (with a corresponding drop-down menu), where either :guilabel:`Default Nomenclature` or :guilabel:`Default GS1 Nomenclature` can be selected. The nomenclature selected changes how scanners interpret barcodes in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:41
msgid "Scan barcodes for internal transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:43
msgid "To create and process internal transfers for products in a warehouse, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features **must** be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:46
msgid "To do so, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, and click the checkboxes next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:50
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the page to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:53
msgid "Create an internal transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:55
msgid "To process existing internal transfers, there first needs to be an internal transfer created, and an operation to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:58
msgid "To create an internal transfer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`. From the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard, locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` card, and click on the :guilabel:`0 To Process` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:62
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Create` in the top left of the resulting page. This navigates to a new :guilabel:`Internal Transfer` form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:65
msgid "On this blank form, the :guilabel:`Operation Type` is automatically listed as :guilabel:`Internal Transfers`. Under that field, the :guilabel:`Source Location` and :guilabel:`Destination Location` are set as :guilabel:`WH/Stock` by default, but can be changed to whichever locations the products are being moved from, and moved to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Blank internal transfer form with source location and destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:74
msgid "Once the desired locations have been selected, products can be added to the transfer. On the :guilabel:`Product` line under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the desired product(s) to add to the transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:78
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form to save the new internal transfer. Once saved, click the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` icon (four lines, at the far right of the :guilabel:`Product` line) to open the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Internal transfer detailed operations pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:86
msgid "From the pop-up, click :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:88
msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`To` column, change the location from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to a different location, where the products should be moved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:91
msgid "Next, in the :guilabel:`Done` column, change the quantity to the desired quantity to transfer. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close out the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:95
msgid "Scan barcodes for internal transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:97
msgid "To process and scan barcodes for internal transfers, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:99
msgid "Once inside the :guilabel:`Barcode app`, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:102
msgid "To process internal transfers, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` button at the bottom of the screen. This navigates to an :menuselection:`Operations` overview page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:109
msgid "From this page, locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` card, and click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to view all outstanding internal transfers. Then, select the desired operation to process. This navigates to the barcode transfer screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:114
msgid "When using the *Barcode* app without the *Inventory* app (**only** if using a barcode scanner or the Odoo mobile app), the barcodes for each transfer of a corresponding operation type can be scanned to be processed easily."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:118
msgid "Once scanned, the products that are part of an existing transfer can be scanned, and new products can be added to the transfer, as well. Once all products have been scanned, validate the transfer to proceed with the stock moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:122
msgid "From this screen, an overview of all products to process within that specific internal transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**) is shown. At the bottom of the screen, there are options to :guilabel:`Add Product` or :guilabel:`Validate`, depending on if products need to be added to the operation, or if the whole operation should be validated at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:131
msgid "Then, scan the barcode of the product to process the internal transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:133
msgid "Or, to process and scan each product individually, choose a specific product line. The :guilabel:`+ 1` button can be clicked to add additional quantity of that product to the transfer, or the :guilabel:`pencil icon` can be clicked to open a new screen to edit that product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:137
msgid "In the product's pop-up window, the product and the units to process is displayed with a number pad. Under the product name, the :guilabel:`Quantity` line can be edited. Change the number in the line to the quantity listed to be transferred on the internal transfer form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:142
msgid "In the internal transfer operation `WH/INT/000XX`, `50 Units` of the `Transfer Product` is moved from `WH/Stock` to `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`. `[TRANSFER_PROD]` is the :guilabel:`Internal Reference` set on the product form. Scan the barcode of the `Transfer Product` to receive one unit. Afterwards, click the :guilabel:`pencil icon` to manually enter the transferred quantities."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:151
msgid "Additionally, the :guilabel:`+1` and :guilabel:`-1` buttons can be clicked to add or subtract quantity of the product, and the number keys can be used to add quantity, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:154
msgid "Below the number keys are the two :guilabel:`location` lines, which read whichever locations were previously specified on the internal transfer form, in this case `WH/Stock` and `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`. Click these lines to reveal a drop-down menu of additional locations to choose from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:160
msgid "Then, from the overview page with all products to process within that transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**), click :guilabel:`Validate`. The receipt has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:165
msgid "The *Barcode* app can also be used to scan products in internal transfers containing unique lot numbers and serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:168
msgid "From the barcode transfer screen, scan the barcode of a lot or serial number, and Odoo automatically increases the quantity of the product to the quantity recorded in the database. If the same lot or serial number is shared between different products, scan the product barcode first, then the barcode of the lot/serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:174
msgid "Create a transfer from scratch"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:176
msgid "In addition to processing and scanning barcodes for existing, previously-created internal transfers, the *Barcode* app can also be used to create transfers from scratch, simply by scanning a printed operation type barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:182
msgid "Odoo's *Barcode* application provides demo data with barcodes to explore the features of the app. These can be used for testing purposes, and can be printed from the home screen of the app. To access this demo data, navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app` and click :guilabel:`stock barcodes sheet` (bolded and highlighted in blue) in the information pop-up above the scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:191
msgid "To do this, first navigate to the :menuselection:`Barcode app`. Once inside the *Barcode* app, a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanning` screen displaying different options is presented."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:194
msgid "From this screen, when using a USB or bluetooth barcode scanner, directly scan the product barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:196
msgid "When using a smartphone as the barcode scanner, click the :guilabel:`Tap to Scan` button (next to the camera icon, at the center of the screen). This opens a :guilabel:`Barcode Scanner` pop-up screen that enables the camera of the device being used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:200
msgid "Face the camera toward the printed operation type barcode to scan it. Doing so processes the barcode, and navigates to a barcode transfer screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:203
msgid "From this screen, an overview of all products to process within that specific internal transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**) is shown. Since this is a new transfer created from scratch, however, there should not be any products listed on the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:207
msgid "To add products, scan the product barcode. If the barcode is not available, manually enter the product into the system by clicking the :guilabel:`Add Product` button at the bottom of the screen, and add the products and product quantities that should be transferred."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:-1
msgid "Blank product editor in scratch internal transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:217
msgid "Then, from the overview page with all products to process within that transfer (**WH/INT/000XX**), click :guilabel:`Validate`. The internal transfer has now been processed, and the *Barcode* app can be closed out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup.rst:5
msgid "Setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:3
msgid "Barcode device troubleshooting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:5
msgid "Odoo *Barcode* supports three main types of barcode scanners: USB scanners, bluetooth scanners, and mobile computer scanners. While configuring each type of scanner, common issues may arise, in which the scanners do not work as intended, and Odoo returns errors to the device."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:9
msgid "Read the sections below to identify general and unique device issues, related to specific, popular types of scanners."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:13
msgid "General issues"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:15
msgid "Refer to the following sections below for common issues involving popular barcode scanner devices."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:17
msgid "For issues related to specific devices, refer to the :ref:`Android scanners <barcode/setup/android-scanners>` section for mobile computer scanners, or to the :ref:`Screenless scanners <barcode/setup/screenless-scanners>` section for USB and bluetooth scanners."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:22
msgid "Barcode cannot be read"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:24
msgid "One common issue encountered when using barcode scanners is an error resulting from barcodes that cannot be read."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:27
msgid "This can occur due to any of the following reasons:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:29
msgid "The barcode is damaged."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:30
msgid "The device cannot read the required barcode type (some scanners can only read 2D barcodes)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:31
msgid "The barcode being scanned is on a screen. Some scanners don't support this, and the barcodes **must** be printed out to be scanned. This is most common with 1D barcodes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:33
msgid "The device has no battery, or is broken. To rule this out, follow the troubleshooting instructions in the following sections."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:37
msgid "Odoo returns barcode error"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:39
msgid "All types of barcode scanners have their own device \"language\", which affects how they output barcode data to Odoo's *Barcode* app. Sometimes, this can cause Odoo *Barcode* to return a barcode error after scanning. This could be due to any of the following reasons:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:43
msgid "The computer is configured with a different keyboard layout than the barcode scanner. To rule this out, ensure that the device is configured with the same keyboard layout."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:46
msgid "For example, if the computer is configured to use an FR-BE keyboard, configure the scanner to send FR-BE keystrokes. The same logic applies if using a tablet instead of a computer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:49
msgid "For more information on configuring keystrokes, refer to the :doc:`Barcode scanner setup <hardware>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:51
msgid "For mobile computer scanners (such as Zebra devices, for example), the scanner might interpret the barcode differently than intended. To rule this out, scan a test barcode to see how the scanner interprets the barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:58
msgid "Android scanners"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:60
msgid "The most recent barcode scanner models using Android and Google Chrome should work with Odoo. However, due to the variety of models and configurations, it is recommended to first test a scanner's compatibility with Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:64
msgid "The Zebra product line is recommended; specifically, the **Zebra TC21 (WiFi-only)**, and **Zebra TC26 (WiFi/cellular)**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:68
msgid "`Odoo Inventory & Barcode compatible hardware <https://www.odoo.com/app/inventory-hardware>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:71
msgid "Barcode app does not give feedback"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:73
msgid "By default, Android barcode scanners pre-process the barcode, then send a full text. Since Odoo *Barcode* does not read this type of output, settings for each type of scanner **must** be configured correctly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:77
msgid "Odoo *Barcode* expects that the scanner works like an analogue keyboard, and so, only detects *key events*. Refer to the following sections for configuration settings for the most popular devices."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:81
msgid "Zebra TC21/TC26"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:83
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:76
msgid "When using Zebra scanners, ensure the following keystroke configurations are set to prevent errors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:78
msgid "Begin on the Zebra scanner's home screen, and select the :guilabel:`DataWedge` app (the app is represented by a :guilabel:`(light blue barcode)` icon)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:88
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:81
msgid "On the :guilabel:`DataWedge Profiles` page, select the profile option to access the Zebra scanner's settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:91
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:92
msgid "Once the profile is selected, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Keyboard Output` option, and ensure the :guilabel:`Enable/disable keystroke output` option is :guilabel:`Enabled`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1
msgid "Show keystroke option in the Zebra scanner's DataWedge app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:98
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:99
msgid "Once that option is enabled, go back to the :guilabel:`Profile` options page, and go to the :guilabel:`Keystroke output` section. Then, open the :guilabel:`Key event options` submenu. Under :guilabel:`Characters`, ensure the :guilabel:`Send Characters as Events` option is checked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:103
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:104
msgid "The :guilabel:`Send Characters as Events` option **must** be checked on the Zebra scanner, or Odoo **cannot** recognize the barcodes that are scanned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:106
msgid "Once the above steps have been taken, perform a test scan to ensure the Zebra scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:110
msgid "MUNBYN Android devices"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:112
msgid "When using MUNBYN Android scanners, ensure the following configurations are set to prevent errors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:114
msgid "From the device's home screen, click :menuselection:`AppSettings`. On the resulting page, locate the :guilabel:`Process mode` section, and select :guilabel:`Keyboard input`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
msgid "Process mode section on MUNBYN scanner's AppSettings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:122
msgid "The selected *Process mode* controls how data is processed after barcode data has been read out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:124
msgid "*Keyboard input* enters read-out data at the position of the cursor, the same as input data on an analogue keyboard would."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:127
msgid "Once the above steps have been taken, perform a test scan to ensure the MUNBYN Android scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:130
msgid "Why is there no data output in the app after a successful scan?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:132
msgid "When scanning a barcode, the scanner might beep, indicating a successful scan, but there is no data output in the app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:135
msgid "To fix this issue, adjust the output method to *keyboard analogue* in the *Scanner* app on the device."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:138
msgid "From the device's home screen, click :menuselection:`Scanner App --> Settings`. From the :guilabel:`Settings` page, click :guilabel:`Output Mode`. The resulting pop-up window presents the different output options available to users. Select :guilabel:`Keyboard Mode`, then click :guilabel:`OK`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
msgid "Output mode pop-up window on MUNBYN scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:147
msgid "Go back to the app that needs to be scanned, and click on the input dialog box first before scanning. Finally, perform a test scan to ensure the MUNBYN Android scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:152
msgid "Datalogic Android devices"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:154
msgid "When using Datalogic Android scanners, ensure the following configurations are set to prevent errors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:157
msgid "To view and configure all settings for the scanner, use the *Settings* app on the Datalogic Android device. From the applications menu, select :menuselection:`Settings --> System --> Scanner Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:161
msgid "From the resulting list of settings, select :guilabel:`Wedge`. From this menu, under the :guilabel:`Keyboard wedge` section, ensure that the :guilabel:`Enable keyboard wedge` feature is activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:165
msgid "Then, also under the :guilabel:`Keyboard wedge` section, locate the :guilabel:`Keyboard wedge input mode` option. By default, the input mode is set to :guilabel:`Text injection`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
msgid "Wedge configuration menu on Datalogic scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:172
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Keyboard wedge input mode`, and change the setting to :guilabel:`Key pressure`. This ensures that scanned barcodes are translated into keyboard strokes, instead of being injected into the text area."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
msgid "Keyboard wedge input mode selection on Datalogic scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:180
msgid "Once all those steps have been taken, perform a test scan to ensure the Datalogic Android scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:186
msgid "Screenless scanners"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:188
msgid "Screenless scanners are barcode scanning devices that have no screens. These include USB scanners and bluetooth scanners."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:192
msgid "Odoo supports most USB and Bluetooth barcode scanners, as they all emulate a keyboard. However, to verify that a scanner is compatible with a specific keyboard layout (or can be configured to do so), refer to Odoo's `Inventory & Barcode compatible hardware <https://www.odoo.com/app/inventory-hardware>`_ documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:198
msgid "NETUM devices"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:200
msgid "By default, the NETUM barcode scanner's user manual only shows the French keyboard configuration. To use the Belgian keyboard, scan the code below:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:-1
msgid "Belgian FR key barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:207
msgid "Once that code has been scanned, ensure the NETUM scanner has the correct keyboard configuration, and is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:211
msgid ":doc:`../setup/hardware`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/device_troubleshooting.rst:212
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:165
msgid ":doc:`../setup/software`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3
msgid "Barcode scanner setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:7
msgid "Follow this guide to choose and set up a barcode scanner compatible with Odoo's *Inventory* and *Barcode* apps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1
msgid "An image of an example barcode scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:15
msgid "Scanner types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:17
msgid "Before setting up a barcode scanner, it is important to determine which type of scanner best meets the needs of the business. There are three main types of scanners that can be used with Odoo, each with their own benefits and use cases:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:21
msgid "**USB scanners** are connected to a computer, and are suitable for businesses that scan products at a fixed location, like at the checkout line in a grocery store."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:23
msgid "**Bluetooth scanners** pair with a smartphone or tablet, making them both a cost-effective and portable barcode scanner option. In this scenario, Odoo is installed on the smartphone, allowing warehouse operators to handle operations, and check stock, directly through their mobile devices."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:26
msgid "**Mobile computer scanners** are mobile devices with a built-in barcode scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:29
msgid "If using a USB scanner, ensure the scanner is compatible with the keyboard layout of the computer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32
msgid "If using a mobile computer scanner, ensure the device can run the Odoo mobile app properly. Recent models that use Android OS with the Google Chrome browser, or Windows OS with Microsoft Edge, should work. However, testing is crucial due to the variety of available models and configurations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:38
msgid "`Odoo Inventory & Barcode • Compatible Hardware <https://www.odoo.com/app/inventory-hardware>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:43
msgid "When setting up the barcode scanner, make sure the following configurations are correct so the scanner can properly interpret barcodes with Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:47
msgid "Keyboard layout"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:49
msgid "When using a USB barcode scanner, match its keyboard layout with the operating system's layout for proper interpretation of characters. Generally, the scanning mode should be set to accept a USB keyboard (HID), with the language set based on the keyboard that is in use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:53
msgid "To configure the keyboard layout for a **Zebra** scanner, scan the keyboard wedge barcode for the desired language in the scanner's user manual."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:60
msgid "Example of a user manual for keyboard layout."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:60
msgid "Examples of keyboard language settings in the Zebra scanner user manual."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:63
msgid "Automatic carriage return"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:65
msgid "Odoo has a default 100-millisecond delay between scans to prevent accidental double scanning. To synchronize with the barcode scanner, set it to include a *carriage return* (:dfn:`character like the \"Enter\" key on a keyboard`) after each scan. Odoo interprets the carriage return as the end of the barcode input; so Odoo accepts the scan, and waits for the next one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:70
msgid "Typically, on the scanner, a carriage return is included by default. Ensure it is set by scanning a specific barcode in the user manual, like `CR suffix ON` or `Apply Enter for suffix`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:74
msgid "Zebra scanner"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:85
msgid "It is **not** suggested to use the \"DWDemo\" profile, as it does not work properly in every circumstance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:88
msgid "Instead, it is recommended to create a new, personal profile. Once a new profile is created, add the *Odoo Mobile* app and *Google Chrome* app in the :guilabel:`Associated Apps` on the scanner's home screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:107
msgid "Once all those steps have been taken, perform a test scan to ensure the Zebra scanner is working properly, as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:111
msgid "Honeywell mobile computer scanner"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:113
msgid "When using Honeywell scanners, follow the instructions below to ensure barcodes can be scanned in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:116
msgid "Begin on the Honeywell scanner's home screen, and select :guilabel:`Settings`, represented by a :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Then, click :guilabel:`Honeywell Settings`, followed by :guilabel:`Scanning`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:120
msgid "From here, click :guilabel:`Internal Scanner`, followed by :guilabel:`Default Profile`. From the resulting list of options, select :guilabel:`Data Processing Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:123
msgid "The :guilabel:`Data Processing Settings` specify how barcode data is processed by the computer. Locate the :guilabel:`Wedge Method` setting. By default, this is set to :guilabel:`Standard`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1
msgid "Data processing settings options for Honeywell scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:130
msgid "Change the :guilabel:`Wedge Method` setting to :guilabel:`Keyboard`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:132
msgid "After completing the steps, conduct a test scan to verify the Honeywell scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:136
msgid "Cipherlab mobile computer scanner"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:138
msgid "When using Cipherlab scanners, follow the instructions below to ensure barcodes can be scanned in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:141
msgid "Begin on the Cipherlab scanner's home screen, and navigate to the :menuselection:`App Drawer (All Applications)`. Then, click the :guilabel:`ReaderConfig` app, represented by an orange :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon over a blue :guilabel:`(barcode)` icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:145
msgid "Next, select the :guilabel:`Default Profile`, or create a new profile, if needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:147
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`General Settings`, click :guilabel:`Data Output`, followed by :guilabel:`Keyboard Emulation`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1
msgid "Cipherlab scanner data output setting page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:154
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`Input Method`, under :guilabel:`Keyboard Emulation`, is set to :guilabel:`Default Mode`. Change this setting to :guilabel:`KeyEvent`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:-1
msgid "Cipherlab scanner keyboard emulation settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:161
msgid "After completing the steps, conduct a test scan to verify the Cipherlab scanner is working as intended."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:3
msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:7
msgid "The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with the barcode scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:16
msgid "To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Settings --> Barcode Scanner`. Once you have ticked the feature, you can hit save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:24
msgid "Set Product Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:26
msgid "You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the *Inventory* app. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Configure Products Barcodes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:32
msgid "Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly at creation on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:42
msgid "Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:49
msgid "Set Locations Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:51
msgid "If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:62
msgid "You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the *Print* menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:66
msgid "Barcode Formats"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:68
msgid "Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes, also known as GTIN (Global Trade Identification Numbers). GTIN are used by companies to uniquely identify their products and services. While GTIN and UPC are often used synonymously, GTIN refers to the number a barcode represents, while UPC refers to the barcode itself. More information about GTIN can be found on the GS1 website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:73
msgid "In order to create GTIN for items, a company must have a GS1 Company Prefix. This prefix is the number that will appear at the beginning of each GTIN, and will identify the company as the owner of the barcode any the products it appears on. To learn more about GS1 Company Prefixes, or purchase a license for a prefix, visit the GS1 Company Prefix page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/barcode/setup/software.rst:78
msgid "Odoo users are able to use GTIN barcodes to identify their products. However, since Odoo supports any numeric string as a barcode, it is also possible to define a custom barcode for internal use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:8
msgid "Inventory"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:10
msgid "Odoo *Inventory* is both an inventory application and a warehouse management system. The app allows users to easily manage lead times, automate replenishment, configure advanced routes, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Inventory <https://www.odoo.com/slides/inventory-24>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management.rst:5
msgid "Product management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment.rst:5
msgid "Product replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:3
msgid "Replenish on order (MTO)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:9
msgid "*Replenish on order*, also known as *MTO* (make to order), is a replenishment strategy that creates a draft order for a product every time a sales order is created for it. For products that are purchased from a vendor, a request for quotation (RFQ) is created, while a sales order for a product manufactured in-house triggers the creation of a manufacturing order. The creation of a |RFQ| or manufacturing order occurs every time a sales order is created, regardless of the current stock level of the product being ordered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:17
msgid "Unarchive the Replenish on Order (MTO) route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:19
msgid "By default, Odoo sets the |MTO| route as *archived*. This is because |MTO| is a somewhat niche workflow that is only used by certain companies. However, it is easy to unarchive the route in just a few simple steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:23
msgid "To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`. On the :guilabel:`Routes` page, click the :guilabel:`Filters` button and select the :guilabel:`Archived` option. This shows all routes that are currently archived."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:-1
msgid "The archived filter on the Routes page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:31
msgid "Enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, then click the :guilabel:`Action` button to reveal a drop-down menu. From the drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Unarchive`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:-1
msgid "The unarchive action on the Routes page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:38
msgid "Finally, remove the :guilabel:`Archived` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. The :guilabel:`Routes` page will now show all available routes, including :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, which is now selectable on the inventory tab of each product page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:-1
msgid "The MTO route appears on the Routes page after unarchiving it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:47
msgid "Configure a product to use the MTO route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:49
msgid "With the |MTO| route unarchived, products can now be properly configured to use replenish on order. To do so, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, then select an existing product, or click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:53
msgid "On the product page, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route in the :guilabel:`Routes` section, along with one other route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:57
msgid "The :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route **does not** work unless another route is selected as well. This is because Odoo needs to know how to replenish the product when an order is placed for it (buy it, manufacture it, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:-1
msgid "Select the MTO route and a second route on the Inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:65
msgid "If the product is purchased from a vendor to fulfill sales orders, enable the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkbox under the product name. Doing so makes the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab appear alongside the other settings tabs below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:69
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and specify a :guilabel:`Vendor` and the :guilabel:`Price` they sell the product for."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:-1
msgid "Enable \"Can be Purchased\" and specify a vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:76
msgid "If the product is manufactured, make sure that it has a bill of materials (BOM) configured for it. To do so, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the screen, then click :guilabel:`Create` on the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` page to configure a new |BOM| for the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:81
msgid "On the blank |BOM| form, add the components used to manufacture the product on the :guilabel:`Components` tab, along with the operations required for the manufacturing workflow on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:85
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:88
msgid "Fulfill a sales order using the MTO route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:90
msgid "After configuring a product to use the |MTO| route, a replenishment order is created for it every time a sales order including the product is confirmed. The type of order created depends on the second route selected in addition to |MTO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:94
msgid "For example, if *Buy* was the second route selected, then a purchase order is created upon confirmation of a sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:98
msgid "When the |MTO| route is enabled for a product, a replenishment order is always created upon confirmation of a sales order. This is the case even if there is enough stock of the product on-hand to fulfill the sales order, without buying or manufacturing additional units of it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:102
msgid "While the |MTO| route can be used in unison with a variety of other routes, the *Buy* route is used as the example for this workflow. Begin by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, then click :guilabel:`Create`, which opens a blank quotation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:106
msgid "On the blank quotation form, add a :guilabel:`Customer`, then click :guilabel:`Add a product` under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, and enter a product that has been configured to use the *MTO* and *Buy* routes. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` and the quotation is turned into a sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:110
msgid "A :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button now appears in the top-right corner of the sales order. Clicking it opens the |RFQ| associated with the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:113
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the |RFQ|, and turn it into a purchase order. A green :guilabel:`Receive Products` button now appears at the top of the purchase order. Once the products are received, click :guilabel:`Receive Products` to register them into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:117
msgid "Return to the sales order by clicking the :guilabel:`SO` breadcrumb, or by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales --> Orders --> Orders`, and selecting the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/mto.rst:120
msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button in the top-right of the order to be taken to the delivery order. Once the products have been shipped to the customer, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm the delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:3
msgid "Reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:7
msgid "Reordering rules are used to keep forecasted stock levels above a certain threshold without exceeding a specified upper limit. This is accomplished by specifying a minimum quantity that stock should not fall below and a maximum quantity that stock should not exceed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:11
msgid "Reordering rules can be configured for each product based on the route used to replenish it. If a product uses the *Buy* route, then a Request for Quotation (RFQ) is created when the reordering rule is triggered. If a product uses the *Manufacture* route, then a Manufacturing Order (MO) is created instead. This is the case regardless of the selected replenishment route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:17
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Automatic Reordering Rules <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XEJZrCjoXaU>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:18
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Manual Reordering Rules <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=deIREJ1FFj4>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:21
msgid "Configure products for reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:23
msgid "In order to use reordering rules for a product, it must first be correctly configured. Begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, then select an existing product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:27
msgid "On the product form, under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, make sure the :guilabel:`Product Type` is set to :guilabel:`Storable Product`. This is necessary because Odoo only tracks stock quantities for storable products, and this number is used to trigger reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Set the Product Type as Storable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:35
msgid "Next, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and select one or more routes from the :guilabel:`Routes` section. Doing so tells Odoo which route to use to replenish the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Select one or more routes on the Inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:42
msgid "If the product is reordered using the :guilabel:`Buy` route, confirm that the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkbox is enabled under the product name. This makes the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab appear. Click on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and specify at least one vendor, and the price that they sell the product for, so that Odoo knows which company the product should be purchased from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Specify a vendor and price on the Purchase tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:51
msgid "If the product is replenished using the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route, it needs to have at least one Bill of Materials (BoM) associated with it. This is necessary because Odoo only creates manufacturing orders for products with a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:55
msgid "If a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` does not already exist for the product, select the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the product form, then click :guilabel:`New` to configure a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "The Bill of Materials smart button on a product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:64
msgid "Create new reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:66
msgid "To create a new reordering rule, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`, then click :guilabel:`New`, and fill out the new line as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:69
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: The product that is replenished by the rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: The location where the product is stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:71
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: The minimum quantity that can be forecasted without the rule being triggered. When forecasted stock falls below this number, a replenishment order for the product is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:74
msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: The maximum quantity that stock is replenished up to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:75
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: Specify if the product should be replenished in batches of a certain quantity (e.g., a product could be replenished in batches of 20)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:77
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: The unit of measure used for reordering the product. This value can simply be `Units` or a specific unit of measurement for weight, length, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "The form for creating a new reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:85
msgid "Reordering rules can also be created from each product form. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product. Then, click the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button, and click :guilabel:`New` to fill out the new line, as detailed above."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:90
msgid "For advanced usage of reordering rules, learn about the following reordering rule fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:92
msgid ":ref:`Trigger <inventory/product_management/trigger>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:93
msgid ":ref:`Visibility days <inventory/product_management/visibility-days>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:94
msgid ":ref:`Route <inventory/product_management/route>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:99
msgid "Trigger"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:101
msgid "When stock falls below the reordering rule's minimum, set the reordering rule's *trigger* to *automatic* to automatically create purchase or manufacturing orders to replenish stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:104
msgid "Alternatively, setting the reordering rule's trigger to *manual* displays the product and forecasted stock on the *replenishment dashboard*, where the procurement manager can review the stock levels, lead times, and forecasted dates of arrival."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:109
msgid ":doc:`strategies`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:112
msgid "The replenishment dashboard is accessible by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:115
msgid "To enable the :guilabel:`Trigger` field, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`. Then, click the :guilabel:`(slider)` icon, located to the far-right of the column titles, and enable the :guilabel:`Trigger` option from the additional options drop-down menu that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the Trigger field by toggling it in the additional options menu"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:124
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Trigger` column, select :guilabel:`Auto` or :guilabel:`Manual`. Refer to the sections below to learn about the different types of reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:128
msgid "Auto"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:130
msgid "Automatic reordering rules, configured by setting the reordering rule's :guilabel:`Trigger` field to :guilabel:`Auto`, generates purchase or manufacturing orders when:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:133
msgid "the scheduler runs, and the *On Hand* quantity is below the minimum"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:134
msgid "a sales order is confirmed, and lowers the *Forecasted* quantity of the product below the minimum"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:138
msgid "The scheduler is set to run once a day, by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:140
msgid "To manually trigger a reordering rule before the scheduler runs, ensure :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>` is enabled, and select :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`. Then, click the purple :guilabel:`Run Scheduler` button on the pop-up window that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:145
msgid "Be aware that this also triggers any other scheduled actions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:148
msgid "The product, `Office Lamp`, has an automatic reordering rule set to trigger when the forecasted quantity falls below the :guilabel:`Min Quantity` of `5.00`. Since the current :guilabel:`Forecast` is `55.00`, the reordering rule is **not** triggered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0
msgid "Show automatic reordering rule from the Reordering Rule page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:156
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected, then an :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` is generated. To view and manage :abbr:`RFQs (Requests for Quotation)`, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Requests for Quotation`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:160
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route is selected, then an :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` is generated. To view and manage :abbr:`MOs (Manufacturing Orders)`, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:164
msgid "When no route is selected, Odoo selects the :guilabel:`Route` specified in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:170
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:163
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:182
msgid "Manual"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:172
msgid "Manual reordering rules, configured by setting the reordering rule's :guilabel:`Trigger` field to :guilabel:`Manual`, lists a product on the replenishment dashboard when the forecasted quantity falls below a specified minimum. Products on this dashboard are called *needs*, because they are needed to fulfill upcoming sales orders, but the forecasted quantity is not enough."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:177
msgid "The replenishment dashboard, accessible by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`, considers sales order deadlines, forecasted stock levels, and vendor lead times. It displays needs **only** when it is time to reorder items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:182
msgid "If the one-day window for ordering products is too short, skip to the :ref:`visibility days <inventory/product_management/visibility-days>` section to make the need appear on the replenishment dashboard a specified number of days in advance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:186
msgid "When a product appears on the replenishment dashboard, clicking the :guilabel:`Order Once` button generates the purchase or manufacturing order with the specified amounts :guilabel:`To Order`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Click the Order Once button on the replenishment dashboard to replenish stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:196
msgid "Visibility days"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:199
msgid "Ensure :doc:`lead times <../../shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates>` are understood before proceeding with this section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:202
msgid "When :ref:`manual reordering rules <inventory/product_management/manual-rr>` are assigned to a product, *visibility days* make the product appear on the replenishment dashboard (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`) a certain number of days in advance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:208
msgid "A product has a manual reordering rule set to trigger when the stock level falls below four units. The current on-hand quantity is ten units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:211
msgid "The current date is February 20th, and the *delivery date* on a sales order (in the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab) is March 3rd — twelve days from the current date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:214
msgid "The :ref:`vendor lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/purchase-lt>` is four days, and the :ref:`purchase security lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/purchase-security-lt>` is one day."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:218
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Visibility Days` field of the reordering rule is set to zero, the product appears on the replenishment dashboard five days before the delivery date, which, in this case, is February 27th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Graphic representing when the need appears on the replenishment dashboard: Feb 27th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:226
msgid "To see the product on the replenishment dashboard for the current date, February 20, set the :guilabel:`Visibility Days` to `7.00`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:229
msgid "To determine the amount of visibility days needed to see a product on the replenishment dashboard, subtract *today's date* from the *date the need appears* on the replenishment dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:232
msgid "Visibility~days = Need~appears~date - Today's~date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:237
msgid "Referring to the example above, today's date is February 20th, and the need for the product appears on February 27th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:240
msgid "(February 27 - February 20 = 7 days)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:242
msgid "Incorrectly setting the :guilabel:`Visibility Days` fewer than seven days in this case results in the need **not** appearing on the replenishment dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:0
msgid "Show the replenishment dashboard with the correct and incorrect visibility days set."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:252
msgid "Route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:254
msgid "Odoo allows for multiple routes to be selected under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on each product form. For instance, it is possible to select both :guilabel:`Buy` and :guilabel:`Manufacture`, thus enabling the functionality of both routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:258
msgid "Odoo also enables users to set a preferred route for a product's reordering rule. This is the route that the rule defaults to, if multiple are selected. To select a preferred route, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:262
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`Route` column is hidden on the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:264
msgid "Reveal the :guilabel:`Route` column by selecting the :guilabel:`(slider)` icon to the far-right of the column titles, and checking the :guilabel:`Route` option from the drop-down menu that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:267
msgid "Click inside of the column on the row of a reordering rule, and a drop-down menu shows all available routes for that rule. Select one to set it as the preferred route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:-1
msgid "Select a preferred route from the drop-down."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules.rst:275
msgid "If multiple routes are enabled for a product but no preferred route is set for its reordering rule, the product is reordered using the selected route that is listed first on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:3
msgid "Selecting a replenishment strategy"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:10
msgid "In Odoo, there are two strategies for automatically replenishing inventory: *reordering rules* and the *make to order (MTO)* route. Although these strategies differ slightly, they both have similar consequences: triggering the automatic creation of a |PO| or |MO|. The choice of which strategy to use depends on the business's manufacturing and delivery processes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:6
msgid "Terminology"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:19
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:56
msgid "Replenishment report and reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:21
msgid "The replenishment report is a list of all products that have a negative forecast quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:23
msgid "*Reordering rules* are used to ensure there's always a minimum amount of a product in-stock, in order to manufacture products and/or fulfill sales orders. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum, Odoo automatically generates a purchase order with the quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:28
msgid "Reordering rules can be created and managed in the replenishment report, or from the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:33
msgid "Make to order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:35
msgid "*Make to order (MTO)* is a procurement route that creates a draft purchase order (or manufacturing order) each time a sales order is confirmed, **regardless of the current stock level**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:38
msgid "Unlike products replenished using reordering rules, Odoo automatically links the sales order to the |PO| or |MO| generated by the |MTO| route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:41
msgid "Another difference between reordering rules and |MTO| is, with |MTO|, Odoo generates a draft |PO| or |MO| immediately after the |SO| is confirmed. With reordering rules, Odoo generates a draft |PO| or |MO| when the product's forecasted stock falls below the set minimum quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:45
msgid "In addition, Odoo automatically adds quantities to the |PO| or |MO| as the forecast changes, so long as the |PO| or |MO| is not confirmed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:48
msgid "The |MTO| route is the best replenishment strategy for products that are customized, and/or for products that have no stock kept on-hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:58
msgid "To access the replenishment report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment.`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:61
msgid "By default, the replenishment report dashboard shows every product that needs to be manually reordered. If there is no specific rule for a product, Odoo assumes the :guilabel:`Min Quantity` and :guilabel:`Max Quantity` stock are both `0.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:66
msgid "For products that don't have a set reordering rule, Odoo calculates the forecast based on confirmed sales orders, deliveries, and receipts. For products that have a set reordering rule, Odoo calculates the forecast normally, but also takes into account the purchase/manufacturing lead time and security lead time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:72
msgid "Before creating a new reordering rule, make sure the product has a *vendor* or a *bill of materials* configured on the product form. To check this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the product to open its product form. The vendor, if configured, is listed in the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and the bill on materials, if configured, is found in the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:78
msgid "The :guilabel:`Product Type`, located in the :guilabel:`General Information` tab on the product form, **must** be set to :guilabel:`Storable Product`. By definition, a consumable product does not have its inventory levels tracked, so Odoo cannot account for a consumable product in the replenishment report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Replenishment report listing all items needing to be purchased to meet current needs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:87
msgid "To create a new reordering rule from the replenishment report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`, click :guilabel:`Create`, and select the desired product from the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` column. If necessary, a :guilabel:`Min Quantity` and a :guilabel:`Max Quantity` can be configured in the corresponding columns on the :guilabel:`Replenishment` report page, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:93
msgid "To create a new reordering rule from the product form, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product to open its product form. Click the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button, click :guilabel:`Create`, and fill out the fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:98
msgid "Replenishment report fields"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:100
msgid "The following fields are on the :guilabel:`Replenishment` report. If any of these fields are not visible, click the :guilabel:`⋮ (additional options)` icon on the far right side of the report, then click the checkbox next to a field to make it visible."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:104
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product that requires a replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:105
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the specific location where the product is stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:106
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: the warehouse where the product is stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:107
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand`: the amount of product currently available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:108
msgid ":guilabel:`Forecast`: the amount of product available after all current orders (sales, manufacturing, purchase, etc.) are taken into account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:110
msgid ":guilabel:`Preferred Route`: how the product is procured, either :guilabel:`Buy`, :guilabel:`Manufactured`, :guilabel:`Dropship`, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:112
msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: the company from which the product is acquired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:113
msgid ":guilabel:`Bill of Materials`: the bill of materials for the product (if one is configured)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:114
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger`: how the replenishment is created, either :guilabel:`Auto` (automatically, once the :guilabel:`On Hand` quantity goes below the :guilabel:`Min Quantity`) or :guilabel:`Manual` (only when the replenishment is requested)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:117
msgid ":guilabel:`Procurement Group`: the reference number for how the product is being acquired, such as a sales order, purchase order, or manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:119
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: the minimum amount of product that should be available. When inventory levels goes below this number, the replenishment is triggered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:121
msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: the amount of product that should be available after replenishing the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:123
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: if the product should be ordered in specific quantities, enter the number that should be ordered. For example, if the :guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` is set to `5`, and only 3 are needed, 5 products are replenished."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`To Order`: the amount of product that is currently needed, and will be ordered, if the :guilabel:`Order Once` or :guilabel:`Automate Orders` button is clicked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:128
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the unit of measure used to acquire the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:129
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company for which the product is acquired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:131
msgid "By default, the quantity in the :guilabel:`To Order` field is the quantity required to reach the set :guilabel:`Max Quantity`. However, the :guilabel:`To Order` quantity can be adjusted by clicking on the field and changing the value. To replenish a product manually, click :guilabel:`Order Once`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:135
msgid "To automate a replenishment from the :guilabel:`Replenishment` page, click :guilabel:`Automate Orders` on the right-side of the line, represented by a :guilabel:`🔄 (circular arrow)` icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:138
msgid "When this button is clicked, Odoo will automatically generate a draft |PO|/|MO| every time the forecasted stock level falls below the set :guilabel:`Min Quantity` of the reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:141
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Replenishment` page, a reordering rule or manual replenishment can be temporarily deactivated for a given period, by clicking the :guilabel:`🔕 (snooze)` icon on the far-right of the line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Snooze options to turn off notifications for reordering for a period of time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:149
msgid "A |PO| or |MO| created by a manual replenishment has a :guilabel:`Replenishment Report` as the source document. A |PO| or |MO| created by an automated reordering rule has the |SO| reference number(s) that triggered the rule as the source document."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Quote request list shows which quotes are directly from the replenishment report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:158
msgid "Make to order (MTO) route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:160
msgid "Since the |MTO| route is recommended for customized products, the route is hidden by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:169
msgid "To activate the |MTO| route in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:163
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:164
msgid "Activate the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting, located under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:166
msgid "Then, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:167
msgid "Click on :menuselection:`Filters --> Archived` to show archived routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:168
msgid "Select the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, and click on :menuselection:`Action --> Unarchive`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:172
msgid "Activating the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting also activates :guilabel:`Storage Locations`. If these features aren't applicable to the warehouse, disable these settings after unarchiving the |MTO| route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:176
msgid "To set a product's procurement route to |MTO|, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and click on the desired product to open its product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:179
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and in the :guilabel:`Routes` section of options, select :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:182
msgid "For products purchased directly from a vendor, make sure the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected, in addition to the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route. Also, make sure a vendor is configured in the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:186
msgid "For products manufactured in-house, make sure the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route is selected, in addition to the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route. Also, make sure a bill of materials is configured for the product, which is accessible via the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:192
msgid "The |MTO| route cannot be selected alone. |MTO| **only** works if the :guilabel:`Manufacture` or :guilabel:`Buy` route is also selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Replenish on Order selected on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:3
msgid "Units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:11
msgid "In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary. For example, a business can buy products from a country that uses the metric system, and then sell those products in a country that uses the imperial system. In that case, the business needs to convert the units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:15
msgid "Another case for unit conversion is when a business buys products in a big pack from a supplier, and then sells those products in individual units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:18
msgid "Odoo can be set up to use different *units of measure (UoM)* for one product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:23
msgid "To use different units of measure in Odoo, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Products` section, activate the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` setting. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Units of Measure in the Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:32
msgid "Units of measure categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:34
msgid "After enabling the *Units of Measure* setting, view the default units of measure categories in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> UoM Categories`. The category is important for unit conversion; Odoo can convert a product's units from one unit to another **only** if both units belong to the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Set units of measure categories."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:43
msgid "Each units of measure category has a reference unit. The reference unit is highlighted in blue in the :guilabel:`Uom` column of the :guilabel:`Units of Measure Categories` page. Odoo uses the reference unit as a base for any new units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:47
msgid "To create a new unit, first select the correct category from the :guilabel:`Units of Measure Categories` page. For example, to sell a product in a box of six units, click the :guilabel:`Unit` category line. Then, on the category page that appears, click :guilabel:`Add a line` in the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` tab. Then, in the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field, title the new unit, such as `Box of 6`, then in the :guilabel:`Type` field, select the appropriate size reference, such as :guilabel:`Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:54
msgid "If applicable, enter a :guilabel:`UNSPSC Category`, which is a globally recognized `code managed by GS1 <https://www.unspsc.org/>`_, that **must** be purchased in order to use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:57
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Ratio` field, enter how many individual units are in the new |UOM|, such as `6.00000` when using the example of the `6-Pack` (since a box of six is six times *bigger* than the reference unit, `1.00000`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Convert products from one unit to another as long as they belong to the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:66
msgid "Specify a product's units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:68
msgid "To set units of measure on a product, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and select a product to open its product form page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:71
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, edit the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is sold in. The specified unit is also the unit used to keep track of the product's inventory and internal transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:75
msgid "Edit the :guilabel:`Purchase UoM` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is purchased in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:81
msgid "Unit conversion"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:83
msgid "Odoo automatically converts unit measurements when products have different :abbr:`UoMs (Units of Measure)` and purchase :abbr:`UoMs (Units of Measure)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:86
msgid "This occurs in various scenarios, including:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:88
msgid ":ref:`Vendor orders <inventory/product_replenishment/buy-in-uom>`: purchase |UOM| on purchase orders (POs) converts to |UOM| on internal warehouse documents"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:90
msgid ":ref:`Automatic replenishment <inventory/product_replenishment/replenish>`: generates |POs| when the stock levels of a product (tracked in |UOM|) dips below a certain level. But, the |POs| are created using the purchase |UOM|"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:93
msgid ":ref:`Sell products <inventory/product_replenishment/sell-in-uom>`: if a different |UOM| is used on the sales order (SO), the quantity is converted to the warehouse's preferred |UOM| on the delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:100
msgid "Buy products in the purchase UoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:102
msgid "When creating a new request for quotation (RFQ) in the *Purchase* app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified purchase unit of measure. If needed, manually edit the :guilabel:`UoM` value on the |RFQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:106
msgid "After the |RFQ| is confirmed into a |PO|, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:109
msgid "Odoo automatically converts the purchase unit of measure into the product's sales/inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery receipt shows the converted quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:113
msgid "When the product's purchase :guilabel:`UoM` is `Box of 6`, and its sales/inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the |PO| shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the receipt (and other internal warehouse documents) shows the quantity in units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:0
msgid "Image of a purchase order that is using the purchase unit of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:121
msgid "An order of three quantities is placed using the purchase \"UoM\": `Box of 6`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:0
msgid "Image of receipt displaying the unit of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:127
msgid "Upon warehouse receipt, the recorded quantities are in the internal \"Unit of Measure\": `Units`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:133
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:169
msgid "Replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:135
msgid "A request for quotation for a product can also be generated directly from the product form using the :guilabel:`Replenish` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:138
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Replenish`, a replenish assistant box pops up. The purchase unit of measure can be manually edited in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, if needed. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to create the |RFQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:143
msgid "A |PO| can **only** be automatically generated if at least **one** vendor is listed in the product form's :guilabel:`Purchase` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Click Replenish button to manually replenish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:150
msgid "Navigate to the created |PO| by clicking the :guilabel:`Forecasted` smart button on the product form. Scroll down to the :guilabel:`Forecasted Inventory` section, and in the :guilabel:`Requests for quotation` line, click the |RFQ| reference number to open the draft |RFQ|. If necessary, the purchase |UOM| can be edited directly on the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:158
msgid "Sell in a different UoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:160
msgid "When creating a new quotation in the *Sales* app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified unit of measure. If needed, the :guilabel:`UoM` can be manually edited on the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:163
msgid "After the quotation is sent to the customer, and confirmed into a sales order (SO), click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the |SO|. Odoo automatically converts the unit of measure into the product's inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery shows the converted quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/uom.rst:168
msgid "For example, if the product's |UOM| on the |SO| was changed to `Box of 6`, but its inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the |SO| shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the delivery shows the quantity in units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking.rst:5
msgid "Product tracking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:100
msgid "Assign serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:5
msgid "Assigning serial numbers to individual products allows the for tracking of properties, :doc:`expiration dates <expiration_dates>`, and location throughout the supply chain, which particularly benefits manufacturers providing after-sales services."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:10
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Serial Numbers <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZP-gMz2X5AY>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:21
msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:13
msgid "In Odoo, serial numbers are assigned to products:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:15
msgid "in the :ref:`Detailed Operations page <inventory/product_management/detailed-operations>` on a receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:17
msgid "by clicking the :ref:`Assign Serial Numbers <inventory/product_management/assign-sn>` button on a receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:19
msgid "in the :ref:`Open: Stock move window <inventory/product_management/stock-move-section>` on a receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:21
msgid ":doc:`during a manufacturing order <../../../manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product>` for a product tracked by lot/serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:24
msgid "when making an inventory adjustment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:32
msgid "Display the Detailed Operations smart button and bulleted list icon on a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:32
msgid "Display the **Detailed Operations** smart button and bulleted list icon on a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:37
msgid "To assign serial numbers to products, activate the :guilabel:`Lots and Serial Numbers` feature in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:40
msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of an item's product form, set the :guilabel:`Tracking` field to :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:44
msgid ":ref:`Enable serial numbers <inventory/product_management/enable-lots>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:45
msgid ":ref:`Track products by serial numbers <inventory/product_management/configure-lots>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:49
msgid "Next, enable creating new serial numbers by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:52
msgid "From the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, select the desired operation type (e.g. :guilabel:`Receipts`, :guilabel:`Delivery Orders`, or :guilabel:`Manufacturing`), and select the :guilabel:`Create New` option in the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` section of the operation type's configuration page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Create New\" option is selected on the Receipts operation type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:64
msgid "Detailed Operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:66
msgid "Serial numbers can be assigned to products when entering stock for the first time, from the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` page on the receipt. Receipts can be accessed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Receipts`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:71
msgid "Serial numbers can **not** be assigned to products on a request for quotation (RfQ) or purchase order (PO) — **only** on a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:0
msgid "Show the purchase order and the Receipt smart button"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:78
msgid "Screenshot of a \"Purchase Order\" with the \"Receipt\" smart button at the top."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:80
msgid "To record an item's serial number before receiving the item, follow the steps in the next sections to assign serial numbers, but do **not** click the receipt's :guilabel:`Validate` button, until the products are received from the vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:84
msgid "Assign a single serial number to a product by clicking the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` smart button on a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:87
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` column, manually type in the serial number for a single product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Add a line on the Detailed Operations page to assign serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:94
msgid "When finished, click the receipt's breadcrumbs, and the assigned serial numbers are automatically saved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:102
msgid "To generate new serial numbers in a sequence, click the :guilabel:`+ (plus)` icon in the :ref:`product line <inventory/product_management/detailed-operations-popup>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Show the plus icon in the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:110
msgid "If the icon is not visible, ensure the :guilabel:`Create New` option is selected in the :ref:`receipt's configuration page <inventory/product_management/configure-new-serials>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:113
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers` pop-up window. The :guilabel:`Number of SN` field is auto-filled based on the product quantity requiring serial numbers. Manually input the first serial number in the :guilabel:`First SN` field, and click :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers` to generate a sequence of serial numbers based on the first serial number entered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Show Assign Serial numbers pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:125
msgid "Stock move pop-up window"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:127
msgid "For various methods of assigning serial numbers in bulk, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon in the :ref:`product line <inventory/product_management/detailed-operations-popup>` of a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:132
msgid "Add a line"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:134
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window that appears, manually input the serial numbers in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Add a line on the Stock move pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:142
msgid "Generate Serials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:144
msgid "Assign multiple serial numbers at once by clicking the :guilabel:`Generate Serials/Lots` button in the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:-1
msgid "Show generate serials button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:151
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Generate Serial numbers` pop-up window, where the first serial number is entered in the :guilabel:`First SN` field to generate a sequence of serial numbers, based on the first serial number entered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:155
msgid "For more details on how to fill in this pop-up window, :ref:`refer to this section <inventory/product_management/assign-sn>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:159
msgid "Import Serials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:161
msgid "Assign multiple serial numbers at once by clicking the :guilabel:`Import Serials/Lots` button in the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:165
msgid "If the button is not visible, ensure the :guilabel:`Create New` option is selected in the :ref:`receipt's configuration page <inventory/product_management/configure-new-serials>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:168
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Import Lots` pop-up window. Enter each serial number on a separate line in the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial numbers` text field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:172
msgid "Copy/paste serial numbers from an existing excel spreadsheet and add them to the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial numbers` text field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:0
msgid "Show excel sheet to copy serial numbers from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:179
msgid "Tick the :guilabel:`Keep current lines` checkbox to add serial numbers to the list of products, and serial numbers in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` table, in the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window. To replace the serial numbers in the list, leave the :guilabel:`Keep current lines` option unchecked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:184
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:146
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Generate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:187
msgid "For a receipt with a :guilabel:`Demand` of `3.00` products, one product has already been assigned a serial number in the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:190
msgid "So, in the :guilabel:`Import Lots` pop-up window, two serial numbers, `124` and `125` are assigned to the remaining products by entering the following in the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial numbers` input field:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:199
msgid "The :guilabel:`Keep current lines` option is selected to add these two serial numbers **in addition** to the serial number, `123`, that has already been assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn.rst:0
msgid "Show example of correctly inputting serial numbers in the text field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:3
msgid "Difference between lots and serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:5
msgid "*Lots* and *serial numbers* are the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. While there are similarities between the two traceability methods, there are also notable differences that affect receipts, deliveries, and inventory reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:9
msgid "A *lot* usually indicates a specific batch of an item that was received, is currently stored, or was shipped from a warehouse. However, it can also pertain to a batch of products manufactured in-house, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:13
msgid "A *serial number* is a unique identifier assigned incrementally (or sequentially) to an item or product, used to distinguish it from other items or products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:17
msgid ":doc:`lots`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:24
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:22
msgid "Enable lots & serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:23
msgid "To track products using lots and serial numbers, the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature must be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:26
msgid "To do that, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and click the box next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers feature in inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:35
msgid "When to use lots"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:37
msgid "Lots are useful for products that are manufactured or received in large quantities, such as clothes or food. Lots and can be used to trace a product back to a group, which is especially useful when managing product recalls or expiration dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:0
msgid "Created lot with quantity of products in it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:46
msgid "Manufacturers assign lot numbers to groups of products that have common properties; this can lead to multiple goods sharing the same lot number. This helps identify a number of products in a single group, and allows for end-to-end traceability of these products through each step in their life cycles."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:52
msgid "When to use serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:54
msgid "The goal of assigning serial numbers to individual products is to make sure every item's history is identifiable when it travels through the supply chain. This can be especially useful for manufacturers that provide after-sales services related to products they sell and deliver."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:0
msgid "List of serial numbers for product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:63
msgid "Serial numbers can contain many different types of characters: numbers, letters, typographical symbols, or a mixture of all three types."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:67
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:343
msgid "Traceability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:69
msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to traceability reports to see the entire life cycle of a product. These reports include vital information, like where it came from (and when), where it was stored, and to whom it was sent."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:73
msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group products by lots and/or serial numbers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:77
msgid "From here, products with lots or serial numbers assigned to them are listed by default. They can also be expanded to show what lots or serial numbers have been specifically assigned to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:80
msgid "To group by lots or serial numbers, first remove any default filters from the search bar in the upper-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, and select :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, which reveals a mini drop-down menu. From this mini drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and click :guilabel:`Apply`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:85
msgid "Doing so reveals all existing lots and serial numbers, and each can be expanded to show all product quantities with that assigned number. For unique serial numbers that are *not* reused, there should *only* be one product per serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting page with drop-down lists of lots and serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences.rst:94
msgid "For additional information regarding an individual lot number or serial number, click the line item for the lot or serial number to reveal that specific number's :guilabel:`Lot` or :guilabel:`Serial Number` form. From this form, click the :guilabel:`Location` and :guilabel:`Traceability` smart buttons to see all stock on-hand using that serial number. Any operations made using that lot or serial number can be found here, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:3
msgid "Expiration dates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:7
msgid "In Odoo, *expiration dates* can be used to manage and track the lifecycles of perishable products, from purchase to sale. Using expiration dates reduces product loss due to unexpected expiry, and helps to avoid sending expired products to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, only products that are tracked using *lots* and *serial numbers* can be assigned expiration information. Once a lot or serial number has been assigned, an expiration date can be set. This is especially helpful for companies (such as food manufacturers) that consistently, or exclusively, buy and sell perishable products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:17
msgid ":doc:`../product_tracking/lots`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:18
msgid ":doc:`../product_tracking/serial_numbers`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:21
msgid "Enable expiration dates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:23
msgid "To enable the use of *expiration dates*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. Then, click the checkbox to enable the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:27
msgid "Once that feature is activated, a new option will appear to enable :guilabel:`Expiration Dates`. Click that checkbox to enable the feature, and be sure to :guilabel:`Save` changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers and expiration dates settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:35
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is activated, additional features appear to :guilabel:`Display Lots & Serial Numbers on Delivery Slips`; to :guilabel:`Display Lots & Serial Numbers on Invoices`; and to :guilabel:`Display Expiration Dates on Delivery Slips`. Activating these features helps with end-to-end traceability, making it easier to manage product recalls, identify \"bad\" batches of products, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:42
msgid "Configure expiration dates on products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:44
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` and :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` features have been enabled in the settings of the *Inventory* app, expiration information can be configured on individual products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:48
msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product to edit. Selecting a product reveals the product form for that particular item. Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit` in the upper-left corner to make changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:53
msgid "To be tracked using lots or serial numbers, or to configure expiration information, products *must* have their :guilabel:`Product Type` set as :guilabel:`Storable Product` under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:57
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. From here, make sure that either :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` or :guilabel:`By Lots` is checked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:61
msgid "Once it is, a new :guilabel:`Expiration Date` checkbox appears that must also be clicked. When both are enabled, a new :guilabel:`Dates` field appears to the right."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:65
msgid "If a product has stock on-hand prior to activating tracking by lots or serial numbers, an inventory adjustment might need to be performed in order to assign lot numbers to the existing stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:70
msgid "For processing large quantities of products on receipts or deliveries, it is recommended to track using lots, so multiple products can be traced back to the same lot, if any issues arise."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Expiration dates configuration on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:77
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Dates` field, there are four categories of expiration information to configure for the product:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:80
msgid ":guilabel:`Expiration Time`: the number of days after receiving products (either from a vendor or in stock after production) in which goods may become dangerous and should not be used or consumed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:82
msgid ":guilabel:`Best Before Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which the goods start deteriorating, **without** necessarily being dangerous yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Removal Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which the goods should be removed from stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:86
msgid ":guilabel:`Alert Time`: the number of days before the expiration date in which an alert should be raised on goods in a particular lot or containing a particular serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:90
msgid "The values entered into these fields automatically compute the expiration date for goods entered into stock, whether purchased from a vendor or manufactured in-house."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:93
msgid "Once all the expiration information has been configured, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:96
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Dates` field is not populated with any values for expiration information, dates (and lots) can be manually assigned upon receipts and deliveries in and out of the warehouse. Even when assigned, they can still be overwritten and changed manually if needed, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:101
msgid "Set expiration dates on receipts with lots & serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:103
msgid "Generating expiration dates for **incoming** goods can be done directly from the purchase order. To create a purchase order, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:107
msgid "Then, fill out the information by adding a :guilabel:`Vendor`, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:110
msgid "Choose the desired quantity to order by changing the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This converts the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` into a purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:114
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the purchase order to be taken to the warehouse receipt form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:118
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a serial number to the ordered product quantities causes a :guilabel:`User Error` popup to appear. The popup requires entry of a lot or serial number for the ordered products. The :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` cannot be validated without an assigned lot or serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:0
msgid "User error popup when validating an order with no lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:127
msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Additional Options` menu (hamburger) icon located on the far-right of the product line. When clicked, a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up will appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:130
msgid "In this pop-up, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and assign a lot or serial number under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:133
msgid "An expiration date automatically populates, based on the configuration on the product form (if previously configured)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:137
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Dates` field on the product form has not been configured, this date can be manually entered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:140
msgid "After the expiration date has been established, mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Detailed operations popup showing expiration dates for ordered products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:147
msgid "A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button will appear upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document; the :guilabel:`Product` being traced; the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`; and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:153
msgid "Set expiration dates on manufactured products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:155
msgid "Expiration dates can also be generated for products manufactured in-house. To assign expiration dates to manufactured products, a manufacturing order (MO) needs to be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:158
msgid "To create a :abbr:`MO (manufacturing order)`, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Choose a product to manufacture from the :guilabel:`Product` field drop-down menu, then select the :guilabel:`Quantity` to produce."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Manufacturing order for product with expiration date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:167
msgid "To manufacture a product, there must be materials to consume in the lines in the :guilabel:`Product` column. This can be achieved either by creating a :guilabel:`Bill of Material` for the :guilabel:`Product`, or manually adding materials to consume by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:172
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:174
msgid "Next to :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, either select an existing lot number from the drop-down menu, or click the green :guilabel:`+` sign to automatically assign a new lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:177
msgid "Then, select a number of units for the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, and click :guilabel:`Mark as Done`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:180
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`External Link` icon in the assigned :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field. A pop-up appears, revealing a detail form for that specific number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:183
msgid "On that pop-up, under the :guilabel:`Dates` tab, all expiration information that was previously configured for the product is displayed. That same information is also available on the detail form for that specific product, or by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Dates tab with expiration information for specific lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:193
msgid "Sell products with expiration dates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:195
msgid "Selling perishable products with expiration dates is done the same as any other type of product. The first step in selling perishable products is to create a sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:198
msgid "To do that, go to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation, and fill out the information on the sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:201
msgid "Add a :guilabel:`Customer`, click :guilabel:`Add a product` to add the desired products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines, and set a :guilabel:`Quantity` for the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:204
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab. Under the :guilabel:`Delivery` section, change the :guilabel:`Delivery Date` to a date after the expected date, and click the :guilabel:`green checkmark` icon to confirm the date. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:208
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the sales order to see the warehouse receipt form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:211
msgid "On the warehouse receipt form, click :guilabel:`Validate`, and then :guilabel:`Apply` in the accompanying pop-up window, to automatically process all :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and deliver the products to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:215
msgid "If the products are delivered before the :guilabel:`Alert Date` set on the product form, then no alerts will be created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:219
msgid "To sell perishable products with expiration dates, the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` for the :guilabel:`Location` the products are stored in must be set to :abbr:`FEFO (First Expiry, First Out)`. If there is not enough stock of perishable products in one lot, Odoo will automatically take the remaining quantity required from a second lot with the next-soonest expiration date. Removal strategies can also be set on :guilabel:`Product Categories`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:226
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:189
msgid ":doc:`../../warehouses_storage/removal_strategies`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:229
msgid "View expiration dates for lots & serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:231
msgid "To view (and/or group) all products with expiration dates by lot number, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:234
msgid "Once there, remove any default search filters from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, choose :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, and select the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` parameter from the drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Apply` to apply the filter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:238
msgid "Doing so breaks down all perishable products, their expiration dates, and the assigned lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Group by expiration dates on lots and serial numbers page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:247
msgid "Expiration alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:249
msgid "To see expiration alerts, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:251
msgid "Then, click into a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` with perishable products. Doing so reveals the serial number detail form. On the serial number detail form, click the :guilabel:`Dates` tab to see all expiration information related to the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:255
msgid "To edit the form, click :guilabel:`Edit` in the upper-left corner of the form, then change the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` to today's date (or earlier), and click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:259
msgid "After saving, the lot number form displays a red :guilabel:`Expiration Alert` at the top of the form to indicate that the products in this lot are either expired or expiring soon. From here, click back to the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` page (via the breadcrumbs)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:263
msgid "To see the new expiration alert, or any expiration alerts for products that are expired (or will expire soon), remove all of the search filters from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar on the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:267
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Filters`, and choose :guilabel:`Expiration Alerts`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Expiration alert for product past the expiration date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:3
msgid "Lot numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:10
msgid "*Lots* are one of the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. They typically represent a specific batch of products that were received, stored, shipped, or manufactured in-house."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:13
msgid "Manufacturers assign lot numbers to groups of products sharing common properties, facilitating end-to-end traceability through their lifecycles."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:16
msgid "Lots are useful for managing large quantities of manufactured or received products, aiding in tracing items back to their group, particularly for product recalls or :doc:`expiration dates <expiration_dates>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:26
msgid "To track products using lots, enable the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature. Go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:32
msgid ":doc:`Tracking expiration dates <expiration_dates>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:33
msgid ":ref:`Print GS1 barcodes for lots and serial numbers <barcode/operations/gs1-lots>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:42
msgid "Track by lots"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:44
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is activated, configure individual products to be tracked using lots. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and choose a product to configure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:48
msgid "On the product form, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. In the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, select the :guilabel:`By Lots` option in the :guilabel:`Tracking` field. Now, new or existing lot numbers can be assigned to newly-received or manufactured batches of this product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:53
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:49
msgid ":doc:`expiration_dates`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:56
msgid "If a product has stock on-hand prior to activating tracking by lots or serial numbers, a warning message appears. Use an :doc:`inventory adjustment <reassign>` to assign lot numbers to existing products in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled tracking by lots feature on product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:65
msgid "Assign lots for shipping and receiving"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:67
msgid "Assign new lot numbers to :ref:`incoming goods <inventory/product_management/assign-lots>` on the receipt form. When shipping :ref:`outgoing goods <inventory/product_management/assign-lots-delivery>`, select products with specific lot numbers on the delivery order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:75
msgid "On receipts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:77
msgid "Assigning new or existing lot numbers to incoming goods can be done directly on receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:79
msgid "To begin, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app to `create and confirm <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o_uI718P1Dc>`_ a |PO| for products tracked by lot numbers. Then, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button that appears at the top of the page to navigate to the warehouse receipt form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:85
msgid "Alternatively, navigate to an existing receipt by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, clicking the :guilabel:`Receipts` Kanban card, and choosing the desired receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:89
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a lot number triggers an error, indicating that a lot number **must** be assigned before validating the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0
msgid "Add lot/serial number user error popup."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:96
msgid "On the receipt form, on the product line in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, select the |list| icon to the right of the product that is tracked by lot numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Show the bulleted list icon on the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:103
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, where the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` and :guilabel:`Quantity` are assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:106
msgid "The two ways to assign lot numbers: **manually** and **importing**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:109
msgid "Manual assignment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:111
msgid "To manually assign lot numbers, click :guilabel:`Add a line`. Input the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, :guilabel:`Store To` location for the lot, :guilabel:`Quantity`, and :guilabel:`Destination Package`, if any."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:116
msgid "To assign multiple lot numbers, or store to multiple locations, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and type a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` for additional quantities. Repeat until the total in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column matches the :guilabel:`Demand` at the top."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Assign lot number detailed operations popup."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:125
msgid "Import lots"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:127
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, click :guilabel:`Import Serials/Lots`, then paste the bulk lot numbers, in the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial numbers` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:134
msgid "List of lot numbers copied on excel spreadsheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:134
msgid "List of lot numbers copied on *Google* spreadsheets."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:140
msgid "Lot numbers copied to the lot number line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:140
msgid "Lot numbers pasted to the \"Lots/Serial numbers\" field, in the **Import Lots** pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:142
msgid "Tick the :guilabel:`Keep current lines` checkbox to generate *additional* lot numbers in the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window. To replace the lot numbers in the list, leave the :guilabel:`Keep current lines` option unticked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:148
msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a lot number, click :guilabel:`Save` to close the pop-up window. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate` on the receipt form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:152
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:200
msgid ":ref:`Traceability report for lot numbers <inventory/product_management/lot-traceability>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:157
msgid "On delivery orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:159
msgid "Odoo makes it possible to specify which lot numbers for a product are chosen for outgoing shipment on a delivery order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:162
msgid "To begin, create or select an existing quotation from the :menuselection:`Sales` app. After confirming the |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button becomes available. Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form for that specific |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:167
msgid "Alternatively, navigate to delivery orders by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` kanban card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:170
msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button opens the the delivery order form, where lot numbers are picked for delivery. In the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, click the |list| icon to the right of the product that is tracked by lot numbers. Clicking that icon reveals a :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:175
msgid "In the pop-up window, the chosen lot number and its storage location is displayed in the :guilabel:`Pick From` column, with the with the full :guilabel:`Quantity` taken from that specific lot (if there is enough stock in that particular lot)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:179
msgid "If there is insufficient stock in that lot, or if partial quantities of the :guilabel:`Demand` should be taken from multiple lots, change the :guilabel:`Quantity` directly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:183
msgid "The lot automatically chosen for delivery orders varies, depending on the selected removal strategy (:abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expiry, First Out)`). It also depends on the ordered quantity, and whether the lot's on-hand quantity is enough to fulfill the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:191
msgid "Repeat the above steps to select enough lots to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand`, and click :guilabel:`Save` to close the pop-up window. Lastly, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button on the |DO| to deliver the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Popup for source lot number on sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:203
msgid "Lot management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:205
msgid "Manage and view existing lot numbers for products in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Numbers` dashboard by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:208
msgid "By default, lot numbers are grouped by product, and selecting the drop-down menu for each product displays the existing lot numbers. Select a lot number to :ref:`modify or add details <inventory/product_management/edit-lot>` linked to the lot. Lot numbers can also be :ref:`created <inventory/product_management/create-new-lot>` from this page, by clicking the :guilabel:`New` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:218
msgid "Show the \"Lot/Serial Number\" dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:218
msgid "Display lot numbers, grouped by products, on the **Lot/Serial Number** dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:223
msgid "Modify lot"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:225
msgid "Clicking a lot from the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` dashboard reveals a separate page where additional information can be provided about the lot."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:229
msgid "Odoo automatically generates a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` to follow the most recent number. However, it can be edited, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field, and changing the generated number to any desired one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:233
msgid "On the lot number form, the following fields can be modified:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:235
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: change the lot number linked to the :guilabel:`Product`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:236
msgid ":guilabel:`Internal Reference`: records an alternative lot/serial number used within the warehouse that differs from the one used by the supplier manufacturer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:238
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify the company where the lot number is available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:239
msgid ":guilabel:`Description`: add extra details about the lot or serial number in this text field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:242
msgid "On existing lots, the :guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` fields **cannot** be modified, as the lot numbers are linked with existing stock moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Show the lot number form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:250
msgid ":doc:`Set expiration dates for lots <expiration_dates>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:253
msgid "Add property"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:255
msgid "To add custom fields to lots for enhanced traceability, there are two methods of adding properties on a lot number form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:258
msgid "Click the :icon:`fa-cog` :guilabel:`(cog)` icon at the top-left of the page, then select :icon:`fa-cogs` :guilabel:`Add Properties` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:260
msgid "Click the :icon:`fa-plus` :guilabel:`Add a Property` button, located below the existing fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:262
msgid "Name and :doc:`configure the new field <../../../../productivity/knowledge/properties>`. Once finished, enter the property value in the new field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:266
msgid "The new property, `Wood type`, is added. The value is recorded as `Cherry wood`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0
msgid "Show the \"Add Properties\" button on a lot number form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:273
msgid ":doc:`Configuring custom properties <../../../../productivity/knowledge/properties>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:278
msgid "Reserve lot number for a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:280
msgid "To create a lot number for a product, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lot/Serial Numbers`, and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:284
msgid "Creating a lot number reserves it for a product but **does not** assign it. To assign lot numbers, refer to the section on :ref:`assigning lot numbers on receipts <inventory/product_management/assign-lots>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:289
msgid "While Odoo automatically generates a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` to follow the most recent number, it can be edited and changed to any desired number, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field on the lot form, and changing the generated number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:293
msgid "Once the new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated, click the blank field next to :guilabel:`Product` to reveal a drop-down menu. From this menu, select the product to which this new number will be assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:298
msgid "The lot number, `000001`, is created for the product, `Drawer Black`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0
msgid "New lot number creation form with assigned product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:304
msgid "After a new lot number has been created, saved, and assigned to the desired product, the lot number is saved as an existing lot number linked to the product, and can be selected when :ref:`assigning lot numbers to products on a receipt <inventory/product_management/assign-lots>`, or when making an inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:310
msgid "After creating the lot number, `000001` appears as an option for `Drawer Black` when assigning lot numbers on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:0
msgid "Show how to assign lot numbers on the Inventory Adjustment page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:318
msgid "Manage lots for different operations types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:320
msgid "By default, new lots can only be created when receiving products, and existing lot numbers cannot be used. For sales orders, only existing lot numbers can be utilized, and new ones cannot be created on the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:324
msgid "To change the ability to use new (or existing) lot numbers on any operation type, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and select the desired operation type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:328
msgid "On the operation type form, under the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` section, tick the :guilabel:`Create New` checkbox to enable new lot numbers to be created during this operation type. Choose :guilabel:`Use Existing ones` if only existing lot numbers can be selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled traceability setting on operations type form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:337
msgid "For inter-warehouse transfers involving products tracked by lots, it can be useful to enable the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option for warehouse receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:345
msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to traceability reports to see the entire lifecycle of a product: where it came from, when it arrived, where it was stored, who it went to (and when)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:348
msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group by lots, go to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :menuselection:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:352
msgid "From here, products with lot numbers assigned to them will be listed by default, and can be expanded to show the lot numbers those products have assigned to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:355
msgid "To group by lots, begin by removing any filters in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, click the :icon:`fa-caret-down` :guilabel:`(caret down)` icon to open a drop-down menu of :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By` options, and :guilabel:`Favorites`. Under the :guilabel:`Group By` section, click the :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` option, and select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:361
msgid "Doing so reorganizes all the records on the page to display all existing lots and serial numbers, and can be expanded to show all quantities of products with that assigned number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Lots and serial numbers traceability report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:369
msgid "Traceability report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:371
msgid "To view a full stock moves report for a lot number, select the lot number line from the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Number` dashboard. On the lot number form, click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:-1
msgid "Show the Traceability Report for a lot, that displays the stock moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots.rst:380
msgid ":doc:`differences`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:189
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:99
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:159
msgid "Packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:7
msgid "A *package* is a physical container holding one or more products. Packages can also be used to store items in bulk."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:10
msgid "Packages are commonly used for the following purposes:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:12
msgid ":ref:`Grouping products to move them in bulk <inventory/warehouses_storage/pack>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:13
msgid ":ref:`Shipping to customers <inventory/warehouses_storage/package-type>`: configure package types to align with shipping carriers' size and weight requirements, streamlining the packing process, and ensuring compliance with carrier shipping specifications."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:16
msgid "Storing items in bulk."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:18
msgid "*Package use* is a field on the package form in Odoo that is only visible by enabling the *Batch Transfers* and *Packages* features (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:21
msgid "By default, the *Package Use* field on a packages form is set to *Disposable Box*. Change this field to *Reusable Box* **only** when configuring packages for :ref:`cluster pickings <inventory/warehouses_storage/cluster-pack>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:25
msgid "*Package type* is an optional feature used for :doc:`calculating shipping cost <../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method>`, based on real shipping weight. Create package types to include the weight of the package itself (e.g. boxes, pallets, other shipping containers) in shipping cost calculations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:31
msgid "While packages are commonly used in the :doc:`three-step delivery route <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`, they can be used in any workflow involving storable products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:40
msgid "To use packages, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading, activate the :guilabel:`Packages` feature. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:-1
msgid "Activate the *Packages* setting in Inventory > Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:51
msgid "Pack items"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:53
msgid "Products can be added to packages in any transfer by:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:55
msgid "Clicking each :ref:`Detailed Operations <inventory/warehouses_storage/detailed-operations>` icon on the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:57
msgid "Using the :ref:`Put in Pack <inventory/warehouses_storage/put-in-pack>` button to place everything in the transfer into a package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:63
msgid "Detailed operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:65
msgid "On any warehouse transfer (e.g. receipt, delivery order), add a product to a package by clicking the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Detailed Operations\" icon in the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:72
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window for the :guilabel:`Product`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:74
msgid "To put the :guilabel:`Product` in a package, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and assign the product to a :guilabel:`Destination Package`. Select an existing package, or create a new one by typing the name of the new package, then select :guilabel:`Create...`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:82
msgid "Assign a package to \"Destination Package\" field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:82
msgid "Twelve units of `Acoustic Bloc Screen` are placed in `PACK0000001`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:84
msgid "Then, specify the quantity of items to go into the package in the :guilabel:`Done` column. Repeat the above steps to place the :guilabel:`Product` in different packages. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:89
msgid ":doc:`Ship one order in multiple packages <../../shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:95
msgid "Put in pack"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:97
msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button on **any** warehouse transfer to create a new package, and place all the items in the transfer in that newly-created package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:101
msgid "The :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button appears on receipts, delivery orders, and other transfer forms with the *Packages* feature enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:109
msgid "Image of the \"Put in Pack\" button being clicked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:109
msgid "In batch transfer `BATCH/00003`, the :guilabel:`Put in Pack` button was clicked to create a new package, `PACK0000002`, and assign all items to it in the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:117
msgid "Create package types by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Package Types`, in order to set custom dimensions and weight limits. This feature is mainly used to calculate package weights for shipping costs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:122
msgid ":doc:`Shipping carriers <../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:123
msgid ":doc:`../../shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:125
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Package Types` list, clicking :guilabel:`New` opens a blank package type form. The fields of the form are as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:128
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type` (required): define the package type's name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:129
msgid ":guilabel:`Size`: define the dimensions of the package in millimeters (mm). The fields, from left to right, define the :guilabel:`Length`, :guilabel:`Width`, and :guilabel:`Height`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:131
msgid ":guilabel:`Weight`: weight of an empty package (e.g. an empty box, pallet)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:134
msgid "Odoo calculates the package's weight by adding the weight of the empty package plus the weight of the item(s), which can be found in the :guilabel:`Weight` field, in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, of each product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:138
msgid ":guilabel:`Max Weight`: maximum shipping weight allowed in the package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:139
msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: define a barcode to identify the package type from a scan."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:140
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify a company to make the package type available **only** at the selected company. Leave the field blank if it is available at all companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:142
msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier`: specify the intended shipping carrier for this package type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:143
msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier Code`: define a code that is linked to the package type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:-1
msgid "Package type for FedEx's 25 kilogram box."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:152
msgid "Cluster packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:154
msgid "To use *cluster packages*, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` feature, located in the :guilabel:`Operations` section. Doing so makes the *Package Use* field become visible on a package form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:-1
msgid "Activate the *Batch Transfers* feature in Inventory > Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:163
msgid "Add new packages by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`. Then, click :guilabel:`New`, or select an existing package. Doing so opens the package form, which contains the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:167
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Reference` (required): name of the package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:168
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type`: used for :ref:`configuring shipping boxes to ship to the customer <inventory/warehouses_storage/package-type>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:172
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Type` is unnecessary for configuring packages for cluster pickings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:174
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Weight`: used to input the weight of the package after measuring it on a scale."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:176
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify a company to make the package available **only** at the selected company. Leave the field blank if the package is available at all companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:178
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: current location of the package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:179
msgid ":guilabel:`Pack Date`: the date the package was created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:180
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Use`: choose :guilabel:`Reusable` for packages used for moving products within the warehouse; :guilabel:`Disposable` for packages used to ship products to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:-1
msgid "Display package form to create a cluster pack."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/package.rst:188
msgid ":doc:`Using cluster packages <../../warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, *packaging* refers to disposable containers holding multiple units of a specific product. Each specific packaging **must** be defined on the individual product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:8
msgid "For example, different packages for cans of soda, such as a 6-pack, a 12-pack, or a case of 36, need to be configured on the individual product form. This is because packagings are product specific — **not** generic."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:15
msgid "To use packagings, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, under the :guilabel:`Products` heading, enable the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:-1
msgid "Enable packagings by selecting \"Product Packagings\"."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:24
msgid "Create packaging"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:26
msgid "Packagings can be created directly on the product form, or from the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:30
msgid "From product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:32
msgid "Create packagings on a product form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the desired product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:35
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Packaging` section, and click :guilabel:`Add a line`. In the table, fill out the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:38
msgid ":guilabel:`Packaging` (required): name of packaging that appears on sales/purchase orders as a packaging option for the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:40
msgid ":guilabel:`Contained quantity` (required): amount of product in the packaging."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:41
msgid ":guilabel:`Unit of Measure` (required): measurement unit for quantifying the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Sales`: check this option for packagings intended for use on sales orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:43
msgid ":guilabel:`Purchase`: check this option for packagings intended for use on purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:46
msgid "Access additional fields in the :guilabel:`Packaging` table below by clicking the :guilabel:`(sliders)` icon to the far-right of the column titles in the :guilabel:`Packaging` section, and selecting the desired options from the drop-down menu that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:0
msgid "Show the additional options menu's icon: sliders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: identifier for tracing packaging in stock moves or pickings, using the :ref:`Barcode app <barcode/operations/intro>`. Leave blank if not in use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: indicates the packaging is only available at the selected company. Leave blank to make the packaging available across all companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:60
msgid "To create a packaging type for six units of the product, `Grape Soda`, begin by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. In the line, name the :guilabel:`Packaging` `6-pack`, and set the :guilabel:`Contained quantity` to `6`. Repeat this process for additional packagings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:0
msgid "Create 6-pack case for product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:69
msgid "From product packagings page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:71
msgid "To view all packagings that have been created, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Packagings`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page with a complete list of all packagings that have been created for all products. Create new packagings by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:77
msgid "Two soda products, `Grape Soda` and `Diet Coke`, have three types of packagings configured. On the :guilabel:`Product Packagings` page, each product can be sold as a `6-Pack` that contains 6 products, as a `12-Pack` of 12 products, or as a `Case` of 32 products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:0
msgid "List of different packagings for products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:86
msgid "Apply packagings"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:88
msgid "When creating a sales order in the :menuselection:`Sales` app, specify the packagings that should be used for the product. The chosen packaging is displayed on the :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` under the :guilabel:`Packaging` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:93
msgid "18 cans of the product, `Grape Soda`, is packed using three 6-pack packagings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:0
msgid "Assign packagings on the Sales Order Line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/packaging.rst:100
msgid "Packaging can be used in conjunction with Odoo :ref:`Barcode <inventory/barcode/software>`. When receiving products from suppliers, scanning the packaging barcode automatically adds the number of units in the packaging to the internal count of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:3
msgid "Reassign lot/serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:5
msgid "Changing a product's tracking settings to use lots or serial numbers, *after* storing products in Odoo without them, can lead to inconsistent records. Follow this documentation to learn how to use an inventory adjustment to assign lot or serial numbers to products that were not originally assigned lots."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:-1
msgid "Warning message: products in stock have no lot/serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:15
msgid "This document outlines the process of using two inventory adjustments: one to remove incorrect records *without* lot numbers, and another to save the quantities *with* the lot numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:19
msgid ":doc:`Set up and use lot numbers <lots>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:20
msgid ":doc:`Set up serial numbers <create_sn>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:21
msgid ":doc:`Use serial numbers <serial_numbers>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:24
msgid "Change on-hand quantity to zero"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:26
msgid "To change the product's settings to track by lots or serial numbers, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the intended product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:29
msgid "Next, click the product's :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button to open the :guilabel:`Update Quantity` page. In the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column, change the value to zero."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:33
msgid "If the product is stored in multiple locations, make sure the **total** on hand quantity at **all** locations is zero."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:-1
msgid "Show the Inventory Adjustments model, highlighting the \"On Hand Quantity\" field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:41
msgid "Change traceability setting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:43
msgid "Return to the product form (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`), and switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. In the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, change the :guilabel:`Tracking` option from :guilabel:`No Tracking` to :guilabel:`By Lots` or :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Enable lots and serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:56
msgid "Restore on-hand quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:58
msgid "After manually changing the on-hand quantity to zero and changing the :guilabel:`Tracking` setting to lots or serial numbers, restore the quantities by clicking the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button from the desired product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:62
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Update Quantity` page, because the on-hand quantity had been previously changed to zero, a :guilabel:`No Stock On Hand` warning appears on the page. From here, click the :guilabel:`New` button in the top-left corner. Doing so reveals a new, modifiable line on the :guilabel:`Update Quantity` page. Then, input a desired lot number in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field, and adjust the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` to its original value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:69
msgid ":doc:`../../warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:-1
msgid "Fill in the \"Lot/Serial Number\" and \"On Hand Quantity\" field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:76
msgid "To find the original quantity, and adjust the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` accordingly, after assigning a new lot or serial number, click the :icon:`fa-pencil` :guilabel:`(pencil)` icon in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column. Then, click the :icon:`fa-history` :guilabel:`History` button on the far-right."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"History\" button on the Inventory Adjustments page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:85
msgid "The inventory adjustment that changed the on-hand quantity to zero is displayed in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/reassign.rst:0
msgid "Show the history entry."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:3
msgid "Use serial numbers to track products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:5
msgid "*Serial numbers* are one of the two ways to identify and track products in Odoo. A serial number is a unique identifier assigned incrementally (or sequentially) to an item or product, used to distinguish it from other items and products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:9
msgid "Serial numbers can consist of many different types of characters: they can be strictly numerical, they can contain letters and other typographical symbols, or they can be a mix of all of the above."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:12
msgid "The goal of assigning serial numbers to individual products is to make sure that every item's history is identifiable when it travels through the supply chain. This can be especially useful for manufacturers that provide after-sales services to products that they sell and deliver."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:17
msgid ":doc:`/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/lots`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:24
msgid "To track products using serial numbers, the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature must be enabled. To enable this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, and click the box next to :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers`. Remember to click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled lots and serial numbers setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:36
msgid "Configure serial number tracking on products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:38
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` setting has been activated, individual products can now be tracked using serial numbers. To configure this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and choose a desired product to track."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:42
msgid "Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`, and click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:44
msgid "Once on the product form, click :guilabel:`Edit`, navigate to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and scroll to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section. Then, select the :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` option, and click :guilabel:`Save` to save the changes. Existing or new serial numbers can now be selected and assigned to newly-received or manufactured batches of this product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled serial number tracking on product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:54
msgid "If a product doesn't have a serial number assigned to it, a user error pop-up window will appear. The error message states that the product(s) in stock have no lot/serial number. However, a lot/serial number can be assigned to the product by making an inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:59
msgid "Create new serial numbers for products already in stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:61
msgid "New serial numbers can be created for products already in stock with no assigned serial number. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so reveals a blank lots/serial numbers form. On this form, a new :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated automatically."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:67
msgid "While Odoo automatically generates a new lot/serial number to follow the most recent number, it can be edited and changed to any desired number, by clicking the line under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field, and changing the generated number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:71
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` is generated, click the blank field next to :guilabel:`Product` to reveal a drop-down menu. From this menu, select the product to which this new number will be assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:75
msgid "This form also provides the option to adjust the :guilabel:`Quantity`, to assign a unique :guilabel:`Internal Reference` number (for traceability purposes), and to assign this specific lot/serial number configuration to a specific website in the :guilabel:`Website` field (if working in a multi-website environment)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:80
msgid "A detailed description of this specific lot/serial number can also be added in the :guilabel:`Description` tab below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:83
msgid "When all desired configurations are complete, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save all changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "New serial number created for existing product stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:89
msgid "After a new serial number has been created, assigned to the desired product, and saved, navigate back to the product form, by going to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`, and selecting the product that this newly-created serial number was just assigned to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:93
msgid "On that product's detail form, click the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Numbers` smart button to view the new serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:97
msgid "Manage serial numbers for shipping and receiving"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:99
msgid "Serial numbers can be assigned for both **incoming** and **outgoing** goods. For incoming goods, serial numbers are assigned directly on the purchase order form. For outgoing goods, serial numbers are assigned directly on the sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:104
msgid "Assign serial numbers to newly received products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:106
msgid "Assigning serial numbers to **incoming** goods can be done on the receipt, by clicking the :ref:`Detailed Operations smart button <inventory/product_management/detailed-operations>` or by clicking the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon in the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:111
msgid ":doc:`create_sn`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Display the bulleted list icon and Detailed Operations smart buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:118
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Validate` before assigning a serial number to received quantities will cause a :guilabel:`User Error` pop-up to appear. The pop-up requires entry of a lot or serial number for the ordered products. The :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` **cannot** be validated without a serial number being assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:0
msgid "User error popup prompting serial number entry."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:127
msgid "There are multiple ways to do this: manually assigning serial numbers, automatically assigning serial numbers, and copy/pasting serial numbers from a spreadsheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:131
msgid "Assign serial numbers automatically"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:133
msgid "If a large quantity of products need individual serial numbers assigned to them, Odoo can automatically generate and assign serial numbers to each of the individual products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:136
msgid "To accomplish this, start with the :guilabel:`First SN` field in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window, and type the first serial number in the desired order to be assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:139
msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`Number of SN` field, type the total number of items that need newly-generated unique serial numbers assigned to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:142
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers`, and a list will populate with new serial numbers matching the ordered quantity of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Automatic serial number assignment in detailed operations popup."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:150
msgid "Copy/paste serial numbers from a spreadsheet"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:152
msgid "To copy and paste serial numbers from an existing spreadsheet, first populate a spreadsheet with all of the serial numbers received from the supplier (or manually chosen upon receipt). Then, copy and paste them in the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number Name` column. Odoo will automatically create the necessary number of lines based on the amount of numbers pasted in the column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:157
msgid "From here, the :guilabel:`To` locations and :guilabel:`Done` quantities can be manually entered in each of the serial number lines."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "List of serial numbers copied in Excel spreadsheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:165
msgid "For purchase orders that include large quantities of products to receive, the best method of serial number assignment is to automatically assign serial numbers using the :guilabel:`Assign Serial Numbers` button located on the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`. This prevents any serial numbers from being reused or duplicated, and improves traceability reporting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:170
msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a serial number, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to close the pop-up. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:173
msgid "A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button appears upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:178
msgid "Once all product quantities have been assigned a serial number, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the popup, and click :guilabel:`Validate`. A :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button will appear upon validating the receipt. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #`, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:185
msgid "Manage serial numbers on delivery orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:187
msgid "Assigning serial numbers to **outgoing** goods can be done directly from the sales order (SO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:189
msgid "To create an :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and click the :guilabel:`Create` button. Doing so reveals a new, blank quotation form. On this blank quotation form, fill out the necessary information, by adding a :guilabel:`Customer`, and adding products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines (in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab), by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:195
msgid "Then, choose the desired quantity to sell by changing the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:197
msgid "Once the quotation has been filled out, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to confirm the quotation. When the quotation is confirmed, the quotation becomes an :abbr:`SO (sales order)`, and a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:201
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form for that specific :abbr:`SO (sales order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:204
msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Additional Options` menu, represented by a `hamburger` icon (four horizontal lines, located to the right of the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` column in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab). Clicking that icon reveals a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:208
msgid "In the pop-up, a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` will be chosen by default, with each product of the total :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity listed with their unique serial numbers (most likely listed in sequential order)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:212
msgid "To manually change a product's serial number, click the drop-down menu under :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and choose (or type) the desired serial number. Then, mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:216
msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to deliver the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Serial numbers listed in detailed operations popup."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:222
msgid "Upon validating the delivery order, a :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button appears. Click the :guilabel:`Traceability` smart button to see the updated :guilabel:`Traceability Report`, which includes: a :guilabel:`Reference` document, the :guilabel:`Product` being traced, the :guilabel:`Date`, and the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial #` assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:227
msgid "The :guilabel:`Traceability Report` can also include a :guilabel:`Reference` receipt from the previous purchase order (PO), if any of the product quantities shared a serial number assigned during receipt of that specific :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:232
msgid "Manage serial numbers for different operations types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:234
msgid "By default in Odoo, the creation of new serial numbers is only allowed upon **receiving** products from a purchase order. **Existing** serial numbers cannot be used. For sales orders, the opposite is true: new serial numbers cannot be created on the delivery order, only existing serial numbers can be used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:239
msgid "To change the ability to use new (or existing) serial numbers on any operation type, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and select the desired :guilabel:`Operation Type`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:243
msgid "For the :guilabel:`Receipts` operation type, found on the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option can be enabled, by selecting :guilabel:`Receipts` from the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, clicking :guilabel:`Edit`, and then clicking the checkbox beside the :guilabel:`Use Existing Lots/Serial Numbers` option (in the :guilabel:`Traceability` section). Lastly, click the :guilabel:`Save` button to save the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:249
msgid "For the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` operation type, located on the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, the :guilabel:`Create New Lots/Serial Numbers` option can be enabled, by selecting :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` from the :guilabel:`Operations Types` page, clicking :guilabel:`Edit`, and clicking the checkbox beside the :guilabel:`Create New Lots/Serial Numbers` option (in the :guilabel:`Traceability` section). Be sure to click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled traceability setting in operations type form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:260
msgid "Serial number traceability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:262
msgid "Manufacturers and companies can refer to the traceability reports to see the entire lifecycle of a product: where it came from (and when), where it was stored, and who it went to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:265
msgid "To see the full traceability of a product, or group by serial numbers, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Lots/Serial Numbers` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:269
msgid "From here, products with serial numbers assigned to them will be listed by default, and can be expanded to show what serial numbers have been specifically assigned to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:272
msgid "To group by serial numbers (or lots), first remove any default filters from the search bar in the upper-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Group By`, and select :guilabel:`Add Custom Group`, which reveals a mini drop-down menu. From this mini drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`, and click :guilabel:`Apply`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:277
msgid "Doing so reveals all existing serial numbers and lots, and can be expanded to show all quantities of products with that assigned number. For unique serial numbers that are not reused, there should be just one product per serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:-1
msgid "Serial numbers reporting page with drop-down lists."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:286
msgid "For additional information regarding an individual serial number (or lot number), click the line item for the serial number to reveal that specific serial number's :guilabel:`Serial Number` form. From this form, click the :guilabel:`Location` and :guilabel:`Traceability` smart buttons to see all stock on-hand using that serial number, and any operations made using that serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/serial_numbers.rst:293
msgid ":doc:`/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/differences`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:69
msgid "Product type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:7
msgid "Define *product types* in Odoo to track products in varying levels of detail."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:9
msgid "Classify products as *storable* to track stock counts, allowing users to trigger :doc:`reordering rules <../product_replenishment/reordering_rules>` for generating purchase orders. *Consumable* products are assumed to always be in stock, and *service* products are performed and served by the business."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:15
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Product Type <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l6j0ZkP5mLM>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:18
msgid "Set product type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:20
msgid "To set a product type, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the desired product from the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:23
msgid "On the product form, in the :guilabel:`Product Type` field, select:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:25
msgid ":guilabel:`Storable Product` for products tracked with stock counts. Only storable products can trigger reordering rules for generating purchase orders;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:29
msgid "Choose :guilabel:`Storable Product` if it is necessary to track a product's stock at various locations, inventory valuations, or if the product has lots and/or serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:32
msgid ":guilabel:`Consumable` for products that are always assumed to be in stock, whose quantities are not necessary to track or forecast (e.g. nails, toilet paper, coffee, etc.). Consumables are replaceable and essential, but exact counts are unnecessary; or"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Service` for sellable service products that are performed, and not tracked with stock counts (i.e. maintenance, installation, or repair services)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:0
msgid "Set a product type on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:43
msgid "The product types listed above are part of the standard *Inventory* app. For access to the fields below, :ref:`install <general/install>` the corresponding apps **in addition** to *Inventory*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:46
msgid ":guilabel:`Booking Fees`: charge a fee for booking appointments through the *Appointments* app. Requires the installation of the *Calendar* app and *Pay to Book* (`appointment_account_payment`) module"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Combo`: create discounted products sold in a bundle. Requires the installation of the *PoS* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Event Ticket`: sold to attendees wanting to go to an event. Requires the installation of the *Events* app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:53
msgid ":guilabel:`Event Booth`: sold to partners or sponsors to set up a booth at an event. Requires the installation of the *Events* app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Course`: sell access to an educational course. Requires the installation of the *eLearning* app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:59
msgid "Compare types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:61
msgid "Below is a summary of how each product type affects common *Inventory* operations, like transfers, reordering rules, and the forecasted report. Click the chart item with an asterisk (*) to navigate to detailed sections."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:70
msgid "Storable"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:71
msgid "Consumable"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:72
msgid "Service"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:73
msgid "Physical product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:74
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:75
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:83
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:91
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:95
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:103
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:104
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:107
msgid "Yes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:76
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:80
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:84
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:93
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:97
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:101
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:105
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:109
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:112
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:113
msgid "No"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:77
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:118
msgid "On-hand quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:78
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/on-hand-store>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:79
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/on-hand-con>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:81
msgid ":doc:`Inventory valuation <../../warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:86
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:139
msgid "Create transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:87
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/transfer-store>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:88
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/transfer-con>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:89
msgid ":ref:`No* <inventory/product_management/transfer-serv>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:90
msgid ":doc:`Lot/serial number tracking <differences>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:94
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:163
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:56
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:79
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:80
msgid "Create purchase order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:96
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/po>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:98
msgid "Can be manufactured or subcontracted"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:99
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:100
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/manufacture>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:102
msgid "Can be in a kit"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:106
msgid "Placed in package"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:108
msgid ":ref:`Yes* <inventory/product_management/package>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:110
msgid "Appears on Inventory report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:111
msgid ":ref:`Yes <inventory/product_management/report>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:120
msgid "A storable product's on-hand and forecasted quantities, based on incoming and outgoing orders, are reflected on the product form, accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the desired product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:128
msgid "Show \"On Hand\" and \"Forecast\" smart buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:128
msgid "Current and forecasted quantities are displayed in the **On Hand** and **Forecasted** smart buttons on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:133
msgid "On the other hand, consumable products are regarded as always available, and they **cannot** be managed using reordering rules or lot/serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:141
msgid "*Transfers* are any warehouse operation, such as receipts, internal or batch transfers, or deliveries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:144
msgid "When creating a transfer for storable products in the *Inventory* app, transfers modify the on-hand quantity at each location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:147
msgid "For example, transferring five units from the internal location `WH/Stock` to `WH/Packing Zone` decreases the recorded quantity at `WH/Stock` and increases it at `WH/Packing Zone`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:152
msgid "For consumable products, transfers can be created, but exact quantities at each storage location are not tracked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:157
msgid "Service products cannot be included in transfers, but these products can be `linked to projects and tasks for deadline tracking <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fix2LGkv13c>`_."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:165
msgid "Both storable and consumable products can be included in a request for quotation in the *Purchase* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:168
msgid "However, when receiving consumable products, their on-hand quantity does not change upon validating the receipt (e.g. `WH/IN`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:174
msgid "Manufacture or subcontract"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:176
msgid "Storable and consumable products can be manufactured, subcontracted, or included in a bill of materials (BoM)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:183
msgid "Show \"Bill of Materials\" and \"Used In\" smart buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:183
msgid "When the **Bill of Materials** and **Used In** smart buttons are visible on the product form, this indicates the product can be manufactured or used as a component of a |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:191
msgid "Both storable and consumable products can be placed in :doc:`packages <package>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:193
msgid "However, for consumable products, the quantity is not tracked, and the product is not listed in the package's :guilabel:`Contents`, accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`, and selecting the desired package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:201
msgid "Show Packages page, containing the package contents list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:201
msgid "A consumable product was placed in the package, but the **Content** section does not list it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:203
msgid "If the *Move Entire Package* feature is enabled, moving a package updates the location of the contained storable products. However, the location of consumable products are not updated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:209
msgid "Inventory report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:211
msgid "**Only** storable products appear on the following reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:213
msgid "The *stock report* is a comprehensive list of all on-hand, unreserved, incoming, and outgoing storable products. The report is only available to users with :doc:`administrator access <../../../../general/users/access_rights>`, and is found by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:-1
msgid "Show stock reporting list found in Inventory > Reporting > Stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:222
msgid "The *location report* is a breakdown of each location (internal, external, or virtual) and the on-hand and reserved quantity of each storable product. The report is only available with the *Storage Location* feature activated (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`), and to users with :doc:`administrator access <../../../../general/users/access_rights>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:227
msgid "Navigate to the location report by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/product_management/product_tracking/type.rst:-1
msgid "Show location reporting list found in Inventory > Reporting > Locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving.rst:5
msgid "Shipping and receiving"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse.rst:5
msgid "Advanced operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:3
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request to a shipper?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:6
msgid "Overview"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:8
msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. Odoo will be linked with the transportation company tracking system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:12
msgid "It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:15
msgid "You can easily cancel the request made to the carrier system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:18
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:20
msgid "If the delivery order is not **Validated**, then the request hasn't been made. You can choose to cancel the delivery or to change the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:24
msgid "If you have clicked on **Validate**, the request has been made and you should have received the tracking number and the label. You can still cancel the request. Simply click on the **Cancel** button next to the **Carrier Tracking Ref**:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:32
msgid "You will now see that the shipment has been cancelled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:37
msgid "You can now change the carrier if you wish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:40
msgid "How to send a shipping request after cancelling one?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:42
msgid "After cancelling the shipping request, you can change the carrier you want to use. Confirm it by clicking on the **Send to shipper** button. You will get a new tracking number and a new label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:50
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:160
msgid ":doc:`invoicing`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/cancel.rst:51
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:161
msgid ":doc:`multipack`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:3
msgid "Use dropshipping to ship directly from suppliers to customers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:5
msgid "Dropshipping is an order fulfillment strategy that allows sellers to have items shipped directly from suppliers to customers. Normally, a seller purchases a product from a supplier, stores it in their inventory, and ships it to the end customer once an order is placed. With dropshipping, the supplier is responsible for storing and shipping the item. This benefits the seller by reducing inventory costs, including the price of operating warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:12
msgid "Configure products to be dropshipped"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:14
msgid "To use dropshipping as a fulfillment strategy, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app and select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Logistics` heading, click the :guilabel:`Dropshipping` checkbox, and :guilabel:`Save` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:18
msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, click :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and choose an existing product or select :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one. On the :guilabel:`Product` page, make sure that the :guilabel:`Can be Sold` and :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkboxes are enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the \"Can be Sold\" and \"Can be Purchased\" checkboxes on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:27
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and specify a vendor and the price that they sell the product for. Multiple vendors can be added, but the vendor at the top of the list will be the one automatically selected for purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "The product form with a vendor specified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:35
msgid "Finally, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the :guilabel:`Dropship` checkbox in the :guilabel:`Routes` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the Dropship option in the product inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:43
msgid "Fulfill orders using dropshipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:45
msgid "When a customer completes an online purchase for a dropshipped product, a sales order will be automatically created with an associated request for quotation (:abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`) for the supplier. Sales orders can be viewed in the :menuselection:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders`. Click the :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button at the top right of a sales order to view the associated :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:52
msgid "Dropship sales orders can also be created manually through the :menuselection:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders --> Create` and adding a product configured for dropshipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "A dropship sales order with the Purchase smart button in the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:60
msgid "Once the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` is confirmed, it becomes a purchase order and a dropship receipt is created and linked to it. The receipt can be viewed by clicking the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button in the top right corner of the purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "A dropship purchase order with the Receipt smart button in the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:68
msgid "The dropship receipt will list the supplier in the :guilabel:`Receive From` section and the customer in the :guilabel:`Destination Location` section. Upon delivery of the product to the customer, click on the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top left of the dropship receipt to confirm the delivered quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Validate the dropship receipt after delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:77
msgid "To view all dropship orders, simply navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory` :guilabel:`Overview` dashboard and click the teal :guilabel:`# TO PROCESS` button on the :guilabel:`Dropship` card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Click the green button on the Dropship card to view all dropship orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:3
msgid "Shipping cost invoicing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:7
msgid "Invoicing customers for shipping after delivery ensures accurate charges based on real-time shipping factors like distance, weight, and method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:10
msgid "In Odoo, shipping costs can be invoiced in two ways:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:12
msgid "Agree with the customer on a fixed cost and :ref:`include it in the sale order. <inventory/shipping/invoice-so>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:15
msgid ":ref:`Invoice shipping costs to the customer post-delivery <inventory/shipping/invoice-shipping>`, reflecting the actual expenses incurred by the business."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:21
msgid "To set prices to delivery methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Shipping` section, enable the :guilabel:`Delivery Methods` feature. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the \"Delivery Methods\" feature in Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:30
msgid "Add shipping method"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:32
msgid "Next, configure the the price of each delivery method by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods` and click the :guilabel:`Create` button. Doing so opens a form to provide details about the shipping provider, including:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*required*) the name of the delivery method (e.g. `flat-rate shipping`, `same day delivery`, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:38
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*required*): choose the delivery service, like FedEx, if using a third-party carrier Ensure the integration with the shipping carrier is properly installed and select the provider from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:43
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:124
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:24
msgid ":doc:`../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:61
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:121
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: if the shipping method should apply to a specific company, select it from the drop-down menu. Leave the field blank to apply the method to all companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:48
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:59
msgid ":guilabel:`Website`: configure shipping methods for an e-commerce page. Select the applicable website from the drop-down menu, or leave it blank to apply the method to all web pages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*required*): the product listed on the :ref:`sales order line <inventory/shipping/invoice-on-so>` as the delivery charge."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:53
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: checking this box enables free shipping if the customer spends above the specified amount."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:59
msgid "Invoice cost on sales order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:61
msgid "To invoice shipping costs on the sales order, before the item is delivered, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and select the desired sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:64
msgid "On the sales order, click the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button at the bottom-right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Click \"Add Shipping\" button at the bottom right, near the total."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:70
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window, choose the intended carrier in the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:73
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Get Rate` button to the calculate shipping price based on real-time shipping data Odoo's shipping carrier integration."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:76
msgid "The :guilabel:`Cost` is automatically calculated using the weight of the items in the order. Finally, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to close the window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Calculate shipping by selecting a shipping method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:85
msgid "On the sales order, the delivery product appears in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, with the :guilabel:`Unit Price` set as the shipping cost calculated in the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Show delivery product on the sales order line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:93
msgid "Finally, after the product is delivered, click the :guilabel:`Create invoice` button, and an invoice is created that includes the shipping cost that was added earlier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Create Invoice\" button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:100
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Create and View Invoice` button, and a draft invoice is generated, with the shipping cost included in the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Show delivery product in the invoice line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:110
msgid "Invoice real shipping costs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:112
msgid "To modify the invoice to reflect the real cost of shipping, follow the steps :ref:`above <inventory/shipping/invoice-so>` to create an invoice with a delivery product with a :guilabel:`Unit Price` of zero."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:116
msgid "Then, on a draft invoice, modify the :guilabel:`Unit Price` to reflect the real shipping cost. Finally, invoice the customer the adjusted shipping cost by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:-1
msgid "Show delivery product on the invoice line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing.rst:125
msgid ":doc:`labels`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:3
msgid "Change shipping label size"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:8
msgid "In Odoo, there are a variety of different types of shipping labels that can be selected for delivery orders. Depending on the types of shipping packages used, different label sizes may be more appropriate, and can be configured to fit the package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:15
msgid "In the :menuselection:`Inventory` module, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> Shipping Methods.` Click on a delivery method to choose it. For the following example, *FedEx International* will be used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Different shipping methods."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:23
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab, under :guilabel:`Label Type`, choose one of the label types available. The availability varies depending on the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Select a label type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:30
msgid "When a sales order with the corresponding shipping company is confirmed and a delivery order is validated, the shipping label will be automatically created as a PDF and appear in the :guilabel:`Chatter`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:48
msgid "Create a sales order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:37
msgid "In the :menuselection:`Sales` application, click :guilabel:`Create` and select an international customer. Click :guilabel:`Add A Product` and select an item. Click :guilabel:`Add Shipping`, select a shipping method, then click :guilabel:`Get Rate`, and finally, click :guilabel:`Add`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Add a shipping method and rate to a sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:45
msgid "Once the quotation is confirmed by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`, a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button will appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery order smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:52
msgid "Once the delivery order is validated by clicking :guilabel:`Validate` in the delivery order, the shipping documents appear in the :guilabel:`Chatter`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Shipping PDF documents."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:60
msgid "Example labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:62
msgid "The default :guilabel:`Label Type` is :guilabel:`Paper Letter`. An example of a FedEx letter sized label is:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Full page letter size FedEx shipping label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:69
msgid "For comparison, an example of a FedEx bottom-half label is:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/label_type.rst:-1
msgid "Half page letter size FedEx shipping label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:3
msgid "Print shipping labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:8
msgid "Integrate Odoo with :doc:`third-party shipping carriers <../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>` to automatically generate shipping labels that includes prices, destination addresses, tracking numbers, and barcodes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:15
msgid "To generate labels for a third-party shipping carrier, first :doc:`install the third-party shipping connector <../setup_configuration/third_party_shipper>`. Then, configure and activate the :ref:`delivery method <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-delivery-method>`, being sure to set the :guilabel:`Integration Level` to :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` to generate shipping labels. Finally, provide the company's :ref:`source address <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>` and :ref:`product weights <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:-1
msgid "Set the \"Get Rate and Create Shipment\" option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:33
msgid "Labels for multi-step"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:35
msgid "For companies using :doc:`two <../daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>` or :doc:`three step delivery <../daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`, labels can be triggered to print after validating the picking or packing operation. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and choose the desired operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:40
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Operation Type` configuration page, tick the :guilabel:`Print Label` checkbox. Enabling this feature ensures that the third-party shipping label is printed upon validating this operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:45
msgid "For :doc:`two-step delivery <../daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`, where products are placed directly in packages during picking, companies can print shipping labels during picking instead of delivery. Odoo allows users to enable the :guilabel:`Print Label` feature on the `Pick` operation itself to achieve this flexibility."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:0
msgid "Enable the \"Print Label\" feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:55
msgid "Print tracking labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:57
msgid "Tracking labels are printed when specific operations are validated. By default, validating a delivery order (DO) generates a tracking label in the chatter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:61
msgid "For companies using two or three step delivery, refer to the :ref:`printing labels for multi-step delivery <inventory/shipping_receiving/picking-config>` section to learn how to print the label after validating a picking or packing operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:65
msgid "When both the *Sales* and *Inventory* apps are installed, begin in the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and proceed to the desired quotation or sales order (SO). There, and :ref:`add the shipping cost <inventory/shipping_receiving/add-shipping-quote>` to the order. Then, navigate to the linked |DO| — or another operation type when using multi-step delivery — to validate the operation and print the label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:71
msgid "If only the *Inventory* app is installed, create :abbr:`DOs (Delivery Orders)` directly in the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, :ref:`add the third-party carrier <inventory/shipping_receiving/validate-print-label>` in the :guilabel:`Carrier` field, and validate the |DO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:79
msgid "Add shipping on quotation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:81
msgid "To generate a tracking label for an order, begin by creating a quotation in :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`, clicking :guilabel:`New`, and filling out the quotation form. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button in the bottom-right corner of the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"Add Shipping\" button on the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:89
msgid "In the resulting pop-up window, select the intended carrier from the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` field is automatically populated, based on the :ref:`weight of products in the order <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>`. Modify this field to overwrite the predicted weight, and use this weight to estimate the cost of shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:94
msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Get Rate` to display the shipping cost for the customer, via the third-party carrier in the :guilabel:`Cost` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:98
msgid "If clicking :guilabel:`Get Rate` results in an error, ensure the :ref:`warehouse's address <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>` and :ref:`weight of products in the order <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>` are properly configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:102
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Add` to add the cost to the quotation, which is listed as the :ref:`configured delivery product <inventory/shipping_receiving/delivery-product>`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` on the quotation, and click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to access the |DO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Get rate\" pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:112
msgid "For users who do not have the *Sales* app installed, specify the :guilabel:`Carrier` by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, navigating to the |DO|, and going to the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:0
msgid "Show the \"Additional Info\" tab of a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:123
msgid "Validate delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:125
msgid "On a delivery order form, navigate to the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab to ensure the third-party shipping carrier has been added to the :guilabel:`Carrier` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:129
msgid "If the *Sales* app is not installed, the third-party carrier is set in the :guilabel:`Carrier` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:132
msgid "After the items in the order have been packed, click :guilabel:`Validate` to get the shipping carrier's tracking number, and generate the shipping label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:136
msgid "Create or select an existing delivery order by going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and selecting the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:139
msgid "The :guilabel:`Tracking Reference` number is generated in the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab of the delivery order. Click the :guilabel:`Tracking` smart button to access the tracking link from the shipping carrier's website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:143
msgid "The tracking label is found in PDF format in the chatter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:-1
msgid "Show generated shipping label in the chatter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:150
msgid "For multi-package shipping, one label is generated per package. Each label appears in the chatter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:157
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/labels.rst:157
msgid "Sample label generated from Odoo's shipping connector with FedEx."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:3
msgid "Multi-package shipments"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:5
msgid "In some cases, a delivery order with multiple items may need to be shipped in more than one package. This may be necessary if the items are too large to ship in a single package, or if certain items cannot be packaged together. Shipping a single delivery order in multiple packages provides flexibility for how each item is packaged, without the need to create multiple delivery orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:13
msgid "In order to split a delivery order across multiple packages, the *Packages* setting must be enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, then enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Packages`. Click :guilabel:`Save` to confirm the change."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The Packages setting on the Inventory app settings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:24
msgid "Ship items in multiple packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:26
msgid "To split items in the same delivery order across multiple packages, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Delivery Orders`, then select a delivery order that has multiple items, a multiple quantity of the same item, or both."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:30
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, select the :guilabel:`⁞≣ (menu)` icon in the line of the product that will be shipped in the first package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The menu icon for a product in a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:37
msgid "This makes a :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` pop-up window appear. In the table at the bottom of the pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Reserved` column shows the total quantity of the product included in the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:41
msgid "If the full quantity will be shipped in the first package, enter the number from the :guilabel:`Done` column in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. If less than the full quantity will be shipped in the first package, enter a smaller number than the one that appears in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the :guilabel:`Done` quantities and close the pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The Detailed Operations pop-up for a product in a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:51
msgid "Repeat the same steps for every item quantity that is included in the first package. Then, click :guilabel:`Put In Pack` to create a package with all of the selected items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The Put In Pack button on a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:58
msgid "For the next package, follow the same steps as detailed above, marking the quantity of each item to be included in the package as :guilabel:`Done` before clicking :guilabel:`Put In Pack` on the delivery order. Continue doing so until the full quantity of all items are added to a package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:62
msgid "Finally, after all of the packages have been shipped, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the delivery order has been completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:66
msgid "After one or more packages are created, a :guilabel:`Packages` smart button appears in the top-right corner of the delivery order. Click the :guilabel:`Packages` smart button to go to the :guilabel:`Packages` page for the delivery order, where each package can be selected to view all of the items included in it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:0
msgid "The Packages smart button on a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:76
msgid "Create a backorder for items to be shipped later"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:78
msgid "If some items will be shipped at a later date than others, there is no need to put them in a package until they are ready to be shipped. Instead, create a backorder for the items being shipped later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:81
msgid "Begin by shipping the items that will be shipped immediately. If they will be shipped in multiple packages, follow the :ref:`steps above <inventory/shipping/multiple-packages>` to package them as required. If they will be shipped in a single package, simply mark in the :guilabel:`Done` column the quantity of each item being shipped, but **do not** click the :guilabel:`Put In Pack` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:86
msgid "After all quantities being shipped immediately are marked as :guilabel:`Done`, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button, and a :guilabel:`Create Backorder?` pop-up window appears. Then, click the :guilabel:`Create Backorder` button. Doing so confirms the items being shipped immediately and creates a new delivery order for the items that will be shipped later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The Create Backorder? pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:95
msgid "The backorder delivery order will be listed in the chatter of the original delivery order in a message that reads :guilabel:`The backorder WH/OUT/XXXXX has been created.`. Click on :guilabel:`WH/OUT/XXXXX` in the message to view the backorder delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The backorder delivery order listed in the chatter of the original delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:103
msgid "The backorder delivery order can also be accessed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# Back Orders` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card, and selecting the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:-1
msgid "The Back Orders button on the Delivery Orders card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:111
msgid "Once the remaining items are ready to be shipped, navigate to the backorder delivery order. The items can be shipped in a single package by clicking :guilabel:`Validate` and selecting :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears, or shipped in multiple packages by following the steps detailed in the section above."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/multipack.rst:116
msgid "It is also possible to ship out some of the items while creating another backorder for the rest. To do so, simply follow the same steps used to create the first backorder."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:3
msgid "Printable delivery PDFs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:5
msgid "Automatically print delivery-related PDFs documents and labels in Odoo, containing package recipient details, contents, or handling instructions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:8
msgid "The following PDFs can be configured to print upon validating an *Inventory* operation (e.g. receipt, picking, delivery orders, quality checks):"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:11
msgid ":ref:`Delivery slip <inventory/shipping_receiving/delivery-slip>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:12
msgid ":ref:`Return slip <inventory/shipping_receiving/return-slip>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:13
msgid ":ref:`Product labels of items in the order <inventory/shipping_receiving/product-labels>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:14
msgid ":ref:`Lot and serial number labels <inventory/shipping_receiving/lot-sn-labels>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:15
msgid "Carrier labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:16
msgid "Export documents"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:17
msgid "Package Content"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:18
msgid "Package label"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:22
msgid "To automatically print these forms, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and select the desired operation type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:25
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Hardware` tab, tick each of the desired options available in the :guilabel:`Print on Validation` section to download the PDF of those selected documents automatically after validating the :guilabel:`Operation Type`. For details on what each of the checkbox options do, jump to the related section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:-1
msgid "Show the *Print on Validation* option in the \"Pick\" *Operation Type*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:36
msgid "Delivery slip"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:38
msgid "A *delivery slip* contains recipient and package details, usually placed inside (or attached to) the package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:42
msgid ":ref:`Picking list <inventory/warehouses_storage/barcode_picking>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:43
msgid ":doc:`Tracking label <labels>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:45
msgid "After :ref:`enabling the Delivery Slip setting <inventory/shipping_receiving/print_setup>` in the :guilabel:`Hardware` tab configuration options, clicking :guilabel:`Validate` on the desired operation type downloads a PDF of the delivery slip."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:49
msgid "The delivery slip shows products, quantities, the delivery order reference number, and the total order weight."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:-1
msgid "Example delivery slip."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:58
msgid "Return slip"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:60
msgid "Print a *return slip* to include in a delivery for customer return packages. It identifies the return, links to the sales order, and includes item details and customer information. It can also include specific return instructions for the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:64
msgid "After :ref:`enabling the Return Slip setting <inventory/shipping_receiving/print_setup>` in the :guilabel:`Hardware` tab configuration options, clicking :guilabel:`Validate` on the desired operation type downloads a PDF of the return slip."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:68
msgid "The return slip displays the company's return address, along with barcodes for both the order and the return operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:-1
msgid "Example return slip."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:77
msgid "Product labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:79
msgid "Print *product labels* to affix to items in an order, providing essential information, such as product name, barcode, and price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:82
msgid "After navigating to the intended operation type (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`), in the :guilabel:`Hardware` tab, tick the :guilabel:`Product Labels` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:137
msgid "Doing so makes the :guilabel:`Print label as:` drop-down menu visible, where each product label can be printed as:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:88
msgid ":guilabel:`2 x 7 with price`: PDF displays product name, barcode, and price, fitting two rows and seven columns of product labels per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:0
msgid "Example 2 x 7 with price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:97
msgid ":guilabel:`4 x 7 with price`: displays product name, barcode, and price, fitting four rows and seven columns of product labels per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:0
msgid "Example 4 x 7 with price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:106
msgid ":guilabel:`4 x 12`: displays product name and barcode. Fits four rows and twelve columns of product labels per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:0
msgid "Example 4 x 12."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:115
msgid ":guilabel:`4 x 12 with price`: displays product name, barcode, and price. Fits four rows and twelve columns of product labels per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:117
msgid ":guilabel:`ZPL Labels`: prints labels in the Zebra Programming Language (ZPL) containing the product name and barcode. Readable for Zebra printers to automatically print labels."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:119
msgid ":guilabel:`ZPL Labels with price`: prints labels in the :abbr:`ZPL (Zebra Programming Language)` containing the product name, barcode, and price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:123
msgid "Product labels can be manually printed from any delivery order, by clicking the :guilabel:`Print Labels` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:128
msgid "Lot/SN Labels"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:130
msgid "Print *lot/SN labels* to affix to items in an order, providing essential information, such as product name, lot or serial number, and the barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:133
msgid "To automatically print this PDF, navigate to the intended operation type's options page (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`). Then, in the :guilabel:`Hardware` tab, tick the :guilabel:`Lot/SN Labels` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:140
msgid ":guilabel:`4 x 12 - One per lot/SN`: PDF with labels for unique lot/serial numbers in the order, including product name, lot/serial number, and barcode. Fits four rows and twelve columns per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:0
msgid "Order with only one unique set of lot/serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:150
msgid "Labels for an order with only one unique set of lot/serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:152
msgid ":guilabel:`4 x 12 - One per unit`: PDF with labels matching the quantity of items, displaying the product name, lot/serial number, and barcode. Fits four rows and twelve columns per page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:154
msgid ":guilabel:`ZPL Labels - One per lot/SN`: prints labels in :abbr:`ZPL (Zebra Programming Language)`, containing the product name, lot/serial number, and barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/print_on_validation.rst:156
msgid ":guilabel:`ZPL Labels - One per unit`: prints labels with the quantity of items in :abbr:`ZPL (Zebra Programming Language)`, containing the product name, lot/serial number, and barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:3
msgid "Scheduled delivery dates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:10
msgid "Accurately forecasting delivery dates is vital for fulfilling customer expectations. In Odoo, the *Inventory* app allows for comprehensive lead time configuration, allowing coordination and planning of manufacturing orders, deliveries, and receptions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:15
msgid "Lead time types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:17
msgid "Different lead times for different operations can impact various stages of the order fulfillment process. Here's a summary of the types of lead times in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Show graphic of all lead times working together."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:24
msgid ":ref:`Customer lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/customer-lt>`: default time frame for fulfilling customer orders. The customer lead time is the number of days from the date the sales order (SO) is confirmed to the date the products are shipped from the warehouse. This is also known as *delivery lead time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:29
msgid ":ref:`Sales security lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/sales-security-lt>`: moves the *scheduled delivery date* forward by a specified number of days. This serves as a buffer to allow ample time to prepare the outgoing shipment earlier, considering the possibility of delays in the fulfillment process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:34
msgid ":ref:`Purchase lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/purchase-lt>`: number of days from the confirmation of a purchase order (PO) to the receipt of products. It provides insight on the time it takes for products to arrive at the warehouse, facilitating effective scheduling and planning of supplier deliveries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:39
msgid ":ref:`Purchase security lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/purchase-security-lt>`: advances the order deadline on a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` by a specified number of days. This proactive approach of placing orders earlier mitigates the risk of vendor or shipping delays. Thus, for products that are set to replenish to order, the need appears on the *Replenishment report* earlier, according to the specified number of days."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:45
msgid ":ref:`Days to Purchase <inventory/shipping_receiving/days-to-purchase>`: days needed for the vendor to receive a request for quotation (RFQ) and confirm it. It advances the deadline to schedule a |RFQ| by a specified number of days."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:49
msgid ":ref:`Manufacturing lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/manuf-lt>`: number of days needed to complete a manufacturing order (MO) from the date of confirmation. This lead time includes weekends (non-working hours in Odoo), and is used to forecast an approximate production date for a finished good."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:54
msgid ":ref:`Days to prepare manufacturing order <inventory/shipping_receiving/prepare-manufacturing-order>`: number of days needed to replenish components, or manufacture sub-assemblies of the product. Either set one directly on the bill of materials (BoM), or click *Compute* to sum up purchase and manufacturing lead times of components in the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:60
msgid ":ref:`Manufacturing security lead time <inventory/shipping_receiving/manuf-security-lt>`: moves the scheduled date of the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` forward by a specified number of days. When used in conjunction with :ref:`replenish to order <inventory/management/products/strategies>`, the security lead time makes the need appear earlier on the replenishment report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:69
msgid "Sales lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:71
msgid "Customer lead times and sales security lead times can be configured to automatically compute an *expected delivery date* on a :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`. The expected delivery date ensures a realistic *delivery dates* setting for shipments from the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:75
msgid "Odoo issues a warning message if the set delivery date is earlier than the expected date, as it may not be feasible to fulfill the order by that time, which would impact other warehouse operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:79
msgid "A :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)` containing a `Coconut-scented candle` is confirmed on July 11th. The product has a customer lead time of 14 days, and the business uses a sales security lead time of 1 day. Based on the lead time inputs, Odoo suggests a delivery date in 15 days, on July 26th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Set *Delivery Date* in a sales order. Enables delivery lead times feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:87
msgid "The following sections demonstrate how to automatically compute expected delivery dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:90
msgid "Customer lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:92
msgid "Set the customer lead time on each product form, by navigating to the products page. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Products --> Products`. From there, select the desired product, and switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. Then, under the :guilabel:`Customer Lead Time` field, fill in the number of calendar days required to fulfill the delivery order from start to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:98
msgid "Set a 14-day customer lead time for the `Coconut-scented candle` by navigating to its product form. Then, in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, type `14.00` days into the :guilabel:`Customer Lead Time` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Set *Customer Lead Time* on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:109
msgid "Sales security lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:111
msgid "*Sales security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:114
msgid "On the configuration page, under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` heading, locate the box for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Sales`, and click the checkbox to enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:117
msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. This security lead time is a buffer notifying the team to prepare for outgoing shipments earlier than the scheduled date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:121
msgid "Setting the :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Sales` to `1.00` day, pushes the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of a delivery order (DO) forward by one day. In that case, if a product is initially scheduled for delivery on April 6th, but with a one-day security lead time, the new scheduled date for the delivery order would be April 5th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "View of the security lead time for sales configuration from the sales settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:131
msgid "Deliver several products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:133
msgid "For orders that include multiple products with different lead times, the lead times can be configured directly from the quotation itself. On a quotation, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab, and set the :guilabel:`Shipping Policy` to:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:137
msgid ":guilabel:`As soon as possible` to deliver products as soon as they are ready. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is determined by adding today's date to the shortest lead time among the products in the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:141
msgid ":guilabel:`When all products are ready` to wait to fulfill the entire order at once. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is determined by adding today's date to the longest lead time among the products in the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Show *Shipping Policy* field in the *Other Info* tab of a quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:150
msgid "In a quotation containing 2 products, `Yoga mat` and `Resistance band,` the products have a lead time of 8 days and 5 days, respectively. Today's date is April 2nd."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:153
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Shipping Policy` is set to :guilabel:`As soon as possible`, the scheduled delivery date is 5 days from today: April 7th. On the other hand, selecting :guilabel:`When all products are ready` configures the scheduled date to be 8 days from today: April 10th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:160
msgid "Purchase lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:162
msgid "Automatically determining the dates on which to place orders from suppliers can help simplify the procurement process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:165
msgid "Odoo calculates the supplier shipment *receipt date*, and :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` deadline, based on the required date the product is needed in the warehouse. By working backwards from the receipt date, vendor lead times and purchase security lead times are taken into account, in order to determine the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` deadline."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:170
msgid "This deadline is the date by which the order should be confirmed, in order to ensure timely arrival by the expected receipt date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Visualization of PO deadline and receipt date used with vendor lead times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:178
msgid ":ref:`PO scheduling with reordering rules <inventory/management/reordering_rules>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:181
msgid "Vendor lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:183
msgid "To set a vendor lead time for orders arriving in the warehouse from a vendor location, begin by navigating to a product form through :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Products --> Products`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:186
msgid "Next, select the desired product, and switch to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab. In the editable vendor pricelist, click the :guilabel:`Add a line` button to add vendor details, such as the :guilabel:`Vendor` name, :guilabel:`Price` offered for the product, and lastly, the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:192
msgid "Multiple vendors and lead times can be added to the vendor pricelist. The default vendor and lead time selected will be the entry at the top of the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:196
msgid "On the vendor pricelist of the product form, the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` for the selected vendor is set to `10 days.`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Add delivery lead times to vendor pricelist on a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:203
msgid "By setting the vendor lead time, the expected arrival date of the item is automatically determined as the date of the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` confirmation, plus the vendor lead time. This ensures that warehouse employees are notified, if the products do **not** arrive within the expected timeframe."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:209
msgid "On a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` confirmed on July 11th, for a product configured with a 10-day vendor lead time, Odoo automatically sets the :guilabel:`Receipt Date` to July 21st. The receipt date also appears as the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the warehouse receipt form, accessible from the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button, located on the :guilabel:`PO (Purchase Order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Show expected *Receipt Date* of the product from the vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Show expected *Scheduled Date* of arrival of the product from the vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:225
msgid "Purchase security lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:227
msgid "*Purchase security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:230
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Settings` page, under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` heading, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Purchase`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:233
msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. By configuring the security lead time, a buffer is set to account for potential delays in supplier deliveries. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:237
msgid "Setting the :guilabel:`Security Lead Time for Purchase` to `2.00` days, pushes the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` of receipt back by two days. In that case, if a product is initially scheduled to arrive on April 6th, with a two-day security lead time, the new scheduled date for the receipt would be April 8th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:0
msgid "Set security lead time for purchase from the Inventory > Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:249
msgid "Days to purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:251
msgid "To set up the *days to purchase* lead time, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Advanced Scheduling` section, in the :guilabel:`Days to Purchase` field, specify the number of days required for the vendor to confirm a |RFQ| after receiving it from the company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Days to Purchase\" configuration in the Settings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:263
msgid "Manufacturing lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:265
msgid "Lead times can help simplify the procurement process for consumable materials and components used in manufactured products with bills of materials (BoMs)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:268
msgid "The :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, which is the deadline to begin the manufacturing process to complete the product by the scheduled delivery date, can be determined by configuring the manufacturing lead times and manufacturing security lead times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Visualization of the determination of planned MO date manufacturing lead times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:277
msgid "Manufacturing lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:279
msgid "Manufacturing lead times for products are configured from a product's bill of materials (BoM) form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:281
msgid "To add a lead time to a |BoM|, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and select the desired |BoM| to edit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:284
msgid "On the |BoM| form, click the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab. Change the value (in days) in the :guilabel:`Manuf. Lead Time` field to specify the calendar days needed to manufacture the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Manuf. Lead Time value specified on a product's Bill of Material form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:292
msgid "If the selected |BoM| is a multi-level |BoM|, the manufacturing lead times of the components are added."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:295
msgid "If the |BoM| product is subcontracted, the :guilabel:`Manuf. Lead Time` can be used to determine the date at which components should be sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:298
msgid "Establish a :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, based on the *expected delivery date*, indicated in the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field of the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:301
msgid "The :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` deadline, which is the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`, is calculated as the *expected delivery date* subtracted by the manufacturing lead time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:305
msgid "This ensures the manufacturing process begins on time, in order to meet the delivery date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:307
msgid "However, it is important to note that lead times are based on calendar days. Lead times do **not** consider weekends, holidays, or *work center capacity* (:dfn:`the number of operations that can be performed at the work center simultaneously`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:312
msgid ":doc:`Manufacturing planning <../../../manufacturing/workflows/use_mps>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:313
msgid ":doc:`Schedule MOs with reordering rules <../../product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:317
msgid "A product's scheduled shipment date on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` is August 15th. The product requires 14 days to manufacture. So, the latest date to start the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` to meet the commitment date is August 1st."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:324
msgid "Days to prepare manufacturing order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:326
msgid "Configure the days required to gather components to manufacture a product by going to its |BoM|. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and select the desired |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:330
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab of the |BoM|, specify the calendar days needed to obtain components of the product in the :guilabel:`Days to prepare Manufacturing Order` field. Doing so creates |MOs| in advance, and ensures there is enough time to either replenish components, or manufacture semi-finished products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:336
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Compute`, located next to the :guilabel:`Days to prepare Manufacturing Order` field, calculates the longest lead time among all the components listed on the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:339
msgid "*Purchase security lead times* that impact this specific |BoM| are also added to this value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:343
msgid "A |BoM| has two components, one has a manufacturing lead time of two days, and the other has a purchase lead time of four days. The :guilabel:`Days to prepare Manufacturing Order` is four days."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:350
msgid "Manufacturing security lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:352
msgid "*Manufacturing security lead time* is set globally for the business in :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Planning` heading, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`Security Lead Time`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:356
msgid "Next, enter the desired number of calendar days. By configuring the security lead time, a buffer is set to account for potential delays in the manufacturing process. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the security lead time for manufacturing from the manufacturing app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:364
msgid "A product has a scheduled shipment date on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)` set for August 15th. The manufacturing lead time is 7 days, and manufacturing security lead time is 3 days. So, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` reflects the latest date to begin the manufacturing order. In this example, the planned date on the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` is August 5th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:371
msgid "Global example"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:373
msgid "See the following example to understand how all the lead times work together to ensure timely order fulfillment:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:376
msgid "**Sales security lead time**: 1 day"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:377
msgid "**Manufacturing security lead time**: 2 days"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:378
msgid "**Manufacturing lead time**: 3 days"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:379
msgid "**Purchase security lead time**: 1 day"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:380
msgid "**Vendor lead time**: 4 days"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:382
msgid "The customer places an order for a manufactured product on September 1st, and the scheduled delivery date from the warehouse is on September 20th. Odoo uses lead times and automated reordering rules to schedule the necessary operations, based on the outgoing shipment delivery date, September 20th:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "Show timeline of how lead times work together to schedule warehouse operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:390
msgid "**September 1st**: Sales order created, confirmed by salesperson."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:392
msgid "**September 9th**: Deadline to order components to ensure they arrive in time when manufacturing begins (4-day supplier lead time)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:395
msgid "**September 13th**: Scheduled date of receipt for components. Initially, it was set to 9/14, but the 1-day purchase security lead time pushed the date earlier by 1 day."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:398
msgid "**September 14th**: Deadline to begin manufacturing. Calculated by subtracting the manufacturing lead time of 3 days, and the manufacturing security lead time of 2 days, from the expected delivery date of September 19th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:402
msgid "**September 19th**: :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` on the delivery order form indicates the updated expected delivery date, which was originally set as September 20th. But the sales security lead time pushed the date forward by a day."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates.rst:406
msgid "Odoo's replenishment planning maps a business' order fulfillment process, setting pre-determined deadlines and raw material order dates, including buffer days for potential delays. This ensures products are delivered on time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process deliveries in three steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:7
msgid "Some companies process large amounts of deliveries every day, many of which include multiple products or require special packaging. To make this efficient, a packing step is needed before shipping out products. For this, Odoo has a three step process for delivering goods."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:11
msgid "In the default three-step delivery process, products that are part of a delivery order are picked in the warehouse according to their removal strategy, and brought to a packing zone. After the items have been packed into the different shipments in the packing zone, they are brought to an output location before being shipped. These steps can be modified if they do not fit the needs of the business."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:20
msgid "Odoo is configured by default to :ref:`receive and deliver goods in one step <inventory/receipts_delivery_one_step>`, so the settings need to be changed in order to utilize three step deliveries. First, make sure the *Multi-Step Routes* option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse`. Note that activating :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` will also activate *Storage Locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Activate multi-step routes and storage locations in inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:30
msgid "Next, the warehouse needs to be configured for three step deliveries. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click on the :guilabel:`warehouse` to edit. Then, select :guilabel:`Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)` for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Set outgoing shipment option to deliver in three steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:39
msgid "Activating three-step receipts and deliveries creates two new internal locations: a *Packing Zone* (WH/Packing Zone), and *Output* (WH/Output). To rename these locations, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, click on the :guilabel:`Location` to change, and update the name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:45
msgid "Deliver in three steps (pick + pack + ship)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:50
msgid "To create a new quote, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create`, which reveals a blank quotation form. On the blank quotation form, select a :guilabel:`Customer`, add a storable :guilabel:`Product`, and click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:54
msgid "A :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears in the top right of the quotation form. Clicking it opens the picking order to move the ordered product from `WH/Stock` to `WH/Packing Zone`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "After confirming the sales order, the Delivery smart button appears showing three items\n"
"associated with it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:63
msgid "Process a picking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:65
msgid "The picking order will be created once the sales order is confirmed. To view the picking, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`, and locate the :guilabel:`Pick` task card on the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:69
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button, which reveals the picking order generated from the previously confirmed sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:72
msgid "Click on the picking to process. If the product is in stock, Odoo will automatically reserve the product. Click :guilabel:`Validate` to mark the picking as done, and complete the transfer to the :guilabel:`Packing Zone`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Picking order operation showing source location and destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:81
msgid "Process a packing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:83
msgid "After validating the picking, the packing order is ready to process. Click back to the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview`, and locate the :guilabel:`Pack` task card on the dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:86
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button (in this case, :guilabel:`1 To Process`). This reveals the packing order generated from the previously confirmed sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:89
msgid "Click on the packing order associated with the sales order, then click on :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the packing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Packing order operation showing source location and destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:96
msgid "Once the packing order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` location and moves to the :guilabel:`WH/Output` location. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:101
msgid "Process a delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:103
msgid "Once the packing order has been validated, the delivery order is ready to process. Navigate back to the original sales order to process the delivery by going to :menuselection:`Sales app`, and selecting the sales order created previously."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:108
msgid "Delivery orders can *also* be accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Deliveries`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:111
msgid "The :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button now indicates there are 3 transfers, instead of one. Clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button shows the three operations for this sales order: the picking, the packing, and the delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:115
msgid "Click the delivery (WH/OUT) transfer to open the delivery order. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Click Validate on the delivery order to transfer the product from the output location to\n"
"the customer location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps.rst:122
msgid "Once the delivery order is validated, the product leaves the :guilabel:`WH/Output` location and moves to the :guilabel:`Partners/Customers` location. Then, the status of the document will change to :guilabel:`Done`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:3
msgid "Process receipts and deliveries in one step"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, both incoming and outgoing shipments are configured to process in one step, by default. This means purchases will be received directly into stock, and deliveries will be moved directly from stock to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:30
msgid "Incoming and outgoing shipments do **not** need to be configured with the same amount of steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:18
msgid "For example, a warehouse's settings can be configured so products can be received directly in one step, and delivered in three steps (pick + pack + ship)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:24
msgid "To configure one-step receipts and deliveries for a warehouse, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select a warehouse to edit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:27
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, set :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` to :guilabel:`Receive goods directly (1 step)`, and set :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments` to :guilabel:`Deliver goods directly (1 step)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Incoming and outgoing shipments set to one-step on warehouse form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:36
msgid "Since one-step receipt and delivery is the default for incoming and outgoing shipments in Odoo, the *Multi-Step Routes* feature is *not* required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:39
msgid "However, for the :guilabel:`Shipments` settings to appear on a warehouse form, the feature **must** be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:42
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:41
msgid "To enable *Multi-Step Routes*, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`, and click :guilabel:`Save`. Doing so also activates the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:50
msgid "Receive goods directly (1 step)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:52
msgid "When products are received in one step, they will move from the vendor location to warehouse stock in the database immediately upon validation of a purchase order (PO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:58
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:81
msgid "To create a |PO|, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase app`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a blank :guilabel:`Request for Quotation` (RfQ) form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:61
msgid "Add a vendor in the :guilabel:`Supplier` field. Then, fill out the various fields on the |RfQ|, as necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out new request for quotation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:68
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:91
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select a product to add to the |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:71
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:94
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. This moves the |RfQ| to the :guilabel:`Purchase Order` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:74
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:97
msgid "Once the |PO| is confirmed, a :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button appears at the top of the form. Clicking the smart button opens the warehouse receipt (WH/IN) form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Receipt smart button on confirmed purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:113
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:171
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:249
msgid "Process receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:84
msgid "From the warehouse receipt form, the products ordered can be received into the warehouse. To receive the products, click :guilabel:`Validate`. Once validated, the receipt moves to the :guilabel:`Done` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Validated warehouse receipt in Done stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:123
msgid "Click back to the |PO| (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the form) to view the |PO| form. On the product line, the quantity in the :guilabel:`Received` column now matches the ordered :guilabel:`Quantity`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:99
msgid "Deliver goods directly (1 step)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:101
msgid "When products are delivered in one step, they will move from warehouse stock to the customer location in the database immediately upon validation of a sales order (SO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:105
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:156
msgid "Create sales order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:107
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:158
msgid "To create a |SO|, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales app`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a blank sales quotation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:110
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:161
msgid "Add a customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` field. Then, fill out the various fields on the sales quotation form, as necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out new sales quotation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:117
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Product` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select a product to add to the sales order quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:120
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:171
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm`. This moves the quotation to the :guilabel:`Sales Order` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:123
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:174
msgid "Once the |SO| is confirmed, a :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button appears at the top of the form. Clicking the smart button opens the warehouse delivery (WH/OUT) form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery smart button on confirmed sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:131
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:207
msgid "Process delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:133
msgid "From the warehouse delivery form, the products ordered by the customer can be delivered from the warehouse. To deliver the products, change the value in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field to match the ordered quantity in the :guilabel:`Demand` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:137
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:225
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate`. Once validated, the delivery order moves to the :guilabel:`Done` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:-1
msgid "Validated delivery order in Done stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:144
msgid "Click back to the |SO| (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the form) to view the |SO| form. On the product line, the quantity in the :guilabel:`Delivered` column now matches the ordered :guilabel:`Quantity`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_one_step.rst:149
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:229
msgid ":doc:`shipments_deliveries`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process receipts and deliveries in two steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:12
msgid "Depending on a company's needs, receiving and shipping products in and out of the warehouse might require multi-step operations. In Odoo *Inventory*, this can be done using *Multi-Step Routes*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:15
msgid "In the two-step receipt process, products are received in an input area, then transferred to stock. This kind of process for incoming shipments might be beneficial for warehouses with specific storage locations, such as freezers and refrigerators, secured locked areas, or special aisles and shelves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:19
msgid "Products can be sorted according to where they are going to be stored, and employees can stock all the products going to a specific location. The products are *not* available for further processing, until they are transferred into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:23
msgid "In the two-step delivery process, products are first picked from their respective location in the warehouse, then transferred to an output location before being shipped to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:26
msgid "This might be beneficial for companies using a First In, First Out (FIFO), Last In, First Out (LIFO), or First Expired, First Out (FEFO) removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:32
msgid "For example, a warehouse's settings can be configured so products can be received in two steps (input + stock), and delivered in three steps (pick + pack + ship)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:38
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, both incoming and outgoing shipments are configured to process in one step, by default. To change these settings, the *Multi-Step Routes* feature must be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Multi-Step Routes feature in Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:50
msgid "Next, configure a warehouse for two-step receipts and deliveries. Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select a warehouse to edit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:53
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, set :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` to :guilabel:`Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)`, and set :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments` to :guilabel:`Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Incoming and outgoing shipments set to two-step on warehouse form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:62
msgid "Selecting two-step receipts and deliveries automatically creates new *Input* and *Output* warehouse locations in the database, named `WH/Input` and `WH/Output`, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:65
msgid "To rename or edit these locations, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, and select the desired location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:68
msgid "On the location's form, change the :guilabel:`Location Name`, and make any other necessary changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:72
msgid "Process receipt in two steps (input + stock)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:74
msgid "When products are received in two steps, they first move from the vendor location to an input location. Then, they move from the input location to warehouse stock in the database, upon validation of a purchase order (PO), and a subsequent internal transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:84
msgid "Add a vendor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field. Then, fill out the various fields on the |RfQ|, as necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out new Request for Quotation from vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery smart button for validated purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:105
msgid "For businesses with multiple warehouses that have different step configurations, the :guilabel:`Deliver To` field on the |PO| form **must** be specified as the correct *input location* connected to the two-step warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:109
msgid "This can be done by selecting the warehouse from the drop-down menu that includes the `Receipts` label at the end of the name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:115
msgid "From the warehouse receipt form, the products ordered can be received into the warehouse. To receive the products, click :guilabel:`Validate`. Once validated, the receipt moves to the :guilabel:`Done` stage, and the products move to the :guilabel:`WH/Input` location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Receipt form for products ordered from vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:128
msgid "Process internal transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:130
msgid "Once the receipt is validated, an internal transfer is created and ready to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:132
msgid "To view the internal transfer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`, and locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` task card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:135
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on the task card to reveal a list of all internal transfers to process, and select the transfer associated with the previously validated receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:138
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the transfer, and move the product from :guilabel:`WH/Input` to :guilabel:`WH/Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:141
msgid "Once the transfer is validated, the products enter inventory, and are available for customer deliveries or manufacturing orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Internal transfer form for products ordered from vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:149
msgid "Process delivery order in two steps (pick + ship)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:151
msgid "When products are delivered in two steps, they move from warehouse stock to an output location. Then, they move from the output location to a customer location in the database, upon validation of a picking order, and a subsequent delivery order (DO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out new sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:168
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select a product to add to the sales order quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery smart button on validated sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:182
msgid "Process picking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:184
msgid "Once the sales order is confirmed, a picking order is generated and ready to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:186
msgid "To complete the picking, navigate to the :guilabel:`Inventory app`, and locate the :guilabel:`Pick` task card on the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard. Alternatively, the picking order can also be accessed via the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the sales order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:190
msgid "From the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on the :guilabel:`Pick` task card. This reveals a list of all pickings to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:193
msgid "Click on the picking (WH/PICK) operation associated with the sales order to reveal the picking order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Picking order form for products included in sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:200
msgid "Manually set the quantity by changing the value in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, to match the value in the :guilabel:`Demand` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:203
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the picking, and move the product from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to :guilabel:`WH/Output.`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:209
msgid "Once the picking is validated, a delivery order is created, and ready to process. Clicking the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button on the sales order form reveals the newly created delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:212
msgid "Alternatively, to view the delivery order, navigate back to the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page, via the breadcrumbs, and locate the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` task card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:215
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on the task card to reveal a list of all delivery orders to process, and select the order associated with the previously validated picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery order form for products ordered by customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps.rst:222
msgid "To deliver the products, change the value in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field to match the ordered quantity in the :guilabel:`Demand` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process receipts in three steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:7
msgid "Some companies require a quality control process before receiving goods from suppliers. To accomplish this, Odoo has a three-step process for receiving goods."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:10
msgid "In the three-step receipt process, products are received in an input area, then transferred to a quality area for inspection. Products that pass the quality inspection are then transferred into stock. The products are not available for further processing until they are transferred out of the quality area and into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:18
msgid "Odoo is configured by default to :ref:`receive and deliver goods in one step <inventory/receipts_delivery_one_step>`, so the settings need to be changed in order to utilize three-step receipts. First, make sure the *Multi-Step Routes* option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse`. Note that activating :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` will also activate *Storage Locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Activate multi-step routes and storage locations in Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:28
msgid "Next, the warehouse needs to be configured for three-step receipts. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select the desired warehouse to be edited. Doing so reveals the detail form for that specific warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:32
msgid "On that :guilabel:`Warehouse` detail form page, select :guilabel:`Receive goods in input, then quality and then stock (3 steps)` for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Set incoming shipment option to receive in three steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:39
msgid "Activating three-step receipts and deliveries creates two new internal locations: *Input* (WH/Input), and *Quality Control* (WH/Quality Control). To rename these locations, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, then click on the desired location to change (or update) the name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:45
msgid "Receive in three steps (input + quality + stock)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:48
msgid "Create a purchase order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:50
msgid "To create a new :abbr:`RfQ (Request for Quotation)`, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> New`, which reveals a blank :abbr:`RfQ (Request for Quotation)` form page. On this page, select a :guilabel:`Vendor`, add a storable :guilabel:`Product`, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:54
msgid "A :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will appear in the top right, and the receipt will be associated with the purchase order. Clicking on the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button will show the receipt order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "After confirming a purchase order, a Receipt smart button will appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:63
msgid "Process a receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:65
msgid "Once the purchase order (PO) is confirmed, a receipt (`WH/IN`) operation is generated and ready to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:68
msgid "The receipt can be confirmed from the original purchase order form, or it can be accessed by navigating to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`, and locating the :guilabel:`Receipts` task card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:71
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to reveal all incoming receipts to process. Click the receipt associated with the previous purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:74
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Validate` to validate the receipt, and move the product to the destination location, :guilabel:`WH/Input`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Receipt operation for product being moved to WH/Input location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:82
msgid "Process a transfer to Quality Control"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:84
msgid "Once the receipt has been validated, an internal transfer operation to move the product to quality control is ready to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:87
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` in the breadcrumbs to navigate back to the dashboard, and locate the :guilabel:`Internal Transfers` task card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:90
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`# To Process` button to reveal all internal transfers to process. Then, choose the internal transfer associated with the validated receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:93
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the transfer, and move the product from :guilabel:`WH/Input` to :guilabel:`WH/Quality Control`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Internal transfer for product being moved to quality control zone."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:101
msgid "Process a transfer to stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:103
msgid "Once the internal transfer to move the product to quality control has been validated, another internal transfer operation to move the product into warehouse stock is ready to process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:106
msgid "Click :guilabel:`YourCompany: Internal Transfers` in the breadcrumbs to reveal the list of all internal transfers to process. Then, select the new internal transfer to move the product from `WH/Quality Control` to `WH/Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:110
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the transfer, and move the product from :guilabel:`WH/Quality Control` to :guilabel:`WH/Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "Internal transfer for product being moved to warehouse stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:3
msgid "Incoming shipments and delivery orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo, there are many different ways to process receipts and deliveries for products moving in and out of a warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:8
msgid "A company's preferred method of receiving, or shipping, products depends on several factors, such as the type of products stocked and sold, the size of the warehouse, the amount of receipts and delivery orders processed daily, and so on."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:12
msgid "Enabling the *Multi-Step Routes* feature in Odoo's *Inventory* app settings allows users to change the manner in which receipts and deliveries are processed in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:16
msgid "`Using Routes (eLearning Tutorial) <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/using-routes-1018>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:17
msgid "`Push & Pull Rules (eLearning Tutorial) <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/push-pull-rules-5789>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:20
msgid "The default incoming and outgoing routes in Odoo are set to receive and deliver goods in one step. However, once the *Multi-Step Routes* feature is enabled, the incoming and outgoing routes can be changed to either two steps or three steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:25
msgid "To activate the *Multi-Step Routes* feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:29
msgid "Doing so *also* enables the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature, if not already enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:31
msgid "Adding additional steps to receipts and deliveries moving in and out of the warehouse adds additional operations that must be completed *before* a product is finally received or shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:34
msgid "These configurations vary, depending on the needs of the business. They also depend on any requirements for the products stored, including the performance of quality control checks on received products, or the use of special packaging on shipped products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:39
msgid "One-step flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:41
msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a one-step configuration are as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:43
msgid "**Receipt**: receive products directly from vendors into stock. *No* intermediate steps between receipt and input to stock occur."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:45
msgid "**Shipping**: ship products directly from warehouse stock to customer. *No* intermediate steps occur before shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:47
msgid "Can *only* be used if **not** using First In, First Out (FIFO), Last In, First Out (LIFO), or First Expired, First Out (FEFO) removal strategies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:49
msgid "Items are received or shipped directly into/from stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:50
msgid "Suited for warehouses that require receipts and/or deliveries to be handled quickly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:51
msgid "Recommended for small warehouses with low stock levels, and for non-perishable items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:54
msgid ":doc:`receipts_delivery_one_step`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:57
msgid "Two-step flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:59
msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a two-step configuration are as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:61
msgid "**Input + stock**: bring products to an input location *before* moving into stock. Products can be organized by different internal storage locations, such as various shelves, freezers, and locked areas, before being stocked in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:64
msgid "**Pick + ship**: bring products to an output location before shipping. Packages can be organized by different carriers, or moved to shipping docks before being shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:66
msgid "Minimum requirement to use lot numbers, or serial numbers, to track products with a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:69
msgid "Products received will not be available for manufacturing, shipping, etc., until they are transferred into warehouse stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:71
msgid "Recommended for larger warehouses with high stock levels, or when stocking large items (e.g., mattresses, large furniture, heavy machinery, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:75
msgid ":doc:`receipts_delivery_two_steps`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:78
msgid "Three-step flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:80
msgid "The receiving and shipping rules for a three-step configuration are as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:82
msgid "**Input + quality + stock**: receive products at the input location, transfer them to a quality control area, and move the ones that pass inspection into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:84
msgid "**Pick + pack + ship**: pick products according to their removal strategy, pack them in a dedicated packing area, and bring them to an output location for shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:86
msgid "Can be used when tracking products by lot or serial numbers when using :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`, or :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:89
msgid "Products received will not be available for manufacturing, shipping, etc., until they are transferred into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:91
msgid "Required for any warehouse needing to perform quality control inspections before receiving items into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:93
msgid "Recommended for very large warehouses with very high stock levels."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:96
msgid ":doc:`receipts_three_steps`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/daily_operations/shipments_deliveries.rst:97
msgid ":doc:`delivery_three_steps`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:6
msgid "Reservation methods"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:8
msgid "Companies that sell and deliver goods to customers need to make sure they always have stock on-hand, so when new sales orders are confirmed, they can deliver products on time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, this can be handled using *reservation methods*. Reservation methods control how products included in a delivery order (DO) should be reserved for delivery, ensuring they are reserved at the correct times, for the correct orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:15
msgid "There are three different reservation methods in Odoo: *At Confirmation*, *Manually*, and *Before scheduled date*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:20
msgid "At Confirmation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:22
msgid "Reserves products **only** when a sales order is confirmed, **and** if stock is already available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:25
msgid "Manually"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:27
msgid "Once a quote is confirmed, product availability **must** be checked manually, and the required quantity **must** be reserved manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:30
msgid "Before scheduled date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:32
msgid "A specific number of days can be selected; this is the maximum number of days **before** a scheduled delivery date that products should be reserved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:38
msgid "Reservation methods are set on individual operations types. To configure reservation methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`. Then, select the desired operation type. Or, create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:42
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General` tab of the operation type form, locate the :guilabel:`Reservation Method` option, and choose which method should be used for this type of operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:-1
msgid "Reservation method field on delivery order operation type form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:50
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Before scheduled date` reservation method is selected, a new :guilabel:`Reserve before scheduled date` field appears below. From this field, the number of :guilabel:`days before` and :guilabel:`days before when starred` can be changed from the default `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:55
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:38
msgid "Changing the :guilabel:`days before` value changes the maximum number of days before a scheduled date that products should be reserved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:58
msgid "Changing the :guilabel:`days before when starred` value changes the maximum number of days before a scheduled date that starred (favorited) transfers for products should be reserved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:0
msgid "Reserve before scheduled date fields with before scheduled date method chosen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:66
msgid "Required applications"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:68
msgid "The two required applications that **must** be :ref:`installed <general/install>` to use reservation methods are the *Sales* and *Inventory* apps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:72
msgid "In addition to delivery orders, reservation methods can also be used for *manufacturing orders*, *resupply subcontractor* orders, orders for *repairs*, and *internal transfers*, if desired. To enable this, configure the additional settings:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:76
msgid "**For manufacturing orders:** Install the *Manufacturing* application by going to the :menuselection:`Apps` application, locating the *Manufacturing* app, and clicking :guilabel:`Install`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:79
msgid "**For resupply subcontractor:** Navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, enable :guilabel:`Subcontracting`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:82
msgid "**For repairs:** Install the *Repairs* application by going to the :menuselection:`Apps` application, locating the *Repairs* app, and clicking :guilabel:`Install`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:84
msgid "**For internal transfers:** Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, enable :guilabel:`Storage Locations`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:88
msgid "Once these apps are installed, no additional features need to be enabled from the settings for reservation methods to work. They will be available by default on certain operations types, and can be viewed and changed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`, and then clicking on a specific operations type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:94
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:31
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:33
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Type of Operation` is changed to :guilabel:`Receipt` on an :guilabel:`Operations Type` form, reservation methods are **not** available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:-1
msgid "Operations Types highlighted from the Configurations submenu in the Inventory app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:102
msgid ":doc:`reservation_methods/at_confirmation`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:103
msgid ":doc:`reservation_methods/manually`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods.rst:104
msgid ":doc:`reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:3
msgid "At confirmation reservation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:9
msgid "The *at confirmation* reservation method reserves products **only** when a sales order (SO) is confirmed, **and** if enough stock of the products included in the |SO| is already available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:16
msgid ":doc:`About reservation methods <../reservation_methods>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:18
msgid "To set the reservation method to *at confirmation*, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`. Then, select the desired :guilabel:`Operation Type` to configure, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:22
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General` tab on the operation type form, locate the :guilabel:`Reservation Method` field, and select :guilabel:`At Confirmation`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:79
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:65
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:69
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:47
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:30
msgid "Workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:32
msgid "To see the *at confirmation* reservation method in action, create a new |SO| by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales app --> New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:42
msgid "Add a customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` field. Then, in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select a product to add to the quotation from the drop-down menu. Finally, in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, adjust the desired quantity of the product to sell."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:39
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:46
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:41
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`📈 (area graph)` icon on the product line to reveal the product's :guilabel:`Availability` tooltip, which reveals the :guilabel:`Reserved` number of units for this order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:46
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:106
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:57
msgid "If there is **not** sufficient quantity of stock for the product included in the |SO|, the :guilabel:`📈 (area graph)` icon is red, instead of green."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:49
msgid "Instead of revealing the reserved number of units for the order, the :guilabel:`Availability` tooltip reads :guilabel:`Available`, and reveals the available number of units (e.g., `0 Units`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:-1
msgid "Confirmed sales order with product availability tooltip selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:56
msgid "Forecasted Report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:58
msgid "To see all the factors that affect product reservation, click the :guilabel:`View Forecast` internal link arrow to view the :guilabel:`Forecasted Report` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:61
msgid "The :guilabel:`Forecasted Report` displays forecast information about the product(s) included in the sales order; namely, any live receipts of the product, and any active sales orders, which are listed in the :guilabel:`Used By` column. See how each order is fulfilled in the :guilabel:`Replenishment` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:66
msgid "Additionally, the :guilabel:`Forecasted` quantity is calculated at the top of the page, by adding the :guilabel:`On Hand` and :guilabel:`Incoming` quantity, and subtracting the :guilabel:`Outgoing` quantity, as shown below:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:-1
msgid "Forecasted quantity equation from the Forecasted Report page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:74
msgid "If one order should be prioritized over another order, click the :guilabel:`Unreserve` button on the corresponding order line in the :guilabel:`Replenishment` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:77
msgid "To deliver the products, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the sales order form. To confirm that the reservation worked properly, ensure that the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field reads `Available` (in green text), and the numbers in the :guilabel:`Demand` and :guilabel:`Quantity` columns match (in this case, both should read `100.00`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery order for product included in sales order with at confirmation reservation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:86
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:149
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:108
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:89
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:152
msgid ":doc:`Manual reservation <manually>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/at_confirmation.rst:90
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:139
msgid ":doc:`Before scheduled date reservation <before_scheduled_date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:3
msgid "Before scheduled date reservation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:9
msgid "The *Before scheduled date* reservation method allows users to select a specific number of days that act as the maximum number of days **before** a scheduled delivery date, when products included in a sales order (SO) should be reserved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:19
msgid "To set the reservation method to *Before scheduled date*, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`. Then, select the desired :guilabel:`Operation Type` to configure, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:23
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General` tab, locate the :guilabel:`Reservation Method` field, and select :guilabel:`Before scheduled date`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:34
msgid "Once selected, a new :guilabel:`Reserve before scheduled date` field appears below. From this field, the number of :guilabel:`days before` and :guilabel:`days before when starred` can be changed from the default `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:41
msgid "Changing the :guilabel:`days before when starred` value changes the maximum number of days before a scheduled date that products should be reserved if the transfers are starred (favorited)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:45
msgid "Here, the :guilabel:`days before` value is set to `2` days before, and the :guilabel:`days before when starred` value is set to `3`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:48
msgid "This means products are reserved two days before the scheduled delivery date for normal orders, and three days before the scheduled delivery date for starred (favorited) transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:-1
msgid "Reserve before scheduled date field with set numerical values."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:55
msgid "This is the configuration applied for the following workflow found below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:58
msgid "Edit product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:60
msgid "Before the *Before scheduled date* reservation method can be used, ensure that a *customer lead time* is added to products that plan to be sold with this method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:63
msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select the desired product to configure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:66
msgid "On the product form, click the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, change the value in the :guilabel:`Customer Lead Time` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:69
msgid "For this example workflow, change it to `5` days."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:71
msgid "This sets the scheduled delivery date for this specific product to five days after the creation date of the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:-1
msgid "Product form with customer lead time set in Inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:81
msgid "To see the *Before scheduled date* reservation method in action, create a new |SO| by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales app --> New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:84
msgid "Add a customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` field, then, in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select a product from the drop-down menu that has a configured *customer lead time*, to add to the quotation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:88
msgid "Finally, in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, adjust the desired quantity of the product to sell."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:90
msgid "For this sample workflow, set the :guilabel:`Quantity` to `10`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:94
msgid "Click the green :guilabel:`📈 (area graph)` icon on the product line to reveal the product's :guilabel:`Availability` tooltip. This tooltip reveals the reserved number of units for this order. Because the reservation method is set to *Before scheduled date*, the :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity reads `0 Units`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:99
msgid "However, below that quantity reads `Available in stock`. This is because the quantity is available, but the scheduled date, for this example workflow, is five days from the order date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:102
msgid "Since reservation is not until two days before the scheduled delivery, it will not reserve the products until then."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:109
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:60
msgid "Instead of revealing the reserved number of units for the order, the :guilabel:`Availability` tooltip reads :guilabel:`Reserved`, and reveals the available number of units (e.g., `0 Units`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:112
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:63
msgid "Additionally, unless there is a set replenishment or a live receipt, it also reads :guilabel:`No future availability`, in red text."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:119
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to see the delivery order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:121
msgid "On the delivery order form, the status in the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field is listed as `Available`, in yellow text, instead of green. This is because there is sufficient stock on-hand for this order, but no quantity has been reserved yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:125
msgid "Note the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field, above the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field, displays the date five days from the order creation date. This indicates that the products are not reserved until three days from today's date (two days before the scheduled delivery date)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery order form with product availability and reserved quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:133
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operations` tab on the :guilabel:`Product` line, the numbers in the :guilabel:`Demand` column and the :guilabel:`Quantity` column do not match (in this case, the :guilabel:`Demand` column lists `10.00`, while the :guilabel:`Quantity` column lists `0`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:137
msgid "The :guilabel:`Quantity` column lists `0` because the products aren't reserved until two days *before* their delivery date. Odoo automatically reserves the products once the scheduled date arrives, at which point the :guilabel:`Demand` and :guilabel:`Quantity` columns will match."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:142
msgid "If the products in the |SO| should be reserved *sooner* than the scheduled reservation date, the reservation can be manually overridden. To manually reserve the products sooner than scheduled, click :guilabel:`Check Availability` at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:146
msgid "This turns the `Available` status in the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field green, and changes the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column to match the :guilabel:`Demand` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/before_scheduled_date.rst:153
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:138
msgid ":doc:`At confirmation reservation <at_confirmation>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:3
msgid "Manual reservation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:9
msgid "Unlike the *At Confirmation* reservation method, the *Manually* reservation method does **not** reserve products automatically."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:12
msgid "Instead, once a sales order (SO) is confirmed, product availability **must** be checked manually, and the required quantity **must** be reserved manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:21
msgid "To set the reservation method to *Manually*, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Operations Types`. Then, select the desired :guilabel:`Operation Type` to be configured, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:25
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General` tab, locate the :guilabel:`Reservation Method` field, and select :guilabel:`Manually`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:39
msgid "To see the *Manually* reservation method in action, create a new |SO| by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales app --> New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:48
msgid "Click the green :guilabel:`📈 (area graph)` icon on the product line to reveal the product's :guilabel:`Availability` tooltip. This tooltip reveals the reserved number of units for this order. Because the reservation method is set to *Manually*, the :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity reads `0 Units`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:53
msgid "However, below that quantity reads `Available in stock`. This is because the quantity is available, but must be manually reserved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:70
msgid "Once the |SO| is confirmed, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`, and locate the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card on the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:73
msgid "The :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card displays the current status of live orders, including those with a :guilabel:`Waiting` status. Orders with this status indicate that the products in those orders have either not been reserved yet, or are not in stock at all."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery orders task card with waiting status orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:81
msgid "To see the |SO| created previously, click the :guilabel:`(#) Waiting` button on the card (in this case, `8 Waiting`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:84
msgid "Locate the delivery order (DO) tied to the |SO| that was previously created, and click the line to view it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:87
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Delivery Order` form, the status in the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field is listed as `Available`, in yellow text, instead of green. This is because there is sufficient stock on hand for this order, but no quantity has been reserved yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:91
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, on the :guilabel:`Product` line, the numbers in the :guilabel:`Demand` column and the :guilabel:`Quantity` column do *not* match."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:94
msgid "In this case, the :guilabel:`Demand` column lists `10.00`, while the :guilabel:`Quantity` column lists `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:101
msgid "To manually reserve the specified quantity of the product for this order, click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button at the top of the form. Doing so turns the `Available` status in the :guilabel:`Product Availability` field green, and changes the number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column to match the :guilabel:`Demand` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:106
msgid "This is because there is sufficient quantity in stock to reserve for the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:111
msgid "Multiple orders with a *Waiting* status can be manually reserved at the same time, and set to *Ready* status."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:114
msgid "To do that, open the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, which reveals the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page. The :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page is also accessible by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Overview`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:118
msgid "From the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` page, click the :guilabel:`(#) Waiting` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:121
msgid "Then, tick the checkboxes to the left of each desired order, or tick the checkbox in the header row, to the far-left, to select all orders on the page at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:124
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:126
msgid "If the products included in every selected order have enough stock on-hand, this reserves the products, and moves the order into :guilabel:`Ready` status. Upon receiving a :guilabel:`Ready` status, the order disappears from the :guilabel:`Waiting` list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:130
msgid "If there is *not* enough stock on-hand, the order retains its current status, and remains on the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/reservation_methods/manually.rst:0
msgid "List of orders in waiting status and check availability button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration.rst:5
msgid "Setup and configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:3
msgid "Delivery methods"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:5
msgid "When activated in Odoo, the *Delivery Methods* setting adds the option of calculating the cost of shipping on sales orders and e-commerce shopping carts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:8
msgid "When integrated with a :ref:`third-party carrier <inventory/shipping/third_party>`, shipping prices are calculated based on the carrier's pricing and packaging information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:12
msgid ":ref:`Third-party shipping carrier setup <inventory/shipping/third_party>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:13
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Delivery Prices <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/delivery-prices-613?fullscreen=1>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:19
msgid "To calculate shipping on sales orders and e-commerce, the *Delivery Costs* module must be installed. To do so, navigate to the :menuselection:`Apps` application from the main Odoo dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:22
msgid "Then, remove the :guilabel:`Apps` filter, and type in `Delivery Costs` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. After finding the :guilabel:`Delivery Costs` module, click :guilabel:`Activate` to install it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:-1
msgid "Install the *Delivery Costs* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:32
msgid "To configure delivery methods, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:36
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` option is not available from the :guilabel:`Configuration` drop-down menu, verify whether the feature is enabled by following these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:39
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:40
msgid "Scroll to the :guilabel:`Shipping` section and enable the :guilabel:`Delivery Methods` feature by checking the corresponding checkbox."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:0
msgid "Enable the *Delivery Methods* feature by checking the box in Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:47
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, add a method by clicking :guilabel:`New`. Doing so opens a form to provide details about the shipping provider, including:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:50
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*Required field*): the name of the delivery method (e.g. `flat-rate shipping`, `same day delivery`, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:52
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*Required field*): choose the delivery service, like Fedex, if using a :ref:`third-party carrier <inventory/shipping/third_party>`. Ensure the integration with the shipping carrier is properly installed and select the provider from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:56
msgid "For more details on configuring custom shipping methods, such as :ref:`fixed price <inventory/shipping/fixed>`, :ref:`based on rules <inventory/shipping/rules>`, or :ref:`pickup in store <inventory/shipping/pickup>` options, refer to their respective sections below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*Required field*): the product listed on the :ref:`sales order line <inventory/shipping/sales-order>` as the delivery charge."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:71
msgid "For examples on how to configure specific shipping methods, refer to the sections below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:76
msgid "Fixed price"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:78
msgid "To configure a shipping price that is the same for all orders, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`. Then, click :guilabel:`New`, and on the shipping method form, set the :guilabel:`Provider` to the :guilabel:`Fixed Price` option. Selecting this option makes the :guilabel:`Fixed Price` field become available, which is where the fixed rate shipping amount is defined."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:84
msgid "To enable free shipping if the amount of the order exceeds a specified amount, check the box :guilabel:`Free if order amount is above` and fill in the amount."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:88
msgid "To set up `$20` flat-rate shipping that becomes free if the customer spends over `$100`, fill in the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:91
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: `Flat-rate shipping`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:92
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: :guilabel:`Fixed Price`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:93
msgid ":guilabel:`Fixed Price`: `$20.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:94
msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: `$100.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:95
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: `[SHIP] Flat`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:0
msgid "Example of filling out a shipping method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:104
msgid "Based on rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:106
msgid "To calculate the price of shipping based on pricing rules, set the :guilabel:`Provider` field to the :guilabel:`Based on Rules` option. Optionally, adjust :guilabel:`Margin on Rate` and :guilabel:`Additional margin` to include additional shipping costs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:111
msgid "Create pricing rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:113
msgid "Navigate to the :guilabel:`Pricing` tab and click :guilabel:`Add a line`. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Create Pricing Rules` window, where the :guilabel:`Condition` related to the product weight, volume, price, or quantity is compared to a defined amount to calculate the :guilabel:`Delivery Cost`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:118
msgid "Once finished, click either :guilabel:`Save & New` to add another rule, or :guilabel:`Save & Close`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:121
msgid "To charge customers $20 in shipping for orders with five or fewer products, set the :guilabel:`Condition` to `Quantity <= 5.00`, and the :guilabel:`Delivery Cost` to `$20`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:0
msgid "Display window to add a pricing rule. Set a condition and delivery cost."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:128
msgid "To restrict shipping to specific destinations on the eCommerce website, in the shipping method form, navigate to the :guilabel:`Destination Availability` tab and define the :guilabel:`Countries`, :guilabel:`States`, and :guilabel:`Zip Prefixes`. Leave these fields empty if all locations apply."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:133
msgid "Calculate delivery cost"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:135
msgid "Shipping cost is the :guilabel:`Delivery cost` specified in the rule that satisfies the :guilabel:`Condition`, plus any extra charges from the :guilabel:`Margin on rate` and :guilabel:`Additional margin`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:139
msgid "Total = Rule's~Delivery~Cost + (Margin~on~rate \\times Rule's~Delivery~Cost) + Additional~margin\n"
"\n"
""
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:143
msgid "With the two following rules set up:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:145
msgid "If the order contains five or fewer products, shipping is $20"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:146
msgid "If the order contains more than five products, shipping is $50."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:148
msgid ":guilabel:`Margin on Rate` is `10%` and :guilabel:`Additional margin` is `$9.00`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:-1
msgid "Show example of \"Based on rules\" shipping method with margins configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:154
msgid "When the first rule is applied, the delivery cost is $31 (20 + (0.1 * 20) + 9). When the second rule is applied, the delivery cost is $64 (50 + (0.1 * 50) + 9)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:160
msgid "Pickup in store"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:162
msgid "To configure in-store pickup, select :guilabel:`Pickup in store` in the :guilabel:`Provider` field and specify the pickup location in :guilabel:`Warehouse`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:165
msgid "To invoice the customer for the shipping cost to the pickup location, choose the :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` option in the :guilabel:`Integration Level` field. Then, pick either the :guilabel:`Estimated cost` or :guilabel:`Real cost` radio options in the :guilabel:`Invoicing Policy` field to decide whether the added shipping charge on the sales order is the precise cost from the shipping carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:172
msgid ":ref:`Invoice cost of shipping <inventory/shipping/invoice>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:177
msgid "Add shipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:179
msgid "Shipping methods can be added to sales orders in the form of delivery products, which appear as individual line items. First, navigate to the desired sales order by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:183
msgid "On the sales order, click the :guilabel:`Add shipping` button, which opens the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window. Then, choose a :guilabel:`Shipping Method` from the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:186
msgid "The :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` is pre-filled based on product weights (that are defined in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab for each product form). Edit the field to specify the exact weight, and then click :guilabel:`Add` to add the shipping method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:191
msgid "The amount defined in :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` overwrites the total product weights defined on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:194
msgid "The shipping cost is added to the *sales order line* as the :guilabel:`Delivery Product` detailed on the shipping method form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:198
msgid "`Furniture Delivery`, a delivery product with a fixed rate of `$200`, is added to sales order `S00088`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:0
msgid "Show delivery order on the sales order line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:206
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:255
msgid "Delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:208
msgid "The shipping method added to the sales order is linked to the shipping carrier details on the delivery order. To add or change the delivery method on the delivery itself, go to the :guilabel:`Additional Info` tab and modify the :guilabel:`Carrier` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/delivery_method.rst:-1
msgid "Shipping carrier information on the delivery form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:3
msgid "How to get DHL credentials for integration with Odoo?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:5
msgid "In order to use the Odoo DHL API, you will need:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:7
msgid "A DHL.com SiteID"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:9
msgid "A DHL Password"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:11
msgid "A DHL Account Number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:15
msgid "Getting SiteID and password for countries other than United States (UK and Rest of the world)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:17
msgid "You should contact DHL account manager and request integration for XML Express API. The presales should provide you live credentials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:20
msgid "Getting SiteID and Password for United States"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/dhl_credentials.rst:22
msgid "You need to write to xmlrequests@dhl.com along with your full Account details like account number, region, address, etc. to get API Access."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:3
msgid "Sendcloud configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:5
msgid "Sendcloud is a shipping service aggregator that facilitates the integration of European shipping carriers with Odoo. Once integrated, users can select shipping carriers on inventory operations in their Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:10
msgid "`Sendcloud integration documentation <https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles /360059470491-Odoo-integration>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:14
msgid "Setup in Sendcloud"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:17
msgid "Create an account and activate carriers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:19
msgid "To get started, go to `Sendcloud's platform <https://www.sendcloud.com>`_ to configure the account and generate the connector credentials. Log in with the Sendcloud account, or create a new one if needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:24
msgid "For new account creation, Sendcloud will ask for a :abbr:`VAT (Value-Added Tax Identification)` number or :abbr:`EORI (Economic Operators' Registration and Identification)` number. After completing the account setup, activate (or deactivate) the shipping carriers that will be used in the Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:30
msgid "Odoo integration of Sendcloud works on free Sendcloud plans *only* if a bank account is linked, since Sendcloud won't ship for free. To use shipping rules, or individual custom carrier contacts, a paid plan of Sendcloud is **required**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:174
msgid "Warehouse configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:39
msgid "Once logged into the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Shipping --> Addresses`, and fill in the field for :guilabel:`Warehouse address`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Adding addresses in the Sendcloud settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:46
msgid "To allow Sendcloud to process returns as well, a :guilabel:`Return Address` is required. Under the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous section`, there is a field called :guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`. The Odoo warehouse name should be entered here, and the characters should be exactly the same."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid "**SendClould configuration**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Miscellaneous`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`: `Warehouse #1`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Brand`: `Default`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid "**Odoo warehouse configuration**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: `Warehouse #1`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: `WH`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: `My company (San Francisco)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Address`: `My Company (San Francisco)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:63
msgid "Notice how the inputs for the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field, for both the Odoo configuration and the Sendcloud configuration, are the exact same."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:67
msgid "Generate Sendcloud credentials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:69
msgid "In the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Integrations` in the menu on the right. Next, search for :guilabel:`Odoo Native`. Then, click on :guilabel:`Connect`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:72
msgid "After clicking on :guilabel:`Connect`, the page redirects to the :guilabel:`Sendcloud API` settings page, where the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are produced. The next step is to name the :guilabel:`Integration`. The naming convention is as follows: `Odoo CompanyName`, with the user's company name replacing `CompanyName` (e.g. `Odoo StealthyWood`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:77
msgid "Then, check the box next to :guilabel:`Service Points` and select the shipping services for this integration. After saving, the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Configuring the Sendcloud integration and receiving the credentials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:90
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:158
msgid "Setup in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:87
msgid "To ensure seamless Sendcloud integration with Odoo, :ref:`install <inventory/shipping_receiving/sendcloud-module>` and :ref:`link <inventory/shipping_receiving/link-sendcloud-module>` the Sendcloud shipping connector to the Sendcloud account. Then, :ref:`configure Odoo fields <inventory/shipping_receiving/sendcloud-shipping-info>`, so Sendcloud can accurately pull shipping data to generate labels."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:97
msgid "Install Sendcloud shipping module"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:99
msgid "After the Sendcloud account is set up and configured, it's time to configure the Odoo database. To get started, go to Odoo's :guilabel:`Apps` module, search for the `Sendcloud Shipping` integration, and install it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Sendcloud Shipping module in the Odoo Apps module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:110
msgid "Sendcloud shipping connector configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:112
msgid "Once installed, activate the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping` module in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. The :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector` setting is found under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:116
msgid "After activating the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector`, click on the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping Methods` link below the listed connector. Once on the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:121
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:115
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Methods` can also be accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Delivery --> Shipping Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:124
msgid "Fill out the following fields in the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: type `Sendcloud DPD`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:127
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: select :guilabel:`Sendcloud` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:128
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: set the product that was configured for this shipping method or create a new product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:130
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Public Key`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:131
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Secret Key`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:132
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:146
msgid "Manually :guilabel:`Save` the form by clicking the cloud icon next to the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods / New` breadcrumbs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:135
msgid "After configuring and saving the form, follow these steps to load the shipping products:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:137
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab of the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form, click on the :guilabel:`Load your SendCloud shipping products` link."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:139
msgid "Select the shipping products the company would like to use for deliveries and returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:140
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Select`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:143
msgid "Sample Sendcloud shipping products configured in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`DELIVERY`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Product`: `DPD Home 0-31.5kg`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier`: `DPD`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Minimum Weight`: `0.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Maximum Weight`: `31.50`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:151
msgid ":guilabel:`Countries`: `Austria` `Belgium` `Bosnia` `Herzegovina` `Bulgaria` `Croatia` `Czech` `Republic` `Denmark` `Estonia` `Finland` `France` `Germany` `Greece` `Hungary` `Iceland` `Ireland` `Italy` `Latvia` `Liechtenstein` `Lithuania` `Luxembourg` `Monaco` `Netherlands` `Norway` `Poland` `Portugal` `Romania` `Serbia` `Slovakia` `Slovenia` `Spain` `Sweden` `Switzerland`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`RETURN`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Shipping Product`: `DPD Return 0-20kg`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Carrier`: `DPD`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Minimum Weight`: `0.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Maximum Weight`: `20.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Countries`: `Belgium` `Netherlands`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Example of shipping products configured in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:169
msgid "Sendcloud does not provide test keys when a company tests the sending of a package in Odoo. This means if a package is created, the configured Sendcloud account will be charged, unless the associated package is canceled within 24 hours of creation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:173
msgid "Odoo has a built-in layer of protection against unwanted charges when using test environments. Within a test environment, if a shipping method is used to create labels, then those labels are immediately canceled after the creation — this occurs automatically. The test and production environment settings can be toggled back and forth from their respective smart buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:181
msgid "Shipping information"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:183
msgid "To use Sendcloud to generate shipping labels, the following information **must** be filled out accurately and completely in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:186
msgid "**Customer information**: when creating a quotation, ensure the selected :guilabel:`Customer` has a valid phone number, email address, and shipping address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:189
msgid "To verify, select the :guilabel:`Customer` field to open their contact page. Here, add their shipping address in the :guilabel:`Contact` field, along with their :guilabel:`Mobile` number and :guilabel:`Email` address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:193
msgid "**Product weight**: ensure all products in an order have a specified :guilabel:`Weight` in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of their product form. Refer to the :ref:`Product weight section <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>` of this article for detailed instructions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:197
msgid "**Warehouse address**: ensure the warehouse name and address in Odoo match the :ref:`previously defined warehouse <inventory/shipping_receiving/sendcloud-warehouse-config>` in the Sendcloud setup. For details on warehouse configuration in Odoo, refer to the :ref:`warehouse configuration section <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>` of the third-party shipping documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:204
msgid "Generate labels with Sendcloud"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:206
msgid "When creating a quotation in Odoo, add shipping and a :guilabel:`Sendcloud shipping product`. Then, :guilabel:`Validate` the delivery. Shipping label documents are automatically generated in the chatter, which include the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:210
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:205
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping label(s)` depending on the number of packages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:211
msgid ":guilabel:`Return label(s)` if the Sendcloud connector is configured for returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:212
msgid ":guilabel:`Customs document(s)` should the destination country require them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:214
msgid "Additionally, the tracking number is now available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:217
msgid "When return labels are created, Sendcloud will automatically charge the configured Sendcloud account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:221
msgid "FAQ"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:224
msgid "Shipment is too heavy"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:226
msgid "If the shipment is too heavy for the Sendcloud service that is configured, then the weight is split to simulate multiple packages. Products will need to be put in different :guilabel:`Packages` to :guilabel:`Validate` the transfer and generate labels."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:230
msgid ":guilabel:`Rules` can also be set up in Sendcloud to use other shipping methods when the weight is too heavy. However, note that these rules will not apply to the shipping price calculation on the calculation on the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:235
msgid "Personal carrier contract"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:237
msgid "Use custom prices from a direct carrier contract, via CSV upload, by first logging into Sendcloud, navigating to :menuselection:`Settings --> Carriers --> My contracts`, and then selecting the intended contract."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Navigate to the contracts section in Sendcloud."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:245
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Contract prices` section, click :guilabel:`Download CSV` and fill out the contract prices in the :guilabel:`price` column of the CSV file template."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:249
msgid "Ensure the CSV file includes the correct prices to avoid any inaccuracies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Show sample contract CSV from Sendcloud, highlighting the price column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:255
msgid ":guilabel:`Upload` the completed CSV file to Sendcloud, then click :guilabel:`Save these prices`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:258
msgid "`Sendcloud: How to upload contract prices with carriers <https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles/5163547066004>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:262
msgid "Measuring volumetric weight"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:264
msgid "Many carriers have several measures for weight. There is the actual weight of the products in the parcel, and there is the *volumetric weight* (:dfn:`Volumetric weight is the volume that a package occupies when in transit. In other words it is the physical size of a package`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:269
msgid "Check to see if selected carrier(s) already have defined formulas to compute the volumetric weight."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:273
msgid "`Sendcloud: How to calculate & automate parcel volumetric weight <https://support.sendcloud.com/ hc/en-us/articles/360059644051-How-to-calculate-automate-parcel-volumetric-weight>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:277
msgid "Unable to calculate shipping rate"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/sendcloud_shipping.rst:279
msgid "First, verify that the product being shipped has a weight that is supported by the selected shipping method. If this is set, then verify that the destination country (from the customer address) is supported by the carrier. The country of origin (warehouse address) should also be supported by the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:3
msgid "Starshipit shipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:5
msgid "Starshipit is a shipping service operator that facilitates the integration of Australasian shipping couriers with Odoo. Once integrated, users can create shipping methods that will automatically get rates from specific couriers (such as Australia Post, NZ Post, DHL,...) based on predefined conditions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:11
msgid ":doc:`Automatically calculate shipping <delivery_method>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:12
msgid ":doc:`Integrate other third-party couriers <third_party_shipper>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:15
msgid "Setup in Starshipit"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:18
msgid "Create an account and activate couriers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:20
msgid "To get started, go to `Starshipit's platform <https://starshipit.com/>`_ to configure the account and generate the connector credentials. Log in with the Starshipit account, or create a new one if needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:25
msgid "Pickup address configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:27
msgid "Once logged into the Starshipit account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Pickup address`, and fill in the :guilabel:`Pickup address`. Ensure this field matches the warehouse address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Adding addresses in the Starshipit settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:35
msgid "Couriers configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:37
msgid "To integrate with third-party couriers, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Couriers`, and select :guilabel:`Couriers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:45
msgid "For details on integrating with different couriers, refer to `Starshipit's support center <https://support.starshipit.com/hc/en-us/>`_."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:49
msgid "Checkout rates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:51
msgid "To configure shipping rate calculations, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Checkout rates`. The selected delivery costs are automatically applied in Odoo when calculating shipping costs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Checkout rates in the Starshipit settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:59
msgid "Starshipit API key"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:61
msgid "Configure shipping rules to assign the correct shipping methods to orders based on specific conditions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:64
msgid "To create a rule, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Rules` and click :guilabel:`Add a new rule`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:66
msgid "While there are multiple ways to configure rules, it is recommended to set:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Condition` to :guilabel:`Contains`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:69
msgid ":guilabel:`Value` to the :guilabel:`product code`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Action` to :guilabel:`Set Courier & Product Code`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Shipping rules in the Starshipit settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:79
msgid "Finding Starshipit API credentials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:81
msgid "In the Starshipit account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> API` in the side menu. This page contains the :abbr:`API (Application Programming Interface)` keys needed to connect to Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Finding the Starshipit API keys."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:93
msgid "Install"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:95
msgid "After the Starshipit account is set up, integrate it with the Odoo database. To do that, go to Odoo's :guilabel:`Apps` module, search for the :guilabel:`Starshipit Shipping` module, and click :guilabel:`Activate` to install it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Starshipit Shipping module in the Odoo Apps module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:106
msgid "Once installed, activate the feature by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section, activate the :guilabel:`Starshipit Connector` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:110
msgid "After activating :guilabel:`Starshipit Connector`, click the :guilabel:`Starshipit Shipping Methods` link below the listed connector. Once on the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:118
msgid "Configure Starshipit in Odoo by filling out the fields on the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:121
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: type `Starshipit`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:122
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: select :guilabel:`Starshipit` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:123
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: assign or create the delivery product that will appear on the sales order line when the cost of shipping is computed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:127
msgid "The fields discussed in this section are specific to configuring Starshipit. For more information about the other fields, refer to :doc:`delivery_method`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:130
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Starshipit Configuration` tab, fill out these fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:132
msgid ":guilabel:`Starshipit API Key`: enter the :abbr:`API (Application Programming Interface)` key :ref:`obtained from Starshipit <inventory/shipping_receiving/star-api>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:134
msgid ":guilabel:`Starshipit Subscription Key`: enter the subscription key obtained from the same place as the :ref:`API key <inventory/shipping_receiving/star-api>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:136
msgid ":guilabel:`Origin Address`: Enter the address where products are shipped from. This field is crucial for calculating shipping rates and :ref:`generating shipping labels <inventory/shipping_receiving/star-label>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:139
msgid ":guilabel:`Default Package Type`: Set a default package type to include the weight of the empty package when automatically calculating shipping rates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:143
msgid "To set a default package type, the *Packages* feature **must** be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:149
msgid "To load the newly configured shipping products, click the :guilabel:`Select a service linked to the Starshipit account` link at the bottom of the :guilabel:`Starshipit Configuration` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:152
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Choose Starshipit Shipping Service` pop-up window. In the :guilabel:`Delivery Service` field, choose the desired shipping service for deliveries and returns from the drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:156
msgid "The chosen delivery service will populate in the :guilabel:`Service Name` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:159
msgid "Sample of a Starshipit shipping product configured in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Sendle: Sendle drop off`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Product`: `Sendle Delivery`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Starshipit Service Code`: `STANDARD-DROPOFF`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:170
msgid "Starshipit does not provide test keys when a company tests the sending of a package in Odoo. This means that if a package is created, the account may be charged."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:173
msgid "Odoo has a built-in layer of protection against unwanted charges when using test environments. Within a test environment, if a shipping method is used to create labels, then those labels are immediately canceled after creation — this occurs automatically. Please note that depending on the shipping provider being used, the account might be charged for printing label, unless the order is cancelled manually on the couriers’s portal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:180
msgid "Switch between the test and production environment by clicking the :guilabel:`Environment` smart button at the top of the shipping method form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:186
msgid "Generate a label with Starshipit"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:188
msgid "When creating a quotation in Odoo, add the Starshipit shipping method by clicking the :guilabel:`Add shipping` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:191
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window, select Starshipit in the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:194
msgid "Calculate the shipping rate by clicking :guilabel:`Get rate`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Add` to include the cost of shipping to the sales order line, labeled as the *delivery product*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:199
msgid "Automatically calculate shipping costs for Starshipit in **both** Odoo *Sales* and *eCommerce* applications."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:202
msgid "Then, :guilabel:`Validate` the delivery. Shipping label documents are automatically generated in the chatter, which includes the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:206
msgid ":guilabel:`Tracking number(s)` if the selected courier supports it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:207
msgid ":guilabel:`Return label(s)` if the Starshipit connector is configured for returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Example of a shipped order in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:214
msgid "Package weight in Odoo is calculated by adding the weights of the products plus the empty package saved in the database. Ensure the correct shipping option is selected, as the package weight is not automatically verified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:218
msgid "Verify the destination address, as Starshipit checks it when the order is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:220
msgid "Finally, some couriers may require other information, such as an email address or phone number. Please ensure that all necessary information are set upon sending a shipping order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:224
msgid "Returns"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:233
msgid "Starshipit allows returns with the following couriers:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:227
msgid "Australia Post eParcel"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:228
msgid "TNT"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:229
msgid "Couriers Please"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:230
msgid "Aramex"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:231
msgid "StarTrack"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:232
msgid "DHL Express"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:233
msgid "NZ Post Domestic"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:235
msgid "This can be done by clicking the :guilabel:`Return` smart button on the intended delivery order. If the selected courier supports returns, the :guilabel:`Print Return Label` button will be available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:240
msgid "Cancellations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/starshipit_shipping.rst:242
msgid "If a delivery order is cancelled in Odoo, it will be automatically archived in Starshipit. However, the cancellation will not be sent to the courier itself, so make sure to log onto the courier's platform to handle the cancellation manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:3
msgid "Third-party shipping carriers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:10
msgid "Users can link third-party shipping carriers to Odoo databases, in order to verify carriers' delivery to specific addresses, :doc:`automatically calculate shipping costs <delivery_method>`, and :doc:`generate shipping labels <../advanced_operations_shipping/labels>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:14
msgid "In Odoo, shipping carriers can be applied to a sales order (SO), invoice, or delivery order. For tips on resolving common issues when configuring shipping connectors, skip to the :ref:`Troubleshooting <inventory/shipping_receiving/third-party-troubles>` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:19
msgid ":doc:`dhl_credentials`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:20
msgid ":doc:`sendcloud_shipping`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:21
msgid ":doc:`ups_credentials`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:23
msgid "The following is a list of available shipping connectors in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:29
msgid "Carrier"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:30
msgid "Region availability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:31
msgid "FedEx"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:32
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:34
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:36
msgid "All"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:33
msgid ":doc:`DHL <dhl_credentials>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:35
msgid ":doc:`UPS <ups_credentials>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:37
msgid "US Postal Service"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:38
msgid "United States of America"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:39
msgid ":doc:`Sendcloud <sendcloud_shipping>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:40
msgid "EU"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:41
msgid "Bpost"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:42
msgid "Belgium"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:43
msgid "Easypost"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:44
msgid "North America"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:45
msgid "Shiprocket"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:46
msgid "India"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:51
msgid "To ensure proper setup of a third-party shipping carrier with Odoo, follow these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:53
msgid ":ref:`Install the shipping connector <inventory/shipping_receiving/shipping-connector>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:54
msgid ":ref:`Set up delivery method <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-delivery-method>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:55
msgid ":ref:`Activate production environment <inventory/shipping_receiving/production-env>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:56
msgid ":ref:`Configure warehouse <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:57
msgid ":ref:`Specify weight of products <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:62
msgid "Install shipping connector"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:64
msgid "To install shipping connectors, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:66
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section, tick the third-party shipping carrier's checkbox to install it. Multiple third-party shipping connectors can be selected at once. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:71
msgid ":doc:`Delivery methods <delivery_method>` can also be integrated with operations in the *Sales*, *eCommerce*, and *Website* apps. To install, refer to the :ref:`install apps and modules <general/install>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Options of available shipping connectors in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:82
msgid "Delivery method"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:84
msgid "To configure the API credentials, and activate the shipping carrier, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`, and select the desired delivery method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:89
msgid "The list often includes **two** delivery methods from the same :guilabel:`Provider`: one for international shipping and one for domestic shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:92
msgid "Additional delivery methods can be created for specific purposes, such as :doc:`packaging <../../product_management/product_tracking/packaging>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:96
msgid ":doc:`Configure delivery methods <delivery_method>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:99
msgid "Ensure the delivery method is published when it should be available on the *Website* app. To publish a delivery method on the website, click the desired delivery method, then click the :guilabel:`Unpublished` smart button. Doing so changes that smart button to read: :guilabel:`Published`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:104
msgid "The :guilabel:`Shipping Method` page contains details about the provider, including:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:106
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method` (*Required field*): the name of the delivery method (e.g. `FedEx US`, `FedEx EU`, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:108
msgid ":guilabel:`Website`: configure shipping methods for an *eCommerce* page that is connected to a specific website in the database. Select the applicable website from the drop-down menu, or leave it blank to apply the method to all web pages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:111
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider` (*Required field*): choose the third-party delivery service, like FedEx. Upon choosing a provider, the :guilabel:`Integration Level`, :guilabel:`Invoicing Policy` and :guilabel:`Insurance Percentage` fields become available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:114
msgid ":guilabel:`Integration Level`: choose :guilabel:`Get Rate` to simply get an :ref:`estimated shipment cost <inventory/shipping_receiving/third-party-so>` on an |SO| or invoice."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:118
msgid "Select :guilabel:`Get Rate and Create Shipment` to also :doc:`generate shipping labels <../advanced_operations_shipping/labels>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:123
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product` (*Required field*): the delivery charge name that is added to the |SO| or invoice."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:125
msgid ":guilabel:`Invoicing Policy`: select and calculate an :guilabel:`Estimated cost` of shipping directly from the shipping carrier. If the :guilabel:`Real cost` of shipping is wanted instead, refer to this :doc:`doc about invoicing real shipping costs <../advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:129
msgid ":guilabel:`Margin on Rate`: specify an additional percentage amount added to the base shipping rate to cover extra costs, such as handling fees, packaging materials, exchange rates, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:131
msgid ":guilabel:`Free if order amount is above`: enables free shipping for orders surpassing a specified amount entered in the corresponding :guilabel:`Amount` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:133
msgid ":guilabel:`Insurance Percentage`: specify a percentage amount of the shipping costs reimbursed to the senders if the package is lost or stolen in transit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:140
msgid "Screenshot of a FedEx shipping method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:140
msgid "**Shipping Method** configuration page for `FedEx US`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:142
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab, fill out the API credential fields (e.g. API key, password, account number, etc.). Depending on the third-party shipping carrier chosen in the :guilabel:`Provider` field, the :guilabel:`Configuration` tab will contain different required fields. For more details about configuring specific carriers' credentials, refer to the following documents:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:149
msgid ":doc:`DHL credentials <dhl_credentials>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:150
msgid ":doc:`Sendcloud credentials <sendcloud_shipping>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:151
msgid ":doc:`UPS credentials <ups_credentials>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:156
msgid "Production environment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:158
msgid "With the delivery method details configured, click the :guilabel:`Test Environment` smart button to set it to :guilabel:`Production Environment`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:162
msgid "Setting the delivery method to :guilabel:`Production` creates **real** shipping labels, and users are at risk of being charged through their carrier account (e.g. UPS, FedEx, etc.) **before** users charge customers for shipping. Verify all configurations are correct before launching the delivery method to :guilabel:`Production`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"Test Environment\" smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:176
msgid "Ensure the warehouse's :guilabel:`Address` (including ZIP code) and :guilabel:`Phone` number are entered accurately. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and select the desired warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:180
msgid "On the warehouse configuration page, open the warehouse contact page by clicking the :guilabel:`Company` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Highlight the \"Company\" field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:187
msgid "Verify that the :guilabel:`Address` and :guilabel:`Phone` number are correct, as they are required for the shipping connector to work properly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show company address and phone number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:197
msgid "Product weight"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:199
msgid "For the carrier integration to work properly, specify the weight of products by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the desired product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:202
msgid "Then, switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and define the :guilabel:`Weight` of the product in the :guilabel:`Logistics` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Display the \"Weight\" field in the Inventory tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:210
msgid "Apply third-party shipping carrier"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:212
msgid "Shipping carriers can be applied on a :abbr:`SO (Sales Order)`, invoice, or delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:214
msgid "After configuring the third-party carrier's :ref:`delivery method <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-delivery-method>` in Odoo, create or navigate to a quotation by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:221
msgid "Sales order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:223
msgid "To assign a third-party shipping carrier, and get an estimated cost of shipping, begin by going to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Quotations`. Create or select an existing quotation, and add the cost of shipping through a third-party carrier to a quotation, by clicking the :guilabel:`Add Shipping` button in the bottom-right corner of the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"Add shipping\" button at the bottom of a quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:232
msgid "In the resulting :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window, select the intended carrier from the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Cost` field is automatically filled based on:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:236
msgid "the amount specified in the :guilabel:`Total Order Weight` field (if it is not provided, the sum of :ref:`product weights <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-weight>` in the order is used)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:238
msgid "the distance between the warehouse's :ref:`source address <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>` and the customer's address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:243
msgid "After selecting a third-party provider in the :guilabel:`Shipping Method` field, click :guilabel:`Get Rate` in the :guilabel:`Add a shipping method` pop-up window to get the estimated cost through the shipping connector. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to add the delivery charge to the |SO| or invoice."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:249
msgid ":doc:`Charge customers for shipping after product delivery <../advanced_operations_shipping/invoicing>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:257
msgid "For users making shipments without installing the *Sales* app, assign the shipping carrier to the delivery order, by first going to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app. Then, from the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview` dashboard, select the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` operation type, and choose the desired delivery order that is not already marked as :guilabel:`Done` or :guilabel:`Cancelled`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:263
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Additional info` tab, set the :guilabel:`Carrier` field to the desired third-party shipping carrier. When the delivery method is set to :ref:`production mode <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-delivery-method>`, a :guilabel:`Tracking Reference` is provided."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:269
msgid ":doc:`Generate shipping labels <../advanced_operations_shipping/labels>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show the delivery order's \"Additional info\" tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:278
msgid "Troubleshooting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:280
msgid "Since shipping connectors can sometimes be complex to set up, here are some checks to try when things are not working as expected:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:283
msgid "Ensure the :ref:`warehouse information <inventory/shipping_receiving/configure-source-address>` (e.g., address and phone number) in Odoo is correct **and** matches the records saved in the shipping provider's website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:286
msgid "Verify that the :ref:`package type <inventory/warehouses_storage/package-type>` and parameters are valid for the shipping carrier. To check, ensure the shipment can be directly created on the shipping carrier's website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:289
msgid "When encountering a price mismatch between Odoo's estimated cost and the provider's charge, first ensure the delivery method is set to :ref:`production environment <inventory/shipping_receiving/production-env>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:293
msgid "Then, create the shipment in both the carrier's website and Odoo, and verify the prices are the same across Odoo, the shipping provider, and in the *debug logs*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:297
msgid "When checking for a price mismatch in the debug logs, if the request says the package weighs six kilograms, but the response from FedEx says the package weights seven kilograms, it concludes that the issue is on FedEx's side."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:302
msgid "Debug log"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:304
msgid "Track shipping data inconsistencies by activating debug logging. To do that, go to the delivery method's configuration page (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Method`), and select the desired shipping method. Click the :guilabel:`No Debugging` smart button to activate :guilabel:`Debug Requests`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"No Debug\" smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:313
msgid "With :guilabel:`Debug Requests` activated, each time the shipping connector is used to estimate the cost of shipping, records are saved in the :guilabel:`Logging` report. To access the report, turn on :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`, and go to :menuselection:`Settings app --> Technical --> Database Structure section --> Logging`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:319
msgid "Logs are created for a shipping method each time the :ref:`Get Rate <inventory/shipping_receiving/third-party-rate>` button is clicked on :abbr:`SOs (Sales Orders)` and invoices, **and** when a customer adds the shipping carrier to their order through the *Website* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show how to find the \"Logging\" option from the \"Technical\" menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:328
msgid "Click the *HTTP request* line item to open a detailed page, and verify the correct information is sent from Odoo to the shipping carrier. In the *HTTP response*, verify that the same information is received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/third_party_shipper.rst:-1
msgid "Show debug request history in Settings > Technical > Logging."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:3
msgid "UPS integration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:5
msgid "UPS is a shipping carrier service that integrates with Odoo to coordinate shipping to all regions. Once integrated, users can create shipping methods that estimate shipping costs and :doc:`generate labels <../advanced_operations_shipping/labels>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:10
msgid ":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:12
msgid "To set up the UPS shipping connector in Odoo, complete these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:14
msgid "Create a UPS account to get :ref:`account number <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-account-number>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:16
msgid "Create UPS developer account to get :ref:`client credentials <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-client-id>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:18
msgid "Set up shipping method in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:21
msgid "UPS account setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:23
msgid "To get started, go to the `UPS website <https://www.ups.com>`_ and click the :guilabel:`Log In` button in the top-right corner to log in or create a UPS account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:26
msgid "After logging in, click the profile icon in the top-right corner, and select :guilabel:`Accounts and Payment` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show how to navigate to the \"Accounts and Payment\" page from the home screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:33
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Accounts and Payment Options` page, two accounts must be configured: an Odoo shipment account and a payment card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:37
msgid "Shipping account"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:39
msgid "To add an Odoo shipment account, select :guilabel:`Add New Account` from the :guilabel:`Add a Payment Method` drop-down menu, and click :guilabel:`Add`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Display \"Add an account\" option from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:46
msgid "On the next screen, labeled :guilabel:`Open a Shipping Account`, complete the forms to configure the shipping account type (e.g. :guilabel:`Business`) and if any regulated items will be shipped. Then finish the remaining three steps in the wizard to :guilabel:`Add Addresses`, :guilabel:`Verify Identity`, and :guilabel:`Explore Discounts`, with the last option being optional."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:51
msgid "When complete, submit the application on the last page of the wizard to finish setting up the shipping account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Display UPS form to fill out company shipping information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:61
msgid "Get account number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:63
msgid "With the shipping account set up, the UPS :guilabel:`Account Number` becomes available. To access it, navigate to :menuselection:`Profile --> Accounts and Payment` and refer to the shipping account's :guilabel:`Number` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show Account \"Number\" field for the shipping account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:72
msgid "Payment card"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:74
msgid "Navigate back to the :guilabel:`Accounts and Payments` page and select the :guilabel:`Add Payment Card` option from the :guilabel:`Add a Payment Method` drop-down menu. Then, complete the form to add the credit card information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Add Payment Card\" option from the drop-down."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:83
msgid "UPS developer account setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:85
msgid "Next, log into the `UPS developer account <http://developer.ups.com/>`_ to generate the developer key. To begin, click the profile icon in the top-right corner, and choose the :guilabel:`Apps` option from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Display the \"Apps\" drop-down option after clicking the profile picture icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:94
msgid "Add app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:96
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Add Apps` button to begin filling out the form. In the :guilabel:`I need API credentials because \\*` field, select :guilabel:`I want to integrate UPS technology into my business`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:100
msgid "Under the next label, :guilabel:`Choose an account to associate with these credentials. \\*`, select :guilabel:`Add existing account` from the drop-down menu in the corresponding field, and then select the :ref:`account number <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-account-number>` linked to the UPS account created in the previous step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show form to fill in the UPS account number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:109
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Next`, and proceed to the :guilabel:`Add App` form, and fill out the fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:111
msgid ":guilabel:`App Name`: Type the name to identify the app by."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:112
msgid ":guilabel:`Callback URL`: Type the URL of the Odoo database, in the format: `https://databaseName.odoo.com`. Do **not** include `www` in the URL."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:115
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Add Products` section on the right, search for and click the :guilabel:`+ (plus)` icon to add the following products to the app:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:118
msgid ":guilabel:`Authorization (O Auth)`: Used to generate the authorization token to request information from the UPS API."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:120
msgid ":guilabel:`Address Validation`: Validates addresses at the street level in the United States and Puerto Rico."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:122
msgid ":guilabel:`Locator`: Enables search for UPS shipping locations based on type and available services."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:124
msgid ":guilabel:`Paperless Documents`: Enables the upload of document images to link to shipments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:125
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping`: Enables UPS shipping services, such as preparing packages for shipment, managing returns, and canceling scheduled shipments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:127
msgid ":guilabel:`Rating`: Compare delivery services and shipping rates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:129
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` and accept UPS's terms and conditions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:132
msgid "`UPS API Catalog <https://developer.ups.com/catalog?loc=en_US>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show \"Add Apps\" form, where the app details are configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:141
msgid "Client ID and Client Secret"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:143
msgid "With the new app created, in the :menuselection:`Profile --> My Apps --> App` page, select the app from the :guilabel:`Credentials` section to view the UPS credentials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show newly created app in the \"My Apps\" section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:150
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Credentials` section, copy the :guilabel:`Client ID` and :guilabel:`Client Secret` key."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Display the \"Client ID\" and \"Client Secret\" key."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:160
msgid "With the credentials obtained, configure the UPS shipping method in Odoo by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Shipping Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:163
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click the :guilabel:`New` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:166
msgid "For existing UPS shipping methods whose :guilabel:`Provider` is :guilabel:`UPS Legacy`, archive it and create a new shipping method using :guilabel:`UPS`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:169
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Provider` field, select :guilabel:`UPS`. Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`UPS Configuration` tab, where various fields must be entered. For details instructions on configuring the other fields on the shipping method, refer to the :doc:`Configure third-party carrier <third_party_shipper>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:174
msgid "In the :guilabel:`UPS Configuration` tab, complete the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:176
msgid ":guilabel:`UPS Account Number`: (*required*) Get the :ref:`account number <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-account-number>` from the UPS portal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:178
msgid ":guilabel:`UPS Client ID`: (*required*) Get the :ref:`Client ID <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-client-id>` from the UPS developer website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:180
msgid ":guilabel:`UPS Client Secret`: (*required*) Get the :ref:`Client Secret <inventory/shipping_receiving/ups-client-id>` key from the UPS developer website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:182
msgid ":guilabel:`UPS Service Type`: Select from the drop-down menu the type of shipping service."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:183
msgid ":guilabel:`UPS Package Type`: (*required*) Select from the drop-down menu the :doc:`package type <../../product_management/product_tracking/package>` that is supported for the shipping service."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:185
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Weight Unit`: The unit of measure for the package weight."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:186
msgid ":guilabel:`Package Size Unit`: The unit of measure for the package dimensions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:187
msgid ":guilabel:`Label Format`: Choose the label format shipping labels: :guilabel:`PDF`, :guilabel:`ZPL`, :guilabel:`EPL`, or :guilabel:`SPL`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:-1
msgid "Show the \"UPS Configuration\" tab on the Shipping Methods form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:194
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Options` section, the following features are available:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:196
msgid ":guilabel:`Bill My Account`: Charge the user's UPS account for shipping in the *eCommerce* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:197
msgid ":guilabel:`Collect on Delivery`: Collect payment from customers for shipping after the shipment is delivered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:199
msgid ":guilabel:`Generate Return Label`: Print the return label for the order after the delivery order is validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping_receiving/setup_configuration/ups_credentials.rst:201
msgid ":guilabel:`Duties paid by`: Select whether duties or other fees are charged to the :guilabel:`Sender` or :guilabel:`Recipient` of the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage.rst:5
msgid "Warehouses and storage"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:3
msgid "Batch picking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:7
msgid "*Batch picking* enables a single picker to handle multiple orders at once, reducing the time needed to navigate to the same location in a warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:10
msgid "When picking in batches, orders are grouped and consolidated into a picking list. After the picking, the batch is taken to an output location, where the products are sorted into their respective delivery packages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:15
msgid ":ref:`Use Barcode app for pickings <inventory/warehouses_storage/barcode_picking>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:17
msgid "Since orders *must* be sorted at the output location after being picked, this picking method suits businesses with a few products that are ordered often. Storing high-demand items in easily accessible locations can increase the number of orders that are fulfilled efficiently."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:24
msgid "To activate the batch picking option, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, check the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` box."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the *Batch Transfers* in Inventory > Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:32
msgid "Since batch picking is a method to optimize the *pick* operation in Odoo, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading must also be checked on this settings page. When finished, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:-1
msgid "Enable *Storage Locations* and *Multi-Step Routes* Inventory > Configuration > Settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:40
msgid "Lastly, enable the warehouse picking feature, by navigating to the warehouse settings page, which is accessible from :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:43
msgid "From here, select the desired warehouse from the list. Then, from the radio options available for :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`, select either the :guilabel:`Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)` or :guilabel:`Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:48
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:128
msgid ":ref:`Delivery in two steps <inventory/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:49
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:129
msgid ":ref:`Delivery in three steps <inventory/delivery_three_steps>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Set up 2-step or 3-step outgoing shipments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:56
msgid "Create batch transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:58
msgid "Manually create batch transfers directly from the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` page. Click the :guilabel:`New` button to begin creating a batch transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:61
msgid "On the batch transfer form, fill the following fields out accordingly:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:63
msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible`: employee assigned to the picking. Leave this field blank if *any* worker can fulfill this picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`Operation Type`: from the drop-down menu, select the operation type under which the picking is categorized."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:67
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: specifies the date by which the :guilabel:`Responsible` person should complete the transfer to the output location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:70
msgid "Next, in the :guilabel:`Transfers` list, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to open the :guilabel:`Add: Transfers` window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:73
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Operation Type` field was filled, the list will filter transfer records matching the selected :guilabel:`Operation Type`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:76
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`New` button to create a new transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:78
msgid "Once the transfer records are selected, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the batch picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:81
msgid "A new batch transfer assigned to the :guilabel:`Responsible`, `Joel Willis`, for the `Pick` :guilabel:`Operation Type`. The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` is set to `August 11`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:0
msgid "View of *Batch Transfers* form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:88
msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Add a line` button opens the :guilabel:`Add:Transfers` window, displaying only pickings. This is because the :guilabel:`Operation Type` was set to `Pick` on the batch transfer form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:92
msgid "Click the checkbox to the left of the transfers, `WH/PICK/00001` and `WH/PICK/00002`, to include them in the new transfer. Then, click the :guilabel:`Select` button to close the :guilabel:`Add:Transfers` window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:0
msgid "Select multiple transfers from the *Add:Transfers* window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:103
msgid "Add batch from transfers list"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:105
msgid "Another method of creating batch transfers is available using the :guilabel:`Add to batch` option in a list. Navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations` drop-down menu, and select any of the :guilabel:`Transfers` to open a filtered list of transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Show all transfer types in a drop-down menu: Receipts, Deliveries, Internal Transfers,\n"
"Manufacturings, Batch Transfers, Dropships."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:114
msgid "On the transfers list, select the checkbox to the left of the selected transfers to add in a batch. Next, navigate to the :guilabel:`Actions ⚙️ (gear)` button, and click :guilabel:`Add to batch` from the resulting drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Use *Add to batch* button, from the *Action* button's list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:122
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:148
msgid "Doing so opens an :guilabel:`Add to batch` pop-up window, wherein the employee :guilabel:`Responsible` for the picking can be assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:125
msgid "Choose from the two radio options to add to :guilabel:`an existing batch transfer` or create :guilabel:`a new batch transfer`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:128
msgid "To begin with a draft, select the :guilabel:`Draft` checkbox."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:130
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:157
msgid "Conclude the process by clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:-1
msgid "Show *Add to batch* window to create a batch transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:137
msgid "Process batch transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:139
msgid "Handle batch transfers in the :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:142
msgid "From here, select the intended transfer from the list. Then, on the batch transfer form, input the :guilabel:`Done` quantities for each product, under the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab. Finally, select :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:147
msgid "Be certain the batch transfer is complete when the :guilabel:`Validate` button is highlighted in purple. If the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button is highlighted instead, that means there are items in the batch that are currently *not* available in-stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:154
msgid "In a batch transfer involving products from pickings, `WH/PICK/00001` and `WH/PICK/00002`, the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab shows that the product, `Cabinet with Doors`, has been picked because the :guilabel:`Done` column matches the value in the :guilabel:`Reserved` column. However, `0.00` quantities have been picked for the other product, `Cable Management Box`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:0
msgid "Show batch transfer of products from two pickings in the *Detailed Operations* tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:163
msgid "Only in-stock products are visible in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:165
msgid "To view the complete product list, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. On this list, the :guilabel:`Demand` column indicates the required quantity for the order. The :guilabel:`Reserved` column shows the available stock to fulfill the order. Lastly, the :guilabel:`Done` column specifies the products that have been picked, and are ready for the next step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:171
msgid "The product, `Desk Pad`, from the same batch as the :ref:`example above <inventory/management/batch-transfers-example>`, is only visible in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab because there are no :guilabel:`Reserved` quantities in-stock to fulfill the batch picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:175
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button to search the stock again for available products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:0
msgid "Show unavailable reserved quantities in the *Operations* tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:182
msgid "Create backorder"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:184
msgid "On the batch transfer form, if the :guilabel:`Done` quantity of the product is *less* than the :guilabel:`Reserved` quantity, a pop-up window appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:187
msgid "This pop-up window provides the option: :guilabel:`Create Backorder?`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:189
msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Create Backorder` button automatically creates a new batch transfer, containing the remaining products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:192
msgid "Click :guilabel:`No Backorder` to finish the picking *without* creating another batch picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:194
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Discard` to cancel the validation, and return to the batch transfer form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Show the *Create Backorder* pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:203
msgid "Process batch transfer: Barcode app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:205
msgid "Created batch transfers are also listed in the :menuselection:`Barcode` app, accessible by selecting the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:208
msgid "By default, confirmed batch pickings appear on the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` page. On that page, click on the desired batch transfer to open the detailed list of products for the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Show list of to-do batch transfers in *Barcode* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:215
msgid "For the chosen batch transfer, follow the instructions at the top of the page in the black background. Begin by scanning the product's barcode to record a single product for picking. To record multiple quantities, click the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` icon, and enter the required quantities for the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:221
msgid "Products from the same order are labeled with the same color on the left. Completed pickings are highlighted in green."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:225
msgid "In a batch transfer for 2 `Cabinet with Doors`, 3 `Acoustic Bloc Screens`, and 4 `Four Person Desks`, the `3/3` and `4/4` :guilabel:`Units` indicate that the last two product pickings are complete."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:229
msgid "`1/2` units of the `Cabinet with Doors` has already been picked, and after scanning the product barcode for the second cabinet, Odoo prompts the user to `Scan a serial number` to record the unique serial number for :ref:`product tracking <inventory/product_management/configure-lots>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:0
msgid "Display products to be picked in barcode view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers.rst:237
msgid "Once all the products have been picked, click on :guilabel:`Validate` to mark the batch transfer as :guilabel:`Done`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:3
msgid "Cluster picking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:10
msgid "Cluster picking is an advanced order fulfillment approach derived from :ref:`batch picking <inventory/misc/batch_picking>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:13
msgid "In this strategy, pickers load a cart with multiple packages, each designated for a specific *sales order* (SO). Then, the picker travels to each storage location, and places the products directly in the package of the associated order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:17
msgid "This method is most efficient for medium-sized companies, with high order volumes, and relatively few unique products, since the method eliminates the need for sorting products into packages for customers after picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:21
msgid "However, cluster picking does have some disadvantages. For instance, urgent orders cannot be prioritized, and optimized batches must be manually created beforehand. As a result, the picking process can lead to bottlenecks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:28
msgid "|SO| 1 calls for one apple and orange"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:29
msgid "|SO| 2 calls for one apple and banana"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:30
msgid "|SO| 3 calls for one apple, orange, and banana"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:32
msgid "Apples are stored in Shelf A, oranges in Shelf B, and bananas in Shelf C."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:34
msgid "To pick products for three orders at once, the cart is loaded with three empty packages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:36
msgid "Starting at Shelf A, the picker places apples into each package. Next, the picker navigates to Shelf B, and places oranges in the packages designated for |SO| 1 and |SO| 3. Finally, the picker pushes the cart to Shelf C, and loads packages for |SO| 2 and |SO| 3 with a banana, each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:40
msgid "With the packages for all three |SOS| packed, the picker pushes the cart to the output location, where the packages are sealed and prepared for shipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Show example of fulfilling sales orders 2 and 3 at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:50
msgid "To enable cluster picking, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading, activate the :guilabel:`Packages` and :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:-1
msgid "Activate *Packages* and *Batch Transfers* features in the settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:58
msgid "Since batch picking is used to optimize the *pick* operation in Odoo, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options, under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading, must also be checked on this settings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:62
msgid "*Storage locations* allow products to be stored in specific locations they can be picked from, while *multi-step routes* enable the picking operation itself."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:65
msgid "When finished, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:74
msgid "Packages setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:76
msgid "After the :guilabel:`Packages` feature is enabled, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`, and click the :guilabel:`New` button to create a new package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:79
msgid "On the new package form, the :guilabel:`Package Reference` is pre-filled with the next available `PACK` number in the system. :guilabel:`Pack Date` is automatically set to the creation date of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:83
msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Package Use` field to :guilabel:`Reusable Box`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:86
msgid ":doc:`Packages <../../product_management/product_tracking/package>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:89
msgid "A package intended for cluster picking is named `CLUSTER-PACK-3` for easy identification. For this workflow, the products are directly packed using their intended shipping boxes, so :guilabel:`Package Use` is set to :guilabel:`Disposable Box`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Create new package form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:98
msgid "Create cluster batch"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:100
msgid "To see how cluster picking works in Odoo, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and create |SOS| that will be fulfilled together in the same batch. After confirming an |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button becomes visible. Displayed inside the icon is a number representing the amount of steps in the outgoing shipment process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:106
msgid "Begin by creating three |SOS| for the apples, oranges, and bananas, as shown in the :ref:`example above <inventory/misc/cluster_picking/example>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:109
msgid "After confirming the |SO|, the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button displays the number `2`, indicating there are two operations to complete: `Pick` and `Delivery`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Example sales order for an apple, orange, and banana."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:116
msgid "With the |SOS| created, orders now must be grouped into batches. To do so, navigate to the *Inventory* dashboard and select the operation type card, :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` or :guilabel:`Pick` (whichever is the first operation in the delivery flow)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:120
msgid "Doing so displays a filtered list of outgoing operations with the :guilabel:`Ready` status, indicating that all the products in the |SO| are in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:124
msgid "Cluster pick batches can be created for outgoing shipments in one, two, or three steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:127
msgid ":ref:`Delivery in one step <inventory/receipts_delivery_one_step>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:131
msgid "Click the checkbox to the left of the corresponding outgoing operation to add them to the batch. With the desired pickings selected, click the :guilabel:`⚙️ Actions (gear)` button, and select the :guilabel:`Add to batch` option from the resulting drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:136
msgid "To create a cluster batch, as shown in the :ref:`example above <inventory/misc/cluster_picking/example>`, in a warehouse configured with two-step outgoing shipments, the following pick operations are selected:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:140
msgid "`WH/PICK/00007`: linked to |SO| 88 for one apple and orange."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:141
msgid "`WH/PICK/00008`: linked to |SO| 89 for one apple and banana."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:142
msgid "`WH/PICK/00009`: linked to |SO| 90 for one apple, orange, and banana."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:151
msgid "Choose from the two options in the :guilabel:`Add to` field to either: add to :guilabel:`an existing batch transfer`, or create :guilabel:`a new batch transfer`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:154
msgid "To create draft batch pickings to be confirmed at a later date, select the :guilabel:`Draft` checkbox."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:164
msgid "Process batches"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:166
msgid "To process batches, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Batch Transfers`. Click on a batch to select it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:169
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab, products that are to be picked are grouped by location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:171
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Source Package` or :guilabel:`Destination Package` field, enter the package used for the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:175
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Source Package` field when the picking package is configured as *reusable* on the :ref:`package form <inventory/misc/create-package>`. This means the products are temporarily placed in a container during picking, before getting transferred to their final shipping box."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:179
msgid "Alternatively, use the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field when the product is directly placed in its *disposable* shipping box during picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:183
msgid "Process the cluster batch for the three orders of apples, oranges, and bananas :ref:`example <inventory/misc/cluster_picking/example>` by assigning each picking to a dedicated package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:186
msgid "At the storage location for apples, `WH/Stock/Shelf A`, assign the apples in all three pickings to one of the three disposable packages, `CLUSTER-PACK-1`, `CLUSTER-PACK-2`, or `CLUSTER-PACK-3`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:189
msgid "Record this in Odoo using the :guilabel:`Destination Package` field in the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Example of processing cluster pickings in *Inventory*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:197
msgid "In Barcode"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:199
msgid "To process cluster pickings directly from the *Barcode* app, select the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` button from the *Barcode* dashboard. Then, select the desired batch."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:202
msgid "On the batch transfer screen, the products in the picking are grouped by location, and each line is color-coded to associate products in the same picking together."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:205
msgid "Then, follow the prompt to :guilabel:`Scan the source location` barcode for the storage location of the first product. Then, scan the barcode for the product and package to process the transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:208
msgid "Repeat this for all products, and click the :guilabel:`Validate` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:211
msgid "To find the package barcode, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Packages`, select the desired package, click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon at the top of the package form, and select the :guilabel:`Print` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:215
msgid "Next, select one of the three print options to generate the package barcode from the :guilabel:`Package Reference` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Display where the package barcode can be generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:223
msgid "Begin processing the cluster picking by going to the first storage location, `Shelf A`, and scanning the :ref:`location barcode <barcode/setup/location>`. Doing so highlights all the pickings that need products from this particular location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:227
msgid "Scan the barcode for the apple, which highlights the picking (labeled in red) for the product `Apple`, for the picking, `WH/PICK/00007`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:230
msgid "Then, scan the `CLUSTER-PACK-1` package barcode, and place the product in the designated package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:0
msgid "Example of cluster batch from the *Barcode* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cluster_picking.rst:237
msgid "After creating a batch transfer and assigning a package to a picking, Odoo suggests the specified package by displaying the name *in italics* under the product name, ensuring pickers place products into the correct boxes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:3
msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:5
msgid "Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load another truck."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:13
msgid "For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What is cross-docking and is it for me? <https://www.odoo.com/blog/business-hacks-1/post/what-is-cross-docking-and-is-it-for-me-270>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:20
msgid "In the *Inventory* app, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Multi-Step Routes*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:27
msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:29
msgid "Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit your warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:36
msgid "This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that can be found in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:43
msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:45
msgid "Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price for it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:55
msgid "Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* because we still need to order the product to our supplier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:68
msgid "Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the products in the *Input Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:77
msgid "When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to *Output*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/cross_dock.rst:86
msgid "The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:3
msgid "Consignment: buy and sell stock without owning it"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:5
msgid "Most of the time, products stored in a company's warehouse are either purchased from suppliers, or are manufactured in-house. However, suppliers will sometimes let companies store and sell products in the company's warehouse, without having to buy those items up-front. This is called *consignment*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:10
msgid "Consignment is a useful method for suppliers to launch new products, and easily deliver to their customers. It's also a great way for the company storing the products (the consignee) to earn something back for their efforts. Consignees can even charge a fee for the convenience of storing products they don't actually own."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:16
msgid "Enable the consignment setting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:18
msgid "To receive, store, and sell consignment stock, the feature needs to be enabled in the settings. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, check the box next to :guilabel:`Consignment`, and then click :guilabel:`Save` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Consignment setting in Inventory configuration."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:28
msgid "Receive (and store) consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:30
msgid "With the feature enabled in Odoo, consignment stock can now be received into a warehouse. From the main :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, click into the :guilabel:`Receipts` section. Then, click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:35
msgid "Consignment stock is not actually purchased from the vendor; it is simply received and stored. Because of this, there are no quotations or purchase orders involved in receiving consignment stock. So, *every* receipt of consignment stock will start by creating manual receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:39
msgid "Choose a vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Receive From` field, and then choose the same vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Assign Owner` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:43
msgid "Since the products received from the vendor will be owned by the same vendor, the :guilabel:`Receive From` and :guilabel:`Assign Owner` fields must match."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:46
msgid "Once the vendor-related fields are set, enter products into the :guilabel:`Product` lines, and set the quantities to be received into the warehouse under the :guilabel:`Done` column. If the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` feature is enabled, the :abbr:`UoM (Units of Measure)` can be changed, as well. Once all the consignment stock has been received, :guilabel:`Validate` the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Matching vendor fields in consignment Receipt creation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:56
msgid "Sell and deliver consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:58
msgid "Once consignment stock has been received into the warehouse, it can be sold the same as any other in-stock product that has the :guilabel:`Can Be Sold` option enabled on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:61
msgid "To create a sales order, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and from the :guilabel:`Quotations` overview, click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose a customer to enter into the :guilabel:`Customer` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:66
msgid "The :guilabel:`Customer` *must* be different from the :guilabel:`Vendor` that supplied the consignment stock received (and stored) in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:69
msgid "Add the consignment product under the :guilabel:`Product` column in the order lines, set the :guilabel:`Quantity`, and fill out any other pertinent product details on the form. Once the quotation is complete, click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Sales order of consignment stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:77
msgid "Once the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` has been confirmed, it will become a sales order. From here, the products can be delivered by clicking on the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button, and selecting :guilabel:`Validate` to validate the delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:82
msgid "Traceability and reporting of consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:84
msgid "Although consignment stock is owned by the vendor who supplied it, and not by the company storing it in their warehouse, consignment products will *still* appear in certain inventory reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:87
msgid "To find inventory reports, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting`, and choose a report to view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:91
msgid "Since the consignee does not actually own consigment stock, these products are *not* reflected in the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` report, and have no impact on the consignee's inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:96
msgid "Product moves report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:98
msgid "To view all information about on-hand stock moves, navigate to the the :guilabel:`Product Moves` dashboard by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Product Moves`. For consignment products, the information in this report is the same as any other product: the history of its product moves can be reviewed; the :guilabel:`Quantity Done` and :guilabel:`Reference` document are available; and its :guilabel:`Locations` are available, as well. The consignment stock will originate from :guilabel:`Partner Location/Vendors`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:106
msgid "To view a consignment product's moves by ownership, select the :guilabel:`Group By` filter, choose the :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` parameter, and then select :guilabel:`From Owner`, and :guilabel:`Apply` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Consignment stock moves history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:115
msgid "To see forecasted units of consignment stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Forecasted Inventory`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:119
msgid "Stock on hand report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock.rst:121
msgid "View the :guilabel:`Stock On Hand` dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Inventory Report`. From this report, the :guilabel:`Locations` of all stock on-hand are displayed, in addition to the quantities per location. For consigment products, the :guilabel:`Owner` column will be populated with the owner of those products, or the original vendor who supplied the products in the first place."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:3
msgid "Putaway rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:5
msgid "Putaway is the process of routing products to appropriate storage locations upon shipment arrival."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:7
msgid "Odoo can accomplish this seamlessly using *putaway rules*, which dictate how products move through specified warehouse locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:10
msgid "Upon shipment arrival, operations are generated based on putaway rules to efficiently move products to specified locations, and ensure easy retrieval for future delivery orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:13
msgid "In warehouses that process specific kinds of products, putaway rules can also prevent volatile substances from being stored in close proximity, by directing them to different locations determined by the warehouse manager."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:18
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Putaway Rules <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nCQMf6sj_w8>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:23
msgid "To use putaway rules, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. By doing so, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is also automatically activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:27
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes in Inventory configuration settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:36
msgid "Define putaway rule"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:38
msgid "To manage where specific products are routed for storage, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Putaway Rules`. Use the :guilabel:`Create` button to configure a new putaway rule on a :guilabel:`Product` or :guilabel:`Product Category` that the rule affects."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:43
msgid "Putaway rules can be defined either per product/product category, and/or package type (the *Packages* setting must be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` for that)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:47
msgid "In the same line, the :guilabel:`When product arrives in` location is where the putaway rule is triggered to create an operation to move the product to the :guilabel:`Store to` location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:50
msgid "For this to work, the :guilabel:`Store to` location must be a *sub-location* of the first (e.g., `WH/Stock/Fruits` is a specific, named location inside `WH/Stock` to make the products stored here easier to find)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:55
msgid "In a warehouse location, **WH/Stock**, there are the following sub-locations:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:57
msgid "WH/Stock/Fruits"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:58
msgid "WH/Stock/Vegetables"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:60
msgid "Ensure all apples are stored in the fruits section by filling the field :guilabel:`Store to` with the location `WH/Stock/Fruits` when the :guilabel:`Product`, `Apple` arrives in `WH/Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:63
msgid "Repeat this for all products and hit :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:0
msgid "Create putaway rules for apples and carrots."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:70
msgid "Putaway rule priority"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:72
msgid "Odoo selects a putaway rule based on the following priority list (from highest to lowest) until a match is found:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:75
msgid "Package type and product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:76
msgid "Package type and product category"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:79
msgid "Product category"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:82
msgid "The product `Lemonade can` has the following putaway rules configured:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:84
msgid "When receiving a `Pallet` (:guilabel:`Package Type`) of `Lemonade cans`, it is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:86
msgid "`Lemonade can`'s :guilabel:`Product Category` is `All/drinks`, and when receiving a `Box` of any item in this product category, items are redirected to `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:88
msgid "Any product on a `Pallet` is redirected to `WH/Stock/Pallets`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:89
msgid "The product `Lemonade can` is redirected to `WH/Stock/Shelf 2`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:90
msgid "Items in the `All/drinks` product category are redirected to `WH/Stock/Small Refrigerator`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:0
msgid "Some examples of putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:97
msgid "Storage categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:99
msgid "A *storage category* is an extra location attribute. Storage categories allow the user to define the quantity of products that can be stored in the location, and how the location will be selected with putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:106
msgid "To enable storage categories, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the :guilabel:`Storage Categories` feature in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:111
msgid "The :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature **must** be enabled to enable :guilabel:`Storage Categories`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:115
msgid "Define storage category"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:117
msgid "To create a storage category, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Storage Categories` and click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:120
msgid "On the storage category form, type a name for the :guilabel:`Storage Category` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:122
msgid "Options are available to limit the capacity by weight, by product, or by package type. The :guilabel:`Allow New Product` field defines when the location is considered available to store a product:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`If location is empty`: a product can be added there only if the location is empty."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:127
msgid ":guilabel:`If products are the same`: a product can be added there only if the same product is already there."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:129
msgid ":guilabel:`Allow mixed products`: several different products can be stored in this location at the same time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:133
msgid "Create putaway rules for pallet-stored items and ensure real-time storage capacity checks by creating the `High Frequency pallets` storage category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:136
msgid "Name the :guilabel:`Storage Category`, and select :guilabel:`If all products are same` in the :guilabel:`Allow New Product` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:139
msgid "Then, define package capacity in the :guilabel:`Capacity by Package` tab, specifying the number of packages for the designated :guilabel:`Package Type` and setting a maximum of `2.00` `Pallets` for a specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:0
msgid "Create a storage category on the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:147
msgid "Once the storage category settings are saved, the storage category can be linked to a location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:149
msgid "To do that, navigate to the location by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`, and select the location. Click :guilabel:`Edit` and select the created category in the :guilabel:`Storage Category` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:154
msgid "Assign the `High Frequency pallets` storage category to the `WH/Stock/pallets/PAL 1` sub-location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:0
msgid "When a Storage Category is created, it can be linked to a warehouse location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:162
msgid "Storage categories in putaway rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:164
msgid "To continue the example from above, apply the `High Frequency Pallets` on the `PAL1` and `PAL2` locations and :ref:`rework the putaway rules <inventory/routes/putaway-rule>` as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:167
msgid "Assume one pallet of lemonade cans is received:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:169
msgid "If PAL1 and PAL2 are empty, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:170
msgid "If PAL1 is full, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL2."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:171
msgid "If PAL1 and 2 are full, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Storage Categories used in a variety of putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:3
msgid "Sell stock from multiple warehouses using virtual locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:5
msgid "While keeping stock and selling inventory from one warehouse might work for smaller companies, bigger companies might need to keep stock in, or sell from, multiple warehouses in multiple locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:9
msgid "Sometimes products included in a single sales order might take stock from two (or more) warehouses; in Odoo, pulling products from multiple warehouses to satisfy sales demands can be done using *virtual locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:14
msgid "The solution in this document, describing the use of a virtual warehouse to fulfill orders for multiple warehouses, has some limitations. Consider the following before proceeding:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:17
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field is set to a virtual warehouse on a sales order, the virtual warehouse's address is indicated on the picking, packing, and delivery forms, **not** the actual warehouse's address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:20
msgid "Each location has a `warehouse_id` (hidden field). This means that the stock in the virtual warehouse will **not** be the sum of the stock of the real warehouses, but rather the sum of the stock in the locations whose warehouse ID is the virtual warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:25
msgid "Potential limitation for those using :doc:`two <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>` or :doc:`three-step delivery <../../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:29
msgid "The output or packing zone on the various forms is incorrectly listed as the virtual warehouse's address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:31
msgid "There is no workaround for two or three-step deliveries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:32
msgid "Proceed **only** if setting a virtual warehouse's address as the output or packing zone makes sense for the company's workflow."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:36
msgid "In order to create virtual locations in warehouses, and proceed to the following steps, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features **must** be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:39
msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, and enable the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` options. Then, :guilabel:`Save` the changes to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:47
msgid "Create virtual parent location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:49
msgid "Before creating any virtual stock locations, create a new warehouse that acts as a *virtual* warehouse — the *parent* location of other physical warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:54
msgid "Virtual warehouses are great for companies with multiple physical warehouses. This is because a situation might arise when one warehouse runs out of stock of a particular product, but another warehouse still has stock on-hand. In this case, stock from these two (or more) warehouses could be used to fulfill a single sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:59
msgid "The \"virtual\" warehouse acts as a single aggregator of all the inventory stored in a company's physical warehouses, and is used (for traceability purposes) to create a hierarchy of locations in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:63
msgid "To create a new warehouse, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. From here, the warehouse :guilabel:`Name` and :guilabel:`Short Name` can be changed, and other warehouse details can be changed under the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:68
msgid "Lastly, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating a *regular* warehouse. Continue following the steps below to finish configuring the virtual parent warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "New warehouse form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:76
msgid ":doc:`Warehouse configurations <../inventory_management/warehouses_locations>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:77
msgid ":ref:`Incoming and outgoing shipments <inventory/receipts_delivery_one_step/wh>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:78
msgid ":doc:`Resupply from another warehouse <../inventory_management/resupply_warehouses>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:83
msgid "Create child warehouses"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:85
msgid "Create at least two *child* warehouses to link to the virtual warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:88
msgid "In order to take stock from multiple warehouses to fulfill a sales order, there needs to be at least **two** warehouses acting as child locations of the virtual parent location warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:91
msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, click :guilabel:`Create`, and follow the :ref:`preceding instructions <inventory/routes/virtual-wh>` to configure the physical stock locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid "**Parent Warehouse**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: `Virtual Warehouse`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: `VWH/Stock`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid "**Child Warehouses**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouses`: `Warehouse A` and `Warehouse B`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Locations`: `WHA` and `WHB`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid "Graphic of child locations 'WHA' and 'WHB' tied to the parent location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:110
msgid "While the virtual stock location will be changed to 'View' later, the :guilabel:`Location Type` **must** be :guilabel:`Internal Location` at this point to :ref:`link the child warehouses <inventory/routes/link-to-vwh>` in the next section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:117
msgid "Link child warehouses to virtual stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:119
msgid "To set physical warehouses as child locations of the virtual location configured in the :ref:`previous step <inventory/routes/virtual-wh>`, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:123
msgid "Remove any filters from the search bar. Then, click the physical warehouse :guilabel:`Location` that was previously created to be a child location (e.g. `WHA`), and click :guilabel:`Edit`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:126
msgid "Change the :guilabel:`Parent Location` field from :guilabel:`Physical Locations` to the virtual warehouse's **stock location** (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) from the drop-down menu, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:131
msgid "To select the virtual warehouse's stock location in the :guilabel:`Parent Location` drop-down menu, the parent warehouse stock location (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) **must** have its :guilabel:`Location Type` set to :guilabel:`Internal Location`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Set the child warehouse's *Parent Location* to the virtual warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:139
msgid "Repeat the preceding steps to configure two or more child warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:141
msgid "Once complete, the virtual, parent warehouse (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) fulfills orders using stock from child warehouses (e.g. `WHA` and `WHB`), if there is insufficient stock in any one location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:145
msgid "Set virtual stock location as 'view'"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:147
msgid "Set the virtual stock location's :guilabel:`Location Type` to :guilabel:`View`, as it is a non-existent location used to group various physical warehouses together."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:150
msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:152
msgid "Click the virtual warehouse's stock location (e.g. `VWH/Stock`) that was :ref:`previously created <inventory/routes/virtual-wh>`, from the :guilabel:`Locations` list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:155
msgid "On the location form, under the :guilabel:`Additional Information` heading, set the :guilabel:`Location Type` to :guilabel:`View`. :guilabel:`Save` the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Warehouse location types in location creation screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:163
msgid "To view the total quantity across **all** linked child warehouses, go to the product form and click the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid "Display stock across all linked warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:171
msgid "Example: sell products from a virtual warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:173
msgid "To sell products from multiple warehouses using a virtual parent location, the database must have at least **two** warehouses configured — with at least **one** product, with quantity on-hand in each warehouse, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:178
msgid "The following product, `Toy soldier`, is available at each location with the quantities:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:180
msgid "`WHA/Stock` : 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:181
msgid "`WHB/Stock` : 2"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:182
msgid "Warehouses `WHA` and `WHB` are child warehouses of the virtual warehouse `VWH`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:184
msgid "Create a quotation for the product by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales` app and clicking :guilabel:`Create`. On the quote, add a :guilabel:`Customer`, and click :guilabel:`Add a product` to add the two products stored in the two warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:188
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab on the sales order form. Under the :guilabel:`Delivery` section, change the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field value to the virtual warehouse that was :ref:`previously created <inventory/routes/virtual-wh>`. Next, :guilabel:`Confirm` the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Set virtual warehouse as the *Warehouse* field in sales order's *Other Info* tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:196
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button. From the warehouse delivery form, confirm that the :guilabel:`Source Location` value matches the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field value from the sales order. Both should list the virtual warehouse location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:200
msgid "Finally, on the warehouse delivery form, under the :guilabel:`Detailed Operations` tab, confirm that the :guilabel:`Locations` in the :guilabel:`From` column for each product match the child locations that are tied to the virtual parent location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Delivery order with matching source and child locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:209
msgid "The :guilabel:`Source Location` on the warehouse delivery form, and the :guilabel:`Warehouse` under the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab on the sales order, **must** match for products in the sales order to be pulled from different warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:213
msgid "If the virtual warehouse is not in the :guilabel:`Source Location` field on the warehouse delivery form, retry product reservation by:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:216
msgid "Running the scheduler: turn on :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`, and then go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:218
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Check Availability` on the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:219
msgid "If the virtual warehouse is **not** assigned to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field on the sales order, then cancel it, and create a new sales order with the virtual warehouse set in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:222
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field is missing on the sales order form, then the multiple child warehouses may not have been set up correctly. Review the :ref:`previous section <inventory/routes/child-wh>` to ensure the correct settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:227
msgid "To use a virtual *parent* location as the default warehouse for sales orders, each salesperson should have the virtual warehouse assigned to them from the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Default Warehouse` on their employee form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/stock_warehouses.rst:0
msgid "Default warehouse location on employee form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:3
msgid "Process wave transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:5
msgid "While a batch transfer is a group of several pickings, a **wave transfer** only contains some parts of different pickings. Both methods are used to pick orders in a warehouse, and depending on the situation, one method may be a better fit than the other."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:9
msgid "To handle orders of a specific product category, or fetch products that are at the same location, wave transfers are the ideal method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:12
msgid "In Odoo, wave transfers are actually batch transfers with an extra step: transfers are split before being grouped in a batch."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:18
msgid "Before a wave transfer can be created, the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers` options must be activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:21
msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Operations` section, enable :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of Odoo Inventory app settings to enable the wave transfers option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:30
msgid "Add products to a wave"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:32
msgid "Now that the settings are activated, start a wave transfer by adding products to a wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:34
msgid "Wave transfers can only contain product lines from transfers of the same operation type. To view all the transfers and product lines in a specific operation, first go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` dashboard and locate the desired operation type's card. Then, open the options menu (the three dots icon in the corner of the operation type's card) and click :guilabel:`Operations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "How to get an operation type's list of operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:43
msgid "On the operations page, select the product lines you want to add in a new or existing wave. Then, click :guilabel:`Add to Wave`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Select lines to add to the wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:51
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Filters` in the search bar to group lines with the same product, location, carrier, etc..."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:54
msgid "After that, a pop-up box appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:56
msgid "To add the selected lines to an existing wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`an existing wave transfer` option and select the existing wave transfer from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:59
msgid "To create a new wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`a new wave transfer` option. If creating a new wave transfer, an employee can also be set in the optional :guilabel:`Responsible` field. Once the desired options are selected, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to add the product lines to a wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:64
msgid "View wave transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/wave_transfers.rst:66
msgid "To view all wave transfers and their statuses, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Wave Transfers`. Wave transfers can also be viewed in the :guilabel:`Barcode` app by going to :menuselection:`Barcode --> Batch Transfers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management.rst:5
msgid "Inventory management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:3
msgid "Inventory adjustments"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:5
msgid "In any warehouse management system, the recorded inventory counts in the database might not always match the actual inventory counts in the warehouse. The discrepancy between the two counts can be due to damages, human errors, theft, or other factors. As such, inventory adjustments must be made to reconcile the differences, and ensure that the recorded counts in the database match the actual counts in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:12
msgid "Inventory Adjustments page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:14
msgid "To view the *Inventory Adjustments* page, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "In stock products listed on the Inventory adjustments page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:21
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page, all products that are currently in stock are listed, with each product line containing the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:24
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the specific location in the warehouse where a product is stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:25
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product whose quantity is listed on the inventory adjustment line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: the tracking identifier assigned to the specific product listed. It can contain letters, numbers, or a combination of both."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:30
msgid "If a specific product has a quantity of more than `1.00` in stock, and more than one serial number (or lot number) assigned to it, each uniquely-identified product is displayed on its own product line with its own lot/serial number, displayed under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`: the quantity of the product currently recorded in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the *unit of measure* in which the product is measured. Unless otherwise specified (i.e., in :guilabel:`Pounds` or :guilabel:`Ounces`), the default :abbr:`UoM (Unit of Measure)` is :guilabel:`Units`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:39
msgid ":guilabel:`Counted Quantity`: the real quantity counted during an inventory count. This field is left blank by default, but can be changed, depending on if it matches the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` or not."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Difference`: the difference between the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` and :guilabel:`Counted Quantity`, once an inventory adjustment is made. The difference is automatically calculated after every inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date at which a count should be made. If not otherwise specified, this date will default to the 31st of December of the current year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the person assigned to the count in the database. This can either be the person physically counting the inventory, or applying the count in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Product Category`: the category assigned internally to a specific product. Unless otherwise specified (i.e., as :guilabel:`Consumable` or :guilabel:`Rental`), the default *Product Category* is set to :guilabel:`All`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:52
msgid ":guilabel:`Available Quantity`: the quantity of a specific product that is currently available, based on any outstanding/uncompleted sales orders, purchase orders, or manufacturing orders that might change the available quantity once fulfilled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date on which the adjustments will be accounted in the Odoo *Accounting* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:57
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company whose database these inventory adjustments are being made on. The company is listed in the top right corner of the database, next to the user currently logged in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:61
msgid "Some columns are hidden by default. To reveal these columns, click the :guilabel:`additional options` button (three dots icon) to the far right of the form's top row, and select any desired column to reveal by clicking the checkbox next to that option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:66
msgid "Create an inventory adjustment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:68
msgid "To create a new inventory adjustment from the :menuselection:`Inventory Adjustments` page, click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so creates a new, blank inventory adjustment line at the bottom of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:72
msgid "On this blank inventory adjustment line, click the drop-down menu under the :guilabel:`Product` column, and select a product. If the selected product is tracked using either lots or serial numbers, the desired lot or serial number can also be chosen from the drop-down menu under the :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:77
msgid "Next, set the value in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column to the quantity counted for that product during the inventory adjustment process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:81
msgid "The :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` for new inventory adjustments is set to `0.00` by default. An inventory move with `0.00` :guilabel:`Quantity Done` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history, so it should be set to reflect the actual quantity counted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:85
msgid "To the right of the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` and :guilabel:`User` can also be changed via their respective drop-down menus. Changing the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` changes the date that the inventory adjustment should be processed on, and selecting a responsible :guilabel:`User` assigns a user to the specific inventory adjustment (for traceability purposes)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:91
msgid "Once all changes have been made to the new inventory adjustment line, click away from the line. Doing so saves the adjustment, and moves the line to the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:94
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:160
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is greater than the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`, the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column is **green**. If the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is less than the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`, the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column is **red**. If the quantities match, and haven't been changed at all, no value appears in the :guilabel:`Difference` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Difference column on inventory adjustments page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:104
msgid "At this stage, the count (:dfn:`inventory adjustment`) is recorded, but not yet applied. This means that the quantity on hand before the adjustment has not yet been updated to match the new, real counted quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:108
msgid "There are two ways to apply the new inventory adjustment. The first way is to click the :guilabel:`Apply` button on the line at the far right of the page. The second way is to click the checkbox on the far left of the line. Doing so reveals new button options at the top of the page, one of which is an :guilabel:`Apply` button. Clicking this button instead causes an :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustment Reference / Reason` pop-up window to appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:114
msgid "From this pop-up menu, a reference or reason can be assigned to the inventory adjustment. By default, the :guilabel:`Inventory Reference / Reason` field is pre-populated with the date the adjustment is being made on, but can be changed to reflect whatever reference or reason is desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:118
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Apply` to apply the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:121
msgid "Applying an inventory adjustment simultaneously creates a :doc:`stock move line (SML) <../reporting/moves_history>` in the *Moves History* report for traceability."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Apply all option applies the inventory adjustment once a reason is specified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:129
msgid "Count products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:131
msgid "Counting products is a recurring activity in a warehouse. Once a count is complete, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments` to update the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column for each product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:135
msgid "On each product line, identify whether the value in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column recorded in the database matches the newly-counted value. If the recorded value and the counted value do match, click the :guilabel:`Set` button (target icon) at the far right of the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:139
msgid "Doing so copies the value from the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column over to the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column, and sets the value of the :guilabel:`Difference` column to `0.00`. Subsequently, once applied, an inventory move with `0.00` :guilabel:`Quantity Done` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Zero count inventory adjustment move."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:148
msgid "If the newly-counted value for a given product does **not** match the value in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` recorded in the database, instead of clicking the :guilabel:`Set` button, record the real value in the field in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:152
msgid "To do so, click the field in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column on the specific inventory adjustment line for the product whose count is being changed. This automatically assigns a :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` of `0.00`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:156
msgid "To change this value, type in a new value that matches the real, newly-counted value. Then, click away from the line. Doing so saves the adjustment, and automatically adjusts the value in the :guilabel:`Difference` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:166
msgid "Subsequently, once applied, a move with the difference between the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` and the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` is recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory Adjustments History dashboard detailing a list of prior product moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:174
msgid "Sometimes a count occurs, but cannot be applied in the database right away. In the time between the actual count and applying the inventory adjustment, product moves can occur. In that case, the on-hand quantity in the database can change and no longer be consistent with the counted quantity. As an extra precaution, Odoo asks for confirmation before applying the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:181
msgid "Change inventory count frequency"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:183
msgid "By default, the *scheduled date* for inventory adjustments are always scheduled for the 31st of December of the current year. However, for some companies, it is crucial that they have an accurate inventory count at all times. In such cases, the default scheduled date can be modified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:187
msgid "To modify the default scheduled date, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Operations` section, locate the :guilabel:`Annual Inventory Day and Month` setting, which includes a drop-down menu that is set to `31 December` by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Adjust the next inventory count date with the Annual Inventory Day and Month setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:195
msgid "To change the day, click the :guilabel:`31`, and change it to a day within the range `1-31`, depending on the desired month of the year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:198
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:117
msgid "Then, to change the month, click :guilabel:`December` to reveal the drop-down menu, and select the desired month."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:201
msgid "Once all desired changes have been made, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:204
msgid "Plan big inventory counts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:206
msgid "To plan big inventory counts, such as a full count of everything currently in stock, first navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:209
msgid "Then, select the desired products to be counted by clicking the checkbox on the far left of each product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:213
msgid "To request a count of **all** products currently in stock, click the checkbox at the very top of the table, in the header row next to the :guilabel:`Location` label. This selects **all** product lines."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Request a count popup on inventory adjustments page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:221
msgid "Once all desired products have been selected, click the :guilabel:`Request a Count` button at the top of the page. This causes a :guilabel:`Request a Count` pop-up window to appear. From this pop-up, fill in the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:225
msgid ":guilabel:`Inventory Date`: the planned date of the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:226
msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the user responsible for the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:227
msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date at which the inventory adjustment will be accounted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:228
msgid ":guilabel:`Count`: to leave the on-hand quantity of each product line blank, select :guilabel:`Leave Empty`. To pre-fill the on-hand quantity of each product line with the current value recorded in the database, select :guilabel:`Set Current Value`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:232
msgid "Finally, once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to request the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:235
msgid "In the Odoo *Barcode* app, users can only view inventory counts that are assigned to **them**, and are scheduled for **today** or **earlier**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/count_products.rst:239
msgid ":doc:`cycle_counts`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:3
msgid "Create a second warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, a *warehouse* is a physical building or space where items are stored. By default, each Odoo database has one warehouse already pre-configured, with the address set as the company's address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:9
msgid "However, it is possible to set up multiple additional warehouses, and transfer stored items between them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:15
msgid "To create a second warehouse, the *Storage Locations* feature must be enabled. To enable this feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations`, and :guilabel:`Save` changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:-1
msgid "Warning pop-up window for creating a second warehouse before enabling Storage Locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:25
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:97
msgid "Creating a second warehouse without first enabling the *Storage Locations* feature triggers a :guilabel:`Warning` pop-up window. It indicates creating a second warehouse automatically activates the *Storage Locations* setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:30
msgid "Create new warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:32
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:70
msgid "To create a new warehouse, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Doing so opens a blank warehouse creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:35
msgid "Fill out the following fields as necessary:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:37
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: the full name of the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:38
msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: the abbreviated code used to identify the warehouse, i.e. `WH2` (the short name for the default warehouse in Odoo is `WH`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:40
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company that owns the warehouse. This can be set as the company that owns the Odoo database or the company of a customer or vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Address`: the address where the warehouse is located. By default, this is set to the company's address in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out warehouse name and address settings on warehouse creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:49
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, configure the warehouse's main workflow in the :guilabel:`Shipments` section, and set available replenishment methods in the :guilabel:`Resupply` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:54
msgid "The :guilabel:`Shipments` and :guilabel:`Resupply` sections only appear if the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` checkbox is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading. For more information about routes and how they work in Odoo, see :ref:`Using Routes and Pull/Push Rules <use-routes>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:59
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Shipments` section, choose between one, two, or three-step processes for both incoming and outgoing shipments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:62
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Resupply` section, edit the following settings:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:64
msgid ":guilabel:`Dropship Subcontractors`: enable this feature to coordinate with vendors, and have components dropshipped directly to subcontractors for manufacturing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Resupply Subcontractors`: allow subcontractors to be resupplied with goods from this warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture to Resupply`: when products are manufactured, they can be delivered to this warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture`: the route that should be followed when manufacturing goods inside the warehouse. Choose from one, two, and three-step production."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:72
msgid ":guilabel:`Buy to Resupply`: when products are purchased, they can be delivered to this warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:73
msgid ":guilabel:`Resupply From`: Check the box next to the other warehouses from which this warehouse can replenish products. If the current warehouse does not have the stock, it can also pull products from these selected warehouses in the database. Automatic resupply routes will be created accordingly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out Warehouse Configuration tab settings on warehouse creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:82
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the new warehouse's settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:85
msgid "Add inventory to a new warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:87
msgid "If a new warehouse is created to represent a real-world storage location with existing stock, update the warehouse's stock using an inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:91
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:123
msgid ":doc:`count_products`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:93
msgid "To perform an inventory adjustment, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Physical Inventory`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Doing so adds a new line at the bottom of the list of inventory adjustments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:97
msgid "Configure the line by filling out the following fields as necessary:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:99
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the location where the product is currently stored in the new warehouse. This can be set as the overall warehouse, or a location within the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:101
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product being added to inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:102
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: the lot that the product belongs to or the serial number used to identify it, if the product is tracked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:104
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`: the total quantity of the product stored in the location for which inventory is being adjusted. For a new warehouse or location where a count or a prior inventory adjustment has not taken place, this should be set to `0.00`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:107
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the unit of measure (UoM) used for counting the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:108
msgid ":guilabel:`Counted Quantity`: the amount of the product being added to inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:109
msgid ":guilabel:`Difference`: the difference between the on-hand and counted quantities. This automatically updates to reflect the value entered in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:111
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date selected for the next inventory count for this product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:112
msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the user who recorded the inventory adjustment in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out inventory adjustment line for product in new warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:118
msgid "Once each line for the products being added to the new warehouse is configured, click :guilabel:`Apply` on each line to apply the new inventory counts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:121
msgid "The values in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` column update to reflect those in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column, and the products added appear in the new warehouse's stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:125
msgid "If products tracked using a lot number or serial number are added without specifying the tracking number, a :guilabel:`Tracked Products in Inventory Adjustment` pop-up window appears upon clicking :guilabel:`Apply` on that product's line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:129
msgid "The pop-up indicates tracked products were added, but the lots/serial numbers were not defined. To apply the adjustment without the numbers, click :guilabel:`Apply`. To add the numbers before applying, click :guilabel:`Discard`, and add the numbers. Then, once ready, click :guilabel:`Apply` again."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:0
msgid "Tracked Products in Inventory Adjustment pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse.rst:139
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:118
msgid ":doc:`warehouses_locations`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:3
msgid "Cycle counts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:5
msgid "For most companies, warehouse stock only needs to be counted once a year. This is why, by default, after making an *inventory adjustment* in Odoo, the scheduled date for the next inventory count is set for the 31st of December of the current year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:9
msgid "However, for some businesses, it's crucial to have an accurate inventory count at all times. These companies use *cycle counts* to keep critical stock levels accurate. Cycle counting is a method by which companies count their inventory more often in certain *locations*, to ensure that their physical inventory counts match their inventory records."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:17
msgid "In Odoo, cycle counts are performed by location. Therefore, the *Storage Locations* feature needs to be enabled before performing a cycle count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:20
msgid "To enable this feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Then, tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations`, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Storage Locations setting in inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:29
msgid "Change inventory count frequency by location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:31
msgid "Once the *Storage Locations* feature is enabled, and there are multiple locations created in the warehouse, the inventory count frequency can be changed for specific locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:34
msgid "To view and edit locations, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`. This reveals a :guilabel:`Locations` page containing every location currently created and listed in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:38
msgid "From this page, click into a location to reveal the settings and configuration page for that location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:41
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Cyclic Counting` section, locate the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field, which should be set to `0` by default (if this location has not been edited previously). In this field, change the value to any number of days desired for the frequency of counts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Location frequency setting on location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:50
msgid "A location that needs an inventory count every 30 days should have the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` value set to `30`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:53
msgid "Now, once an inventory adjustment is applied to this location, the next scheduled count date is automatically set, based on the value entered into the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:57
msgid "Count inventory by location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:59
msgid "To perform a cycle count for a specific location in the warehouse, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Physical Inventory`. This reveals an :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page containing all products currently in-stock, with each product listed on its own line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:64
msgid "From this page, the :guilabel:`Filters` and :guilabel:`Group By` options (accessible by clicking the :guilabel:`⬇️ (down arrow)` icon, to the right of the :guilabel:`Search...` bar), can be used to select specific locations and perform inventory counts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:68
msgid "To select a specific location, and view all products within that location, click the :guilabel:`⬇️ (down arrow)` icon, to the right of the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, in the :guilabel:`Group By` column, click :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` to reveal a new drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Filters and Group By menu on Inventory Adjustments page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:76
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Location` from the drop-down menu. Doing so sorts products into their storage locations on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page, and a cycle count can be performed for all products in that location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:81
msgid "In large warehouses with multiple locations and a high volume of products, it might be easier to search for the specific location desired. To do this, from the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page, click the :guilabel:`⬇️ (down arrow)` icon to the right of the :guilabel:`Search...` bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:85
msgid "Then, in the :guilabel:`Filters` column, click :guilabel:`Add Custom Filter` to open an :guilabel:`Add Custom Filter` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:88
msgid "In the first field, click the value and select :guilabel:`Location` from the list of options. Select :guilabel:`contains` in the second field. In the third field, type in the name of the location being searched for."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:92
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Add` for that location to appear on the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:0
msgid "Add Custom Filter pop-up window with location values entered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:99
msgid "Change full inventory count frequency"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:101
msgid "While cycle counts are typically performed per location, the scheduled date for full inventory counts of all in-stock products in the warehouse can also be manually changed, to push the date up sooner than the date listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:105
msgid "To modify the default scheduled date, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Operations` section, locate the :guilabel:`Annual Inventory Day and Month` setting field, which includes a drop-down field that is set to `31` :guilabel:`December`, by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Frequency field in inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:114
msgid "To change the day, click the `31`, and change it to a day within the range `1-31`, depending on the desired month of the year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:120
msgid "Once all necessary changes have been made, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/cycle_counts.rst:124
msgid ":doc:`use_locations`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:3
msgid "Resupply from another warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:5
msgid "A common use case for multiple warehouses is to have one central warehouse that resupplies multiple shops, and in this case, each shop is considered a local warehouse. When a shop wants to replenish a product, the product is ordered to the central warehouse. Odoo allows the user to easily set which warehouse(s) can resupply another warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:13
msgid "To resupply from another warehouse, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse` and activate :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Multi-Step Routes in Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:21
msgid "View all the configured warehouses by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:24
msgid "Create a new warehouse by clicking :guilabel:`Create`. Then, give the warehouse a name and a :guilabel:`Short Name`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:27
msgid "After that, go back to the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and open the warehouse that will be resupplied by the second warehouse. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit`. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, locate the :guilabel:`Resupply From` field, and check the box next to the second warehouse's name. If the warehouse can be resupplied by more than one warehouse, make sure to check those warehouses' boxes too. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting. Now, Odoo knows which warehouses can resupply this warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Supply one warehouse with another in the Warehouse Configuration tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:39
msgid "Set route on a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:41
msgid "After configuring which warehouse(s) to resupply from, a new route is now available on all product forms. The new route appears as :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on a product form. Use the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route with a reordering rule or the make to order (MTO) route to replenish stock by moving the product from one warehouse to another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Route setting which enables a product to resupplied from a second warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:51
msgid "When a product's reordering rule is triggered and the product has the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route set, Odoo automatically creates two pickings. One picking is a *delivery order* from the second warehouse, which contains all the necessary products, and the second picking is a *receipt* with the same products for the main warehouse. The product move from the second warehouse to the main warehouse is fully tracked in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:57
msgid "On the picking/transfer records created by Odoo, the :guilabel:`Source Document` is the product's reordering rule. The location between the delivery order and the receipt is a transit location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A reordering rule automatically creates two receipts for stock between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A warehouse order for resupplying one warehouse's stock with another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A receipt for stock received to one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:3
msgid "Scrap inventory"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:8
msgid "Sometimes, products in a company's warehouse stock might be found to be damaged or defective, past the point of being reparable. If it is not possible to repair the product, or return the product to a vendor, it can be scrapped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:12
msgid "Odoo *Inventory* allows users to scrap inventory, designating goods or materials that are no longer usable or sellable for disposal (or recycling)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:15
msgid "Scrapping inventory in a database helps stock counts remain accurate, by removing scrapped products from physical inventory, and placing it in a virtual scrap location (*Virtual Locations/Scrap*)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:19
msgid "*Virtual locations* in Odoo are **not** real, physical spaces in a warehouse. Rather, they are designated locations in a database that provide tracking of items that shouldn't be counted in a physical inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:23
msgid "For more information about virtual locations, see the documentation about the different types of :ref:`locations <inventory/warehouses_storage/difference-warehouse-location>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:29
msgid "To use locations in warehouse, including a virtual scrap location, the *Storage Locations* feature must first be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:32
msgid "To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations` to enable the feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Storage Locations setting in Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:41
msgid "Scrap from stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:43
msgid "To create a new scrap order (SP) for an in-stock product, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Scrap`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a new |SP| form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:46
msgid "Click the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` field, and select the product that should be scrapped from inventory. In the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, change the value to the quantity of the product that should be scrapped (by default, this value is set to `1.00`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "Filled out new scrap order form with product details."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:54
msgid "The :guilabel:`Source Location` defaults to the location where the product is currently stored. The :guilabel:`Scrap Location` defaults to the designated scrap location (:guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap`). Either of these locations can be changed by selecting a different location from their respective drop-down menus."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:59
msgid "If the scrapping is tied to a specific existing operation, specify the operation in the :guilabel:`Source Document` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:62
msgid "The :guilabel:`Company` field displays the company whose warehouse this product belongs to. If a replenishment rule is set up for the product being scrapped, and if the product should be replenished, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`Replenish Quantities`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:66
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the new |SP|. Once validated, a :guilabel:`Product Moves` smart button appears at the top of the form. Click the smart button to view the details of the scrap operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "Product Moves smart button on new scrap order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:75
msgid "To view the all-time total quantities of scrapped items, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`. Click the :guilabel:`x (remove)` button on the :guilabel:`Internal` filter in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, to display virtual locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:79
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap` location. From the :guilabel:`Scrap` location's form, click the :guilabel:`Current Stock` smart button, at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:82
msgid "A list of all scrapped products, and their quantities, is displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:0
msgid "Current Stock list of all scrapped products in virtual scrap location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:89
msgid "Scrap from an existing operation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:91
msgid "Scrap orders (SPs) can *also* be created from existing operations, such as receipts, delivery orders, and internal transfers, before they are entered into, or removed from, stock for an operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:95
msgid "To scrap a product during an operation, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory app`. From the :guilabel:`Inventory Overview`, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation's task card (i.e. the :guilabel:`Receipts` task card)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "# To Process button on Receipts task card on Inventory Overview page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:103
msgid "Then, select an operation to process from the resulting list of existing orders. Doing so opens that operation's form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:106
msgid "Click the :icon:`fa-cog` :guilabel:`(cog)` icon, and select :guilabel:`Scrap` from the resulting drop-down menu. This opens a :guilabel:`Scrap Products` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "Scrap Products pop-up window on operation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:113
msgid "From this pop-up window, click the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` field, and select the products from the operation that should be scrapped. Adjust the value in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:117
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Product` selected is tracked using a lot or serial number, a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial` field appears. Specify the tracking number in that field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:120
msgid "The :guilabel:`Source Location` and :guilabel:`Scrap Location` can be changed, if needed. If a replenishment rule is set up for the product being scrapped, and if the product should be replenished, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`Replenish Quantities`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:124
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Scrap Products`. A :guilabel:`Scraps` smart button appears at the top of the operation form. Click this smart button to view the details of all scrap orders created from this specific operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory.rst:-1
msgid "Scraps smart button showing all scrap orders from operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:3
msgid "Locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, a *location* is a specific space within a warehouse. This can be a shelf, room, aisle, rack, bin, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:8
msgid "There are also external and virtual locations. For example, customer locations, and locations specifically designated as \"virtual\", instead of real, physical locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:11
msgid "Locations allow for the storage of products in designated areas of the warehouse, to help track inventory accurately."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:17
msgid "To specify storage locations, the *Storage Locations* setting must be enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Storage Locations` to enable the feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Storage Location setting in Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:26
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is enabled, two additional internal link options appear below it: :guilabel:`Locations` and :guilabel:`Putaway Rules`. Click :guilabel:`Locations` to open a list of all existing locations in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:31
msgid "Create a new location inside a warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:33
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:104
msgid "To create a new location inside a warehouse, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`. Doing so opens a list of all existing locations. Click :guilabel:`New` to open a new location creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:108
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Location Name` field, assign a name for the new location. In the :guilabel:`Parent Location` field, assign the location that this new location exists in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:41
msgid "A new location `Gate 1` is created. Its parent location is `Dispatch Zone`. In the :guilabel:`Parent Location` for `Gate 1`, select `Dispatch Zone`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:44
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Additional Information` section, fill out the necessary details for the new location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:47
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Location Type` field, select which type of location this is. There are seven different types of locations to choose from:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:50
msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor Location`: virtual location representing the source location for products coming from vendors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:52
msgid ":guilabel:`View`: virtual location used to create a hierarchical structure for a warehouse; aggregates its child locations. **Should not directly contain products**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`Internal Location`: physical location inside a warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Customer Location`: virtual location representing the destination location for products sent to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:57
msgid ":guilabel:`Inventory Loss`: virtual location serving as a counterpart for inventory operations. Used to correct stock levels of physical inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:59
msgid ":guilabel:`Production`: virtual counterpart location for production operations. This location consumes components and produces finished products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:61
msgid ":guilabel:`Transit Location`: counterpart location that should be used in inter-company or inter-warehouse operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Additional Information section of new location creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:68
msgid "Configure the remaining fields in the :guilabel:`Additional Information` section as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company whose warehouse the location is inside of. Leave this field blank if this location is shared between companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:72
msgid ":guilabel:`Is a Scrap Location?`: tick this checkbox to allow for scrapped/damaged goods to be stored in this location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:74
msgid ":guilabel:`Is a Return Location?`: tick this checkbox to allow products to be returned to this location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:76
msgid ":guilabel:`Barcode`: the barcode assigned to the location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:77
msgid ":guilabel:`Replenish Location`: tick this checkbox to get all quantities to replenish at this location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:80
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Cyclic Counting` section, change the value in the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field from the default `0`, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Cyclic Counting section of new location creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:87
msgid "When different than `0`, the inventory count dates for products stored at this location are automatically set at the defined frequency."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:90
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, in the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` field, click the drop-down menu and select the :doc:`removal strategy <../removal_strategies>` for how items should be removed from this location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:97
msgid "Create location hierarchies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:99
msgid "The *Parent Location* setting on the new location form allows for a location to exist within a warehouse, or below another location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:102
msgid "Every location can serve as a parent location, and every parent location can have multiple locations within it, allowing for the creation of a hierarchical structure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:106
msgid "Location hierarchy could be organized so that a small refrigerator is located on a specific shelf, which is located in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Location hierarchy of small refrigerator, on a shelf in a warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_locations.rst:113
msgid "To create the location hierarchy in the example above (`WH/Stock/Shelf 2/Small Refrigerator`), set the warehouse stock as the parent of the shelf, and the shelf as the parent of the small refrigerator. This can be adapted to a hierarchy of any magnitude."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:5
msgid "Routes and push/pull rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:7
msgid "In inventory management, the supply chain strategy determines when products should be purchased/manufactured, delivered to distribution centers, and made available to the retail channel."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, a product's supply chain strategy can be configured using *Routes*, which feature *Pull and Push Rules*. Once everything is properly configured, the Inventory app can automatically generate transfers following the configured push/pull rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:16
msgid "Inside the warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:18
msgid "In a generic warehouse, there are receiving docks, a quality control area, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping docks. All products go through all these locations. As the products move through the locations, each location triggers the products' specified route and rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic warehouse with stock and quality control area."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:27
msgid "In this example, vendor trucks unload pallets of ordered products at the receiving docks. Operators then scan the products in the receiving area. Depending on the product's route and rules, some of these products are sent to a quality control area (for example, products that are components used in the manufacturing process), while others are directly stored in their respective locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic push to rule when receiving products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:36
msgid "Here is an example of a fulfillment route. In the morning, items are picked for all the orders that need to be prepared during the day. These items are picked from storage locations and moved to the picking area, close to where the orders are packed. Then, the orders are packed in their respective boxes, and conveyor belts bring them to the shipping docks, ready to be delivered to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic pull from rule when preparing deliveries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:46
msgid "Pull rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:48
msgid "With *Pull Rules*, a demand for some products triggers procurements, while *Push Rules* are triggered by products arriving in a specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:51
msgid "Pull Rules are used to fulfill a sales order. Odoo generates a need at the *Customer Location* for each product in the order. Because pull rules are triggered by a need, Odoo looks for a pull rule defined on the *Customer Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:55
msgid "In this case, a \"delivery order\" pull rule that transfers products from the *Shipping Area* to the *Customer Location* is found, and a transfer between the two locations is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:58
msgid "Then, Odoo finds another pull rule that tries to fulfill the need for the *Shipping Area*: the \"packing\" rule that transfers products from the *Packing Area* to the *Shipping Area*. Finally, other pull rules are triggered until a transfer between the *Stock* and the *Picking Area* is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:64
msgid "All these product transfers are automatically generated by Odoo based on the pull rules, starting from the end (the customer location) and going backward (the stock warehouse). While working, the operator processes these transfers in the opposite order: first the picking, then the packing, and finally the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:70
msgid "Push rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:72
msgid "On the other hand, *Push Rules* are much easier to understand. Instead of generating documents based on needs, they are triggered in real time when products arrive in a specific location. Push rules basically say: \"when a product arrives at a specific location, move it to another location.\""
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:76
msgid "An example of a push rule would be: when a product arrives in the *Receipt Area*, move it to the *Storage Location*. As different push rules can be applied to different products, the user can assign different storage locations for different products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:80
msgid "Another push rule could be: when products arrive at a location, move them to the *Quality Control Area*. Then, once the quality check is done, move them to their *Storage Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:84
msgid "Push rules can only be triggered if there are no pull rules that have already generated the product transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:88
msgid "Sets of push/pull rules like those are called *Routes*. The grouping on the rule decides if products are grouped in the same transfer or not. For example, during the picking operation, all orders and their products are grouped in one transfer, whereas the packing operation respects the grouping per customer order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:96
msgid "Use routes and rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:98
msgid "Since *Routes* are a collection of *Push and Pull Rules*, Odoo helps you manage advanced route configurations such as:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:101
msgid "Manage product manufacturing chains."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:102
msgid "Manage default locations per product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:103
msgid "Define routes within the stock warehouse according to business needs, such as quality control, after-sales services, or supplier returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:105
msgid "Help rental management by generating automated return moves for rented products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:107
msgid "To configure a route for a product, first, open the :guilabel:`Inventory` application and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, enable the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Activate the Multi-Step Routes feature in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:116
msgid "The :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is automatically activated with the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:119
msgid "Once this first step is completed, the user can use pre-configured routes that come with Odoo, or they can create custom routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:123
msgid "Pre-configured routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:125
msgid "To access Odoo's pre-configured routes, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`. Then, open a warehouse form. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, the user can view the warehouse's pre-configured routes for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "A pre-configured warehouse in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:134
msgid "Some more advanced routes, such as pick-pack-ship, are also available. The user can select the route that best fits their business needs. Once the :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments` routes are set, head to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` to see the specific routes that Odoo generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of all the preconfigured routes Odoo offers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:143
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Routes` page, click on a route to open the route form. In the route form, the user can view which places the route is :guilabel:`Applicable On`. The user can also set the route to only apply on a specific :guilabel:`Company`. This is useful for multi-company environments; for example, a user can have a company and warehouse in Country A and a second company and warehouse in Country B."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a route example applicable on product categories and warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:153
msgid "At the bottom of the route form, the user can view the specific :guilabel:`Rules` for the route. Each :guilabel:`Rule` has an :guilabel:`Action`, a :guilabel:`Source Location`, and a :guilabel:`Destination Location`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "An example of rules with push & pull actions in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:162
msgid "Custom Routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:164
msgid "To create a custom route, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`, and click on :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose the places where this route can be selected. A route can be applicable on a combination of places."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a pick-pack-ship route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:172
msgid "Each place has a different behavior, so it is important to tick only the useful ones and adapt each route accordingly. Then, configure the :guilabel:`Rules` of the route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:175
msgid "If the route is applicable on a product category, the route still needs to be manually set on the product category form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. Then, select the product category and open the form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, set the :guilabel:`Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:180
msgid "When applying the route on a product category, all the rules configured in the route are applied to **every** product in the category. This can be helpful if the business uses the dropshipping process for all the products from the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a route applied to the \"all\" product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:188
msgid "The same behavior applies to the warehouses. If the route can apply to :guilabel:`Warehouses`, all the transfers occurring inside the chosen warehouse that meet the conditions of the route's rules will then follow that route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the warehouse drop-down menu when selecting applicable on warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:196
msgid "If the route is applicable on :guilabel:`Sales Order Lines`, it is more or less the opposite. The route must be manually chosen when creating a quotation. This is useful if some products go through different routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:200
msgid "Remember to toggle the visibility of the :guilabel:`Route` column on the quotation/sales order. Then, the route can be chosen on each line of the quotation/sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the menu allowing to add new lines to sales orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:207
msgid "Finally, there are routes that can be applied to products. Those work more or less like the product categories: once selected, the route must be manually set on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:210
msgid "To set a route on a product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select the desired product. Then, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, select the :guilabel:`Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a product form, where the route must be selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:219
msgid "Rules must be set on the route in order for the route to work."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:222
msgid "Rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:224
msgid "The rules are defined on the route form. First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` and open the desired route form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and in the :guilabel:`Rules` section, click on :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the rules menu, where it is possible to add new rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:232
msgid "The available rules trigger various actions. If Odoo offers *Push* and *Pull* rules, others are also available. Each rule has an :guilabel:`Action`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:235
msgid ":guilabel:`Pull From`: this rule is triggered by a need for the product in a specific location. The need can come from a sales order being validated or from a manufacturing order requiring a specific component. When the need appears in the destination location, Odoo generates a picking to fulfill this need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:239
msgid ":guilabel:`Push To`: this rule is triggered by the arrival of some products in the defined source location. In the case of the user moving products to the source location, Odoo generates a picking to move those products to the destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:242
msgid ":guilabel:`Pull & Push`: this rule allows the generation of pickings in the two situations explained above. This means that when products are required at a specific location, a transfer is created from the previous location to fulfill that need. This creates a need in the previous location and a rule is triggered to fulfill it. Once the second need is fulfilled, the products are pushed to the destination location and all the needs are fulfilled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:247
msgid ":guilabel:`Buy`: when products are needed at the destination location, a request for quotation is created to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:249
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture`: when products are needed in the source location, a manufacturing order is created to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of a \"Pull From\" rule that creates a transfer between the stock and the packing\n"
"zone."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:257
msgid "The :guilabel:`Operation Type` must also be defined on the rule. This defines which kind of picking is created from the rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:260
msgid "If the rule's :guilabel:`Action` is set to :guilabel:`Pull From` or :guilabel:`Pull & Push`, a :guilabel:`Supply Method` must be set. The :guilabel:`Supply Method` defines what happens at the source location:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:264
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:266
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: the system tries to find a stock rule to bring the products to the source location. The available stock is ignored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:268
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock, if Unavailable, Trigger Another Rule`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location. If there is no stock available, the system tries to find a rule to bring the products to the source location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:273
msgid "Example flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:275
msgid "In this example, let's use a custom *Pick - Pack - Ship* route to try a full flow with an advanced custom route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:278
msgid "First, a quick look at the route's rules and their supply methods. There are three rules, all :guilabel:`Pull From` rules. The :guilabel:`Supply Methods` for each rule are the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:281
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: When products are needed in the :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`, *picks* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:284
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`WH/Output`, *packs* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to :guilabel:`WH/Output`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:287
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`Partner Locations/Customers`, *delivery orders* are created from :guilabel:`WH/Output` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of all the transfers created by the pick - pack - ship route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:295
msgid "This means that, when a customer orders products that have a *pick - pack - ship* route set on it, a delivery order is created to fulfill the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the operations created by a pull from transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:303
msgid "If the source document for multiple tranfers is the same sales order, the status is not the same. The status will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation` if the previous transfer in the list is not done yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the transfers' various statuses at the beginning of the process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:311
msgid "To prepare the delivery order, packed products are needed at the output area, so an internal transfer is requested from the packing zone."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the packing and output zones."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:318
msgid "Obviously, the packing zone needs products ready to be packed. So, an internal transfer is requested to the stock and employees can gather the required products from the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the stock and packing zones."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:325
msgid "As explained in the introduction of the documentation, the last step in the process (for this route, the delivery order) is the first to be triggered, which then triggers other rules until we reach the first step in the process (here, the internal transfer from the stock to the packing area). Now, everything is ready to be processed so the customer can get the ordered items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:330
msgid "In this example, the product is delivered to the customer when all the rules have been triggered and the transfers are done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the transfers' statuses when the route is completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:3
msgid "Transfer products between warehouses using replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:5
msgid "For companies that use multiple warehouses, it is often necessary to transfer items between them. This is referred to as an *inter-warehouse transfer*. Odoo *Inventory* handles the administrative process of inter-warehouse transfers to ensure that inventory counts remain accurate during and after the transfer. This document will detail the method for conducting an inter-warehouse transfer using replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:12
msgid "Configure warehouses for inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:14
msgid "First, ensure the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting is enabled by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and then check the box under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` tab. This will provide additional configuration options when creating a second warehouse that are needed for inter-warehouse replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:19
msgid "By default, Odoo comes with a main warehouse already configured. If an additional warehouse has not already been created, do so now from the :guilabel:`Inventory` module by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses --> Create`. Otherwise, select the warehouse that products will be transferred to from the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and then click :guilabel:`Edit` to change its settings. Configure the warehouse as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:25
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: choose a name that is not already being used for another warehouse (e.g. `Alternative Warehouse`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: choose a short name by which the warehouse will be identified (e.g. `ALT_WH`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:30
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Save` and the new warehouse will be created. In addition, a new :guilabel:`Resupply From` field will appear on the warehouse's form. Click :guilabel:`Edit` and then check the box next to the warehouse that will be used to resupply the warehouse that is currently being configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "A warehouse settings form configured to allow resupplying between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:39
msgid "For the purposes of this demonstration, the warehouse that products are transferred from (outgoing) will be titled \"San Francisco\", and the warehouse that products are transferred to (incoming) will be titled \"San Francisco 2\"."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:44
msgid "Configure products for inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:46
msgid "Products must also be configured properly in order for them to be transferred between warehouses. Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select an existing product or :guilabel:`Create` a new one, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:50
msgid "Then, on the product form, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the checkbox for :guilabel:`X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse receiving the transferred products and *Y* being the warehouse that products are transferred from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the checkbox to resupply one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:59
msgid "Replenish one warehouse from another"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:61
msgid "Starting in the :menuselection:`Inventory` module, select :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then choose the product that will be replenished. Click the :guilabel:`Replenish` button on the top left of the product page and fill out the pop-up form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: the number of units that will be sent to the warehouse being replenished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date that the replenishment is scheduled to take place"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:67
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: the warehouse that will be replenished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Preferred Routes`: select `X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse to be replenished and *Y* being the warehouse that the product will be transferred from"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "The form for replenishing a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:75
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm` and a delivery order will be created for the outgoing warehouse along with a receipt for the warehouse that will receive the product. Depending on the configuration settings for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, processing delivery orders and receipts will require between one and three steps. This document will detail how to process one-step deliveries and receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:82
msgid "Process the delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:84
msgid "The first stage of a replenishment order is processing the delivery from the warehouse that the product is being transferred from. On the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card for the outgoing warehouse, then the delivery order created for the replenishment. On the delivery order page, click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button in the top left to reserve the quantity of the product to be transferred. Once the delivery has been dispatched, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to register the quantities shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "The delivery orders card for the outgoing warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:97
msgid "Process the receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:99
msgid "Once the goods arrive at the incoming warehouse, the receipt created for that warehouse must be processed as well. Return to the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard and select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Receipts` card for the incoming warehouse, then the receipt created for the replenishment. On the receipt page, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button in the top left of the page to register the quantities received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:109
msgid "After processing the receipt, the products transferred will now appear in the inventory of the incoming warehouse. The stock numbers for both warehouses can be viewed by returning to the product page and selecting the :guilabel:`X Units On Hand` button at the top of the screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:114
msgid "Automate inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:116
msgid "Using reordering rules, it is possible to automate the process of replenishing one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:119
msgid "To get started, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, and then choose the product that will be replenished. From the product page, select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button at the top of the form, and then on the next page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure the form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:124
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the location that the reordering rule will replenish when triggered, in this case, the incoming warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: when the quantity on hand at the incoming warehouse falls below this number, the reordering rule will be triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:128
msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: when the reordering rule is triggered, the product will be replenished at the incoming warehouse up to this quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:130
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: specify if the product should be replenished in batches of a certain quantity; for example, a product could be replenished in batches of 20"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:132
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the unit of measure used for reordering the product; this value can simply be `Units`, or a specific unit of measurement for weight, length, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "A fully configured reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:139
msgid "Finish by clicking :guilabel:`Save` and the reordering rule will be created. Now, when the scheduler runs automatically each day, a transfer will be created for each reordering rule that has been triggered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:144
msgid "To manually trigger reordering rules, start from the :menuselection:`Inventory` module and select :menuselection:`Operation --> Run Scheduler`, then click the green :guilabel:`Run Scheduler` button in the pop-up that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:148
msgid "After the scheduler runs, a delivery order and receipt will be created for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, respectively. Both the delivery order and receipt should be processed using the same method as detailed above."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:3
msgid "Manage warehouses and locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:9
msgid "Warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:15
msgid "Multiple warehouses can be set up in Odoo, and stock moves can be created between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:22
msgid "In Odoo *Inventory*, a *location* is a specific space within a warehouse. This can be a shelf, room, aisle, rack, bin, etc. Locations allow for the storage of products in designated areas of the warehouse, to help track inventory accurately."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:26
msgid "A location is only part of *one* warehouse, and can **not** be linked to multiple warehouses. As many locations can be configured as needed under one warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:29
msgid "There are three types of locations in Odoo *Inventory*:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:31
msgid "**Physical Locations**: internal locations within a single warehouse owned by the company. This can include shipping and loading docks, aisles, shelves, storage areas, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:33
msgid "**Partner Locations**: external locations, such as designated spaces in a customer or vendor's warehouse. They are similar to physical locations, but they are **not** owned by the user's company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:36
msgid "**Virtual Locations**: this type of location does not exist as a physical space, but products can be \"stored\" here when they are not physically in an inventory yet. *Inventory Loss* and *Procurements* are examples of virtual locations, for products that are lost or in transit to the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:41
msgid "Every location within a warehouse can serve as a parent location, and every parent location can have multiple locations within it, allowing for the creation of a hierarchical structure. This allows for more detailed levels of analysis of the stock operations and the organization of the warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:48
msgid "For companies with one warehouse, no additional settings are required to activate before editing the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:51
msgid "For companies with multiple warehouses, and to create locations within a warehouse, the *Storage Locations* feature must be enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:54
msgid "To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section. Tick the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` checkbox to enable the feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Storage Locations feature enabled in the Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:63
msgid "To manage warehouse *routes*, such as two-and-three-step receipts and deliveries, enable the *Multi-Step Routes* feature from the *Inventory* app settings, as well. For more on routes, see :doc:`use_routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:68
msgid "Create a new warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:73
msgid "Begin by assigning a :guilabel:`Warehouse Name`, and a :guilabel:`Short Name`. The :guilabel:`Short Name` field is limited to a **five** character maximum."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "New warehouse creation form name configuration fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:81
msgid "The :guilabel:`Short Name` appears on transfer orders and other warehouse documents. Odoo recommends using an understandable one like `WH/[first letters of location]`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:84
msgid "For example, a warehouse named `Warehouse #2` might have the :guilabel:`Short Name` `WH2` (the short name for the default warehouse in Odoo is `WH`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:87
msgid "Once the warehouse is created, navigate back to the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard. New operations for the newly created warehouse are automatically generated there."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:90
msgid "For more on creating new warehouses, see :doc:`create_a_second_warehouse`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory app dashboard displaying new transfers for the new warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:102
msgid "Create a new location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:111
msgid "For more on locations, see :doc:`use_locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "New warehouse location creation form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:123
msgid "Inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:3
msgid "Landed costs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:12
msgid "When shipping products to customers, the landed cost is the total price of a product or shipment, including all expenses associated with shipping the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:15
msgid "In Odoo, the *Landed Costs* feature is used to take additional costs into account when calculating the valuation of a product. This includes the cost of shipment, insurance, customs duties, taxes, and other fees."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:22
msgid "To add landed costs to products, the *Landed Costs* feature must first be enabled. To enable this feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll to the :guilabel:`Valuation` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:26
msgid "Tick the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` option, and click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:29
msgid "Once the page refreshes, a new :guilabel:`Default Journal` field appears below the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` feature in the :guilabel:`Valuation` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:32
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Default Journal` drop-down menu to reveal a list of accounting journals. Select a journal for which all accounting entries related to landed costs should be recorded."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Landed Costs feature and resulting Default Journal field in the Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:40
msgid "Create landed cost product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:42
msgid "For charges that are consistently added as landed costs, a landed cost product can be created in Odoo. This way, a landed cost product can be quickly added to a vendor bill as an invoice line, instead of having to be manually entered every time a new vendor bill is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:46
msgid "To do this, create a new product by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:49
msgid "Assign a name to the landed cost product in the :guilabel:`Product Name` field (i.e. `International Shipping`). In the :guilabel:`Product Type` field, click the drop-down menu, and select :guilabel:`Service` as the :guilabel:`Product Type`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:54
msgid "Landed cost products **must** have their :guilabel:`Product Type` set to :guilabel:`Service`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:56
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Is a Landed Cost` in the :guilabel:`Vendor Bills` section. Once ticked, a new :guilabel:`Default Split Method` field appears below it, prompting a selection. Clicking that drop-down menu reveals the following options:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:60
msgid ":guilabel:`Equal`: splits the cost equally across each product included in the receipt, regardless of the quantity of each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:62
msgid ":guilabel:`By Quantity`: splits the cost across each unit of all products in the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:63
msgid ":guilabel:`By Current Cost`: splits the cost according to the cost of each product unit, so a product with a higher cost receives a greater share of the landed cost."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`By Weight`: splits the cost, according to the weight of the products in the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`By Volume`: splits the cost, according to the volume of the products in the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Is a Landed Cost checkbox and Default Split Method on service type product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:72
msgid "When creating new vendor bills, this product can be added as an invoice line as a landed cost."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:75
msgid "To apply a landed cost on a vendor bill, the products included in the original |PO| **must** belong to a *Product Category* with its *Force Removal Strategy* set to |FIFO|, and its *Costing Method* set to |AVCO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:82
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> New` to create a new request for quotation (RfQ). In the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, add a vendor to order products from. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, under the :guilabel:`Products` tab, to add products to the |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:86
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the order. Then, click :guilabel:`Receive Products` once the products have been received, followed by :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:90
msgid "Create vendor bill"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:92
msgid "Once the vendor fulfills the |PO| and sends a bill, a vendor bill can be created from the |PO| in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:95
msgid "Navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase app`, and click into the |PO| for which a vendor bill should be created. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Bill`. This opens a new :guilabel:`Vendor Bill` in the :guilabel:`Draft` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:99
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field, click the line to open a calendar popover menu, and select the date on which this draft bill should be billed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:102
msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and click the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` column to select the previously created landed cost product. Click the :guilabel:`Save manually (cloud with arrow)` icon to update the draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Landed Costs column checkboxes for product and landed cost."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:110
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` column, the product ordered from the vendor does **not** have its checkbox ticked, while the landed cost product's checkbox **is** ticked. This differentiates landed costs from all other costs displayed on the bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:114
msgid "Additionally, at the top of the form, a :guilabel:`Create Landed Costs` button appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Create Landed Costs button on vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:121
msgid "Add landed cost"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:123
msgid "Once a landed cost is added to the vendor bill, click :guilabel:`Create Landed Costs` at the top of the vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:126
msgid "Doing so automatically creates a landed cost record, with a set landed cost pre-filled in the product line in the :guilabel:`Additional Costs` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:129
msgid "From the :guilabel:`Landed Cost` form, click the :guilabel:`Transfers` drop-down menu, and select which transfer the landed cost belongs to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Landed cost form with selected receipt transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:137
msgid "In addition to creating landed costs directly from a vendor bill, landed cost records can *also* be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Landed Costs`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:141
msgid "After setting the picking from the :guilabel:`Transfers` drop-down menu, click :guilabel:`Compute` (at the bottom of the form, under the :guilabel:`Total:` cost)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:144
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Valuation Adjustments` tab to see the impact of the landed costs. The :guilabel:`Original Value` column lists the original price of the |PO|, the :guilabel:`Additional Landed Cost` column displays the landed cost, and the :guilabel:`New Value` displays the sum of the two, for the total cost of the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:149
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Validate` to post the landed cost entry to the accounting journal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:151
msgid "This causes a :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button to appear at the top of the form. Click the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button to open a :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` page, with the product's updated valuation listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:156
msgid "For a :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button to appear upon validation, the product's :guilabel:`Product Type` **must** be set to :guilabel:`Storable`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:159
msgid "To view the valuation of *every* product, including landed costs, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Valuation`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:163
msgid "Each journal entry created for a landed cost on a vendor bill can be viewed in the *Accounting* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:166
msgid "To locate these journal entries, navigate to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Accounting --> Journal Entries`, and locate the correct entry, by number (i.e. `PBNK1/2024/XXXXX`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:169
msgid "Click into the journal entry to view the :guilabel:`Journal Items`, and other information about the entry."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/integrating_landed_costs.rst:0
msgid "Journal Entry form for landed cost created from vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:3
msgid "Inventory valuation configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:7
msgid "All of a company's stock on-hand contributes to the valuation of its inventory. That value should be reflected in the company's accounting records to accurately show the value of the company and all of its assets."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:11
msgid "By default, Odoo uses a periodic inventory valuation (also known as manual inventory valuation). This method implies that the accounting team posts journal entries based on the physical inventory of the company, and that warehouse employees take the time to count the stock. In Odoo, this method is reflected inside each product category, where the :guilabel:`Costing Method` field will be set to `Standard Price` by default, and the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field will be set to `Manual`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1
msgid "The Inventory Valuation fields are located on the Product Categories form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:21
msgid "Alternatively, automated inventory valuation is an integrated valuation method that updates the inventory value in real-time by creating journal entries whenever there are stock moves initiated between locations in a company's inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:26
msgid "Automated inventory valuation is a method recommended for expert accountants, given the extra steps involved in journal entry configuration. Even after the initial setup, the method will need to be periodically checked to ensure accuracy, and adjustments may be needed on an ongoing basis depending on the needs and priorities of the business."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:34
msgid "Types of accounting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:36
msgid "Accounting entries will depend on the accounting mode: *Continental* or *Anglo-Saxon*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:39
msgid "Verify the accounting mode by activating the :ref:`developer-mode` and navigating to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:42
msgid "Then, in the search bar, look for :guilabel:`Anglo-Saxon Accounting`, to see if the feature is enabled. If it is **not** enabled, Continental accounting mode is in use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
msgid "Show the Anglo-Saxon accounting mode feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:49
msgid "In *Anglo-Saxon* accounting, the costs of goods sold (COGS) are reported when products are sold or delivered. This means that the cost of a good is only recorded as an expense when a customer is invoiced for a product. So for **manual** valuation method, set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to `Stock Valuation` for the current asset type; for **automatic** valuation method, set the the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to an *Expenses* or a *Cost of Revenue* type (e.g. `Cost of Production`, `Cost of Goods Sold`, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:56
msgid "In *Continental* accounting, the cost of a good is reported as soon as a product is received into stock. Because of this, the :guilabel:`Expense Account` can be set to **either** *Expenses* or a *Cost of Revenue* type, however, it is more commonly set to an *Expenses* account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:61
msgid ":ref:`Details about configuring Expense and Stock accounts <inventory/management/config-inventory-valuation>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:67
msgid "Make changes to inventory valuation options by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` section, select the desired :guilabel:`Costing Method` and :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:72
msgid "It is possible to use different valuation settings for different product categories."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1
msgid "Show inventory valuation configuration options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:81
msgid "Costing method"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:83
msgid "From the product category's configuration page, choose the desired :guilabel:`Costing Method`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:85
msgid ":guilabel:`Standard Price`: the default costing method in Odoo. The cost of the product is manually defined on the product form, and this cost is used to compute the valuation. Even if the purchase price on a purchase order differs, the valuation will still use the cost defined on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:89
msgid ":guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)`: calculates the valuation of a product based on the average cost of that product, divided by the total number of available stock on-hand. With this costing method, inventory valuation is *dynamic*, and constantly adjusts based on the purchase price of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:94
msgid "When choosing :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)` as the :guilabel:`Costing Method`, changing the numerical value in the :guilabel:`Cost` field for products in the respective product category creates a new record in the *Inventory Valuation* report to adjust the value of the product. The :guilabel:`Cost` amount will then automatically update based on the average purchase price both of inventory on hand and the costs accumulated from validated purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:100
msgid ":guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)`: tracks the costs of incoming and outgoing items in real-time and uses the real price of the products to change the valuation. The oldest purchase price is used as the cost for the next good sold until an entire lot of that product is sold. When the next inventory lot moves up in the queue, an updated product cost is used based on the valuation of that specific lot. This method is arguably the most accurate inventory valuation method for a variety of reasons, however, it is highly sensitive to input data and human error."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:108
msgid "Changing the costing method greatly impacts inventory valuation. It is highly recommended to consult an accountant first before making any adjustments here."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:112
msgid ":doc:`using_inventory_valuation`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:114
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Costing Method` is changed, products already in stock that were using the :guilabel:`Standard` costing method **do not** change value; rather, the existing units keep their value, and any product moves from then on affect the average cost, and the cost of the product will change. If the value in the :guilabel:`Cost` field on a product form is changed manually, Odoo will generate a corresponding record in the *Inventory Valuation* report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:125
msgid "Inventory valuation in Odoo can be set to be updated manually or automatically. While *Expense* accounts apply to both, the *Stock Input* and *Stock Output* accounts are only used for automated valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:129
msgid "Refer to the :ref:`Expense <inventory/management/expense-account>` and :ref:`Stock input/output <inventory/management/stock-account>` sections for details on configuring each account type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:135
msgid "Expense account"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:137
msgid "To configure the *expense account*, go to the :guilabel:`Account Properties` section of the intended product category (:menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`). Then, choose an existing account from the :guilabel:`Expense Account` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:141
msgid "To ensure the chosen account is the correct :guilabel:`Type,` click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the account. Then, set the account type based on the information below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:146
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:214
msgid "Anglo-Saxon"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:150
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:177
msgid "Automated"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:152
msgid "In Anglo-Saxon accounting for automated inventory valuation, set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to the `Expenses` account. Then, click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:156
msgid "In the pop-up window, choose :guilabel:`Expenses` or :guilabel:`Cost of Revenue` from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
msgid "Show **Expense Account** field, and external link icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:165
msgid "To configure the :guilabel:`Expense Account`, choose :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` from the field's drop-down menu. Verify the account's type by clicking the |right arrow| icon, and then ensure the :guilabel:`Type` is :guilabel:`Current Assets`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
msgid "Show the **Expense Account** field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:173
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:232
msgid "Continental"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:179
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:184
msgid "Set the :guilabel:`Expense Account` to the :guilabel:`Expenses` or :guilabel:`Cost of Revenue` account type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:190
msgid "Stock input/output (automated only)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:192
msgid "To configure the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account`, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:196
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field, select :guilabel:`Automated`. Doing so makes the :guilabel:`Account Stock Properties` section appear. These accounts are defined as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:199
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account`: when automated inventory valuation is enabled on a product, this account will hold the current value of the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:201
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Journal`: accounting journal where entries are automatically posted when a product's inventory valuation changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:203
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Input Account`: counterpart journal items for all incoming stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the source location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:207
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Output Account`: counterpart journal items for all outgoing stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the destination location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:216
msgid "In Anglo-Saxon accounting, the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account` are set to *different* :guilabel:`Current Assets` accounts. This way, delivering products and invoicing the customer balance the *Stock Output* account, while receiving products and billing vendors balance the *Stock Input* account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:221
msgid "To modify the account type, go to the click the |right arrow| icon to the right of the stock input/output account. In the pop-up window, choose :guilabel:`Current Assets` from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
msgid "Display account setup page, highlighting the **Type** field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:229
msgid "The *Stock Input* account is set to `Stock Interim (Received)`, a *Current Asset* account type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:234
msgid "In Continental accounting, the :guilabel:`Stock Input Account` and :guilabel:`Stock Output Account` are set to **the same** :guilabel:`Current Assets` account. That way, one account can be balanced when items are bought and sold."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:239
msgid "The stock input and output accounts are both set to `Stock Interim (Received)`, a :guilabel:`Current Assets` account type. They can also be set to the `Stock Interim (Delivered)`, as long as the input and output accounts are assigned to the **same** account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:0
msgid "Show the Stock Input and Output accounts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:249
msgid "Inventory valuation reporting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:251
msgid "To start, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Reporting --> Balance Sheet`. At the top of the dashboard, change the :guilabel:`As of` field value to :guilabel:`Today`, and adjust the filtering :guilabel:`Options` to :guilabel:`Unfold All` in order to see all of the latest data displayed, all at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:257
msgid ":doc:`../../../../finance/accounting/get_started/cheat_sheet`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:259
msgid "Under the parent :guilabel:`Current Assets` line item, look for the nested :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` line item, where the total valuation of all of the inventory on hand is displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:263
msgid "Access more specific information with the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` drop-down menu, by selecting either the :guilabel:`General Ledger` to see an itemized view of all of the journal entries, or by selecting :guilabel:`Journal Items` to review all of the individualized journal entries that were submitted to the account. As well, annotations to the :guilabel:`Balance Sheet` can be added by choosing :guilabel:`Annotate`, filling in the text box, and clicking :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1
msgid "See the full inventory valuation breakdown in Odoo Accounting app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:3
msgid "Using inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:7
msgid "*Inventory valuation* is a quintessential accounting procedure that calculates the value of on-hand stock. Once determined, the inventory valuation amount is then incorporated into a company's overall value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, this process can be conducted manually— by warehouse employees physically counting the products— or automatically through the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:15
msgid "Automatic inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:17
msgid "To use Odoo to automatically generate a trail of inventory valuation entries, first navigate to the :menuselection:`Product Categories` list by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category. On the form, set the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` as :guilabel:`Automated` and the :guilabel:`Costing Method` to any of the three options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:24
msgid ":doc:`Set up inventory valuation <inventory_valuation_config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:26
msgid "In order to understand how moving products in and out of stock affects the company's overall value, consider the following product and stock moves scenario below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:30
msgid "Receive a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:32
msgid "To track the value of incoming products, such as a simple *table*, configure the product category on the the product itself. To get there, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products` and click the desired product. On the product form, click the :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` icon beside the :guilabel:`Product Category` field, which opens an internal link to edit the product category. Next, set the :guilabel:`Costing Method` as :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)` and :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` as :guilabel:`Automated`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:40
msgid "Alternatively access the :guilabel:`Product Categories` dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and select the desired product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:44
msgid "Next, assume 10 tables are purchased at a price of $10.00, each. The :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` for those tables will show the subtotal of the purchase as $100, plus any additional costs or taxes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase order with 10 tables products valued at $10.00 each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:51
msgid "After selecting :guilabel:`Validate` on the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`, the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button is enabled. Clicking on this button displays a report showing how the inventory valuation for the table was affected by this purchase."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:56
msgid ":ref:`Developer mode <developer-mode>` **must** be turned on to see the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:60
msgid "The :doc:`consignment </applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/advanced_operations_warehouse/owned_stock>` feature allows ownership to items in stock. Thus, products owned by other companies are not accounted for in the host company's inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "See Valuation smart button on a receipt, with Developer mode enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:68
msgid "For a comprehensive dashboard that includes the inventory valuation of all product shipments, inventory adjustments, and warehouse operations, refer to the :ref:`stock valuation report <inventory/management/reporting/valuation-report>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:73
msgid "Deliver a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:75
msgid "In the same logic, when a table is shipped to a customer and leaves the warehouse, the stock valuation decreases. The :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)`, likewise, displays the stock valuation record as it does on a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Decreased stock valuation after a product is shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:86
msgid "Inventory valuation report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:88
msgid "To view the current value of all products in the warehouse, first turn on :ref:`Developer mode <developer-mode>` and navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Valuation`. The :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard displays detailed records of products with the :guilabel:`Date`, :guilabel:`Quantity`, :guilabel:`Unit Value`, and :guilabel:`Total Value` of the inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:95
msgid ":ref:`Developer mode <developer-mode>` **must** be enabled to see the :guilabel:`Valuation` option under :guilabel:`Reporting`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory valuation report showing multiple products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:102
msgid "The :guilabel:`Valuation At Date` button, located in the top-left corner of the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` page, reveals a pop-up window. In this pop-up, the inventory valuation of products available during a prior specified date can be seen and selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:107
msgid "View a detailed record of a product's inventory value, stock move, and on-hand stock by selecting the teal :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` button to the right of the :guilabel:`Reference` column value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:112
msgid "Update product unit price"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:114
msgid "For any company: lead times, supply chain failures, and other risk factors can contribute to invisible costs. Although Odoo attempts to accurately represent the stock value, *manual valuation* serves as an additional tool to update the unit price of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:119
msgid "Manual valuation is intended for products that can be purchased and received for a cost greater than 0, or have product categories set with :guilabel:`Costing Method` set as either :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)` or :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Add manual valuation of stock value to a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:127
msgid "Create manual valuation entries on the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard by first navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Valuation`. Next, to enable the *product revaluation* feature, select :menuselection:`Group by --> Product` to organize all the records by product. Click on the gray :guilabel:`▶️ (drop-down triangle)` icon to reveal stock valuation line items below, as well as a teal :guilabel:`➕ (plus)` button on the right."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:133
msgid "Click the teal :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button to open up the :guilabel:`Product Revaluation` form. Here, the inventory valuation for a product can be recalculated, by increasing or decreasing the unit price of each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:138
msgid "The :guilabel:`▶️ (drop-down triangle)` and :guilabel:`➕ (plus)` buttons are only visible after grouping entries by product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Product revaluation form adding a value of $1.00 with the reason being inflation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:146
msgid "Inventory valuation journal entries"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:148
msgid "In Odoo, automatic inventory valuation records are also recorded in the :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Accounting --> Journal Entries` dashboard. On this comprehensive list of accounting entries, inventory valuation records are identified by checking values in the :guilabel:`Journal` column, or looking for the :guilabel:`Reference` column value which matches the warehouse operation reference (e.g. `WH/IN/00014` for receipts)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:154
msgid "Clicking on an inventory valuation journal entry opens a *double-entry accounting* record. These records are generated by Odoo to track the change of value in inventory valuation as products are moved in and out of the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:159
msgid "To view the inventory valuation of 10 *tables*, costing $10.00 each, upon reception from the vendor, go to the :menuselection:`Journal Entries` page found in :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Accounting --> Journal Entries`. Here, click the journal line where the :guilabel:`Reference` column value matches the reference on the receipt, `WH/IN/00014`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:0
msgid "Stock valuation page depicting the products within a shipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:168
msgid "`Stock interim` is a holding account for money intended to pay vendors for the product. The `stock valuation` account stores the value of all on-hand stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:0
msgid "Accounting entry for the inventory valuation of 10 tables."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_valuation/using_inventory_valuation.rst:176
msgid "`Odoo Tutorial: Inventory Valuation <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/2795/share>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:6
msgid "Removal strategies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:8
msgid "For companies with warehouses, *removal strategies* determine **which** products are taken from the warehouse, and **when**. For example, for perishable products, prioritizing the picking of goods with the nearest expiration date helps minimize food spoilage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:12
msgid "The following columns in the table below list the removal strategies available in Odoo, and detail how pickings are determined along with the picking order. Leverage these removal strategies to have Odoo automatically select how products are selected for orders:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:21
msgid ":doc:`FIFO <removal_strategies/fifo>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:22
msgid ":doc:`LIFO <removal_strategies/lifo>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:23
msgid ":doc:`FEFO <removal_strategies/fefo>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:24
msgid ":doc:`Closest Location <removal_strategies/closest_location>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:25
msgid ":doc:`Least Packages <removal_strategies/least_packages>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:26
msgid "Based on"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:27
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:28
msgid ":ref:`Incoming date <inventory/warehouses_storage/arrival_date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:29
msgid ":ref:`Removal date <inventory/warehouses_storage/removal-date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:30
msgid ":ref:`Location sequence <inventory/warehouses_storage/sequence>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:31
msgid ":ref:`Package quantity <inventory/warehouses_storage/pkg-qty>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:32
msgid "Selection order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:33
msgid "First in"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:34
msgid "Last in"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:35
msgid ":ref:`First to expire <inventory/warehouses_storage/exp-date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:36
msgid ":ref:`Alphanumeric name of location <inventory/warehouses_storage/location-name>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:37
msgid "Quantity closest to fulfilling demand"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:39
msgid "For comprehensive examples for how to use each removal strategy, refer to each individual documentation page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:47
msgid "Removal strategies are set on either the product category or storage location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Change the Force Removal Strategy for either the Product Categories or Locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:53
msgid "Configure removal strategies on the location by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, and selecting the desired location. On the location form, choose a removal strategy from the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` field's drop-down menu options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:58
msgid "To set a removal strategy on a location, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` settings **must** be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:62
msgid "These features are **only** necessary when setting the removal strategy on a location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:64
msgid "Configure removal strategies on product categories by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and selecting the intended product category. Next, choose a removal strategy from the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` drop-down menu options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:69
msgid "When there are different removal strategies applied on both the location and product category for a product, the value set on the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` field set on a :guilabel:`Product Category` form is applied as top priority."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:74
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:94
msgid "Required features"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:76
msgid "While some removal strategies are available by default, some additional features **must** be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` for the removal strategy option to appear in the drop-down menu of the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` or :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:81
msgid "Refer to the table below for a summary of required features. Otherwise, refer to the dedicated sections for the removal strategy for more details on requirements and usage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:89
msgid "FIFO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:90
msgid "LIFO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:91
msgid "FEFO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:92
msgid "Closest Location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:93
msgid "Least Packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:95
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:96
msgid "Lots & Serial Numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:97
msgid "Lots & Serial Numbers, Expiration Date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:98
msgid "Storage Locations, Multi-Step Routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:104
msgid "Lots and serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:106
msgid "Lots and serial numbers differentiate identical products and track information like arrival or expiration dates. To enable this feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Traceability` heading, check the box beside :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` to enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:115
msgid "Next, ensure the intended product is tracked by lots or serial numbers by navigating to the product form through :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the desired product. On the product form, switch to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and under the :guilabel:`Tracking` field, select either the :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` or :guilabel:`By Lots` options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:121
msgid "After enabling the features, assign lot or serial numbers to products using an :doc:`inventory adjustment <inventory_management/count_products>` or during :ref:`product reception <inventory/product_management/assign-lots>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:126
msgid "Locations and routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:128
msgid "**Storage locations** and **multi-step routes** are necessary features for setting **all** types of removal strategies on a location. However, these features are specifically required for the closest location removal strategy since it is only applied at the location level."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:132
msgid "To activate these features, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` heading, enable the :guilabel:`Storage Location` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` features."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the locations and route features."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:143
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:97
msgid "Expiration date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:145
msgid "Enable the **expiration date** feature to track expiration dates, best before dates, removal dates, and alert dates on a lot or serial number by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:149
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Traceability` heading, ensure the :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` feature is selected, and then select the check box for :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` to enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Enable expiration dates feature for FEFO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:161
msgid "The *packages* feature is used to group products together and is required for the least packages removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:164
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and select the check box for the :guilabel:`Packages` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the packages feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:172
msgid ":doc:`Packages <../product_management/product_tracking/package>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:173
msgid ":doc:`2-step delivery <../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/receipts_delivery_two_steps>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies.rst:174
msgid ":doc:`3-step delivery <../shipping_receiving/daily_operations/delivery_three_steps>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:3
msgid "Closest location removal"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:5
msgid "For the *Closest Location* removal strategy, products are picked based on the alphanumeric order of storage location titles."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:8
msgid "The goal of this strategy is to save the warehouse worker from taking a long journey to a farther shelf when the product is also available at a closer location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:12
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:9
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:9
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:13
msgid ":doc:`About removal strategies <../removal_strategies>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:16
msgid "To understand *location sequence* in the closest removal strategy, consider the following example:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:19
msgid "A product is stored in the following locations: `Shelf A/Pallet`, `Shelf A/Rack 1`, and `Shelf A/Rack 2`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:-1
msgid "Show a mockup of real storage location in a warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:26
msgid "The sublocation, `Pallet`, is on the ground level. Products stored here are easier to retrieve, compared to requiring a forklift to reach `Rack 1` and `Rack 2`. The storage locations were strategically named in alphabetic order, based on ease of access."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:31
msgid "To use this removal strategy, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` and :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` settings **must** be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:35
msgid ":ref:`Set up removal strategy <inventory/warehouses_storage/removal-config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:40
msgid "Location names"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:42
msgid "To configure location names, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Locations`. Then, select an existing location, or click :guilabel:`New` to create a new one, and then enter the desired name in the :guilabel:`Location Name` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:46
msgid "Once the locations are named in alphabetical order, based on their proximity to the output or packing location, set the removal strategy on the :ref:`parent location <inventory/location-hierarchy>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:50
msgid "To do that, in the :guilabel:`Locations` list, select the parent location of the alphabetically named storage locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:53
msgid "Doing so opens the form for the parent location. In the :guilabel:`Removal Strategy` field, select :guilabel:`Closest Location`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:57
msgid "In a warehouse, the storage location `WH/Stock/Shelf 1` is located closest to the packing area, where products retrieved from shelves are packed for shipment. The popular product, `iPhone charger` is stored in three locations, `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`, `WH/Stock/Shelf 2`, and `WH/Stock/Shelf 3`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:62
msgid "To use closest location, set the removal strategy on the parent location, 'WH/Stock'."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:67
msgid "To see how the closest location removal strategy works, consider the following example, featuring the popular product, `iPhone charger`, which is stored in `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`, `WH/Stock/Shelf 2`, and `WH/Stock/Shelf 3`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:71
msgid "Fifteen, five, and thirty units are in stock at each respective location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:74
msgid "To check the on-hand stock at each storage location, navigate to the product form, and click the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:0
msgid "Show on-hand stock at all locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:81
msgid "Create a :ref:`delivery order <inventory/delivery/one-step>` for eighteen units of the `iPhone charger` by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and creating a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:84
msgid "After adding the products, clicking :guilabel:`Confirm` creates a delivery order that reserves items stored at the closest location, using the removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:87
msgid "For more details about *where* the units were picked, select the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon, located on the far-right. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window that displays how the reserved items were picked, according to the removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:91
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Pick from` field displays where the quantities to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand` are picked. All fifteen of the units stored at the closest location, `WH/Stock/Shelf 1`, are picked first. The remaining three units are then selected from the second closest location, `WH/Stock/Shelf 2`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/closest_location.rst:-1
msgid "Display *Pick From* quantities for the order for iPhone chargers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:3
msgid "FEFO removal"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:5
msgid "The *First Expired, First Out* (FEFO) removal strategy targets products for removal based on their assigned removal dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:14
msgid "Removal date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:16
msgid "Products **must** be removed from inventory before their *removal date*, which is set as a certain number of days before the product's *expiration date*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:19
msgid "The user sets this number of days by navigating to the product form's :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. Under the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, ensure the :guilabel:`Tracking` field is set to either :guilabel:`By Lots` or :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:23
msgid "Next, select the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` option, which makes the :guilabel:`Removal Date` field (and other date fields) appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:27
msgid "The :guilabel:`Lots and Serial Numbers` and :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` features **must** be enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` to track expiration dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:31
msgid "The expiration date of a product is determined by adding the date the product was received to the number of days specified in the :guilabel:`Expiration Date` field of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:34
msgid "The removal date takes this expiration date, and subtracts the number of days specified in the :guilabel:`Removal Date` field of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:38
msgid ":doc:`Expiration dates <../../product_management/product_tracking/expiration_dates>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:41
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product, `Egg`, the following :guilabel:`Dates` are set by the user:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:44
msgid ":guilabel:`Expiration Date`: `30` days after receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Removal Date`: `15` days before expiration date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:-1
msgid "Display expiration and removal dates set on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:51
msgid "A shipment of Eggs arrive at the warehouse on January 1st. So, the expiration date of the Eggs is **January 31st** (Jan 1st + 30). By extension, the removal date is **January 16th** (Jan 31 - 15)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:57
msgid "To view the expiration dates of items in stock, navigate to the product form, and click the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:60
msgid "Next, click the additional options icon, located on the far-right, and select the columns: :guilabel:`Expiration Date` and :guilabel:`Removal Date`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:-1
msgid "Show expiration dates from the inventory adjustments model accessed from the *On Hand*\n"
"smart button from the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:71
msgid "Using the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy ensures that products with the nearest removal date are picked first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:74
msgid "To understand how this removal strategy works, consider the following example below about the product, `Carton of eggs`, which is a box containing twelve eggs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:77
msgid "The product is tracked :guilabel:`By Lots`, and the product category's :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` is set to :guilabel:`First Expired, First Out (FEFO)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:81
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:59
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:24
msgid ":ref:`Set up force removal strategy <inventory/warehouses_storage/removal-config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:60
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:25
msgid ":ref:`Enable lots tracking <inventory/warehouses_storage/lots-setup>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:83
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Perishable Products <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/5324/share>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:90
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:69
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:35
msgid "LOT1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:91
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:70
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:36
msgid "LOT2"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:71
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:37
msgid "LOT3"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:93
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:72
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:38
msgid "On-hand stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:94
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:73
msgid "5"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:95
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:75
msgid "2"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:96
msgid "1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:98
msgid "April 4"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:99
msgid "April 10"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:100
msgid "April 15"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:101
msgid ":ref:`Removal date <inventory/warehouses_storage/exp-date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:102
msgid "February 26"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:103
msgid "March 4"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:104
msgid "March 9"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:106
msgid "To see the removal strategy in action, go to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and create a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:109
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Confirm` creates a delivery order for today, December 29th, and the lot numbers with the soonest expiration dates are reserved, using the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:113
msgid "To view the detailed pickings, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon, located on the far-right of the Carton of egg's product line, in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the delivery order. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:117
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Pick from` field displays where the quantities to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand` are picked from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:120
msgid "Since the order demanded six Cartons of eggs, using the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy, all five Cartons from `LOT1`, with the removal date of February 26th, are picked. The remaining Carton is selected from `LOT2`, which has a removal date of March 4th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fefo.rst:-1
msgid "The stock moves window that shows the lots to be removed using FEFO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:3
msgid "FIFO removal"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:5
msgid "The *First In, First Out* (FIFO) removal strategy selects products with the earliest arrival dates. This method is useful for companies selling products that have short demand cycles, like clothes, for example. By using :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, companies can prevent prolonged stock retention of specific styles."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:14
msgid "Various quantities of the product, `T-shirt`, tracked by lot numbers, arrive on August 1st and August 25th. For an order made on September 1st, the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy prioritizes lots that have been in stock the longest. So, products received on August 1st are selected first for picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:0
msgid "Illustration of FIFO selecting the oldest products in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:24
msgid ":ref:`Lot/serial number setup details <inventory/warehouses_storage/lots-setup>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:29
msgid "Arrival date"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:31
msgid "To see the product lot or serial number that arrived in inventory first, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:34
msgid "Then, select the :guilabel:`▶️ (right-pointing arrow)` icon on the left of a product line, in order to reveal a list of the product's lots or serial numbers that are in stock. The :guilabel:`Created On` field shows the lot/serial number creation date, which is, essentially, the arrival date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:39
msgid "Serial number `00000000500` of the product, `Cabinet with Doors`, arrived on December 29th, as displayed in the :guilabel:`Created On` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:0
msgid "Display arrival date of a lot for an item."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:49
msgid "To understand how :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` rotates products out, consider the following example, focusing on three lots of white shirts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:52
msgid "The shirts are from the *All/Clothes* category, where :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` is set as the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:55
msgid "The white shirts are tracked :guilabel:`By Lots` in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:62
msgid "The following table represents the on-hand stock and lot number details of white shirts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:74
msgid "3"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:76
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:42
msgid ":ref:`Created on <inventory/warehouses_storage/arrival_date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:77
msgid "March 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:78
msgid "April 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:79
msgid "May 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:81
msgid "To see the removal strategy in action, create a :ref:`delivery order <inventory/delivery/one-step>` for six white shirts by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and creating a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:84
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Confirm` on the sales order, a delivery order with the oldest lot numbers for shirts are reserved, using the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:87
msgid "To view the detailed pickings, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon, located on the far-right of the white shirt's product line in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the delivery order. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:91
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Pick from` field displays where the quantities to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand` are picked from. Since the order demanded six shirts, all five shirts from `LOT1`, and one shirt from `LOT2`, are selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/fifo.rst:-1
msgid "Two lots being reserved for a sales order with the FIFO strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:3
msgid "Least packages removal"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:5
msgid "The *Least Packages* removal strategy fulfills an order by opening the fewest number of packages, which is ideal for maintaining organized stock without needing to open multiple boxes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:10
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Least Packages <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/5477/share>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:12
msgid "To understand how the removal strategy works, consider the following example, featuring a warehouse that stores packages of flour in bulk packages of `100 kg`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:15
msgid "To minimize moisture, and/or prevent pests from entering open packages, the least packages removal strategy is used to pick from a single, opened package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:21
msgid "A package of `100 kg` of flour is depleted to `54 kg` after fulfilling some orders. There are other packages of `100 kg` in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:24
msgid "When an order for `14 kg` of flour is placed, the package of `54 kg` is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:25
msgid "When an order for *more* than `54 kg` of flour is placed, an unopened `100 kg` package is used to fulfill the order. While this temporarily results in two open packages, these open packages are prioritized in the next picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:32
msgid "Using the least package removal strategy, the fewest number of packages is used to fulfill an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:35
msgid "The :ref:`Packages feature <inventory/warehouses_storage/pack-setup>` **must** be enabled to use this strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:38
msgid "Consider the following example, featuring the product, `Flour`. The product's :guilabel:`Units of Measure` field, located on the product form, is set to `kg`. The product is stored in packages of `100 kg`, with one remaining package containing `54 kg`. The product category's :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` is set to :guilabel:`Least Packages`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:44
msgid ":ref:`Set removal strategy on product category <inventory/warehouses_storage/removal-config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:47
msgid "To check the product's on-hand stock, navigate to the product form, and click the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:0
msgid "Show on-hand stock in each package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:54
msgid "Create a :ref:`delivery order <inventory/delivery/one-step>` for eighty kilograms of flour by going to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and creating a new quotation. After clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`, the delivery order is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:58
msgid "On the delivery order, the :guilabel:`Quantity` field displays the amount automatically picked, according to the removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:61
msgid "For more details about *where* the units were picked, select the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon, located on the far-right. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, displaying how the reserved items were picked, according to the removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:65
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Pick from` field displays where the quantities to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand` are picked. Since the order demanded eighty kilograms, which exceeds the quantity in the opened package of `54 kg`, an unopened package of `100 kg` is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/least_packages.rst:-1
msgid "Show which package was picked in the *Pick From* field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:3
msgid "LIFO removal"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:5
msgid "The *Last In, First Out* (LIFO) removal strategy picks the **newest** products on-hand, based on the date they entered a warehouse's stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:8
msgid "Every time an order is placed for products using the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy, a transfer is created for the lot/serial number that has most recently entered the stock (the **last** lot/serial number that entered the warehouse's inventory)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:16
msgid "In many countries, the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy is banned, since it can potentially result in old, expired, or obsolete products being delivered to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:19
msgid "Consider the following example, with the product, `Cinder Block`, which is tracked :guilabel:`By Lots` in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the product form. The :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` for the cinder block's product category is set to :guilabel:`Last In, First Out (LIFO)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:26
msgid ":ref:`Check arrival date <inventory/warehouses_storage/arrival_date>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:28
msgid "The following table represents the cinder blocks in stock, and their various lot number details."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:43
msgid "June 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:44
msgid "June 3"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:45
msgid "June 6"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:47
msgid "To see the removal strategy in action, create a :ref:`delivery order <inventory/delivery/one-step>` for seven cinder blocks by navigating to the :menuselection:`Sales app` and creating a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Confirm` the sales order to create a delivery order. Doing so reserves the newest lot numbers are using the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:54
msgid "To view the detailed pickings, click the :guilabel:`⦙≣ (bulleted list)` icon, located on the far-right of the cinder block's product line in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the delivery order. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:58
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Open: Stock move` pop-up window, the :guilabel:`Pick from` field displays where the quantities to fulfill the :guilabel:`Demand` are picked from. Since the order demanded seven cinder blocks, the newest cinder blocks from `LOT3` are selected, using the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/removal_strategies/lifo.rst:-1
msgid "The detailed operations shows which lots are being selected for the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting.rst:5
msgid "Reporting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:3
msgid "Inventory aging report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:7
msgid "The inventory aging report evaluates all items in stock, providing insights into potentially sunken purchase costs and delays in profitability."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:10
msgid "Create customized pivot tables to analyze product, operation types, month, or company breakdowns. This helps identify products in stock that are at risk of passing their expiration or viability dates, or instances of rot/decay for fast-expiring items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:13
msgid "The *Reporting* menu in *Inventory* is only accessible to users with :doc:`admin access <../../../../general/users/access_rights>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:18
msgid "To access the inventory aging report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Inventory Aging`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:24
msgid "Navigate the inventory aging report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:26
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`Inventory Aging` report displays a pivot table, with the month in columns, and product category in rows. The default filters, :guilabel:`Incoming` and :guilabel:`Has Remaining Qty`, show only products from receipts, and are currently in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:30
msgid ":guilabel:`Remaining Qty` displays the number of on-hand items, and :guilabel:`Remaining Value` displays the total cost of purchasing these items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:33
msgid "Clicking the :icon:`fa-plus-square` :guilabel:`(plus)` icon in each column or row reveals options to expand the pivot table and show a detailed breakdown of the :guilabel:`Remaining Qty` and :guilabel:`Remaining Value` by :guilabel:`Product`, :guilabel:`Product Category`, :guilabel:`Date`, or :guilabel:`Company`. Clicking the :icon:`fa-minus-square-o` :guilabel:`(minus)` icon collapses it back to its previous state."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:43
msgid "Inventory aging report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:43
msgid "Inventory aging report, showing each **Product** in rows and each reception **Date** in columns, to better monitor products with fast expiration dates. Each row shows the the total on-hand quantity and inventory valuation of items purchased on each day."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:48
msgid "Records in the :guilabel:`Inventory Aging` report are *stock valuation layers* (SVLs), representing product moves that impact stock valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:51
msgid "Inventory adjustments do **not** create |SVLs|; only items purchased from vendors do."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:54
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:71
msgid "Generate reports"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:56
msgid "After learning how to :ref:`navigate the inventory aging report <inventory/warehouses_storage/aging-report>`, it can be used to create and share different reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:59
msgid "A few common reports that can be created using the :guilabel:`Inventory Aging` report are detailed below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:63
msgid "Rotating stock report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:65
msgid "To create a report to identify items that have been in stock for a while, follow these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:67
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Inventory Aging`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:68
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Inventory Aging` report, click the :icon:`fa-caret-down` :guilabel:`(caret down)` icon in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to see a drop-down list of :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By`, and :guilabel:`Favorite` options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:71
msgid "Choose :guilabel:`Product` under the :guilabel:`Group By` section. Doing so expands the pivot table to show a product in each row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:73
msgid "Click the :icon:`fa-plus-square` :guilabel:`(plus)` icon to the left of the date column. Hover over :guilabel:`Date` from the drop-down menu and choose :guilabel:`Year`, :guilabel:`Quarter`, :guilabel:`Month`, :guilabel:`Week`, or :guilabel:`Day`. Doing so expands the columns to show the :guilabel:`Remaining Qty` and :guilabel:`Remaining Value` by the selected time period."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:79
msgid "For products that have a longer shelf life, choose longer time periods such as :guilabel:`Month` or :guilabel:`Quarter` when expanding columns by :guilabel:`Date`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:0
msgid "Pivot table, highlighting the plus icon to expand columns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:86
msgid "The report now displays the on-hand stock of items, and their total purchasing cost, for each time period."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:90
msgid "Inventory aging report, with the :guilabel:`Group By`: :guilabel:`Product` option selected, and with the :guilabel:`Date` column set to :guilabel:`Day`. It gives insight into how much raw fish sashimi products were purchased on each day, and how much it cost. This informs the business owners how much stock is at risk of rotting in stock, per day."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/aging.rst:0
msgid "Inventory aging report, showing product row items and day columns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:3
msgid "Locations dashboard"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:7
msgid "The *Locations* dashboard in the *Inventory* application provides an overview of on-hand storage locations for company products. Use this report to see where stock is stored, identify :ref:`misplaced items <inventory/warehouse_storage/stranded>`, or view past inventory to see product locations on specific dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:16
msgid "To access the locations report, the *Storage Locations* feature must be enabled. To do that, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`Storage Locations`, and click :guilabel:`Save`. Then, access the locations dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:24
msgid "Navigate the locations dashboard"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:26
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`Locations` dashboard lists all on-hand products in stock (in the :guilabel:`Product` column), along with the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:29
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: current storage location. If a product is stored at `Shelf 1` and `Shelf 2`, the product is listed twice, showing quantities at each location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Package`: the package that the product is stored in, if any."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:32
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: if the product has a lot or serial number, it is specified here."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`: current quantity of products. Click the :icon:`fa-pencil` :guilabel:`(pencil)` icon to :doc:`modify the on-hand quantity <../inventory_management/count_products>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`Reserved Quantity`: on-hand quantity reserved for operations, such as pickings, delivery orders, or manufacturings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:38
msgid ":guilabel:`Unit`: the unit of measure of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:52
msgid "Click the buttons to the right of each row item to access additional information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:42
msgid ":icon:`fa-history` :guilabel:`History`: access the stock move history of the product, displaying information about the quantity and description of why the product was moved from one location to another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:47
msgid "View what the product is reserved for, by clicking the :icon:`fa-history` :guilabel:`History` button on the far-right of the product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:50
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Moves History` page, remove the :icon:`fa-filter` :guilabel:`Done` filter. Then, click the |down| icon to the right of the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to reveal filter options, and select the :guilabel:`To Do` filter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:0
msgid "Display *Moves History* page of to-do deliveries that reserved the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:58
msgid ":icon:`fa-refresh` :guilabel:`Replenishment`: access the :doc:`reordering rules <../../product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules>` page to replenish products at the specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:62
msgid "In the upper-left corner of the page, click the the :guilabel:`New` button to make an :doc:`inventory adjustment <../inventory_management/count_products>` to record quantities of a certain product at a specific :guilabel:`Location`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:66
msgid "To view products, quantities, and their locations for a specified date, click the :guilabel:`Inventory At Date` button (also located in the upper-left corner of the page). Select a date and time in the :guilabel:`Inventory at Date` field, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:73
msgid "After learning how to :ref:`navigate the locations dashboard <inventory/warehouses_storage/locations-report>`, it can be used to create and share different reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:77
msgid "A few common reports that can be created using the :guilabel:`Locations` dashboard are detailed below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:81
msgid "Dead stock report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:83
msgid "To get list of expired items, also referred to as *dead stock*, follow these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:114
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:143
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:86
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:144
msgid "Then, click the |down| icon to the right of the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to reveal a drop-down list of :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By`, and :guilabel:`Favorite` options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:88
msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Internal Locations` and :guilabel:`Expiration Alerts` option under the :guilabel:`Filters` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:91
msgid "The report now displays a list of expired products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:94
msgid "This report can also be generated from the :ref:`Lot and Serials Numbers <inventory/product_management/expiration-alerts>` page, accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:-1
msgid "Show a list of products whose expiration dates have exceeded today."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:105
msgid "Stranded inventory report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:107
msgid "Businesses using multi-step flows in the *Inventory* or *Manufacturing* apps, may have *stranded* items, which are products not in their proper storage locations, due to human error. Use this report to periodically check transfer locations (e.g. *WH/Input*, *WH/Pre-Processing*) to ensure items are moved to their intended storage locations, and accurately recorded in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:112
msgid "To get a list of items that might be sitting idly in storage, follow these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:115
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, begin typing the name of the location where products are intended to be moved to, such as `WH/Input`, or `WH/Packing`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:117
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Search Location for:` [location name] option from the resulting drop-down menu that appears beneath the :guilabel:`Search...` bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:0
msgid "Show search result for the location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:124
msgid "The report now displays a list of products at the transit location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:127
msgid "Searching `Input` in :guilabel:`Location` shows a list of products at a *WH/Input* location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:129
msgid "The list shows `500` quantities of `Chicken`, which is alarming if not refrigerated soon after reception. The stranded inventory report helps identify items that have been idling in non-storage locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:0
msgid "Show items stored at a specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:138
msgid "Inventory discrepancy report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:140
msgid "To generate a report of items that have been moved since the last :doc:`inventory audit <../inventory_management/cycle_counts>`, follow these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:146
msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Internal Locations` and :guilabel:`Conflicts` option from the :guilabel:`Filters` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:148
msgid "The report now displays items whose quantities have changed since the last cycle count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:0
msgid "Show items from the *Conflicts* filter in the report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:154
msgid "Click the :icon:`fa-history` :guilabel:`History` button to view inventory transfers, including receipts and deliveries, that have occurred since the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/locations.rst:0
msgid "Show *Moves History*, showing a delivery that occurred after an inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:3
msgid "Moves history dashboard"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:5
msgid "The *Moves History* report in Odoo *Inventory* provides a detailed record of product movements (containing past and current locations), lot numbers, and reasons for movement. Reports can be generated for any time frame, making this report essential for analyzing stock levels, monitoring inventory turnover, and identifying any discrepancies in inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:9
msgid "The reporting feature is only accessible to users with :doc:`admin access <../../../../general/users/access_rights>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:14
msgid "To access the stock report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Moves History`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:-1
msgid "Display Moves History report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:23
msgid "Navigate the moves history report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:25
msgid "In the report, the columns represent:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Date`: calendar date and time of the stock move."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:28
msgid ":guilabel:`Reference`: description of the reason for the stock move or quantity change, such as a receipt number (e.g. `WH/IN/00012`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:30
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: name of the product involved in the move."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`: specifies the lot or serial number of the tracked product being moved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`From`: source location of the moved product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:34
msgid ":guilabel:`To`: destination location of the moved product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: number of products moved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`Unit`: unit of measure of the products moved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:37
msgid ":guilabel:`Status`: indicates the move status, which can be :guilabel:`Done`, :guilabel:`Available` (ready for action), or :guilabel:`Partially Available` (insufficient quantities to complete the operation)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:42
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:66
msgid "Search options"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:44
msgid "Use the following search options to customize the :guilabel:`Moves History` report to display relevant information"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:49
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:70
msgid "Filters"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:51
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:72
msgid "The :guilabel:`Filters` section allows users to search among pre-made and custom filters to find specific stock records."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`To Do`: show stock move records that are in progress. This includes lines with a :guilabel:`Status` column value of :guilabel:`Available` or :guilabel:`Partially Available`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`Done`: completed stock moves, with a :guilabel:`Status` of :guilabel:`Done`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:57
msgid ":guilabel:`Incoming`: displays move records from vendor locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:58
msgid ":guilabel:`Outgoing`: displays move records to customer locations, including customer returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:60
msgid ":guilabel:`Internal`: displays move records from one internal location to another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:61
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacturing`: shows records where products were produced from the virtual, production :doc:`location <../inventory_management/use_locations>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:63
msgid ":guilabel:`Date`: select this drop-down menu to access various date filter options and view stock moves from a specific month, quarter, or year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`Last 30 Days`: show records that occurred in the last thirty days."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Last 3 Months`: show records from the last three months."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:68
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:113
msgid "Group By"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:70
msgid "The :guilabel:`Group By` section allows users to add pre-made and custom groupings to the search."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:73
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: group records by product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:74
msgid ":guilabel:`Status`: group records by the three status types: :guilabel:`Done`, :guilabel:`Available`, and :guilabel:`Partially Available`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:76
msgid ":guilabel:`Date`: group records by :guilabel:`Year`, :guilabel:`Quarter`, :guilabel:`Month`, :guilabel:`Week`, or :guilabel:`Day`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:78
msgid ":guilabel:`Transfers`: group records by operation number, e.g. `WH/OUT/00012`, `WH/MO/00211`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:80
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: group records by source location (the :guilabel:`From` column in this report)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:82
msgid ":guilabel:`Category`: group records by product category. To configure these, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Products: Product Categories`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Batch Transfer`: group records by :doc:`batch <../advanced_operations_warehouse/batch_transfers>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:87
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:125
msgid "Favorites"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:89
msgid "To save the current applied filters and groups, so the same information can be easily accessed after closing this page, click :guilabel:`Save current search`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:92
msgid "Optionally, tick the :guilabel:`Default filter` checkbox to make this current view the default filter when opening the :guilabel:`Moves History` report. Or tick the :guilabel:`Shared` checkbox to make the search option available to other users."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:96
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:134
msgid "Lastly, click the :guilabel:`Save` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/moves_history.rst:99
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:137
msgid ":doc:`../../../../essentials/search`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:3
msgid "Stock report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:5
msgid "Use the stock report in Odoo *Inventory* for a detailed list of all stored products, including those reserved, purchased and in transit, as well as those delivered to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:12
msgid "To access the stock report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Stock`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:-1
msgid "Show the stock report, accessible by going to Inventory > Reporting > Stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:19
msgid "Navigate the stock report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:21
msgid "On the stock report, the left sidebar includes several groupings to narrow down what is being shown. The default groupings are :guilabel:`Warehouses`, which filters products by specific warehouses, and :guilabel:`Category`, which shows products within a selected product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:26
msgid "The :guilabel:`Warehouse` grouping is only available when there are multiple warehouses in the database. Refer to the :doc:`../inventory_management/create_a_second_warehouse` documentation for more details."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:30
msgid "In the report itself, the columns represent:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:32
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: name of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Unit Cost`: average inventory valuation per unit, adjusted based on the cost to purchase and/or manufacture the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Total Value`: Total inventory valuation of the product, calculated by multiplying unit cost by on-hand quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:39
msgid ":ref:`Compute average cost inventory valuation per unit <inventory/avg_cost/formula>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:40
msgid ":doc:`Inventory valuation methods <../inventory_valuation/inventory_valuation_config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand`: current quantity of products. Click the :icon:`fa-pencil` :guilabel:`(pencil)` icon to :doc:`modify the on-hand quantity <../inventory_management/count_products>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Free to Use`: on-hand quantity that are **not** reserved for delivery or manufacturing orders, and are available to sell or use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`Incoming`: items expected to arrive at the warehouse. Number of products is based on quantities in confirmed purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Outgoing`: items expected to leave the warehouse or be consumed in manufacturing orders. Number of products is based on quantities in confirmed sales or manufacturing orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`History`: access the stock move history of the product, displaying information about the quantity and description of why the product was moved from one location to another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`Replenishment`: access the :doc:`reordering rules <../../product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules>` page for the product to create or manage methods of procuring the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:59
msgid ":guilabel:`Locations`: break down of on-hand quantity at multiple storage locations. Only available when the product is stored in multiple locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:61
msgid ":guilabel:`Forecast`: access the forecasted report to view on-hand, incoming, and outgoing quantities. Report also contains links to confirmed purchase, sales, or manufacturing orders. Only available when there are confirmed sales, purchase, or manufacturing orders for the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:75
msgid ":guilabel:`Published`: display products published on the website. Only available with the *Website* app installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:77
msgid ":guilabel:`Available in POS`: display products available through the *Point of Sale* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:78
msgid ":guilabel:`Available in Self`: display products available in self order through the *Point of Sale* app. Appears in the search because the :guilabel:`Available in Self Order` checkbox was ticked in the :guilabel:`Point of Sale` section of a product form's :guilabel:`Sales` tab. The option is only available when the :guilabel:`Available in POS` checkbox is ticked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:0
msgid "In the Sales tab of a product form, showing *Available in Self Order* setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:87
msgid ":guilabel:`Not available in Self`: display products available in *PoS*, but not available in self order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:91
msgid "`Configure PoS products <https://youtu.be/REbA3TBhFa4>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:93
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Sold`: display products that can be sold to customers. Appears in the search because the :guilabel:`Can be Sold` checkbox is ticked on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:95
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Purchased`: display products that can be bought from vendors. Appears in the search because the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkbox is ticked on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:97
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Recurring`: show subscription products, indicated by ticking the :guilabel:`Recurring` checkbox on the product form. Only available with the *Subscription* app activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:100
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Rented`: show products that can be loaned to customers for a certain time. Appears in the search because the :guilabel:`Can be Rented` checkbox was ticked on the product form. Only available with the *Rental* app installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:103
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Subcontracted`: display products that can be produced by a :doc:`third-party manufacturer <../../../manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic>`. Available only with the *Manufacturing* app installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:107
msgid ":guilabel:`Can be Expensed`: show items that can be expensed. Only available with the *Expenses* app installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:111
msgid ":doc:`../../product_management/product_tracking/type`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:115
msgid "The :guilabel:`Group By` section allows users to add pre-made and custom groupings to the search results."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:118
msgid ":guilabel:`Product Type`: group items by :doc:`product type <../../product_management/product_tracking/type>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:120
msgid ":guilabel:`Product Category`: group items by product category. To configure these, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Products: Product Categories`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:122
msgid ":guilabel:`POS Product Category`: group items by :doc:`point of sale product categories <../../../../sales/point_of_sale/configuration>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:127
msgid "To save the current applied filters and groupbys, so the same information can be easily accessed after closing this page, click :guilabel:`Save current search`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/warehouses_storage/reporting/stock.rst:130
msgid "Optionally, tick the :guilabel:`Default filter` checkbox to make this current view the default filter when opening the stock report. Or tick the :guilabel:`Shared` checkbox to make the search option available to other users."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:8
msgid "Maintenance"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Maintenance** helps extend the effectiveness of equipment by keeping track of maintenance requirements."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Managing Equipment Maintenance <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/managing-equipment-maintenance-709>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:3
msgid "Add new equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:7
msgid "In Odoo, *equipment* refers to any item that is used in everyday operations, including the manufacturing of products. This can mean a piece of machinery on a production line, a tool that is used in different locations, or a computer in an office space. Equipment registered in Odoo can be owned by the company that uses the Odoo database, or by a third party, such as a vendor in the case of equipment rentals."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:13
msgid "Using Odoo *Maintenance*, it is possible to track individual pieces of equipment, along with information about their maintenance requirements. To add a new piece of equipment, navigate to the :guilabel:`Maintenance` module, select :menuselection:`Equipments --> Machines & Tools --> Create`, and configure the equipment as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:18
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Name`: the product name of the piece of equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:19
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Category`: the category that the equipment belongs to; for example, computers, machinery, tools, etc.; new categories can be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Equipment Categories` and clicking :guilabel:`Create`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:22
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company that owns the equipment; again, this can be the company that uses the Odoo database, or a third-party company"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:24
msgid ":guilabel:`Used By`: specify if the equipment is used by a specific employee, department, or both; select :guilabel:`Other` to specify both an employee and a department"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Maintenance Team`: the team responsible for servicing the equipment; new teams can be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Maintenance Teams` and selecting :guilabel:`Create`; the members of each team can also be assigned from this page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:29
msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the person responsible for servicing the equipment; this can be used to assign a specific individual in the event that no maintenance team is assigned or when a specific member of the assigned team should always be responsible for the equipment; any person added to Odoo as a user can be assigned as a technician"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Used in location`: the location where the equipment is used; this is a simple text field that can be used to specify locations that are not work centers, like an office, for example"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center`: if the equipment is used at a work center, specify it here; equipment can also be assigned to a work center by navigating to :menuselection:`Maintenance --> Equipments --> Work Centers`, selecting a work center or creating a new one using the :guilabel:`Create` button, and clicking the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab on the work center form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a fully configured new equipment form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:46
msgid "Include additional product information"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:48
msgid "The :guilabel:`Product Information` tab at the bottom of the form can be used to provide further details about the piece of equipment:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: the vendor that the equipment was purchased from"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:52
msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor Reference`: the reference code assigned to the vendor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:53
msgid ":guilabel:`Model`: the specific model of the piece of equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`Serial Number`: the unique serial number of the equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Effective Date`: the date that the equipment became available for use; this is used to calculate the :abbr:`MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:57
msgid ":guilabel:`Cost`: the amount the equipment was purchased for"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:58
msgid ":guilabel:`Warranty Expiration Date`: the date on which the equipment's warranty will expire"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:-1
msgid "The product information tab for the new piece of equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:65
msgid "Add maintenance details"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:67
msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab includes information that can be useful to maintenance teams:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:69
msgid ":guilabel:`Preventive Maintenance Frequency`: specifies how often maintenance should be performed to prevent equipment failure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:71
msgid ":guilabel:`Maintenance Duration`: the amount of time required to fix the equipment when it fails"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:72
msgid ":guilabel:`Expected Mean Time Between Failure`: the average amount of time that the equipment is expected to operate before failing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:-1
msgid "The maintenance tab for the new piece of equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:80
msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab also includes sections for :guilabel:`Mean Time Between Failure`, :guilabel:`Estimated Next Failure`, :guilabel:`Latest Failure`, and :guilabel:`Mean Time To Repair`. These values are calculated automatically based on maintenance requests if any exist."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/add_new_equipment.rst:86
msgid "To see the maintenance requests for a piece of equipment, go to the page for the equipment and select :guilabel:`Maintenance` in the top right corner of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:3
msgid "Maintenance calendar"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:7
msgid "Avoiding equipment breakdowns, and blocks in warehouse work centers, requires constant equipment maintenance. Timely corrective maintenance for machines and tools that break unexpectedly, as well as preventive maintenance to ensure that such issues are avoided, are key to keeping warehouse operations running smoothly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:12
msgid "In Odoo *Maintenance*, users can access the *Maintenance Calendar* to create, schedule, and edit both corrective and preventive maintenance requests, to stay on top of equipment and work centers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:16
msgid "Create maintenance request"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:18
msgid "Maintenance requests can be created directly from the *Maintenance Calendar*. To access the calendar, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Maintenance --> Maintenance Calendar`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:21
msgid "To create a new request, click anywhere on the calendar. Doing so opens a :guilabel:`New Event` pop-up window. In the :guilabel:`Name:` field, assign a title to the new request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "New event creation pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:28
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Create` on the pop-up window saves the new request with no additional details. If the request's creation should be canceled, click :guilabel:`Cancel`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:31
msgid "To add more details and schedule the request for a specific date and time, click :guilabel:`Edit`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:33
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Edit` opens a blank maintenance request form, where various details about the request can be filled out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:37
msgid "Edit maintenance request"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:39
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Request` field, assign a title to the new request. In the :guilabel:`Created By` field, from the drop-down menu, select which user the request was created by. By default, this field populates with the user actually creating the request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "New maintenance request form creation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:47
msgid "In the :guilabel:`For` field, from the drop-down menu, select if this request is being created for a piece of :guilabel:`Equipment`, or a :guilabel:`Work Center`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:51
msgid "If :guilabel:`Work Center` is selected in the :guilabel:`For` field's drop-down menu, two additional fields appear on the form: :guilabel:`Work Center` and :guilabel:`Block Workcenter`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:54
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Work Center` field, select which work center in the warehouse this maintenance request applies to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:57
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Block Workcenter` option's checkbox is ticked, it is not possible to plan work orders, or other maintenance requests, in this work center during the time that this request is being performed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:61
msgid "If :guilabel:`Equipment` is selected in the :guilabel:`For` field, which it is by default, select which machine or tool requires maintenance from the :guilabel:`Equipment` field. Once a specific piece of equipment is selected, a greyed-out :guilabel:`Category` field appears, listing the *Equipment Category* to which the equipment belongs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:66
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Worksheet Template` field, if necessary, click the drop-down menu to select a worksheet template. These templates are custom templates that can be filled out by the employee performing the maintenance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:70
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Category` field, the :guilabel:`Request Date` field displays the date requested for the maintenance to happen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:73
msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance Type` field provides two selectable radio button options: :guilabel:`Corrective` and :guilabel:`Preventive`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:76
msgid ":guilabel:`Corrective` maintenance is for requests that arise for immediate needs, such as broken equipment, while :guilabel:`Preventive` maintenance is for planned requests, to avoid breakdowns in the future."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:80
msgid "If this request is tied to a specific |MO|, select that |MO| from the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:83
msgid "From the drop-down menu for the :guilabel:`Team` field, select the desired maintenance team who will perform the maintenance. In the :guilabel:`Responsible` field, select the technician responsible for the request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Filled-out details of maintenance request form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:91
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field, click the date to open a calendar popover. From this popover, select the planned date of the maintenance, and click :guilabel:`Apply` to save the date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:94
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Duration` field, enter the the amount of hours (in a `00:00` format) that the maintenance is planned to take."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:97
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Priority` field, choose a priority between one and three :guilabel:`⭐⭐⭐ (stars)`. This indicates the importance of the maintenance request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:100
msgid "If working in a multi-company environment, from the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Company` field, select the company to which this maintenance request belongs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:103
msgid "At the bottom of the form, there are two tabs: :guilabel:`Notes` and :guilabel:`Instructions`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:105
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Notes` tab, type out any internal notes for the team or technician assigned to the request, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:108
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab, if necessary, select one of the three radio button options to provide maintenance instructions to the assigned team or technician. The available methods for providing instructions are via :guilabel:`PDF`, :guilabel:`Google Slide`, or :guilabel:`Text`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Instructions tab options on maintenance request form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:117
msgid "Calendar elements"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:119
msgid "The *Maintenance Calendar* provides various views, search functions, and filters to help keep track of the progress of ongoing and planned maintenance requests."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:122
msgid "The following sections describe elements found across various views of the calendar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:125
msgid "Filters and Favorites"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:127
msgid "To access the maintenance calendar, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Maintenance --> Maintenance Calendar`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:130
msgid "To add and remove filters for sorting data on the *Maintenance Calendar*, click the :guilabel:`🔻 (triangle pointed down)` icon, to the right of the search bar at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:133
msgid "The left-hand side of the resulting drop-down menu lists all the different :guilabel:`Filters` users can select. By default, :guilabel:`To Do` and :guilabel:`Active` are selected, so all open requests are displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:138
msgid "To add a custom filter to the :guilabel:`Maintenance Calendar`, click :guilabel:`Add Custom Filter`, under the :guilabel:`Filters` section of the drop-down menu. This opens an :guilabel:`Add Custom Filter` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:142
msgid "From this pop-up window, configure the properties of the new rule for the filter. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Add`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:145
msgid "The right-hand side of the drop-down menu lists the :guilabel:`Favorites`, or any searches that have been saved as a favorite to be revisited at a later date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Favorites section of filters drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:152
msgid "To save a new :guilabel:`Favorite` search, select the desired :guilabel:`Filters`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save current search`. In the field directly below :guilabel:`Save current search`, assign a name to the search."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:156
msgid "Under the assigned name, there are two options, to save the current search either as the :guilabel:`Default filter`, or as a :guilabel:`Shared` filter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:159
msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Default filter` sets this filter as the default when opening this calendar view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:162
msgid "Selecting the :guilabel:`Shared` filter makes this filter available to other users."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:164
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save`. When clicked, the new :guilabel:`Favorite` filter appears in the :guilabel:`Favorites` column, and a :guilabel:`⭐ (gold star)` icon appears with the filter's name in the search bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:169
msgid "Views"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:171
msgid "The :guilabel:`Maintenance Calendar` is available in six different views: :guilabel:`Calendar` (default), :guilabel:`Kanban`, :guilabel:`List`, :guilabel:`Pivot`, :guilabel:`Graph`, and :guilabel:`Activity`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Different view type icons for maintenance calendar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:180
msgid "Calendar view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:182
msgid ":guilabel:`Calendar` is the default view displayed when the :guilabel:`Maintenance Calendar` is opened. There are a number of options in this view type for sorting and grouping information about maintenance requests."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:186
msgid "In the top-left corner of the page, there is a drop-down menu set to :guilabel:`Week`, by default. Clicking that drop-down menu reveals the different periods of time, in which the calendar can be viewed: :guilabel:`Day`, :guilabel:`Month`, and :guilabel:`Year`. There is also an option to :guilabel:`Show weekends`, selected by default. If unselected, weekends are not shown on the calendar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Calendar period drop-down menu options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:196
msgid "To the left of this menu, there is a :guilabel:`⬅️ (left arrow)` icon and a :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` icon. Clicking these arrows moves the calendar backward or forward in time, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:199
msgid "To the right of the drop-down menu set to :guilabel:`Week`, by default, is a :guilabel:`Today` button. Clicking this button resets the calendar to view today's date, no matter which point in time is being viewed before clicking it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:203
msgid "At the far-right side of the page is a sidebar column, containing a minimized calendar set to today's date, and a :guilabel:`Technician` list, displaying all the *Technicians* with requests currently open. Click the :guilabel:`(panel)` icon at the top of this sidebar to open or close the sidebar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:209
msgid "The :guilabel:`Technician` list only displays if technicians are assigned to open requests, and individual technicians are only listed, if they are listed as :guilabel:`Responsible` on at least **one** maintenance request form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:214
msgid "Kanban view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:216
msgid "With the :guilabel:`Kanban` view, all open maintenance requests are displayed in Kanban-style columns, in their respective stages of the maintenance process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:219
msgid "Each maintenance request appears on its own task card, and each task card can be dragged-and-dropped to a different stage of the Kanban pipeline."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:222
msgid "Each column has a name (i.e. :guilabel:`In Progress`). Hovering at the top of a column reveals a :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Clicking the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon reveals a list of options for that column: :guilabel:`Fold`, :guilabel:`Edit`, :guilabel:`Automations`, and :guilabel:`Delete`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Column options for stage in Kanban view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:230
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Fold` folds the column to hide its contents."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:232
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Edit` opens an :guilabel:`Edit: (stage name)` pop-up window, with the corresponding stage name, wherein the column's details can be edited. The following are the column options that can be edited:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Edit In Progress pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:240
msgid ":guilabel:`Name`: the name of the stage in the Kanban pipeline."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:241
msgid ":guilabel:`Folded in Maintenance Pipe`: when checked, this stage's column is folded by default in the :guilabel:`Kanban` view type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:243
msgid ":guilabel:`Request Confirmed`: when this box is not ticked, and the maintenance request type is set to *Work Center*, no leave is created for the respective work center when a maintenance request is created. If the box *is* ticked, the work center is automatically blocked for the listed duration, either at the specified date, or as soon as possible, if the work center is unavailable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:248
msgid ":guilabel:`Sequence`: the order in the maintenance process, in which this stage appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:249
msgid ":guilabel:`Request Done`: if ticked, this box indicates this stage is the final step of the maintenance process. Requests moved to this stage are closed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:252
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save & Close`. If no changes have been made, click :guilabel:`Discard`, or click the :guilabel:`X` icon to close the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:256
msgid "List view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:258
msgid "With the :guilabel:`List` view selected, all open maintenance requests are displayed in a list, with information about each request listed in its respective row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:261
msgid "The columns of information displayed in this view type are the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:263
msgid ":guilabel:`Subjects`: the name assigned to the maintenance request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:264
msgid ":guilabel:`Employee`: the employee who originally created the maintenance request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:265
msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the technician responsible for the maintenance request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:266
msgid ":guilabel:`Category`: the category the equipment being repaired belongs to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:267
msgid ":guilabel:`Stage`: the stage of the maintenance process the request is currently in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:268
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: if in a multi-company environment, the company in the database the request is assigned to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:272
msgid "Pivot view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:274
msgid "With the :guilabel:`Pivot` view selected, maintenance requests are displayed in a pivot table, and can be customized to show different data metrics."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:277
msgid "To add more data to the pivot table, click the :guilabel:`Measures` button to reveal a drop-down menu. By default, :guilabel:`Count` is selected. Additional options to add to the table are :guilabel:`Additional Leaves to Plan Ahead`, :guilabel:`Duration`, and :guilabel:`Repeat Every`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Measures options on Pivot view page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:285
msgid "To the right of the :guilabel:`Measures` button is the :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` button. Clicking this button opens a pop-up window titled :guilabel:`Select a spreadsheet to insert your pivot.`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:289
msgid "There are two tabs in this pop-up window: :guilabel:`Spreadsheets` and :guilabel:`Dashboards`. Click into one of these tabs, and select a spreadsheet or dashboard in the database to add this pivot table to. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm`. If this table shouldn't be added to a spreadsheet or dashboard, click :guilabel:`Cancel`, or click the :guilabel:`X` icon to close the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:294
msgid "To the right of the :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` button are three buttons:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:296
msgid ":guilabel:`Flip axis`: the x and y axis of the pivot data table flip."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:297
msgid ":guilabel:`Expand all`: all the available rows and columns of the pivot data table expand fully."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:298
msgid ":guilabel:`Download xlsx`: the pivot data table is downloaded as an .xlsx file."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:301
msgid "Graph view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:303
msgid "With the graph view selected, the following options appear between the search bar and visual representation of the data. These graph-specific options are located to the right of the :guilabel:`Measures` and :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Graph type icons on Graph view page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:311
msgid "There are three different types of graphs available to users to view the data:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:313
msgid ":guilabel:`Bar Chart`: the data is displayed in a bar chart."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:314
msgid ":guilabel:`Line Chart`: the data is displayed in a line chart."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:315
msgid ":guilabel:`Pie Chart`: the data is displayed in a pie chart."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:317
msgid "When viewing the data as a :guilabel:`Bar Chart` graph, the data can be formatted in the following ways:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:320
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:327
msgid ":guilabel:`Stacked`: the data is stacked on the graph."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:321
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:329
msgid ":guilabel:`Descending`: the data is displayed in descending order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:322
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:330
msgid ":guilabel:`Ascending`: the data is displayed in ascending order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:324
msgid "When viewing the data as a :guilabel:`Line Chart` graph, the data can be formatted in the following ways:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:328
msgid ":guilabel:`Cumulative`: the data is increasingly accumulated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:332
msgid "When viewing the data as a :guilabel:`Pie Chart` graph, all relevant data is displayed by default, and no additional formatting options are available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:336
msgid "Activity view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:338
msgid "With the :guilabel:`Activity` view selected, all open maintenance requests are listed in their own row, with the ability to schedule activities related to those requests."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Maintenance requests on Activity view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:345
msgid "Maintenance requests are listed in the :guilabel:`Maintenance Request` column as activities. Clicking a request opens a :guilabel:`Maintenance Request` popover that indicates the status of the request, and the responsible technician. To schedule an activity directly from the popover, click :guilabel:`➕ Schedule an activity`. This opens a :guilabel:`Schedule Activity` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:350
msgid "From the pop-up window, choose the :guilabel:`Activity Type`, provide a :guilabel:`Summary`, schedule a :guilabel:`Due Date`, and choose the responsible user in the :guilabel:`Assigned to` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Schedule Activity pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:358
msgid "Type any additional notes for the new activity in the blank space under the greyed-out :guilabel:`Log a note...` field. When clicked, this changes to :guilabel:`Type \"/\" for commands`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:361
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Schedule` to schedule the activity. Alternatively, click :guilabel:`Schedule & Mark as Done` to close the activity, click :guilabel:`Done & Schedule Next` to close the activity and open a new one, or click :guilabel:`Cancel` to cancel the activity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:365
msgid "With the :guilabel:`Activity` view selected, each activity type available when scheduling an activity is listed as its own column. These columns are :guilabel:`Email`, :guilabel:`Call`, :guilabel:`Meeting`, :guilabel:`Maintenance Request`, :guilabel:`To-Do`, :guilabel:`Upload Document`, :guilabel:`Request Signature`, and :guilabel:`Grant Approval`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:370
msgid "To schedule an activity with that specific activity type, click into any blank box on the corresponding row for the desired maintenance request, and click the :guilabel:`➕ (plus)` icon. This opens an :guilabel:`Odoo` pop-up window, wherein the activity can be scheduled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:-1
msgid "Odoo pop-up schedule activity window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:379
msgid ":doc:`maintenance_requests`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_calendar.rst:380
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:243
msgid ":doc:`add_new_equipment`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:3
msgid "Maintenance requests"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:7
msgid "In order to keep equipment and work centers functioning properly, it is often necessary to perform maintenance on them. This can include preventive maintenance, intended to prevent equipment from breaking down, or corrective maintenance, which is used to fix equipment that is broken or otherwise unusable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:12
msgid "In Odoo *Maintenance*, users can create *maintenance requests* to schedule and track the progress of equipment and work center maintenance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:18
msgid "To create a new maintenance request, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Maintenance --> Maintenance Requests`, and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:21
msgid "Begin filling out the form by entering a descriptive title in the :guilabel:`Request` field (e.g., `Drill not working`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:24
msgid "The :guilabel:`Created By` field auto-populates with the user creating the request, but a different user can be selected by clicking on the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:27
msgid "In the :guilabel:`For` drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Equipment` if the maintenance request is being created for a piece of equipment, or :guilabel:`Work Center` if it is being created for a work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:31
msgid "Depending on the option selected in the :guilabel:`For` field, the next field is titled either :guilabel:`Equipment` or :guilabel:`Work Center`. Using the drop-down menu for either field, select a piece of equipment or a work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:35
msgid "If the *Custom Maintenance Worksheets* setting is enabled in the *Maintenance* app's settings, a :guilabel:`Worksheet Template` field appears below the :guilabel:`Equipment` or :guilabel:`Work Center` field. If necessary, use this field to select a worksheet to be filled out by the employee performing the maintenance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:40
msgid "The next field is titled :guilabel:`Request Date`, and is set by default to the date on which the maintenance request is created. This date cannot be changed by the user."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:43
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Maintenance Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Corrective` option if the request is intended to fix an existing issue, or the :guilabel:`Preventive` option if the request is intended to prevent issues from occurring in the future."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:47
msgid "If the request is being created to address an issue that arose during a specific manufacturing order (MO), select it in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:50
msgid "If an |MO| was selected in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` field, a :guilabel:`Work Order` field appears below it. If the issue arose during a specific work order, specify it in this field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:53
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` field, select the maintenance team that is responsible for managing the request. If a specific team member is responsible, select them in the :guilabel:`Responsible` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:56
msgid "The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field is used to specify the date on which maintenance should take place, and the time it should begin. Choose a date by clicking on the field to open a calendar in a pop-up window, and then select a day on the calendar. Enter an hour and minute in the two fields below the calendar, and click :guilabel:`Apply` to save the date and time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:61
msgid "The :guilabel:`Duration` field is used to specify the time it takes to complete the maintenance request. Use the text-entry field to enter the time in a `00:00` format."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:64
msgid "If :guilabel:`Work Center` was selected in the :guilabel:`For` field, a :guilabel:`Block Workcenter` checkbox appears below the :guilabel:`Duration` field. Enable the checkbox to prevent work orders or other maintenance from being scheduled at the specified work center while the maintenance request is being processed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:69
msgid "The :guilabel:`Priority` field is used to communicate the importance (or urgency) of the maintenance request. Assign the request a priority between zero and three :guilabel:`⭐⭐⭐ (stars)`, by clicking on the desired star number. Requests assigned a higher priority appear above those with a lower priority, on the Kanban board used to track the progression of maintenance requests."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:74
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Notes` tab at the bottom of the form, enter any relevant details about the maintenance request (why the maintenance issue arose, when it occurred, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:77
msgid "The :guilabel:`Instructions` tab is used to include instructions for how maintenance should be performed. Select one of the three options, and then include the instructions as detailed below:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:80
msgid ":guilabel:`PDF`: click the :guilabel:`Upload your file` button to open the device's file manager, and then select a file to upload."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:82
msgid ":guilabel:`Google Slide`: enter a :guilabel:`Google Slide link` in the text-entry field that appears after the option is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Text`: enter the instructions in the text-entry field that appears after the option is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:-1
msgid "A maintenance request form filled out for a piece of equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:92
msgid "Process maintenance request"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:94
msgid "Once a maintenance request has been created, it appears in the *New Request* stage of the *Maintenance Requests* page, which can be accessed by navigating to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Maintenance --> Maintenance Requests`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:98
msgid "Maintenance requests can be moved to different stages by dragging and dropping them. They can also be moved by clicking on a request to open it in a new page, and then selecting the desired stage from the stage indicator bar, located above the top-right corner of the request's form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:102
msgid "Successful maintenance requests should be moved to the :guilabel:`Repaired` stage, indicating that the specified piece of equipment or work center is repaired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_requests.rst:105
msgid "Failed maintenance requests should be moved to the :guilabel:`Scrap` stage, indicating the specified piece of equipment, or work center, could not be repaired, and must instead be scrapped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:3
msgid "Maintenance setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:8
msgid "Odoo *Maintenance* helps companies schedule corrective and preventive maintenance on equipment used in their warehouse. This helps companies avoid equipment breakdowns, blocks in warehouse work centers, and emergency repair costs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:13
msgid "Maintenance teams"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:15
msgid "When creating maintenance requests, a *maintenance team* can be assigned to the request as the team responsible for handling the request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:18
msgid "To view existing maintenance teams, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Configuration --> Maintenance Teams`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:21
msgid "From the resulting :guilabel:`Teams` page, a list of all existing teams (if any) is displayed, with the :guilabel:`Team Name`, :guilabel:`Team Members`, and :guilabel:`Company` listed in the columns, by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "List of Teams on Maintenance Teams page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:29
msgid "To add a new team, click :guilabel:`New`. This adds a blank line at the bottom of the list of teams. In the blank field that appears below the :guilabel:`Team Name` column, assign a name to the new maintenance team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:33
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team Members` column, click the field to reveal a drop-down menu with existing users in the database. Choose which users should be members of the new maintenance team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:36
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Search More...` to open a :guilabel:`Search: Team Members` pop-up window to search for users **not** shown on the initial drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Search: Team Members pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:43
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Company` column, if in a multi-company environment, click the drop-down menu to select the company in the database to which this new maintenance team belongs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:46
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:88
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:49
msgid "The team members assigned to maintenance teams are also referred to as *Technicians*, when viewing the *Maintenance Calendar*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:52
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Maintenance --> Maintenance Calendar`, and click on an existing maintenance request. From the resulting popover, locate the :guilabel:`Technician` field. The name listed in the field is the team member, and is the user responsible for that particular request."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Maintenance request popover with Technician field shown."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:61
msgid "At the far-right side of the page is a sidebar column, containing a minimized calendar set to today's date, and a :guilabel:`Technician` list, displaying all the technicians (or team members) with requests currently open."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:66
msgid "Equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:68
msgid "In Odoo *Maintenance*, *equipment* refers to machines and tools used internally in warehouse work centers. Equipment can include technology such as computers or tablets, power tools, machines used for manufacturing, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:73
msgid "Equipment categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:75
msgid "Each piece of equipment belongs to an *equipment category*. Before adding new equipment, make sure that a fitting equipment category is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:78
msgid "To create a new equipment category, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Configuration --> Equipment Categories`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Doing so opens a blank equipment category form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Equipment category form with various information filled out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:86
msgid "On the blank form, assign a name in the :guilabel:`Category Name` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:88
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Responsible` field, assign a user to be responsible for the equipment in this category, if necessary. By default, the user who creates the category is selected as :guilabel:`Responsible`, by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:92
msgid "If in a multi-company environment, click the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Company` field, and select the company in the database to whom the equipment in this category belongs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:95
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Email Alias` field, assign an email alias to this category, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:97
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Comments` field, type any comments or notes for internal users to reference in relation to this category, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:101
msgid "Once a new equipment category is created, all equipment belonging to that category, as well as any past or currently open maintenance requests, are available from the equipment category form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:104
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Configuration --> Equipment Categories`, and select a category to view. Locate the :guilabel:`Equipment` and :guilabel:`Maintenance` smart buttons at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Equipment and Maintenance smart buttons on equipment category form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:112
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Equipment` smart button to view all equipment belonging to this category. Click the :guilabel:`Maintenance` smart button to view any past, or currently open, maintenance requests."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:117
msgid "Machines & tools"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:119
msgid "To add new equipment, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Equipment --> Machines & Tools`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a blank equipment form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:122
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Name` field, assign a name for the new equipment. In the :guilabel:`Equipment Category` field, click the drop-down menu and select which category this new equipment should belong to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:126
msgid "If in a multi-company environment, click the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Company` field, and select the company in the database to whom the new equipment belongs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:129
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Used By` field, select from one of three radio button options: :guilabel:`Department`, :guilabel:`Employee`, or :guilabel:`Other`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Left-hand side of information fields on new equipment form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:136
msgid "If :guilabel:`Department` is selected, a :guilabel:`Department` field appears below the :guilabel:`Used By` field. Click the drop-down menu and select the department that uses this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:140
msgid "If :guilabel:`Employee` is selected, an :guilabel:`Employee` field appears below the :guilabel:`Used By` field. Click the drop-down menu, and select the employee who uses this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:143
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Other` option is selected, both the :guilabel:`Department` and :guilabel:`Employee` fields appear below the :guilabel:`Used By` field. Click the drop-down menus for the respective fields, and choose which department and employee uses this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:147
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Maintenance Team` field, select the team responsible for this equipment. In the :guilabel:`Technician` field, select the team member/user responsible for this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Right-hand side of information fields on new equipment form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:154
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Used in location` field, enter the location wherein this equipment will be used, if not in an internal work center (e.g. in an office)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:157
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Work Center` field, click the drop-down menu, and select which work center this equipment will be used in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:160
msgid "In the blank space under the :guilabel:`Description` tab at the bottom of the form, add any relevant information describing the equipment for users to reference."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:164
msgid "Product Information tab"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:166
msgid "To add any relevant information while creating a new piece of equipment, from the equipment form, click the :guilabel:`Product Information` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Product Information tab with available fields below it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:173
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, add the vendor from which the equipment was purchased. In the :guilabel:`Vendor Reference` field, add the product reference number obtained from the vendor, if applicable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:177
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Model` field, specify which model this equipment is, if applicable. If the equipment is serialized, add a serial number in the :guilabel:`Serial Number` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:180
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Effective Date` field, click the date to reveal a calendar popover, and select a date. This date indicates when this equipment was first put in use, and will be used to compute the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) in the equipment's :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:184
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Cost` field, specify how much the equipment cost to acquire, if applicable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:186
msgid "If the equipment is covered under a warranty, specify the :guilabel:`Warranty Expiration Date` by selecting a date from the calendar popover in that field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:190
msgid "Maintenance tab"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:192
msgid "Various maintenance metrics are available for each piece of equipment, and are automatically computed, based on corrective maintenance, and planned preventive maintenance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:195
msgid "To view the maintenance metrics for a specific piece of equipment, from the equipment form, click the :guilabel:`Maintenance` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "Maintenance tab on equipment form showing computed metrics fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:202
msgid "Doing so reveals the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:204
msgid ":guilabel:`Expected Mean Time Between Failure`: the amount of time (in days) before the next failure is expected. This is the **only** field not greyed-out, and the **only** field users can edit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:207
msgid ":guilabel:`Mean Time Between Failure`: the amount of time (in days) between reported failures. This value is computed based on completed corrective maintenances."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:209
msgid ":guilabel:`Estimated Next Failure`: the date on which the next failure is expected. This date is computed as the Latest Failure Date + |MTBF|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:211
msgid ":guilabel:`Latest Failure`: The date of the latest failure. The value in this field updates once a failure is reported for this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:213
msgid ":guilabel:`Mean Time To Repair`: the amount of time (in days) it takes to repair this equipment upon failure. This value updates once a maintenance request is completed for this equipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:217
msgid "Work centers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:219
msgid "To view the work centers where equipment is being used, and how the equipment is being used in them, navigate to :menuselection:`Maintenance app --> Equipment --> Work Centers`, and click into a work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:223
msgid "From the resulting work center form, click the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab to view all machines and tools being used in that specific work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:226
msgid "Each piece of equipment is listed with certain relevant information: the :guilabel:`Equipment Name`, the responsible :guilabel:`Technician`, the :guilabel:`Equipment Category` it belongs to, and a few important maintenance metrics: its |MTBF|, |MTTR|, and :guilabel:`Est. Next Failure` date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:-1
msgid "List of equipment included in a work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:235
msgid "To add new equipment to a work center directly from the work center form, click :guilabel:`Add a line` under the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab. This opens an :guilabel:`Add: Maintenance Equipment` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/maintenance/maintenance_setup.rst:239
msgid "From the pop-up window, select the equipment that should be added to the work center, and click :guilabel:`Select`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:7
msgid "Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:9
msgid "**Odoo Manufacturing** helps manufacturers schedule, plan, and process manufacturing orders. With the work center control panel, put tablets on the shop floor to control work orders in real-time and allow workers to trigger maintenance operations, feedback loops, quality issues, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: MRP <https://www.odoo.com/slides/mrp-29>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:15
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Barcode Scanner <https://www.odoo.com/slides/barcode-30>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:16
msgid ":doc:`IoT Boxes (MES) </applications/general/iot>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration.rst:5
msgid "Advanced configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:3
msgid "Use kits"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo, a *kit* is a type of bill of materials (BoM) that can be manufactured and sold. Kits are sets of unassembled components sold to customers. They may be sold as standalone products, but are also useful tools for managing more complex bills of materials (BoMs)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:10
msgid "To use, manufacture, and sell kits, both the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` and :guilabel:`Inventory` apps need to be installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:14
msgid "Create the kit as a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:16
msgid "To use a kit as a sellable product, or simply as a component organization tool, the kit should first be created as a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:19
msgid "To create a kit product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:22
msgid "Then, assign a name to the new kit product. Next, under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Consumable`. Kit products work best as consumables, because the stock on-hand for kits is typically not tracked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:27
msgid "Although kits should almost always be set to :guilabel:`Consumable`, companies using **Anglo-Saxon** accounting might need to create kits as a :guilabel:`Storable Product`. This is because when processing invoices for kits, the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) will be posted in accounting journals."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:32
msgid "Unlike storable products, the :guilabel:`Routes` designation under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab does not matter for kits, since Odoo uses the routes of the kit's individual components for replenishment purposes. All other parameters for the kit product may be modified according to preference. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the new product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:37
msgid "The kit's components must also be configured as products via :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`. These components require no specific configuration."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:41
msgid "Set up the kit BoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:43
msgid "After fully configuring the kit product and its components, a new :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` can be created for the kit product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:46
msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Next to the :guilabel:`Product` field, click the drop-down menu to reveal a list of products, and select the previously configured kit product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:50
msgid "Then, for the :guilabel:`BoM Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Kit` option. Finally, under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and add each desired component, and specify their quantities under the :guilabel:`Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:54
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the newly-created :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Kit selection on the bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:60
msgid "If the kit is solely being used as a sellable product, then only components need to be added under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and configuring manufacturing operations is not necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:64
msgid "When a kit is sold as a product, it appears as a single line item on the quotation and sales order. However, on delivery orders, each component of the kit is listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:68
msgid "Use kits to manage complex BoMs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:70
msgid "Kits are also used to manage multi-level :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`. These are products that contain **other** :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products as components, and therefore require *nested* :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`. Incorporating pre-configured kits into multi-level :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)` allows for cleaner organization of bundled products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:75
msgid "To configure this type of :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` with a kit as a component, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:79
msgid "Next to the :guilabel:`Product` field, click the drop-down menu to reveal a list of products, and select the desired :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` product. Then, for the :guilabel:`BoM Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Manufacture this product` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:83
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and select a kit as the component. Adding the kit as a component eliminates the need to add the kit's components individually. Any :guilabel:`BoM Type` can be used for the higher-level product's :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Kit as a component in a multilevel bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:95
msgid "Structure & cost"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:97
msgid "To access a comprehensive overview of the multi-level :abbr:`BoM's (bill of material's)` components, click on the :guilabel:`Structure & Cost` smart button. Sublevel :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)` can be expanded and viewed from this report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Expanded kit in the Structure and Cost report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:105
msgid "When creating a manufacturing order for a product with a multi-level :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`, the kit product automatically expands to show all components. Any operations in the kit's :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` are also added to the list of work orders on the manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/kit_shipping.rst:111
msgid "Kits are primarily used to bundle components together for organization or sale. To manage multi-level products that require manufactured sub-components, refer to :doc:`this documentation <sub_assemblies>` on sub-assemblies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:3
msgid "Managing BoMs for product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:5
msgid "Odoo allows one bill of materials (BoM) to be used for multiple variants of the same product. Having a consolidated :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` for a product with variants saves time by preventing the need to manage multiple :abbr:`BoMs (bills of materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:10
msgid "Activate product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:12
msgid "To activate the product variants feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Products` section. Then, click the checkbox to enable the :guilabel:`Variants` option. After that, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:17
msgid "For more information on configuring product variants, refer to the :doc:`product variants <../../../sales/sales/products_prices/products/variants>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Selecting \"Variants\" from Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:25
msgid "Create custom product attributes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:27
msgid "Once the product variants feature is activated, create and edit product attributes on the :guilabel:`Attributes` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:30
msgid "The :guilabel:`Attributes` page is accessible either from :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Settings` by clicking the :guilabel:`Attributes` button, or by clicking :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Attributes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:34
msgid "Once on the :guilabel:`Attributes` page, either click into an existing attribute, or click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new one. Clicking :guilabel:`Create` reveals a new, blank form for customizing an attribute. For an existing attribute, click :guilabel:`Edit` on its form to make changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:39
msgid "Assign an :guilabel:`Attribute Name`, and choose a category from the :guilabel:`Category` field's drop-down menu. Then, select the desired options next to the :guilabel:`Display Type` and :guilabel:`Variants Creation Mode` fields. Once the desired options are selected, click :guilabel:`Add a line` under the :guilabel:`Attribute Values` tab to add a new value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:45
msgid "Included on the :guilabel:`Value` row is a :guilabel:`Is custom value` checkbox. If selected, this value will be recognized as a custom value, which allows customers to type special customization requests upon ordering a custom variant of a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:0
msgid "Product variant attribute configuration screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:54
msgid "Once all desired :guilabel:`Values` have been added, click :guilabel:`Save` to save the new attribute."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:58
msgid "Add product variants on the product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:60
msgid "Created attributes can be applied on specific variants for particular products. To add product variants to a product, navigate to the product form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`. To make changes to the product, click :guilabel:`Edit`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Variants` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:65
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Attribute` header, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add a new attribute, and select one to add from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:68
msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Values` header, click the drop-down menu to choose from the list of existing values. Click on each desired value to add them, and repeat this process for any additional attributes that should be added to the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:72
msgid "Once finished, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Product form variants tab with values and attributes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:79
msgid ":abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products with multiple variants that are manufactured in-house should either have a **0,0 reordering rule** set up, or have their replenishment routes set to *Replenish on Order (MTO)*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:84
msgid "Apply BoM components to product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:86
msgid "Next, create a new :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`. Or, edit an existing one, by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create` to open a new :guilabel:`Bills of Materials` form to configure from scratch."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:90
msgid "Add a product to the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` by clicking the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` field and selecting the desired product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:93
msgid "Then, add components by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line` under the :guilabel:`Component` section of the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and choosing the desired components from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:96
msgid "Choose the desired values in the :guilabel:`Quantity` and :guilabel:`Product Unit of Measure` columns. Then, choose the desired values in the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:100
msgid "The :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` option to assign components to specific product variants on the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` is available once the :guilabel:`Variants` setting is activated from the :menuselection:`Inventory` application. If the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` field is not immediately visible, activate it from the additional options menu (three-dots icon, to the right of the header row)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "\"Apply on Variants\" option on the additional options menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:110
msgid "Each component can be assigned to multiple variants. Components with no variants specified are used in every variant of the product. The same principle applies when configuring operations and by-products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:114
msgid "When defining variant :abbr:`BoMs (bills of material)` by component assignment, the :guilabel:`Product Variant` field in the main section of the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` should be left blank. This field is *only* used when creating a :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` specifically for one product variant."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:119
msgid "When all desired configurations have been made to the :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)`, click :guilabel:`Save` at the top of the form to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:123
msgid "For components that only apply for specific variants, choose which operations the components should be consumed in. If the :guilabel:`Consumed in Operation` column is *not* immediately visible, activate it from the additional options menu (three-dots icon, to the right of the header row)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:129
msgid "Sell and manufacture variants of BoM products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:131
msgid "To sell and manufacture variants of :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` products to order, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Create` to create a new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:135
msgid "Sell variant of BoM product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:137
msgid "Once on the blank :guilabel:`Quotation` form, click the drop-down next to the :guilabel:`Customer` field to add a customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:140
msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, and select the previously-created :abbr:`BoM (bill of materials)` product with variants from the drop-down menu. Doing so reveals a :guilabel:`Configure a product` pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:144
msgid "From the pop-up window, click the desired attribute options to configure the correct variant of the product to manufacture. Then, click the green :guilabel:`+` or :guilabel:`-` icons next to the `1` to change the quantity to sell and manufacture, if desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Configure a product pop-up for choosing variant attributes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:152
msgid "Once all the specifications have been chosen, click :guilabel:`Add`. This will change the pop-up to a second :guilabel:`Configure` pop-up, where available optional products will appear, if they have been created previously."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:156
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to close the pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:158
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save all changes, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` at the top of the :guilabel:`Quotation` form to create and confirm a new sales order (SO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:162
msgid "Manufacture variant of BoM product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:164
msgid "Once the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` is confirmed, a :guilabel:`Manufacturing` smart button appears at the top of the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` form. Click the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` smart button to open the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:168
msgid "On this form, under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, the appropriate components for the chosen variant are listed. And, depending on the variant, different components will be listed. To see any mandatory or optional :guilabel:`Operation` steps, click the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:172
msgid "To enter the tablet view work order screen, click the :guilabel:`tablet icon` to the right of the row for the desired operation to be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:175
msgid "From the tablet view, click :guilabel:`Mark as Done` as the operation progresses to complete the operation steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:178
msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button at the top of the manufacturing order form to complete the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Manufacturing order for variant of BoM product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:185
msgid "Then, navigate back to the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` via the breadcrumbs at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:187
msgid "Now that the product has been manufactured, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button to deliver the product to the customer. From the :guilabel:`Delivery Order` form, click :guilabel:`Validate`, then click :guilabel:`Apply` to deliver the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/product_variants.rst:191
msgid "To finish the sale, click back to the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` via the :guilabel:`breadcrumbs` at the top of the page again. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Invoice` followed by :guilabel:`Create Invoice` again to invoice the customer for the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:3
msgid "Manage semi-finished products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:5
msgid "A *semi-finished product*, also known as a *subassembly*, is a manufactured product that is used as a component in another product's bill of materials (BoM). Semi-finished products are used to simplify complex :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` or to more accurately represent a manufacturing flow. A :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` that contains semi-finished products is referred to as a *multilevel BoM*, where the main *top-level product* and its subassemblies are distinguished."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:12
msgid "Configure semi-finished products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:14
msgid "To set up a multilevel :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, the top-level product and semi-finished products must be configured. Therefore, the first step is to create the semi-finished products and their :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:19
msgid ":doc:`../basic_setup/bill_configuration`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A bill of materials for a semi-finished product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:26
msgid "Create the top-level bill of materials (BoM)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:28
msgid "After the semi-finished products are fully configured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`. Then, :guilabel:`Create` the top-level product. Configure the product's specifications as desired, and be sure to :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:32
msgid "Once the top-level product is configured, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product form, then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` for the top-level product. Then, simply add the semi-finished products to this :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, along with any other necessary components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A bill of materials for a top-level product, containing a subassembly component."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:42
msgid "Manage production planning"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:44
msgid "There are several methods to manage manufacturing order automation for products with multilevel :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:48
msgid "Semi-finished products are specifically used to manage manufacturable products with multilevel BoMs. If a BoM is being created simply to organize components or bundle sellable products, using :doc:`Kits <kit_shipping>` is the more appropriate option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:52
msgid "To automatically trigger manufacturing orders for semi-finished products after confirming a manufacturing order for the main product, there are two options:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:55
msgid "**Option 1 (recommended):** Create *Reordering Rules* for the semi-finished products and set both the minimum and maximum desired stock quantities to `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:59
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:28
msgid ":doc:`../../purchase/products/reordering`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:61
msgid "**Option 2:** Activate the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` and :guilabel:`Manufacture` routes under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the semi-finished product's product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:64
msgid "Option 1 is more flexible than Option 2 and is therefore recommended. Reordering rules do not directly link demand to replenishment, and therefore allow stocks to be unreserved and redirected to other orders, if necessary. The Replenish on Order (MTO) route creates a unique link between the semi-finished and top-level products, exclusively reserving quantities for the confirmed top-level manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:70
msgid "Regardless of the method chosen, semi-finished products must be fully manufactured before manufacturing can begin on the top-level product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A manufacturing order for a top-level product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:3
msgid "Manage work orders using work centers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:5
msgid "Odoo Manufacturing allows for work orders to be carried out at specific work centers. When a manufacturing order is created for a product, any work orders listed in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the product bill of materials (BoM) will be automatically created as well and assigned to the specified work center. Work orders can be managed in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module by selecting :menuselection:`Operations --> Work Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:11
msgid "In order to use work centers, the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature must first be enabled. To do so, go to the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Work Orders`. Work centers can then be created and managed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:17
msgid "Create a work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:19
msgid "Within the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers --> Create`. The work center form can then be filled out as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:22
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center Name`: give the work center a concise name that describes the type of operations it will be used for"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:24
msgid ":guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters`: specify an alternative work center for operations to be carried out at if the main work center is not available"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Code`: assign the work center a reference code"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Working Hours`: define the number of hours that the work center can be in use each week"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:28
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: select the company that the work center belongs to"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a fully configured work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:37
msgid "Set standards for work center productivity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:39
msgid "The :guilabel:`General Information` tab on the work center form allows for productivity goals to be assigned to a work center:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Time Efficiency`: used to calculate the expected duration of a work order at the work center; for example, if a work order normally takes one hour and the efficiency is set to 200%, the work order will take 30 minutes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Capacity`: the number of operations that can be performed at the work center simultaneously"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`OEE Target`: the target for efficiency at the work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:48
msgid ":guilabel:`Time before prod.`: setup time required before work can commence"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Time after prod.`: breakdown or cleanup time required after work is finished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:50
msgid ":guilabel:`Cost per hour`: the cost of operating the work center for one hour"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Analytic Account`: the account where the cost of the work center should be recorded"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The general information tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:58
msgid "Assign equipment to a work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:60
msgid "Using the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab, it is possible for specific pieces of equipment to be assigned to a work center. The following information will be displayed for each piece of equipment added:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:63
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Name`: the name of the piece of equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:64
msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the technician responsible for servicing the equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Category`: the category the equipment belongs to"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`: mean time between failures; the average time that the piece of equipment will operate before failing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`MTTR`: mean time to recovery; the average time it takes for the equipment to become fully operational again"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Est. Next Failure`: an estimate of when the next equipment failure will occur"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The equipment tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:77
msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`, :guilabel:`MTTR`, and :guilabel:`Est. Next Failure` are all calculated automatically based on past failure data, if any exists."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:83
msgid "Integrate IoT devices"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:85
msgid "The :guilabel:`IoT Triggers` tab enables the integration of :abbr:`IoT (Internet of Things)` devices with a work center:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:88
msgid ":guilabel:`Device`: specifies the IoT device to be triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:89
msgid ":guilabel:`Key`: the security key for the device"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:90
msgid ":guilabel:`Action`: the IoT device action triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The IoT Triggers tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:97
msgid "Use case: configure an alternative work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:99
msgid "When a work center is at capacity, it cannot accept any new work orders. Instead of waiting for the work center to become available, it is possible to specify an alternative work center where surplus work orders should be carried out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:103
msgid "Begin by creating a new work center. Configure the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab so that it has all of the same equipment as the main work center. This will ensure that the same tasks can be carried out at both work centers. Navigate to the main work center and include the new work center in the :guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters` selection field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:108
msgid "Now, create a new manufacturing order that uses the main work center for one of its operations. The main work center will automatically be selected for the operation in the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. After confirming the manufacturing order, click the :guilabel:`Plan` button that appears at the top left of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "Click the plan button to automatically select an available work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:117
msgid "If the main work center is at capacity, the work center selected for the operation will be automatically changed to the alternative work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The alternative work center is automatically selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:125
msgid "Monitor work center performance"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:127
msgid "Performance for an individual work center can be viewed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`, and clicking on a work center. A variety of metrics showing work center performance can be viewed at the top right of the form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:131
msgid ":guilabel:`OEE`: overall effective efficiency, the percentage of time that the work center has been fully productive"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:133
msgid ":guilabel:`Lost`: the amount of time lost due to work stoppages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:134
msgid ":guilabel:`Load`: the amount of time it will take to complete the current workload"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/using_work_centers.rst:135
msgid ":guilabel:`Performance`: the real duration of work time, shown as a percentage of the expected duration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:3
msgid "Work order dependencies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:7
msgid "When manufacturing certain products, specific operations may need to be completed before others can begin. In order to ensure operations are carried out in the correct order, Odoo *Manufacturing* features a *work order dependencies* setting. Enabling this setting allows for operations on a Bill of Materials (BoM) to be *blocked* by other operations that should occur first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:15
msgid "The *work order dependencies* setting is not enabled by default. To enable it, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting, if it is not already active."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:19
msgid "After enabling the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting, the :guilabel:`Work Order Dependencies` setting appears below it. Enable :guilabel:`Work Order Dependencies`, then click :guilabel:`Save` to confirm the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:24
msgid "Add dependencies to BoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:26
msgid "Work order dependencies are configured on a product's |BOM|. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, then select a |BOM|, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:94
msgid "Learn more"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:32
msgid "For a complete guide on how to properly configure a new |BOM|, see the documentation on :doc:`creating a bill of materials <../basic_setup/bill_configuration>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:35
msgid "On the |BOM|, click on the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab, then enable the :guilabel:`Operation Dependencies` checkbox. This makes a new :guilabel:`Blocked By` option available in the settings of the :guilabel:`Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The Operation Dependencies checkbox on the Miscellaneous tab of a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:43
msgid "Next, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. On the top-right of the tab, click on the tab's :guilabel:`settings` button, then enable the :guilabel:`Blocked By` checkbox. This makes a :guilabel:`Blocked By` field appear for each operation on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The settings for the Operations tab on a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:51
msgid "In the line of the operation that should be blocked by another operation, click the :guilabel:`Blocked By` field, and an :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Blocked By` drop-down field on the pop-up window, select the blocking operation that must be completed *before* the operation that is blocked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The Blocked By drop-down field for an operation on a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:60
msgid "Finally, save the |BOM| by clicking :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:63
msgid "Plan work orders using dependencies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:65
msgid "Once work order dependencies have been configured on a |BOM|, Odoo *Manufacturing* is able to plan when work orders are scheduled, based on their dependencies. To plan the work orders for a manufacturing order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:70
msgid "Next, select a manufacturing order for a product with work order dependencies set on its |BOM|, or create a new manufacturing order by clicking :guilabel:`New`. If a new manufacturing order is created, select a |BOM| configured with work order dependencies from the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` drop-down field, then click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:75
msgid "After confirming the manufacturing order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab to view the work orders required to complete it. Any work orders that are *not* blocked by a different work order display a `Ready` tag in the :guilabel:`Status` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:79
msgid "Work orders that are blocked by one or more work orders display a `Waiting for another WO` tag instead. Once the blocking work order(s) are completed, the tag updates to `Ready`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The status tags for work orders on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:86
msgid "To schedule the manufacturing order's work orders, click the :guilabel:`Plan` button at the top of the page. After doing so, the :guilabel:`Scheduled Start Date` field for each work order on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab auto-fills with the scheduled start date and time. A blocked work order is scheduled at the end of the time period specified in the :guilabel:`Expected Duration` field of the work order that precedes it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The Scheduled Start Date field for work orders on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:97
msgid "A manufacturing order is created for Product A. The manufacturing order has two operations: Cut and Assemble. Each operation has an expected duration of 60 minutes, and the Assemble operation is blocked by the Cut operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:101
msgid "The :guilabel:`Plan` button for the manufacturing order is clicked at 1:30 pm, and the Cut operation is scheduled to begin immediately. Since the Cut operation has an expected duration of 60 minutes, the Assemble operation is scheduled to begin at 2:30 pm."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:106
msgid "Planning by workcenter"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:108
msgid "To see a visual representation of how work orders are planned, navigate to the :guilabel:`Work Orders Planning` page by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Planning --> Planning by Workcenter`. This page shows a timeline of all the work orders scheduled for each operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:112
msgid "If one work order is blocked by the completion of another, the work order that is blocked is shown as scheduled to start after the work order blocking it. In addition, an arrow connects the two work orders, leading from the blocking operation to the blocked operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies.rst:-1
msgid "The arrow connecting a blocked work order to the work order blocking it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup.rst:5
msgid "Basic setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:3
msgid "Bill of materials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:9
msgid "A *bill of materials* (or *BoM* for short) documents specific components, along with their respective quantities, that are needed to produce or repair a product. In Odoo, |BoMs| as blueprints for manufactured goods and kits, and often include production operations and step-by-step guidelines, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:15
msgid "BoM setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:17
msgid "To create a |BOM|, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials` and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:20
msgid "Next, set the :guilabel:`BoM Type` to :guilabel:`Manufacture this Product`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:22
msgid "Then, specify :ref:`required components <manufacturing/basic_setup/setup-components>` and, if necessary, define any :ref:`manufacturing operations <manufacturing/basic_setup/setup-operations>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:26
msgid "Individual |BOMs| can also be quickly accessed or created by clicking the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on any product form, as accessible through the *Sales*, *Inventory*, and *Manufacturing* apps, as well as through any internal links where a product is referenced (such as in a field or a line item)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:35
msgid "Show BoM for a product, with components listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:35
msgid "BoM for `Drawer`, displaying the **Components** tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:38
msgid ":doc:`../advanced_configuration/kit_shipping`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:39
msgid ":doc:`../subcontracting/subcontracting_basic`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:44
msgid "Components"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:46
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Components` tab of a |BOM|, specify components used to manufacture the product by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. From the :guilabel:`Components` drop-down menu, select from existing products or create a new product by typing the name and selecting either the :guilabel:`Create \" \"` option to quickly add the line item, or the :guilabel:`Create and edit...` option to add the component and continue to its configuration form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Add a component by selecting it from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:56
msgid "Optionally, access additional fields by clicking the :icon:`oi-settings-adjust` :guilabel:`(settings adjust)` icon to the far-right of the :guilabel:`Components` tab. Tick the checkboxes for the following features to enable these columns:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:60
msgid ":guilabel:`Apply on Variants`: specify which :doc:`product variant <../advanced_configuration/product_variants>` each component is used in. When the field is left blank, the component is used in all product variants."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Consumed in Operation`: specify the operation using the component. Useful for determining :ref:`manufacturing readiness <manufacturing/basic_setup/manufacturing-readiness>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Manual Consumption`: tick the checkbox to force operators to check the :guilabel:`Consumed` checkbox on a manufacturing order (MO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show a manufacturing order, highlighting the *Consumed* field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:75
msgid "Not doing so triggers the :guilabel:`Consumption Warning` error message, where the consumed component quantity must be manually inputted. Otherwise, the operation cannot be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show the consumption warning error message."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:85
msgid "Operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:87
msgid "Add an *operation* to a |BOM| to specify instructions for production and register time spent on an operation. To use this feature, first enable the *Work Orders* feature by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Operations` section, tick the :guilabel:`Work Orders` checkbox to enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:93
msgid ":doc:`../advanced_configuration/work_order_dependencies`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "\"Work Orders\" feature in the Settings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:99
msgid "Next, navigate to the |BOM| by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bill of Materials` and selecting the desired |BOM|. To add a new operation, go to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, and click :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:103
msgid "Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Create Operations` pop-up window, where the various fields of the operation are configured:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:106
msgid ":guilabel:`Operation`: name of the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:107
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center`: select existing locations to perform the operation, or create a new work center by typing the name and selecting the :guilabel:`Create \" \"` option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:109
msgid ":guilabel:`Apply on Variants`: specify if this operation is only available for certain product variants. If the operation applies to all product variants, leave this field blank."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:113
msgid ":doc:`Configuring BoMs for product variants <../advanced_configuration/product_variants>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:115
msgid ":guilabel:`Duration Computation`: choose how time spent on the operation is tracked. Opt for :guilabel:`Compute based on tracked time` to use the operation's time tracker or :guilabel:`Set duration manually` if operators can record and modify time themselves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:119
msgid "Choosing the :guilabel:`Compute based on tracked time` option enables the :guilabel:`Based on last __ work orders` option, which automatically estimates the time to complete this operation based on the last few operations. Choosing :guilabel:`Set duration manually` enables the :guilabel:`Default Duration` field instead."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:123
msgid ":guilabel:`Default Duration`: estimated amount of time to complete the operation; used for `planning manufacturing orders <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TK55jIq00pc>`_ and determining `work center availability <https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3YwFlD97Bio>`_."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: specify the company the |BOM| is available in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:128
msgid "Include operation details in the :guilabel:`Work Sheet` tab. Choose :guilabel:`PDF` to attach a file or :guilabel:`Google Slide` with *public* access to share a link. Select :guilabel:`Text` to type instructions in the :guilabel:`Description` text field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:133
msgid "Type `/` for a list of formatting options and features, including ChatGPT."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show ChatGPT feature to generate instructions for a work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Fill out the Create Operations pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:143
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Save \\& Close` to close the pop-up window. To add more operations, click :guilabel:`Save & New` and repeat the same steps above to configure another operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:147
msgid "Each operation is unique, as it is always exclusively linked to one |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:150
msgid "After creating an operation, click the :guilabel:`Copy Existing Operations` button to choose an operation to duplicate."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show Operation tab, highlighting the \"Copy Existing Operations\" field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:158
msgid "Instructions"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:161
msgid "To add detailed instructions to operations, the *Quality* app must be installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:163
msgid "Add specific instructions to an existing operation by clicking the operation's :icon:`fa-list-ul` :guilabel:`(list)` icon in the :guilabel:`Instructions` column. The number in the :guilabel:`Instructions` column shows the number of existing detailed instructions there are for the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Show the Instructions column, and list icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:172
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Steps` dashboard, click :guilabel:`New` to open a blank quality control point form where the new manufacturing step can be created. Here, give the specific instruction a :guilabel:`Title` and set the :guilabel:`Type` to :guilabel:`Instructions`. In the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab of the form, write out the directions for the step in the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:178
msgid "Further customizations can be made here on this form, beyond ordinary instructions, to also include specific types of quality control points that carry specific (or complex) conditions. For more details about quality control points refer the :doc:`Instruction check <../../quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Show the page to add a quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:188
msgid "Miscellaneous"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:190
msgid "The :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab contains more |BoM| configurations to customize procurement, calculate costs, and define how components are consumed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:195
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacturing Readiness`: choosing :guilabel:`When components for the 1st operation are available` shows the :guilabel:`Component Status` as a **green** :guilabel:`Not Available`, when only the components that are consumed in the first operation are in stock. This indicates that although not all components are available, operators can at least begin with the first operation. Choosing :guilabel:`When all components are available` displays a **red** :guilabel:`Not Available` component status unless all components are in available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:203
msgid "Specify which operation consumes each component on the |BoM| in the :ref:`Manual Consumption field <manufacturing/basic_setup/consumed-in-operation>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show the *Component Status* field on the manufacturing order dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:210
msgid ":guilabel:`Version`: displays the current |BoM| version, visible with the Odoo *PLM* app installed for managing |BoM| changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:212
msgid ":guilabel:`Flexible Consumption`: specifies if components used can deviate from the quantity defined on the |BoM|. Choose :guilabel:`Blocked` if operators **must** adhere strictly to the |BoM| quantity. Otherwise, choose :guilabel:`Allowed` or :guilabel:`Allowed with Warning`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:215
msgid ":guilabel:`Routing`: select the preferred warehouse's manufacturing operation type for products produced in multiple warehouses. If left blank, this warehouse's `Manufacturing` operation type is used by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:218
msgid ":guilabel:`Analytic Distribution`: select pre-created :doc:`analytic distribution models <../../../finance/accounting/reporting/analytic_accounting>` from the list to automatically record the cost of manufacturing products in the chosen journal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:221
msgid ":guilabel:`Manuf Lead Time`: define the number of days needed to complete a |MO| from the date of confirmation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:223
msgid ":guilabel:`Days to prepare Manufacturing Order`: number of days needed to replenish components, or manufacture sub-assemblies of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:227
msgid ":doc:`Analytic distribution <../../../finance/accounting/reporting/analytic_accounting>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:228
msgid ":doc:`Lead times <../../inventory/shipping_receiving/advanced_operations_shipping/scheduled_dates>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Show the *Miscellaneous* tab of the BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:236
msgid "Add by-products to BoMs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:238
msgid "A *by-product* is a residual product that is created during production in addition to the main product of a |BOM|. Unlike the primary product, there can be more than one by-product on a |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:241
msgid "To add by-products to a |BOM|, first enable the *By-Products* feature in :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Operations` section, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`By-Products` to enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "\"By Products\" feature in the settings page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:249
msgid "Once the feature is enabled, add by-products to a |BOM| by clicking the :guilabel:`By-products` tab. Click :guilabel:`Add a line`, and fill in the :guilabel:`By-product`, :guilabel:`Quantity`, and :guilabel:`Unit of Measure`. Optionally, specify a :guilabel:`Produced in Operation` for the by-product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:255
msgid "The by-product, `Mush`, is created in the `Grind grapes` operation when producing `Red Wine`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration.rst:0
msgid "Show sample by-product in the BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:3
msgid "Manufacturing product configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:8
msgid "In order to manufacture a product in Odoo *Manufacturing*, the product must be properly configured. Doing so consists of enabling the *Manufacturing* route and configuring a bill of materials (BoM) for the product. Once these steps are completed, the product is selectable when creating a new manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:14
msgid "Activate the Manufacture route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:16
msgid "The Manufacture route is activated for each product on its own product page. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`. Then, select an existing product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:20
msgid "On the product page, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, then enable the :guilabel:`Manufacture` checkbox in the :guilabel:`Routes` section. This tells Odoo the product can be manufactured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1
msgid "The Manufacturing route on the Inventory tab of a product page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:30
msgid "Lot/serial number tracking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:32
msgid "The assignment of lots or serial numbers to newly manufactured products is optional. To optionally :doc:`assign lots or serial numbers <../../inventory/product_management/product_tracking/create_sn>` to newly manufactured products, go to the :guilabel:`Traceability` section in the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab. In the :guilabel:`Tracking` field, select :guilabel:`By Unique Serial Number` or :guilabel:`By Lots`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:38
msgid "Doing so enables the *Lot/Serial Number* field on a manufacturing order, or the *Register Production* instruction on a work order card in the *Shop Floor* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:45
msgid "\"Lot/Serial Number\" field on the MO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:45
msgid "**Lot/Serial Number** field on the MO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:51
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:51
msgid "**Register Production** option to generate lot/serial number on a work order card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:54
msgid "Configure a bill of materials (BoM)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:56
msgid "Next, a |BOM| must be configured for the product so Odoo knows how it is manufactured. A |BOM| is a list of the components and operations required to manufacture a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:59
msgid "To create a |BOM| for a specific product, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`, then select the product. On the product page, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the page, then select :guilabel:`New` to configure a new |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1
msgid "The Bill of Materials smart button on a product page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:67
msgid "On the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Product` field auto-populates with the product. In the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, specify the number of units that the BoM produces."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:70
msgid "Add a component to the |BOM| by selecting the :guilabel:`Components` tab and clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Select a component from the :guilabel:`Component` drop-down menu, then enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Continue adding components on new lines until all components have been added."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1
msgid "The Components tab on a bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:79
msgid "Next, select the :guilabel:`Operations` tab. Click :guilabel:`Add a line` and a :guilabel:`Create Operations` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Operation` field, specify the name of the operation being added (e.g. Assemble, Cut, etc.). Select the work center where the operation will be carried out from the :guilabel:`Work Center` drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save & Close` to finish adding operations, or :guilabel:`Save & New` to add more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:86
msgid "The :guilabel:`Operations` tab only appears if the :guilabel:`Work Orders` setting is enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`, then enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` checkbox."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:-1
msgid "The Operations tab on a bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/configure_manufacturing_product.rst:96
msgid "The section above provides instructions for creating a basic |BOM| that allows a product to be manufactured in Odoo. However, it is by no means an exhaustive summary of all the options available when configuring a |BOM|. For more information about bills of materials, see the documentation on how to :doc:`create a bill of materials <bill_configuration>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:3
msgid "One-step manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:9
msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using one-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a manufacturing order (MO), but does not generate transfers for the movement of components out of inventory or finished products into stock. Inventory counts still update based on the number of components used and products manufactured, but the act of transferring them to and from inventory is not tracked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:16
msgid "The number of steps used in manufacturing is set at the warehouse level, allowing for each warehouse to use a different number of steps. To change the number of steps used for a specific warehouse, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`, and then select a warehouse from the :guilabel:`Warehouses` screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:20
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:21
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, find the :guilabel:`Manufacture` radio input field, and select one of the three options: :guilabel:`Manufacture (1 step)`, :guilabel:`Pick components and then manufacture (2 steps)`, or :guilabel:`Pick components, manufacture and then store products (3 steps)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:0
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:0
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:0
msgid "The Manufacture radio input field on a warehouse configuration page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:31
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:31
msgid "Products must be properly configured before they can be manufactured in Odoo. For details on how to do so, see the documentation on how to :ref:`configure a product for manufacturing <manufacturing/management/configure-manufacturing-product>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:36
msgid "Create manufacturing order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:38
msgid "To manufacture a product in Odoo *Manufacturing*, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then click :guilabel:`New` to create a new |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:42
msgid "On the new |MO|, select the product to be produced from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field auto-populates with the associated bill of materials (BoM)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:44
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:45
msgid "If a product has more than one |BOM| configured for it, the specific |BOM| can be selected in the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field, and the :guilabel:`Product` field auto-populates with the associated product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:49
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:48
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:49
msgid "After a |BOM| has been selected, the :guilabel:`Components` and :guilabel:`Work Orders` tabs auto-populate with the components and operations specified on the |BOM|. If additional components or operations are required for the |MO| being configured, add them to the :guilabel:`Components` and :guilabel:`Work Orders` tabs by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:54
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:53
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:54
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:57
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:80
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:77
msgid "Process manufacturing order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:59
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:79
msgid "An |MO| is processed by completing all of the work orders listed under its :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. This can be done on the |MO| itself, or from the work order tablet view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:63
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:86
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:83
msgid "Basic workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:65
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:85
msgid "To complete work orders from the |MO| itself, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:68
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:91
msgid "On the |MO| page, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Once work begins on the first work order that needs to be completed, click the :guilabel:`Start` button for that work order. Odoo *Manufacturing* then starts a timer that keeps track of how long the work order takes to complete."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Start button for an operation on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:76
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:99
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:96
msgid "When the work order is completed, click the :guilabel:`Done` button for that work order. Repeat the same process for each work order listed on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Done button for an operation on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:83
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:106
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:103
msgid "After completing all of the work orders, click :guilabel:`Produce All` at the top of the screen to mark the |MO| as :guilabel:`Done`, and register the manufactured product(s) into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:87
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:110
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:107
msgid "Shop Floor workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:89
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:112
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:109
msgid "To complete the work orders for an |MO| using the *Shop Floor* module, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:115
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:112
msgid "On the |MO|, click on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then select the :guilabel:`↗️ (square with arrow coming out of it)` button on the line of the first work order to be processed. Doing so opens a :guilabel:`Work Orders` pop-up window, with details and processing options for the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:97
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:120
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:117
msgid "On the pop-up window, select the :guilabel:`Open Shop Floor` button at the top-left of the window to open the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Open Shop Floor button for a work order on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:104
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:127
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:124
msgid "When accessed directly from a specific work order within an |MO|, *Shop Floor* defaults to the page for the work center where the work order is configured to be carried out. The page shows a card for the work order that displays the |MO| number, the product and number of units to be produced, and the steps required to complete the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "A work order card on a work center page in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:113
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:133
msgid "A work order is processed by completing each step listed on its card. This can be done by clicking on a step and following the instructions listed on the pop-up window that appears. Once the step is completed, click :guilabel:`Next` to move on to the next step, if any are required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:117
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:140
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:137
msgid "Alternatively, work order steps can be completed by clicking the checkbox that appears on the right side of the step's line on the work order card. When using this method, the step is automatically marked as completed, without a pop-up window appearing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:121
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:144
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:141
msgid "The final step on a work order card is titled *Register Production*. This step is used to register the number of product units that were produced. If the number produced is equal to the number that the |MO| was created for, click the :guilabel:`# Units` button on the right side of the line to automatically register that number as the quantity produced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:126
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:149
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:146
msgid "If a different number must be entered, click the :guilabel:`Register Production` step to open a pop-up window. Enter the number of units produced in the :guilabel:`Units` field, and then click :guilabel:`Validate` to register that number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:131
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:154
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:151
msgid "The *Register Production* step appears on every work order card. It must be completed for the first work order that is processed. After doing so, the step appears as already completed for each remaining work order in the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:135
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:158
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:155
msgid "After completing all of the steps for a work order, a button appears on the footer of the work order card. If any other work orders must be completed before the |MO| can be closed, the button is titled :guilabel:`Mark as Done`. If there are no additional work orders to complete, the button is titled :guilabel:`Close Production`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:140
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:163
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:160
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done` causes the work order card to fade away. Once it disappears completely, the work order's status is marked as *Finished* on the |MO|, and the next work order appears in the *Shop Floor* module, on the page of the work center where it is configured to be carried out. Any additional work orders can be processed using the instructions detailed in this section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:146
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:169
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:166
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` causes the work order card to fade away. Once it disappears, the |MO| is marked as *Done*, and the units of the product that were produced are entered into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:150
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:173
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:170
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done` or :guilabel:`Close Production`, each button is replaced by an :guilabel:`Undo` button. Click the :guilabel:`Undo` button before the work order card fades away to keep the work order open."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing.rst:155
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:178
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:175
msgid "This section details the basic workflow for processing an |MO| in the *Shop Floor* module. For a more in-depth explanation of the module and all of its features, please see the :ref:`Shop Floor overview <manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:3
msgid "Three-step manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:9
msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using three-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a pick components transfer, a manufacturing order (MO), and a store finished products transfer, and updates inventory counts based on the number of components removed, and finished products created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:41
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:42
msgid "On the new |MO|, select the product to be produced from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu. The :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field auto-populates with the associated Bill of Materials (BoM)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:56
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:57
msgid "Process pick components transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:58
msgid "After confirming a three-step |MO|, a :guilabel:`Transfers` smart button appears at the top of the page. Click it to be taken to the :guilabel:`Transfers` page for the |MO|. The page lists two transfers: *WH/PC/XXXXX* (the pick components transfer), and *WH/SFP/XXXXX* (the store finished products transfer)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:63
msgid "Select :guilabel:`WH/PC/XXXXX` to open the pick components transfer for the |MO|. This transfer is used to track the movement of components from the locations where they are stored to the location where they are used to manufacture the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:67
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:64
msgid "After transferring the components out of their storage location, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the transfer, followed by :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears. Doing so marks the transfer as :guilabel:`Done`, and updates inventory counts to reflect the quantity of components transferred."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:72
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:69
msgid "Finally, return to the |MO| by clicking the :guilabel:`WH/MO/XXXXX` breadcrumb at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The manufacturing order bread crumb on a pick components transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:88
msgid "To complete work orders from the |MO| itself, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Start button for a work order on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Done button for an work order on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:136
msgid "A work order is processed by completing each step listed on its card. This can be done by clicking on a step, and following the instructions listed on the pop-up window that appears. Once the step is completed, click :guilabel:`Next` to move on to the next step, if any are required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:183
msgid "Process finished product transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:185
msgid "After completing the |MO|, return to the order's :guilabel:`Transfers` page by clicking the :guilabel:`Transfers` button at the top of the order. This time, select :guilabel:`WH/SFP/XXXXX` to open the store finished products transfer. This transfer is used to track the movement of finished products from the location where they were manufactured to the location where they are stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing.rst:190
msgid "After transferring the finished products to their storage location, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the transfer, followed by :guilabel:`Apply` on the :guilabel:`Immediate Transfer?` pop-up window that appears. Doing so marks the transfer as :guilabel:`Done`, and updates inventory counts to reflect the quantity of finished products transferred."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:3
msgid "Two-step manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:9
msgid "Odoo *Manufacturing* allows users to manufacture products using one, two, or three steps. When using two-step manufacturing, Odoo creates a manufacturing order (MO) and a pick components transfer, but does not generate a transfer for the movement of finished products into stock. Inventory counts still update based on the number of products manufactured, but the act of transferring them to and from inventory is not tracked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:59
msgid "After confirming a two-step |MO|, a :guilabel:`Transfers` smart button appears at the top of the page. Click it to open the pick components transfer for the |MO|. This transfer is used to track the movement of components from the locations where they are stored to the location where they are used to manufacture the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:88
msgid "On the |MO| page, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Once work begins on the first work order that needs to be completed, click the :guilabel:`Start` button for that operation. Odoo *Manufacturing* then starts a timer that keeps track of how long the work order takes to complete."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Start button for an work order on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Done button for a work order on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor.rst:5
msgid "Shop Floor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:3
msgid "Shop Floor overview"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:9
msgid "The *Shop Floor* module is a companion module to the *Manufacturing* app. *Shop Floor* provides a visual interface for processing manufacturing orders (MOs) and work orders. It also allows manufacturing employees to track the amount of time spent working on manufacturing and work orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:13
msgid "The *Shop Floor* module is installed alongside the *Manufacturing* app. It cannot be installed by itself. To install the *Manufacturing* app, navigate to :menuselection:`Apps`, search for `manufacturing` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, and then click :guilabel:`Install` on the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` app card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:19
msgid "The *Shop Floor* module replaces the tablet view functionality of the *Manufacturing* app, and is only available in Odoo versions 16.4 and later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:22
msgid "To check the version number of an Odoo database, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings` and scroll down to the :guilabel:`About` section at the bottom of the page. The version number is displayed there."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:26
msgid "To switch to a newer version of Odoo, see the documentation on :doc:`upgrading a database <../../../../administration/upgrade>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:30
msgid "Navigation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:32
msgid "*Shop Floor* is broken down into three main views, which can be selected from the navigation bar at the top of the module:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:35
msgid "The :guilabel:`All` page serves as the main dashboard for the module, and displays information cards for |MOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:37
msgid "Each work center also has a dedicated page, which shows information cards for work orders assigned to that work center. Work center pages can be toggled on or off by clicking the :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button in the navigation bar, selecting or deselecting them on the pop-up window that appears, and then clicking :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:41
msgid "The :guilabel:`My` page shows information cards for all work orders assigned to the employee whose profile is currently active in the operator panel on the left side of the module. Other than only showing work orders assigned to the active employee, this page functions the same as the pages for each work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:47
msgid "To isolate an |MO| or work order, so that no other orders appear, simply search the reference number of the |MO| in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar at the top of the module. This search filter remains active while switching between the different module views."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:51
msgid "On the left side of the module is the operator panel, which shows all of the employees currently signed in to *Shop Floor*, and allows new employees to sign in. The operator panel is always available in the module, regardless of which view is selected. It can be toggled on or off by clicking the :guilabel:`sidebar` button at the extreme left of the navigation bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1
msgid "The \"sidebar\" button, which is used to toggle the operator panel on or off."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:61
msgid "All page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:63
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`All` page shows an information card for every |MO| that is *ready to start*. An |MO| is considered ready to start once it has been confirmed, and all required components are available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:67
msgid "To view every confirmed |MO| regardless of readiness, click the :guilabel:`x` button on the :guilabel:`Ready to Start` filter to remove it from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:71
msgid "MO information card"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:73
msgid "An |MO| information card on the :guilabel:`All` page shows all of the relevant details of the associated |MO|, and also provides employees with options for processing the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:76
msgid "The header for an |MO| card shows the |MO| number, the product and number of units being produced, and the status of the |MO|. If work has not yet begun on the |MO|, the status appears as :guilabel:`Confirmed`. Once work has begun, the status updates to :guilabel:`In Progress`. If all work orders for an |MO| have been completed and the |MO| is ready to close, the status updates to :guilabel:`To Close`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:82
msgid "The main body of an |MO| card shows a line for each completed work order, if any, followed by the current work order that needs to be completed. Completed work orders are indicated by a green check mark to the right of title of the work order. The current work order is indicated by a button that opens the page for the work center to which the order is assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:87
msgid "Below the current work order is a line titled :guilabel:`Register Production`, which is used to record the number of product units produced. To manually enter the number of units produced, click on the :guilabel:`Register Production` line, enter a value in the :guilabel:`Units` field of the resulting pop-up window, then click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:92
msgid "Alternatively, click the :guilabel:`# Units` button on the right side of the line, which automatically records the number of units the |MO| was created for as the number of units produced. For example, if an |MO| is created for 10 units of a dining table, clicking the :guilabel:`10 units` button records that 10 units were produced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:97
msgid "The footer of the |MO| card displays a :guilabel:`Close Production` button. This is used to close the |MO| once production is completed. However, if there are any quality checks required for the |MO| as a whole (not the work orders within it), a :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears instead. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Checks` opens a pop-up window, from which any required quality checks can be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:103
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Close Production`, the |MO| card begins to fade away, and an :guilabel:`Undo` button appears on the footer. Clicking :guilabel:`Undo` causes the |MO| to remain open. Once the |MO| card disappears completely, the work order is closed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:107
msgid "On the right side of the footer is an :guilabel:`⋮ (options)` button, which opens a pop-up window with additional options for the |MO|:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:110
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:171
msgid ":guilabel:`Scrap` is used to send components to a scrap location when they are found to be defective."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:112
msgid ":guilabel:`Add Work Order` is used to add an additional work order to the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:113
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:173
msgid ":guilabel:`Add Component` is used to add an additional component to the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:114
msgid ":guilabel:`Open Backend MO` opens the |MO| in the Manufacturing app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1
msgid "An information card for an MO on the \"All\" page of the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:121
msgid "Work center pages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:123
msgid "By default, the page for each work center shows an information card for every work order assigned to it that is *ready to start*. A work order is considered ready to start once the |MO| it is a part of is ready to start, and any preceding work orders have been completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:127
msgid "To view every confirmed work order assigned to a work center regardless of readiness, click the :guilabel:`x` button on the :guilabel:`Ready to Start` filter to remove it from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:132
msgid "Work order information card"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:134
msgid "A work order information card on a work center's page shows all of the relevant details of the associated work order, and also provides employees with options for processing the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:137
msgid "The header for a work order card shows the reference number of the |MO| that the work order is a part of, the product and number of units being produced, and the status of the work order. If work has not yet begun on the work order, the status appears as :guilabel:`To Do`. Once work has begun, the status updates to display a timer showing the total time the work order has been worked on."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:142
msgid "The main body of a work order card shows a line for each step required to complete the work order. Work order steps can be completed by clicking on the line, then following the instructions on the pop-up window that appears. Alternatively, clicking the checkbox on the right side of each line automatically marks the step as completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:147
msgid "Below the final step of the work order is a line titled :guilabel:`Register Production`, which functions the same as the :guilabel:`Register Production` line on an |MO| card. Registering the number of units produced using the :guilabel:`Register Production` line on a work order card also completes the step for the associated |MO| card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:152
msgid "If the work order being processed is the final work order for the |MO|, a :guilabel:`Close Production` button appears on the footer of the work order card. Clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` closes both the work order and the |MO|, unless a quality check is required for the |MO|. In this case, the quality check must be completed from the |MO| card before the |MO| can be closed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:158
msgid "Alternatively, if the |MO| requires the completion of additional work orders, a :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button appears instead. Clicking :guilabel:`Mark as Done` marks the current work order as completed, and causes the next work order to appear on the page for the work center it is assigned to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:163
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` or :guilabel:`Mark as Done`, the work order card begins to fade away, and an :guilabel:`Undo` button appears on the footer. Clicking :guilabel:`Undo` causes the work order to remain open. Once the work order card disappears completely, the work order is marked as :guilabel:`Finished` on the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:168
msgid "On the right side of the footer is an :guilabel:`⋮ (options)` button, which opens a pop-up window with additional options for the work order:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:174
msgid ":guilabel:`Move to work center` is used to transfer the work order to a different work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:175
msgid ":guilabel:`Suggest a Worksheet improvement` allows the user to propose a change to the work order's instructions or steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:177
msgid ":guilabel:`Create a Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form that can be filled out to alert a quality team about a potential issue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1
msgid "An information card for a work order in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:185
msgid "Operator panel"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:187
msgid "The operator panel is used to manage the employees that are signed in to the *Shop Floor* module. The panel shows the name and profile picture of every employee that is currently signed in across all instances of the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:191
msgid "To interact with *Shop Floor* as a specific employee, click the employee's name to activate their profile. Profiles that are not active appear with their names and profile pictures greyed-out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:194
msgid "When an employee is selected in the operator panel, they can begin working on a work order by clicking the work order's heading. If an employee is working on one or more work orders, the work order title(s) appear under their name, along with a timer showing how long they've been working on each order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:199
msgid "To add a new employee to the operator panel, click the :guilabel:`+ Add Operator` button at the bottom of the panel. Then, select an employee from the :guilabel:`Select Employee` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:202
msgid "To remove an employee from the operator panel, simply click the :guilabel:`x` button next to their name in the panel."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview.rst:-1
msgid "The operator panel of the Shop Floor module, showing three employees signed in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:3
msgid "Shop Floor time tracking"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:8
msgid "By signing in to the Odoo *Shop Floor* module as *operators*, employees are able to track the amount of time they spend working on each work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:11
msgid "Odoo tracks the time it takes to complete each work order, as well as the time each operator spends on each work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:15
msgid "Operator sign in"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:17
msgid "To sign in to the *Shop Floor* module as an operator, sign in to the Odoo database, and open the :menuselection:`Shop Floor` module. The employee profile that is signed in to the database is automatically signed in as an operator."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:21
msgid "All active operators are listed in the operator panel on the left side of the module. The panel can be opened or collapsed by clicking the :guilabel:`show/hide panel (white square with black column on left side)` button, located in the top-left corner of the module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:-1
msgid "The operator panel in the Shop Floor module, with the show/hide panel button above it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:29
msgid "To sign in to *Shop Floor* as a different employee, click the :guilabel:`+ Add Operator` button at the bottom of the panel. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Select Employee` pop-up window, which lists every employee that is able to sign in to the module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:33
msgid "Click on a specific employee to sign in using their profile. If no PIN code is required to sign in as that employee, the profile will be signed in automatically."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:36
msgid "If a PIN code is required, a :guilabel:`Password?` pop-up window appears, showing a number pad, from which the code can be entered. Enter the code using the number pad, and click :guilabel:`Confirm` to sign in to the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:-1
msgid "The \"Password?\" pop-up window, which is used to enter an operator PIN code."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:45
msgid "A PIN code can be set for each employee, which must be entered each time they sign in to the *Shop Floor* module, check in or out in the *Kiosk Mode* of the *Attendances* application, or sign in as a cashier in the *Point of Sale* application."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:49
msgid "To set an employee PIN, navigate to the :menuselection:`Employees` app, and select a specific employee. At the bottom of the employee's form, click on the :guilabel:`HR Settings` tab, and enter a numerical code in the :guilabel:`PIN Code` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:53
msgid "Once an employee is signed in to the module, their name appears in the operator panel, along with every other employee that has signed in. While the panel can list multiple employees, only one employee can be active at any given time, on a single instance of the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:57
msgid "Click on an employee's name to make their profile active. The active employee appears highlighted in blue, while employees that are signed in, but not active, have their names faded out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:60
msgid "To sign out a specific employee from the module, click the :guilabel:`X (remove)` button next to their name, in the operator panel."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:64
msgid "Track work order duration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:66
msgid "To track time spent working on a work order, begin by selecting the employee working on it from the operator panel."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:69
msgid "Next, navigate to the page for the work center where the work order is scheduled to be carried out. This can be done by selecting the work center from the top navigation in the *Shop Floor* module, or by clicking the name of the work center on the card for the manufacturing order (MO) that the work order is a part of."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:74
msgid "On the page for the work center, find the card for the work order. Once work begins, click the header of the work order card to start timing the duration it takes to complete. This duration is displayed by a timer on the header of the work order card, which tracks the collective time spent working on the work order, by all employees."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:-1
msgid "A work order card with an active timer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:83
msgid "In addition, the reference number of the work order appears in the operator panel, under the name of the employee working on it, along with a second timer, which tracks the amount of time the employee has spent on the work order individually. This timer only reflects work done during the current session, even if the employee has previously worked on the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:88
msgid "Employees are able to work on multiple work orders simultaneously, and track their time for each. The reference number for each work order being worked on appears below the employee's name, along with a timer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:-1
msgid "An employee card in the operator panel, showing two work order timers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:96
msgid "To pause the timer on the work order card, and remove the work order from below the employee's name on the operator panel, click the header a second time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:99
msgid "Once the work order is completed, click the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button at the bottom of the work order card, which causes the card to fade away. If the timer is still active, it stops once the card disappears completely."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:104
msgid "View work order duration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:106
msgid "To view the duration of a work order, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and select an |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:109
msgid "To view and select |MOs| that have been completed and marked as *Done*, remove the :guilabel:`To Do` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, by clicking on the :guilabel:`X (close)` button on the right side of the filter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:113
msgid "On the page for the |MO|, click on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab to see a list of all work orders included in the |MO|. The time it took to complete each work order is displayed in the :guilabel:`Real Duration` column of the tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_tracking.rst:117
msgid "The *Real Duration* represents the total time spent working on the work order by all workers who worked on it. It includes time tracked in the *Shop Floor* module, as well as time tracked on the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab of the |MO| itself."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:5
msgid "Subcontracting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:9
msgid "In manufacturing, *subcontracting* is the process of a company engaging a third-party manufacturer, or subcontractor, to manufacture products that are then sold by the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:12
msgid "Subcontracting provides a variety of benefits for both the contracting company and the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:15
msgid "For the contracting company, subcontracting allows them to sell a wide variety of manufactured products, without having to worry about investing in and maintaining the equipment and labor required to handle the manufacturing themselves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:19
msgid "This helps contracting companies stay flexible throughout economic cycles, as they can easily increase or decrease their engagements with subcontractors, as necessitated by the current moment. It also means they are able to focus on tasks they excel at, while delegating more specialized work to subcontractors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:24
msgid "On the other side of the relationship, subcontracting allows subcontractors to specialize in more niche areas of production, which might not be as profitable outside the bounds of a subcontracting engagement. In certain arrangements, it also provides them with the flexibility to choose which projects they accept or decline, and how many they work on at any given time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:29
msgid "In Odoo, companies can configure their subcontracting workflows based on a variety of different factors, including how components are sourced, and what happens to finished products once they are manufactured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:54
msgid "To enable subcontracting in Odoo, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and tick the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Subcontracting` setting, under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:-1
msgid "The Subcontracting setting in the manufacturing app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:62
msgid "With subcontracting enabled, a few different features become available in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:64
msgid "On bills of materials (BoMs), the *BoM Type* field now includes a *Subcontracting* option. Enabling the *Subcontracting* |BoM| type designates the |BoM|'s product as a subcontracted product, which means Odoo knows that it is produced by a subcontractor, and not by the company that owns the Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:68
msgid "Two subcontracting routes become available in the *Inventory* app, and can be assigned to specific products, on the *Inventory* tab of their product pages:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:71
msgid "*Resupply Subcontractor on Order*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:72
msgid "*Dropship Subcontractor on Order*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:75
msgid "Subcontracting workflows"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:77
msgid "In Odoo, there are three subcontracting workflows, the main difference between them being *how* the subcontractor obtains the necessary components:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:80
msgid "In the *basic* subcontracting workflow, the subcontractor is fully responsible for obtaining the components. This workflow is outlined in the :doc:`subcontracting/subcontracting_basic` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:83
msgid "In the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* workflow, the contracting company sends the components from their warehouse to the subcontractor. This workflow is outlined in the :doc:`subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:86
msgid "In the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* workflow, the contracting company purchases the components from a vendor, and has them delivered directly to the subcontractor. This workflow is outlined in the :doc:`subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:90
msgid "In addition to how a subcontractor obtains components, it is also necessary to consider why a product is being subcontracted, as well as what happens to products once they are manufactured by the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:94
msgid "In terms of why a product is being subcontracted, the two main reasons are to fulfill a customer order, or to replenish the quantity of stock on-hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:97
msgid "In terms of what happens to products once they are manufactured, they can either be shipped to the contracting company, or dropshipped directly to an end customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:100
msgid "Each of the three subcontracting workflows described above can be configured to facilitate any of these possibilities, and the methods for doing so are outlined in their respective documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:104
msgid "Subcontracted product valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:106
msgid "The valuation of a subcontracted product depends upon a few different variables:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:108
msgid "The cost of the required components, if provided by the contracting company; from here on referred to as `C`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:110
msgid "The price paid to the subcontractor for the service of manufacturing the subcontracted product; from here on referred to as `M`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:112
msgid "The cost of shipping components to the subcontractor, and having them shipped back to the contracting company; from here on referred to as `S`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:114
msgid "The cost of dropshipping, if the components are shipped by the subcontractor to the end customer; from here on referred to as `D`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:116
msgid "Any other associated costs, like import taxes, etc.; from here on referred to as `x`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:118
msgid "Therefore, the total valuation of a subcontracted product (`P`) can be represented by the following equation:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:121
msgid "P = C + M + S + D + x\n"
"\n"
""
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting.rst:124
msgid "It is important to note that not every subcontracted product valuation will include all of these variables. For example, if the product is not dropshipped to the end customer, then there is no need to factor in the cost of dropshipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:3
msgid "Basic subcontracting lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:8
msgid "In Odoo, lead times are used to predict how long it takes to complete a certain action. For example, a *delivery lead time* can be set for a purchased product, which specifies the number of days it usually takes for the product's vendor to delivery the product to the purchasing company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:12
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:13
msgid "For subcontracted products specifically, delivery lead times can be configured to take into account the amount of time required for the subcontractor to manufacture a product. Doing so allows the contracting company to better predict the delivery dates of subcontracted products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:31
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:23
msgid "Like all lead times in Odoo, lead times for subcontracted products are only an estimate, and are based on how long actions are *expected* to take."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:20
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:34
msgid "Unforeseen circumstances can impact the completion of these actions, which means that lead times should not be viewed as guarantees."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:26
msgid "When using the :doc:`basic subcontracting <subcontracting_basic>` workflow to manufacture a product, a company is not responsible for supplying the subcontractor with the necessary components. This means that the only factors affecting the delivery date of a product are the amount of time it takes the subcontractor to manufacture and deliver it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:31
msgid "By assigning a product's subcontractor a delivery lead time that considers both of these factors, the *Expected Arrival* date displayed on purchase orders (POs) for the product more accurately reflects the amount of time required for both manufacturing and delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:54
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:44
msgid "Product delivery lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:38
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:46
msgid "To set a delivery lead time for a product's subcontractor, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a subcontracted product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:41
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:59
msgid "Then, select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab on the product's page. If the subcontractor has not already been added as a vendor, do so now by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, and selecting the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:63
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:53
msgid "Once the subcontractor has been added, enter the number of days it takes them to manufacture and deliver the product, in the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
msgid "The Delivery Lead Time field for a subcontractor, on the Purchase tab of a product page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:53
msgid "Multiple subcontractors can be added to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab on a product's page, and a different :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` can be set for each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:57
msgid "Lead time workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:59
msgid "After setting a delivery lead time for a product's vendor, create an |RfQ| by navigating to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:62
msgid "Specify the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field. Then, add the product in the :guilabel:`Products` tab by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`, selecting the product in the :guilabel:`Product` column, and adding a quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:66
msgid "Once a product has been added, the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field on the |RfQ| auto-populates with a date that reflects the vendor's delivery lead time, as specified on the product's page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:69
msgid "If the date needs to be adjusted, click on the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field to open a calendar popover, and select the desired date. Make sure not to choose a date sooner than the one that was auto-populated, unless the subcontractor has confirmed that they are able to deliver the product by that date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:74
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` on the |RfQ| to turn it into a |PO|. At this point, the subcontractor should begin manufacturing the subcontracted product, before delivering it to the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:79
msgid "Bike retailer *Mike's Bikes* works with a subcontractor — *Bike Friends* — to produce units of their *Tricycle* product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:82
msgid "On average, Bike Friends requires three days to manufacture a tricycle, plus an additional two days to deliver it to Mike's Bikes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:85
msgid "As a result, Mike's Bikes sets a delivery lead time of five days for tricycles manufactured by Bike Friends: three days for manufacturing, plus two days for delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:88
msgid "On May 3rd, Mike's Bikes confirms a |PO| to purchase one tricycle from Bike Friends."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:90
msgid "The :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date listed on the |PO| is May 8th, five days after the :guilabel:`Confirmation Date`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
msgid "The Expected Arrival date on a PO for a subcontracted product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:97
msgid "Bike Friends begins manufacturing the tricycle on May 3rd — the day that the |PO| is confirmed — and finishes on May 6th, three days later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/basic_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:100
msgid "The tricycle is then shipped to Mike's Bikes the same day, and they receive it on May 8th, two days later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:3
msgid "Dropship subcontracting lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:9
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo, lead times are used to predict how long it takes to complete a certain action. For example, a *delivery lead time* can be set for a purchased product, which specifies the number of days it usually takes for the product's vendor to deliver the product to the purchasing company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:17
msgid "Certain subcontracted products require the contracting company to supply the subcontractor with manufacturing components. In this case, a *manufacturing lead time* can be used, in addition to the delivery lead time, to generate the date on which the subcontractor must receive the required components, in order to manufacture the product and deliver it on time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:22
msgid "In cases where components are dropshipped to the subcontractor, an additional delivery lead time can be set for each component. This should be set to the amount of time it takes the vendor to deliver components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:26
msgid "Once a delivery lead time has been set on a component, dropship orders for the component display the date by which the order must be confirmed, so that it can be dropshipped to the subcontractor by the date on which manufacturing must begin."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:40
msgid "When using the :doc:`Dropship Subcontractor on Order <subcontracting_dropship>` route, a company is responsible for purchasing the necessary components from a vendor, and having them dropshipped directly to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:44
msgid "This means that, in addition to the amount of time it takes the subcontractor to manufacture and deliver the product, it is also necessary to consider how long it takes the component vendor to dropship the components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:48
msgid "By assigning a product's subcontractor a *delivery lead time*, specifying a *manufacturing lead time* on the product's BoM, and assigning the vendor of the components an additional *delivery lead time*, *Dropship Subcontractor* orders for the product's components display the deadline for confirming a dropship order to send the components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:56
msgid "To set a delivery lead time for a product's subcontractor, navigate to :guilabel:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a subcontracted product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:71
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:61
msgid "Product manufacturing lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:73
msgid "Next, navigate to the product's |BoM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the product's page. Then, select a BoM from the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:76
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:66
msgid "On the |BoM|, select the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab. In the :guilabel:`Manuf. Lead Time` field, enter the same number of days that was entered in the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` field of the |BoM|'s product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
msgid "The Manuf. Lead Time field on a product's BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:84
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:74
msgid "While not all of these days are actually used for manufacturing by the subcontractor, setting the same number of days in each field tells Odoo that the subcontractor must receive the components and begin production by the start of the product's delivery lead time. This gives the subcontractor enough time to both manufacture and deliver the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:90
msgid "Component delivery lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:92
msgid "From the product's BoM, navigate to each component by clicking on the component in the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and then clicking the :icon:`oi-arrow-right` :guilabel:`(right arrow)` button to the right of the component."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:96
msgid "On the product page for each component, select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab. If the vendor has not already been added, do so now by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, and selecting the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:100
msgid "Once the vendor has been added, enter the number of days it takes them to dropship the product to the subcontractor, in the :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:104
msgid "Dropship subcontracting workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:106
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:82
msgid "Create a request for quotation (RfQ) for the product by navigating to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Requests for Quotation`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:109
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:85
msgid "Specify the subcontractor in :guilabel:`Vendor` field. Then, add the product in the :guilabel:`Products` tab by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`, selecting the product in the :guilabel:`Product` column, and specifying a quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:113
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field, enter a date that provides enough time for the component vendor to dropship the components, and the subcontractor to manufacture and deliver the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:117
msgid "When a product is added to an |RfQ|, the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field auto-populates with a date that is today's date plus the delivery lead time of the product. However, this does not consider the time it takes to dropship the components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:121
msgid "When purchasing a product subcontracted using the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route, it is necessary to adjust this date to take into account the extra time needed for the components to be delivered to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:125
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:102
msgid "Since production does not begin until they receive the components, leaving the date as is results in the finished product arriving *after* the date listed on the |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:128
msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to turn the |RfQ| into a |PO|. Doing so creates a second |RfQ| to purchase the components from the dropshipper, and have them sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:131
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Requests for Quotation`, and select the |RfQ| that lists the dropshipper in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:134
msgid "On the |RfQ|, the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field lists the date on which the subcontractor must receive the components, in order to deliver the finished product by the *Expected Arrival* date listed on the subcontractor |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:138
msgid "The :guilabel:`Order Deadline` field lists the latest date on which the |RfQ| can be confirmed, in order for the dropshipper to deliver the components to the subcontractor by the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:142
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to turn the |RfQ| into a |PO|, and confirm the purchase of the components from the dropshipper. Doing so causes a :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button to appear at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:146
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button to open the dropship order. This order can also be accessed from the :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button that now appears on the subcontractor |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:149
msgid "After the dropshipper has delivered the components to the subcontractor, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top of the dropship order to confirm that the subcontractor has received the components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:153
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:127
msgid "Once the subcontractor receives the components, they begin manufacturing the component, before delivering it to the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:158
msgid "Bike retailer *Mike's Bikes* works with a subcontractor — *Bike Friends* — to produce units of their *Bicycle* product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:161
msgid "Mike's Bikes must purchase the required components from vendor Bike World, and have them dropshipped to Bike Friends."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:164
msgid "On average, Bike Friends takes three days to manufacture each bicycle, plus an addition two days to deliver it to Mike's Bikes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:167
msgid "As a result, Mike's Bikes sets a delivery lead time of five days for bicycle manufactured by Bike Friends: three days for manufacturing, plus two days for delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:170
msgid "On the bicycle's BoM, they enter a manufacturing lead time of five days as well, to remind themselves of the date that components must be delivered to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:173
msgid "On the product pages for each of the bicycle's components, they assign Bike World a delivery lead time of two days. This is the amount of time it takes Bike World to dropship each component directly to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:177
msgid "On May 10th, Mike's Bikes confirms a |PO| for one bicycle, with an expected delivery date of May 17th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:180
msgid "The |RfQ| for purchasing the components from Bike World and having them dropshipped to Bike Friends has an Expected Arrival date of May 12th, and a Deadline of May 10th. The |RfQ| must be confirmed by the deadline in order for Bike Friends to receive the components by the Expected Arrival date, giving them enough time to deliver the finished bicycle to Mike's Bikes by May 17th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
msgid "The Order Deadline and Expected Arrival dates on a dropship order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/dropship_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:190
msgid "Mike's Bikes confirms the |RfQ| on May 10th, and Bike World delivers the components to Bike Friends on May 12th. Bike Friends manufactures the bicycle, and delivers it to Mike's Bikes on May 17th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:3
msgid "Resupply subcontracting lead times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:26
msgid "Unforeseen circumstances can impact the completion of these actions, which means that lead times should **not** be viewed as guarantees."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:32
msgid "When using the :doc:`Resupply Subcontractor on Order <subcontracting_resupply>` route, a company is responsible for supplying the subcontractor with the necessary components. As a result, the subcontractor cannot begin manufacturing until the components have been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:36
msgid "This means that, in addition to the amount of time it takes the subcontractor to manufacture and deliver the product, the date they receive the components must also be considered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:39
msgid "By assigning a product's subcontractor a delivery lead time, and specifying a manufacturing lead time on the product's bill of materials (BoM), *Resupply Subcontractor* orders for the product's components display the deadline by which the subcontractor must receive the components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:49
msgid "Then, select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab on the product's page. If the subcontractor has not already been added as a vendor, do so now by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, and selecting the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:63
msgid "Next, navigate to the product's |BoM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button at the top of the product's page. Then, select a |BoM| from the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:80
msgid "Resupply subcontracting workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:89
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field, enter a date that provides enough time for the subcontractor to receive the components, manufacture the product, and deliver it back to the subcontracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:94
msgid "When a product is added to an |RfQ|, the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` field auto-populates with a date that is today's date plus the delivery lead time of the product. However, this does **not** consider the time it takes to ship the components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:98
msgid "When purchasing a product subcontracted using the Resupply Subcontractor on Order route, it is necessary to adjust this date to take into account the extra time needed for the components to be shipped to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:105
msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to turn the |RfQ| into a |PO|. Doing so causes a :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button to appear at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:108
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button to open the resupply subcontractor order, which is the order created to send components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:111
msgid "The :guilabel:`Deadline` field on the resupply subcontractor order shows the deadline for the subcontractor to receive the components, in order for them to have enough time to manufacture and deliver the finished product by the Expected Arrival date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:115
msgid "The :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field should display the latest date on which components can be shipped, while still arriving to the subcontractor by the :guilabel:`Deadline`. However, by default, the date displayed is the same as the date in the :guilabel:`Deadline` field, and must be updated to take into account the time required for shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:120
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field to open a calendar popover from which a date can be selected. Select a date that allows for the components to be delivered by the :guilabel:`Deadline` on the resupply subcontractor order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:124
msgid "After the components are shipped, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top of the order to confirm they have been sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:131
msgid "Bike retailer *Mike's Bikes* works with a subcontractor — *Bike Friends* — to produce units of their *Unicycle* product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:134
msgid "Mike's Bikes must supply Bike Friends with the necessary components for manufacturing the unicycles."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:137
msgid "On average, Bike Friends takes three days to manufacture each unicycle, plus an additional two days to deliver it to Mike's Bikes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:140
msgid "As a result, Mike's Bikes sets a delivery lead time of five days for unicycles manufactured by Bike Friends: three days for manufacturing, plus two days for delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:143
msgid "On the unicycle's |BoM|, they enter a manufacturing lead time of five days, as well, to remind themselves of the date that components must be delivered to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:146
msgid "They confirm a |PO| for one unicycle, with an expected arrival date of May 30th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:148
msgid "The resupply subcontractor order for shipping the components to the subcontractor shows a *Deadline* of May 25th. The subcontractor must receive the components by this date, in order to have enough time to manufacture the unicycle, and deliver it by May 30th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:152
msgid "It takes Mike's Bikes two days to deliver the components, so they update the *Scheduled Date* field on the resupply subcontractor order to May 23rd, two days before the Deadline."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:-1
msgid "The Scheduled Date and Deadline fields on a resupply subcontractor order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/resupply_subcontracting_lead_times.rst:159
msgid "Mike's Bikes ships the components to Bike Friends on the scheduled date of May 23rd, and they arrive on the deadline of May 25th. This gives Bike Friends enough time to manufacture the unicycle, and ship it back to Mike's Bikes by the expected arrival date of May 30th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:3
msgid "Basic subcontracting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:10
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:12
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:10
msgid "In manufacturing, subcontracting is the process of a company engaging a third-party manufacturer, or subcontractor, to manufacture products that are then sold by the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:13
msgid "In basic subcontracting, the subcontractor is responsible for acquiring the necessary components. This means that the contracting company only has to worry about what happens to subcontracted products once they are produced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:17
msgid "The workflow for purchasing a product manufactured using basic subcontracting is similar to the one used when purchasing a non-subcontracted product from a vendor. The main differences are the way that subcontracted products are configured, and the fact that subcontracted products take longer to be sent from the vendor, since they must first be manufactured by them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:25
msgid "To use subcontracting in Odoo, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and tick the checkbox next to the :guilabel:`Subcontracting` setting, under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:29
msgid "Once the :guilabel:`Subcontracting` setting is enabled, it is also necessary to properly configure the subcontracted product, and the product's |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:51
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:53
msgid "Configure product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:37
msgid "To configure a product for basic subcontracting, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:40
msgid "On the product form, select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and add the product's subcontractor as a vendor by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, selecting the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` drop-down menu, and entering a price in the :guilabel:`Price` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:44
msgid "Then, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab, and use the :guilabel:`Routes` field to configure a route that determines what happens to the finished product once it has been manufactured by the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:48
msgid "If the finished product is shipped back to the contracting company, make sure the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected. In addition, select the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route to automatically create a |PO| for the product upon confirmation of a sales order (SO), unless there is enough stock on-hand to fulfill the |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:53
msgid "If the finished product is shipped directly to the customer by the subcontractor, make sure that **only** the :guilabel:`Dropship` route is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:57
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:83
msgid "Configure BoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:59
msgid "To configure a |BoM| for basic subcontracting, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product form, and select the desired |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:62
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:78
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:88
msgid "Alternatively, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and select the |BoM| for the subcontracted product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:66
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:92
msgid "For a full overview of |BoM| configuration, see the :doc:`Bill of materials <../basic_setup/bill_configuration>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:69
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:85
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:95
msgid "In the :guilabel:`BoM Type` field, select the :guilabel:`Subcontracting` option. Then, add one or more subcontractors in the :guilabel:`Subcontractors` field that appears below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:-1
msgid "The \"BoM Type\" field on a BoM, configured to manufacture the product using subcontracting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:76
msgid "Finally, click on the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab. In the :guilabel:`Manuf. Lead Time` field, enter the number of days it takes the subcontractor to manufacture the product. This number is factored in when calculating the product's expected arrival date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:81
msgid "When using basic subcontracting, there is no need to list components in the :guilabel:`Components` tab of the |BoM|, since the components required for manufacturing, and the means by which they are acquired, are handled by the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:86
msgid "Basic subcontracting workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:88
msgid "The basic subcontracting workflow consists of up to four steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:90
msgid "Create a sales order (SO) for the subcontracted product; doing so creates a |PO| to purchase the product from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:92
msgid "Confirm the |PO| created in the previous step, or create a new |PO|; doing so creates a receipt order or a dropship order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:94
msgid "Process the receipt once the subcontractor has finished manufacturing the subcontracted product, and shipped it back to the contracting company, **OR** process the dropship order to ship the product directly to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:97
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:135
msgid "If the workflow was started by creating an |SO|, and the finished product is not dropshipped to the end customer, process the delivery order once the product is shipped to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:100
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:138
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:138
msgid "The specific number of steps depends on the reason that the subcontracted product is being purchased from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:103
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:141
msgid "If the reason is to fulfill a specific customer order, the process starts with creating an |SO|, and ends with delivering the product to the customer, or having the subcontractor dropship it to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:106
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:144
msgid "If the reason is to increase the quantity of stock on-hand, the process starts with creating a |PO|, and ends with receiving the product into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:110
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:169
msgid "Create SO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:112
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:150
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:171
msgid "It is only necessary to complete this step if the product is being purchased from the subcontractor to fulfill a customer need. If the product is being purchased to increase the quantity of stock on-hand, move on to the next step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:116
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:154
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:175
msgid "To create a new |SO|, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales app --> Orders --> Orders`, and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:119
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:178
msgid "Select the customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` drop-down menu. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a product` on the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, select a subcontracted product in the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu, and enter a quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:123
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:182
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the |SO|, at which point a :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button appears at the top of the page. This opens the |PO| created to purchase the subcontracted product from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:128
msgid "An |SO| for the product only creates a |PO| if the *Replenish on Order (MTO)* route is enabled on the product's form, **and** there is not enough stock of the product on-hand to fulfill the |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:131
msgid "If there is enough stock on-hand, confirming an |SO| for the product creates a delivery order instead, because Odoo assumes that the |SO| is fulfilled using the stock in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:134
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:193
msgid "This is not the case for subcontracted products that are dropshipped to the end customer. In that case, a |PO| is **always** created, even if there is enough stock on-hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:138
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:197
msgid "Process PO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:140
msgid "If a |PO| was created in the previous step, navigate to it by clicking the :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button at the top of the |SO|, or by going to :guilabel:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and selecting the |PO|. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm it, and move on to the next step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:145
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:202
msgid "If a |PO| was not created in the previous step, do so now by navigating to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:148
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:205
msgid "Begin filling out the |PO| by selecting a subcontractor from the :guilabel:`Vendor` drop-down menu. In the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product` to create a new product line. Select a subcontracted product in the :guilabel:`Product` field, and enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:153
msgid "When a |PO| is confirmed for a product manufactured using basic subcontracting, a receipt or dropship order is automatically created, and can be accessed from the corresponding :guilabel:`Receipt` or :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button that appears at the top of the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:161
msgid "A PO for a basic subcontracting product, with a Receipt smart button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:161
msgid "PO for a basic subcontracting product, with a Receipt smart button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:164
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:237
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:242
msgid "Process receipt or dropship order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:166
msgid "Once the subcontractor has finished manufacturing the product, they either ship it to the contracting company, or dropship it to the end customer, depending on how the product was :ref:`configured <manufacturing/workflows/subcontracting_basic/product-config>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:173
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:251
msgid "If the subcontractor ships the finished product to the contracting company, once it has been received, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:177
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:255
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Receive Products` button at the top of the |PO|, or the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the page, to open the receipt. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the receipt to enter the product into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:182
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:260
msgid "Process dropship order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:184
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:262
msgid "If the subcontractor dropships the product, once they have sent it, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:187
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:265
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button at the top of the page to open the dropship order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the order to confirm that the product has been sent to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:192
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:254
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:270
msgid "Process delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:194
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:256
msgid "If the subcontracting workflow was started by a customer |SO|, and the finished product was **not** dropshipped to the customer, but rather delivered to the contracting company, it is necessary to ship the product to the customer, and process the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_basic.rst:198
msgid "Once the product has been shipped to the customer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and select the |SO|. Select the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the page to open the delivery order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` on the order to confirm that the product has been shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:3
msgid "Dropship to subcontractor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:15
msgid "In Odoo, the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route is used to purchase the necessary components for a subcontracted product from the vendor, and have them delivered directly to the subcontractor, each time a purchase order (PO) for that product is confirmed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:19
msgid "The subcontractor then uses the components to manufacture the desired product, before shipping it back to the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:23
msgid "It is necessary to understand the differences between the *Dropship* and *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* routes. While both routes involve dropshipping, they are used for different purposes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:26
msgid "The *Dropship* route is used to purchase products from a vendor, and have them shipped directly to the end customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:29
msgid "The *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route is used to purchase components from a vendor, and have them shipped directly to a subcontractor. By default, finished products are then sent from the subcontractor back to the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:33
msgid "However, it is possible to combine both the *Dropship* and *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* routes so they are used for the same product. In this workflow, components are dropshipped to the subcontractor, who then ships the finished product directly to the end customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:37
msgid "This can be achieved by following steps one through five in the :ref:`workflow section <manufacturing/workflows/subcontracting-dropship>` of this doc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:43
msgid "To use the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Subcontracting`, under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:47
msgid "Once the *Subcontracting* setting is enabled, it is also necessary to properly configure the subcontracted product, the product's |BoM|, and the components listed on the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:53
msgid "To configure a product for the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:57
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:59
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and add the product's subcontractor as a vendor by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, selecting the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` drop-down menu, and entering a price in the :guilabel:`Price` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:61
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:71
msgid "Then, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab to configure a route that determines what happens to the finished product, once it has been manufactured by the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:64
msgid "If the finished product is shipped back to the contracting company, make sure that the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected. In addition, select the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route to automatically create a |PO| for the product upon confirmation of a |SO|, unless there is enough stock on-hand to fulfill the |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:69
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:79
msgid "If the finished product is shipped directly to the customer by the subcontractor, make sure that only the :guilabel:`Dropship` route is selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:73
msgid "Configure bill of materials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:75
msgid "To configure a |BoM| for the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product's page, and select the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:92
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:102
msgid "Finally, make sure that all necessary components are specified on the :guilabel:`Components` tab. To add a new component, click :guilabel:`Add a line`, select the component in the :guilabel:`Component` drop-down menu, and specify the required quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:97
msgid "Configure Components"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:99
msgid "To configure components for the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to each component from the |BoM| by selecting the component's name in the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and clicking the :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` button to the right of the name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:103
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:113
msgid "Alternatively, navigate to each component by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting the component."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:106
msgid "On the component product form, select the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and add a vendor by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, selecting the vendor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and adding the price they sell the product for in the :guilabel:`Price` field. This is the vendor that sends components to the subcontractor, once they are purchased."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:111
msgid "Then, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and select the :guilabel:`Dropship Subcontractor on Order` route in the :guilabel:`Routes` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:114
msgid "Repeat the process for every component that must be dropshipped to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:119
msgid "Dropship subcontractor on order workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:121
msgid "The dropship subcontractor on order workflow consists of up to six steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:123
msgid "Create a sales order (SO) for the subcontracted product; doing so creates a *subcontractor* |PO| to purchase the product from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:125
msgid "Confirm the |PO| created in the previous step, or create a new |PO|; doing so creates a request for quotation (RfQ) to purchase the components from the vendor, as well as a receipt order or a dropship order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:128
msgid "Confirm the |RfQ| to turn it into a second |PO| (*vendor* |PO|); doing so creates a *Dropship Subcontractor* order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:130
msgid "Process the *Dropship Subcontractor* order once the vendor has sent the components to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:132
msgid "Process the receipt once the subcontractor has finished manufacturing the subcontracted product, and shipped it back to the contracting company **OR** process the dropship order to ship the product directly to the end customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:135
msgid "If the workflow was started by creating an |SO|, and the finished product is not dropshipped to the end customer, process the delivery order once the product has been shipped to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:141
msgid "If the reason is to fulfill a specific customer order, the process starts with creating an SO, and ends with delivering the product to the customer, or having the subcontractor dropship it to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:144
msgid "If the reason is to increase quantity of stock on-hand, the process starts with creating a PO, and ends with receiving the product into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:148
msgid "Create an SO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:157
msgid "Select the customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` drop-down menu. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a product` on the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab, select the product in the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu, and enter a quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:161
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the |SO|, at which point a :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button appears at the top of the page. This is the *subcontractor* |PO|, or the |PO| created to purchase the subcontracted product from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:166
msgid "An |SO| for the product only creates a *subcontractor* |PO| if the *Replenish on Order (MTO)* route is enabled on the product's page, **and** there is no stock of the product on-hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:169
msgid "If there is stock on-hand, confirming an |SO| for the product will instead create a delivery order, because Odoo assumes that the |SO| is fulfilled using the stock in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:172
msgid "This is not the case for subcontracted products that are dropshipped to the end customer. In that case, a *subcontractor* |PO| is **always** created, even if there is stock on-hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:176
msgid "Process subcontractor PO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:178
msgid "If a *subcontractor* |PO| was not created in the previous step, do so now by navigating to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:181
msgid "Begin filling out the |PO| by selecting a subcontractor from the :guilabel:`Vendor` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:183
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Products` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a product` to create a new product line. Select a product produced by the subcontractor in the :guilabel:`Product` field, and enter the quantity in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:187
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the *subcontractor* |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:189
msgid "When a |PO| is confirmed for a product that requires dropshipping components to a subcontractor, a receipt or dropship order is automatically created, and can be accessed from the corresponding :guilabel:`Receipt` or :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button that appears at the top of the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:-1
msgid "A subcontractor PO for a *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* product, with a Receipt smart\n"
"button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:198
msgid "In addition, an |RfQ| is created for the components that are purchased from the vendor and sent to the subcontractor. However, the |RfQ| **IS NOT** automatically linked to the *subcontractor* |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:201
msgid "Once the |RfQ| is confirmed and becomes a *vendor* |PO|, a *Dropship Subcontractor* order is created. This order is linked to both the *vendor* |PO| and the *subcontractor* |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:205
msgid "Confirm vendor RfQ"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:207
msgid "To access the |RfQ| created by confirming the *subcontractor* |PO|, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Requests for Quotation`. Select the |RfQ| that lists the correct vendor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and the reference number of the receipt that was created after confirming *subcontractor* |PO|, in the :guilabel:`Source Document` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:212
msgid "On the |RfQ|, the :guilabel:`Deliver To` field reads :guilabel:`Dropship Subcontractor`, and the :guilabel:`Dropship Address` field shows the name of the subcontractor to whom components are being dropshipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:216
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to turn the |RfQ| into a *vendor* |PO|, and confirm the purchase of components from the vendor. After doing so, a :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button appears at the top of the *vendor* |PO|, and a :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button appears at the top of the *subcontractor* |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:-1
msgid "A vendor PO for the components of a *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* product, with a\n"
"Dropship smart button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:227
msgid "Process Dropship Subcontractor order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:229
msgid "Once the components have been delivered to the subcontractor, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the *vendor* |PO| or the *subcontractor* |PO|. Then, click the :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button or the :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:233
msgid "Clicking either button opens the *Dropship Subcontractor* order. Click the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top of the order to confirm that the subcontractor has received the components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:239
msgid "Once the subcontractor has manufactured the finished product, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the *subcontractor* |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:242
msgid "If the subcontracted product should be received into inventory, once the product arrives, click the :guilabel:`Receive Products` button at the top of the *subcontractor* |PO| to open the receipt. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the receipt to register the product into inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:246
msgid "Alternatively, select the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top of the *subcontractor* |PO|, and click :guilabel:`Validate` at the top of the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:249
msgid "If the subcontracted product should be dropshipped, select the :guilabel:`Dropship` button at the top of the page to open the dropship order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` once the subcontractor has sent the product to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_dropship.rst:260
msgid "Once the product has been shipped to the customer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and select the |SO|. Select the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the page to open the delivery order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the product has been shipped to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:3
msgid "Resupply subcontractor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:13
msgid "In Odoo, the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route is used to deliver the necessary components for a subcontracted product to the subcontractor, each time a purchase order (PO) for that product is confirmed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:17
msgid "The subcontractor then uses the components to manufacture the desired product, before shipping it back to the contracting company, or dropshipping it to the end customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:21
msgid "It is necessary to understand the differences between the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* and the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:24
msgid "While both routes are used to supply a subcontractor with the components required for manufacturing a product, they differ in how the components are sourced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:27
msgid "When using *Resupply Subcontractor on Order*, components are shipped from the warehouse of the contracting company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:30
msgid "When using *Dropship Subcontractor on Order*, components are purchased from a vendor and shipped directly to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:33
msgid "The choice of which route to use depends upon the specific requirements of the subcontracting company and their subcontractors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:36
msgid "See the :doc:`subcontracting_dropship` documentation for a full overview of the *Dropship Subcontractor on Order* route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:42
msgid "To use the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and enable the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Subcontracting`, under the :guilabel:`Operations` heading."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:46
msgid "Once the *Subcontracting* setting is enabled, it is also necessary to properly configure the subcontracted product, the product's bill of materials (BoM), and the components listed on the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:55
msgid "To configure a product for the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product, or create a new one by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:64
msgid "The value entered in the :guilabel:`Price` field on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab of the of the subcontracted product's page is the amount paid to the subcontractor for the manufacturing of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:68
msgid "This does not represent the total cost of the product, which includes other elements, like the cost of the product's components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:74
msgid "If the finished product is shipped back to the contracting company, make sure that the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected. In addition, select the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` route to automatically create a |PO| for the product upon confirmation of a sales order (SO), unless there is enough stock on-hand to fulfill the |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:85
msgid "To configure a |BoM| for the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product's page, and select the |BoM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:107
msgid "Configure components"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:109
msgid "To configure components for the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route, navigate to each component from the |BoM| by selecting the component's name in the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and clicking the :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` button to the right of the name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:116
msgid "On the component product form, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and select the :guilabel:`Resupply Subcontractor on Order` route in the :guilabel:`Routes` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:119
msgid "Repeat the process for every component that must be sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:122
msgid "Resupply subcontractor on order workflow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:124
msgid "The resupply subcontractor on order workflow consists of up to five steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:126
msgid "Create an |SO| for the subcontracted product; doing so creates a |PO| to purchase the product from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:128
msgid "Confirm the |PO| created in the previous step, or create a new |PO|; doing so creates a *Resupply Subcontractor* order, as well as a receipt order or a dropship order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:130
msgid "Process the *Resupply Subcontractor* order once components for the subcontracted product have been sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:132
msgid "Process the receipt once the subcontractor has finished manufacturing the subcontracted product, and shipped it back to the contracting company **OR** process the dropship order to ship the product directly to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:149
msgid "While the *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* route can be used to automatically resupply a subcontractor upon confirmation of a |PO|, it is also possible to create a resupply order manually. This workflow is useful when it is necessary to resupply the subcontractor without creating a |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:154
msgid "To resupply a subcontractor manually, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, and click on the :guilabel:`Resupply Subcontractor` card. Create a new *Resupply Subcontractor* order by clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:158
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Delivery Address` field, select the subcontractor to whom the components should be sent."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:161
msgid "Then, add each component to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, selecting the component in the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down field, and specifying a quantity in the :guilabel:`Demand` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:165
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Mark as Todo` to register the order. Once the components have been sent to the subcontractor, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the order has been sent."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:187
msgid "An |SO| for the product only creates a |PO| if the *Replenish on Order (MTO)* route is enabled on the product's page, **and** there is not enough stock of the product on-hand to fulfill the |SO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:190
msgid "If there is enough stock on-hand, confirming an |SO| for the product instead creates a delivery order, because Odoo assumes that the |SO| is fulfilled using the stock in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:199
msgid "If a |PO| was created in the previous step, navigate to :guilabel:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the |PO|. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:210
msgid "When a |PO| is confirmed for a product that requires resupplying a subcontractor with components, a receipt or dropship order is automatically created, and can be accessed from the corresponding :guilabel:`Receipt` or :guilabel:`Dropship` smart button that appears at the top of the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:214
msgid "In addition, a *Resupply Subcontractor* order is created to ship the required components to the subcontractor. This order can also be accessed from the |PO|, by clicking the :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:223
msgid "A PO for a *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* product, with Resupply and Receipt smart\n"
"buttons at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:223
msgid "A PO for a *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* product, with Resupply and Receipt smart buttons at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:227
msgid "Process Resupply Subcontractor order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:229
msgid "Once the subcontracted product's components have been sent to the subcontractor, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:232
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Resupply` smart button at the top of the screen to open the *Resupply Subcontractor* order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the components have been sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:236
msgid "Alternatively, navigate to the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on the :guilabel:`Resupply Subcontractor` card, and select the *Resupply Subcontractor* order. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the components have been sent to the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:244
msgid "Once the subcontractor has finished manufacturing the product, they either ship it to the contracting company, or dropship it to the end customer, depending on how the product was :ref:`configured <manufacturing/workflows/subcontracting_resupply/product-config>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:272
msgid "If the subcontracting workflow was started by a customer |SO|, and the finished product was **NOT** dropshipped to the customer, but rather delivered to the contracting company, it is necessary to ship the product to the customer, and process the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/subcontracting/subcontracting_resupply.rst:276
msgid "Once the product has been shipped to the customer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and select the |SO|. Select the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top of the page to open the delivery order, and click :guilabel:`Validate` on the order to confirm that the product has been shipped to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows.rst:5
msgid "Workflows"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:3
msgid "Manufacturing backorders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:7
msgid "In some cases, the full quantity of a manufacturing order cannot be produced immediately. When this happens, Odoo *Manufacturing* allows for the manufacturing of partial quantities of the order and creates a *backorder* for the remaining amount."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:11
msgid "In the *Manufacturing* app, creating a backorder splits the original manufacturing order into two orders. The reference tag for each order is the tag used for the original order, followed by a hyphen and then an additional number to indicate that it's a backorder."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:16
msgid "A company creates a manufacturing order with the reference tag *WH/MO/00175*, for 10 units of *Product X*. After starting work on the manufacturing order, the employee working the production line realizes there are only enough components in stock to produce five units of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:20
msgid "Instead of waiting for additional stock of the components, they manufacture five units and create a backorder for the remaining five. This splits the manufacturing order into two separate orders: *WH/MO/00175-001* and *WH/MO/00175-002*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:24
msgid "Order *001* contains the five units that have been manufactured, and is immediately marked as :guilabel:`Done`. Order *002* contains the five units that still need to be manufactured and is marked as :guilabel:`In Progress`. Once the remaining components are available, the employee returns to order *002* and manufactures the remaining units before closing the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:30
msgid "Create a manufacturing backorder"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:32
msgid "To create a backorder for part of a manufacturing order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select a manufacturing order with a quantity of two or more or create one by clicking :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:36
msgid "If a new manufacturing order is created, select a product from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu and enter a quantity of two or more in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, then click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:40
msgid "After manufacturing the quantity that is being produced immediately, enter that number in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field at the top of the manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1
msgid "The quantity field on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:47
msgid "Next, click :guilabel:`Validate`, and a :guilabel:`You produced less than initial demand` pop-up window appears, from which a backorder can be created. Click :guilabel:`Create Backorder` to split the manufacturing order into two separate orders, with the reference tags *WH/MO/XXXXX-001* and *WH/MO/XXXXX-002*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1
msgid "The Create Backorder button on the \"You produced less than initial demand\" pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:56
msgid "Order *001* contains the items that have been manufactured, and is closed immediately. Order *002* is the backorder that contains the items that have yet to be manufactured, and remains open, to be completed at a later date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:60
msgid "Once the remaining units can be manufactured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select the backorder manufacturing order. If all of the remaining units are manufactured immediately, simply click :guilabel:`Validate` to close the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:65
msgid "If only some of the remaining units are manufactured immediately, create another backorder for the remainder by following the steps detailed in this section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:69
msgid "Create a backorder in Shop Floor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:71
msgid "Backorders for manufacturing orders can also be created from the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:74
msgid "In order to use the *Shop Floor* module, the *Work Orders* setting must be enabled. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings`, enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` checkbox, and then click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:78
msgid "To create a backorder from the *Shop Floor* module, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an |MO| for multiple units of a product, for which a backorder needs to be created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:121
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:133
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:129
msgid "On the |MO|, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and then click the :guilabel:`Open Work Order (external link icon)` button on the line of the work order to be processed. On the resulting :guilabel:`Work Orders` pop-up window, click the :guilabel:`Open Shop Floor` button to open the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:87
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:80
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:126
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:138
msgid "When accessed from a specific work order, the *Shop Floor* module opens to the page for the work center where the order is configured to be processed, and isolates the work order's card so that no other cards are shown."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:91
msgid "Complete the steps on the work order's card until the :guilabel:`Register Production` step is reached, and then click on it to open the :guilabel:`Register Production` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:95
msgid "Do **not** click the :guilabel:`# Units` button on the right side of the step. Doing so automatically registers the full amount of units as having been produced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:98
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Register Production` pop-up window, enter the number of units produced in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field. Make sure the number entered is *less* than the number of units listed to the right of the field. Then, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:-1
msgid "The Register Production pop-up window in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:106
msgid "The pop-up window disappears and the :guilabel:`# Units` button on the work order's card updates to reflect the number of units produced, as a fraction of the number of units for which the |MO| was originally created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:110
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Mark as Done` button at the bottom-right of the work order's card. The work order card begins to fade away. Once it disappears completely, a new work order card appears, titled with the original |MO|'s reference number with a `-002` tag added to the end of it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:114
msgid "This new reference number represents the backorder |MO|. The original |MO|'s reference number now appears with a `-001` tag added to the end of it to distinguish it from the backorder |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:117
msgid "If the original |MO| has no remaining work orders, it can be closed by selecting the :guilabel:`All` filter in the top navigation of the *Shop Floor* module, and then clicking :guilabel:`Close Production` at the bottom of the |MO|'s card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:121
msgid "If the original |MO| has remaining work orders that must be completed before it can be closed, cards for these work orders appear on the *Shop Floor* pages for the work centers where they are configured to be carried out. They can be processed as normal, and additional backorders can be created from their work order cards using the instructions detailed in this section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:126
msgid "Once the current work order for the backorder |MO| is ready to be processed, this can also be completed as normal, and an additional backorder can be created from its work order card by following the instructions detailed in this section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/manufacturing_backorders.rst:130
msgid "After the final work order for the backorder |MO| has been completed, the |MO| can be closed by clicking the :guilabel:`Close Production` button at the bottom of the work order's card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:3
msgid "Scrap during manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:7
msgid "During the manufacturing process, the need to scrap manufacturing components or finished products may arise. This can be necessary if a component or product is damaged, or unusable for any other reason."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:11
msgid "By default, scrapping a component or finished product removes it from physical inventory and places it in a virtual location titled *Virtual Locations/Scrap*. A virtual location is **not** a physical space, but rather a designation in Odoo that is used to track items that are no longer in physical inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:17
msgid "For more information, see the documentation about the different types of :ref:`locations <inventory/warehouses_storage/difference-warehouse-location>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:20
msgid "Components can be scrapped from both the *Manufacturing* app and the *Shop Floor* module, before the associated manufacturing order (MO) is closed. Finished products can only be scrapped from the *Manufacturing* app, and only after closing the associated |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:25
msgid "Scrap orders can be viewed by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Scrap`. Each scrap order shows the date and time the order was created, along with the product and quantity that was scrapped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:29
msgid "To view the total quantity of each item scrapped, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, then remove the :guilabel:`Internal` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar to display all virtual locations. From the list, select the :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap` location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:75
msgid "Scrap pop-up window"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:39
msgid "Scrapping components and finished products is done through the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window. The pop-up window can be accessed from an |MO| in the backend, or the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:43
msgid "Scrap component from Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:45
msgid "To scrap a component from an |MO|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|. At the top of the |MO|, click the :guilabel:`Scrap` button to open the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:50
msgid "Scrap finished product from Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:52
msgid "To scrap a finished product from an |MO|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an open |MO|, and then click the :guilabel:`Produce All` button to close it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:56
msgid "To select an |MO| that has already been closed, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, remove the :guilabel:`To Do` filter from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar, and then select the desired |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:60
msgid "Once closed, click the :guilabel:`Scrap` button at the top of the |MO| to open the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:64
msgid "Scrap component from Shop Floor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:66
msgid "To scrap a component from the *Shop Floor* module, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Shop Floor`. Then, either click the :guilabel:`⋮ (three vertical dots)` button on an |MO| card, or select a work center from the top navigation, and click the :guilabel:`⋮ (three vertical dots)` button on a work order card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:71
msgid "Either method opens the :guilabel:`What do you want to do?` pop-up window. Click the :guilabel:`Scrap` button on the window to open the :guilabel:`Scrap` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:77
msgid "After opening the scrap pop-up window using one of the methods :ref:`detailed above <manufacturing/management/scrap-window>`, select the component or finished product being scrapped, from the :guilabel:`Product` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:81
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Quantity` field, enter the quantity being scrapped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:83
msgid "By default, the :guilabel:`Source Location` field is set to the warehouse's pre-production location, while the :guilabel:`Scrap Location` field is set to the :guilabel:`Virtual Locations/Scrap` location. If either the source or scrap location should be changed, select a different location from their respective drop-down menus."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:88
msgid "Enable the :guilabel:`Replenish Scrapped Quantities` checkbox if a picking order should be created to replace the scrapped component(s) upon confirmation of the scrap order. This option should only be enabled for warehouses with :doc:`two-step <../basic_setup/two_step_manufacturing>` or :doc:`three-step <../basic_setup/three_step_manufacturing>` manufacturing enabled, since components are not picked as part of the :doc:`one-step <../basic_setup/one_step_manufacturing>` manufacturing process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:-1
msgid "The Scrap pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:99
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Scrap` button to scrap the selected component. After one or more scrap orders have been created, a :guilabel:`Scraps` smart button appears at the top of the screen. Click it to view a list of all scrap orders for the |MO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/scrap_manufacturing.rst:103
msgid "If a picking order was automatically created to replenish the scrapped components, it can be accessed by opening the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on the :guilabel:`Pick Components` card, and selecting the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:3
msgid "Split and merge manufacturing orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo *Manufacturing*, it is possible to create manufacturing orders for a single unit of an item, or multiple units of the same item. In some cases, it may be necessary to split a manufacturing order that contains multiple units into two or more orders, or to merge two or more orders into a single order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:11
msgid "A manufacturing order can only contain one unit of a product, or multiple units of a single product that all use the same Bill of Materials (BoM). As a result, it is only possible to merge manufacturing orders when every order contains the same product being manufactured with the same BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:17
msgid "Split manufacturing orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:19
msgid "To split a manufacturing order into multiple orders, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, then select a manufacturing order. At the top of the page, next to the :guilabel:`New` button, the manufacturing order's reference number appears with a :guilabel:`⚙️ (settings)` button next to it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:24
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (settings)` button to open the general settings for the manufacturing order, then select :guilabel:`Split`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:-1
msgid "The Settings and Split buttons on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:31
msgid "After selecting :guilabel:`Split`, a :guilabel:`Split production` pop-up window appears. In the :guilabel:`Split #` field, enter the number of manufacturing orders that the original order should be split into, then click outside of the field. A table appears below, with a line for each new manufacturing order that will be created by the split. In the :guilabel:`Quantity To Produce` column, enter the number of units that will be assigned to each new manufacturing order. Finally, click :guilabel:`Split` to split the manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:-1
msgid "The Split production pop-up window for a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:42
msgid "After clicking :guilabel:`Split`, the original manufacturing order is split into the number of orders that was specified in the :guilabel:`Split #` field. The reference numbers for the new manufacturing orders are the reference number for the original order with *-###* tags added to the end."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:48
msgid "Manufacturing order *WH/MO/00012* is split into three separate orders. The reference numbers for the new orders are *WH/MO/00012-001*, *WH/MO/00012-002*, and *WH/MO/00012-003*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:52
msgid "Merge manufacturing orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:54
msgid "To merge two or more manufacturing orders into a single order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select the manufacturing orders that will be merged by activating the checkbox to the left of the name of each order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:-1
msgid "Select manufacturing orders that will be merged by clicking the checkbox for each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:62
msgid "Once all manufacturing orders have been selected, click the :guilabel:`Actions` button at the top of the page, then select :guilabel:`Merge` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:-1
msgid "The Actions and Merge buttons on the Manufacturing Orders page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:69
msgid "The selected manufacturing orders are merged into a single order. The reference number for the new manufacturing order is the next sequential number that has *not* already been assigned to an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:73
msgid "The last reference number used for a manufacturing order was *WH/MO/00012*. Two manufacturing orders, *WH/MO/00008* and *WH/MO/00009*, are merged into a single order. The reference number for the manufacturing order created by the merger is *WH/MO/00013*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:77
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Source` field for the manufacturing order created by the merger, the reference numbers of the manufacturing orders that were merged are listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/split_merge.rst:81
msgid "Manufacturing orders *WH/MO/00009* and *WH/MO/00010* are merged to create *WH/MO/00011*. The source field for *WH/MO/00011* lists both *WH/MO/00009* and *WH/MO/00010*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:3
msgid "Unbuild orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:7
msgid "In some cases, it is necessary to dismantle manufactured products into their individual components. This may be required if too many units of a product were built, or if the components of one product must be reclaimed to use in the manufacturing of another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo *Manufacturing*, products can be dismantled, and their components returned to inventory, using *unbuild orders*. By using unbuild orders to accomplish this task, inventory counts for the finished product and its components remain accurate, based on the quantity of products dismantled, and the quantity of components reclaimed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:17
msgid "Create unbuild order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:19
msgid "A new unbuild order can be created by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Unbuild Orders`, and clicking :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:22
msgid "Begin filling out the new unbuild order by selecting a :guilabel:`Product` to unbuild. After doing so, the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field auto-populates with the corresponding bill of materials (BoM). If a different |BoM| should be used, click on the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field, and select it from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:27
msgid "Alternatively, a specific |BoM| can be selected in the :guilabel:`Bill of Material` field before selecting a product, which causes the corresponding product to auto-populate in the :guilabel:`Product` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:31
msgid "Next, specify the :guilabel:`Quantity` of the product that is being unbuilt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:33
msgid "If the product being unbuilt was originally manufactured in a specific manufacturing order (MO), select it in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing Order` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:36
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Source Location` field, select the location where the product being unbuilt is currently stored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:39
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Destination Location` field, select the location where the reclaimed components are stored after the unbuild order is completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:42
msgid "If the *Lots & Serial Numbers* feature is enabled in the settings of the *Inventory* app, a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number` field appears on the unbuild order, which can be used to specify the lot(s) or serial number(s) of the product being unbuilt, if any are assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:46
msgid "If the Odoo database has been configured with multiple companies, a :guilabel:`Company` field appears on the unbuild order, which can be used to specify the company that owns the product being unbuilt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:50
msgid "Finally, once the product has been unbuilt, click the :guilabel:`Unbuild` button at the top of the order to confirm that it has been completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:-1
msgid "A filled-out unbuild order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:58
msgid "While it is possible to create unbuild orders for products that have zero (or fewer) units on-hand, this is not advised, since it can lead to inventory inconsistencies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:61
msgid "If an unbuild order is created for a product with zero (or fewer) units on-hand, a pop-up window appears, warning the user that there is an insufficient quantity to unbuild."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:64
msgid "To ignore the warning, and proceed with the unbuild order, click :guilabel:`Confirm` at the bottom of the pop-up window. To return to the unconfirmed unbuild order, click :guilabel:`Discard`, instead."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:0
msgid "The insufficient quantity pop-up that appears after trying to confirm an unbuild order\n"
"for a product with zero or fewer units on hand."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:73
msgid "After completing an unbuild order, inventory counts automatically update, based on the quantity of products unbuilt, and the quantity of components reclaimed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:77
msgid "A `Coat Rack` product is comprised of one `Wooden Pole` component and six `Wooden Dowel` components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:80
msgid "An unbuild order is created for one unit of the `Coat Rack`. Once the order is completed, the on-hand quantity of `Coat Racks` decreases by one, while the on-hand quantities of `Wooden Poles` and `Wooden Dowels` increase by one and six, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:85
msgid "Scrap unusable components"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/unbuild_orders.rst:87
msgid "In some cases, components may be unusable after the unbuilding process is completed. To ensure that inventory counts accurately reflect the quantity of usable components on-hand, any component that can no longer be used should be removed from inventory using a :doc:`scrap order <../../inventory/warehouses_storage/inventory_management/scrap_inventory>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:3
msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:7
msgid "The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your production based on your demand forecast."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:13
msgid "Go to the :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:17
msgid "In the MPS settings, you can define the time range of your MPS (month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display at all times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:20
msgid "Now, go to :menuselection:`Planning --> Master Production Schedule` and click on *add a product*. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum quantities that must or can be replenished in each period."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:28
msgid "In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to display by clicking on *rows*. For instance, the *Actual demand* will show you which quantity of products has already been ordered for the period, or *Available to Promise*, what can still be sold during that same period (what you plan to replenish - what is already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide rows if you like."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:38
msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:40
msgid "The next step is to estimate the demand for the chosen period. This is done in the *Forecasted Demand* Row. You can easily, at any time, compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for its components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:48
msgid "Once the forecasted demand has been set, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will automatically be computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are then displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the replenish button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:54
msgid "Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:61
msgid "In case you manually edit the *Suggested Replenishment* quantity, a small cross will appear on the left hand side of the cell. In case you want to go back to the automatically computed value given by Odoo, simply click the cross."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:67
msgid "Cells color signification"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:69
msgid "The cells, which are part of the *Suggested Replenishment* line, can take different colors depending on the situation:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:72
msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect demand forecast."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:74
msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity still matches current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:76
msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too high considering current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:78
msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too low considering current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:80
msgid "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the stock will be negative during the period in question."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:84
msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:86
msgid "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:91
msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:93
msgid "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you can cancel some RFQ or MO manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:98
msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/use_mps.rst:100
msgid "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on the right of its name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:3
msgid "Make work centers unavailable using Time Off"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo, *work centers* are used to carry out manufacturing operations at specific locations. However, if a work center cannot be used for some reason, work orders begin to pile up at the work center until it is operational again."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:9
msgid "As a result, it is necessary to make the work center unavailable in Odoo so that the platform routes new work orders to alternative work centers that are operational. Using Odoo *Time Off*, it is possible to designate a work center as being unavailable for a set period of time. Doing so ensures that manufacturing operations can continue until the impacted work center is available again."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:17
msgid "Before a work center can be designated as unavailable, the Odoo platform must be properly configured. First, it is necessary to enable :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`. This allows the :guilabel:`Time Off` smart button to appear on each work center's :guilabel:`Working Hours` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:22
msgid "Enable developer mode by going to :menuselection:`Settings`, scrolling to the bottom of the page, and clicking :guilabel:`Activate the developer mode` under the :guilabel:`Developer Tools` heading."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The \"Activate the developer mode\" button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:29
msgid "Next, install the *Time Off* app. This is the app used for assigning time off to all resources within Odoo, including employees and work centers. Navigate to :menuselection:`Apps`, then type `Time Off` in the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. The card for the :guilabel:`Time Off` module should be the only one that appears on the page. Click the green :guilabel:`Install` button on the card to install the app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The Time Off module installation card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:39
msgid "The last step is to properly configure work centers. For this workflow, it is necessary to have at least two work centers: one that is made unavailable and a second that receives the work orders that the other cannot accept. If no second work center is configured, Odoo cannot route work orders away from the unavailable work center and they will pile up in its queue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:44
msgid "To create a work center, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Work Centers --> Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:47
msgid "Make sure that both work centers have the same equipment listed under the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab. This ensures that operations carried out at one work center can also be performed at the other."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The equipment tab on a work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:54
msgid "For the work center that will be made unavailable, select the second work center on the :guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters` drop-down menu. Now, Odoo knows to send work orders to the second work center when the first is unavailable for any reason."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "A work center form configured with an alternative work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:63
msgid "Add time off for a work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:65
msgid "With configuration completed, time off can now be assigned to the work center that will be made unavailable. Begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Work Centers` and selecting the affected work center. Click :guilabel:`Edit`, and then the :guilabel:`↗ (external link)` button next to the :guilabel:`Working Hours` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The Working Hours \"External link\" button on the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:74
msgid "A pop-up appears, titled :guilabel:`Open: Working Hours`. The standard working hours for the work center are listed here, along with various other details about it. Since developer mode was enabled, there is a :guilabel:`Time Off` button in the top right of the pop-up. Click it to be taken to the :guilabel:`Resource Time Off` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The Time Off button on the Working Hours pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:83
msgid "On this page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new time-off entry. On the time-off form, note the :guilabel:`Reason` for the work center closure (broken, maintenance, etc.), select the affected work center as the :guilabel:`Resource`, and choose a :guilabel:`Start Date` and :guilabel:`End Date` to specify the period during which the work center will be unavailable. Click :guilabel:`Save` and the time off for the work center is logged in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The \"Resource Time Off\" form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:94
msgid "Route orders to an alternative work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:96
msgid "Once a work center is within its specified time-off period, work orders sent to it can be automatically routed to an alternative work center using the :guilabel:`Plan` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:99
msgid "Begin by creating a new manufacturing order by selecting :menuselection:`Operations --> Manufacturing Orders --> Create`. On the manufacturing order form, specify a :guilabel:`Product` that uses the unavailable work center for one of its operations. Click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:104
msgid "On the confirmed work order, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. By default, the unavailable work center is specified in the :guilabel:`Work Center` column. There is also a green :guilabel:`Plan` button on the top left of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The Plan button on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:112
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Plan` and the work center listed under the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab is automatically changed to the alternative work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:-1
msgid "The selected work center updates automatically after clicking the Plan button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/workflows/work_center_time_off.rst:119
msgid "Once the time-off period for the unavailable work center ends, Odoo recognizes that the work center is available again. At this point, clicking the :guilabel:`Plan` button does not route work orders to an alternative work center unless the first one is at capacity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:8
msgid "Product lifecycle management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:10
msgid "Odoo *Product Lifecycle Management* (*PLM*) offers a systematic approach for testing, collaboration, and iteration of products across concept development, design, manufacturing, marketing, and post-launch support stages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm.rst:14
msgid "With approvals, key stakeholders can review changes before implementation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes.rst:3
msgid "Change management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:10
msgid "ECO type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:12
msgid "An *ECO type* is assigned to *engineering change orders* (ECOs) to organize and track changes to products and bills of materials (BoMs). Each |ECO| type separates |ECOs| into a project in Gantt view, ensuring collaborators and stakeholders **only** view and assist with relevant |BOM| improvements."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:17
msgid "For example, an electronic chip manufacturer might use 'New Product Introduction', 'Product Improvement', 'Component Change', and 'Firmware Update' |ECO| types. Then, designers and engineers can focus on |ECOs| in the 'New Product Introduction' and 'Product Improvement' projects, avoiding unrelated supplier change or firmware update |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:23
msgid "Create ECO type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:25
msgid "To access and manage ECO types, navigate to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Configuration --> ECO Types`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:28
msgid "Create a new ECO type by clicking :guilabel:`New`. On the new :guilabel:`ECO Types` form, fill in the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Name`: the name of the |ECO| type, which will organize all of the |ECOs| of this *type* in a project."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Email Alias`: if this optional field is filled, emails submitted to this email address automatically generate |ECOs| in the left-most stage of this |ECO| type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:37
msgid "The `Formulation change` |ECO| type is used to organize and track related |ECOs| in a single project. Configuring the :guilabel:`Email Alias` field generates |ECOs| in the `Formulation change` project sent to the email address, `pawlish-change@pawlished-glam.odoo.com`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0
msgid "Example of an ECO type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:46
msgid "Edit ECO type"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:48
msgid "Modify existing |ECO| type names and email aliases by navigating to the :menuselection:`PLM app --> Configuration --> ECO Types` page. There, click on the desired |ECO| type from the list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:51
msgid "On the form for each |ECO| type, proceed to edit the :guilabel:`Name` and :guilabel:`Email Alias` fields."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:57
msgid "Stages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:59
msgid "Within an |ECO| type project, *stages* are like milestones and are used to identify the progress of the |ECO| before the changes are ready to be applied. (e.g. 'Feedback', 'In Progress', 'Approved', 'Complete')"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:63
msgid "Additionally, required approvers can be added to each stage, ensuring that changes to the production |BOM| cannot proceed until the approver reviews and approves the |ECO|. Doing so prevents errors on the production |BOM| by enforcing at least one review of suggested changes before they're applied on a production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:68
msgid "For best practice, there should be at least one *verification* stage, which is a stage with a required approver, and one *closing* stage, which stores |ECOs| that have been either canceled or approved for use as the next production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:73
msgid "Create stage"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:75
msgid "To add a stage, go to the :menuselection:`PLM` app and select the intended project for an |ECO| type from the :guilabel:`PLM Overview` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:78
msgid "Then, on the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` project pipeline for the |ECO| type, click the :guilabel:`+ Stage` button. Doing so reveals a text box to fill in the name of the stage. After filling it in, click the :guilabel:`Add` button to finish adding the stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:83
msgid "A new `Assigned` stage separates assigned |ECOs| from the unassigned ones in the `New` stage. Adding another stage helps the product manager track unassigned tasks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0
msgid "Create a new stage in a project for an ECO type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:91
msgid "Verification stage"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:93
msgid "Click an ECO type from :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview` to open a kanban view of |ECOs| of this type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:96
msgid "To configure a verification stage, hover over the intended stage, and select the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` to open a pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:99
msgid "Configure the verification stage in the edit stage pop-up window, by checking the box for :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:102
msgid "Then, add an approver in the :guilabel:`Approvers` section, by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`, and specifying the :guilabel:`Role` of the reviewer, their :guilabel:`User`, and :guilabel:`Approval Type`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:106
msgid "Make sure at least one approver is configured with the :guilabel:`Approval Type`: :guilabel:`Is required to approve`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:109
msgid "The approver listed is automatically notified when |ECOs| are dropped in the stage specified in the pop-up window. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Save & Close`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:113
msgid "In the |ECO| type `New Product Introduction`, the verification stage `Validated` is configured by clicking the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon, and selecting :guilabel:`Edit`. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Edit: Validated` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:117
msgid "By adding the `Engineering manager` as an approver, only |ECOs| approved by this user can proceed to the next stage, and have the changes applied on the production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:120
msgid "Additionally, check the :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes` option to ensure proper behavior."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:0
msgid "Show \"Allow to apply changes\" option is checked."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:127
msgid "Closing stage"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:129
msgid "Configure a closing stage by opening the :guilabel:`Edit: [stage]` pop-up window. To do so, hover over the intended stage and click the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon that appears in the top-right corner. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:133
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Edit: [stage]` pop-up window, select the check boxes for :guilabel:`Folded in kanban view`, :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes` and :guilabel:`Final Stage`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:137
msgid "The closing stage, `Effective` is configured by checking the :guilabel:`Folded in kanban view`, :guilabel:`Allow to apply changes`, and :guilabel:`Final Stage` options"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/eco_type.rst:-1
msgid "Show configurations of the closing stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:3
msgid "Engineering change orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:12
msgid "Utilize *engineering change orders* (*ECOs*) to track, implement, and revert change versions made to products, and :doc:`bills of materials <../../manufacturing/basic_setup/bill_configuration>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:15
msgid "Engineering change orders can be created:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:17
msgid ":ref:`directly in the ECO type <plm/eco/create-eco>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:18
msgid "by an operator in the :ref:`tablet view <plm/eco/tablet-view>` of an operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:19
msgid "automatically from feedback submitted to the :ref:`ECO type's email alias <plm/eco/eco-type>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:24
msgid "Create ECO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:26
msgid "To create a new |ECO|, begin by navigating to the *PLM* app. Then, select the |ECO| type card that will be used to track the progress of the change. On the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page, click the :guilabel:`New` button in the top-left corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:31
msgid "Learn how to create new :ref:`ECO types <plm/eco/eco-type>` to categorize and organize change orders. Doing so ensures employees only view the |ECOs| related to their responsibilities, whether it involves new product introductions, targeted product line updates, or regulatory compliance fulfillment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:36
msgid "On the |ECO| form, fill in the following fields accordingly:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:38
msgid ":guilabel:`Description` is a brief summary of the improvement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:39
msgid ":guilabel:`Type`: specifies the |ECO| type project for organizing the |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:40
msgid ":guilabel:`Apply on` determines if the |ECO| changes the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` or the :guilabel:`Product Only`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Product` indicates the product being improved."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:43
msgid ":guilabel:`Bill of Materials` specifies the changed |BOM|. It auto-populates if the product in :guilabel:`Product` field has an existing |BOM|. If multiple |BOMs| exist, select the intended radio options from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:46
msgid ":guilabel:`Company` field is used in multi-company databases. Specify if the change applies to products in a specific company, or leave blank if the change applies to all companies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:48
msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible` represents the assignee in charge of this |ECO|. (Optional)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Effective` specifies when the |ECO| becomes live. Choosing :guilabel:`As soon as possible` means the |ECO| applies to the production |BOM| as soon as an authorized user :ref:`applies the changes <plm/eco/apply-changes>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:53
msgid "On the other hand, choosing :guilabel:`At Date`, and setting a specific date, leaves a date that makes it easier to track the version history of the |BOM|, and the specific date |BOMs|, used for production."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`Tags` are assigned to |ECOs| for prioritization and organization. Create a new tag by typing the name in the field and selecting :guilabel:`Create` from the drop-down menu. (Optional)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:59
msgid "After filling out the |ECO| form, click the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button to begin implementing the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:62
msgid "By pressing :guilabel:`Start Revision`, three actions occur:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:64
msgid "The :guilabel:`Documents` smart button appears, storing relevant files of the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:65
msgid "A copy of the production |BOM| is stored in the newly-appeared :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the |ECO|. The next available version number (e.g., `V2`, `V3`, ...) is also assigned to keep track of all |BOM| versions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:68
msgid "The stages of the |ECO| :guilabel:`Type` are displayed in the top-right corner of the |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:71
msgid "The :guilabel:`Revision` smart button is available **only** when the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` radio button is selected in the :guilabel:`Apply on` field, and the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button has been pressed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1
msgid "ECO with overview of stages in the top-right corner, and *Revision* smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:80
msgid "Change components"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:82
msgid "To modify the components in a |BOM|, click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button on an |ECO| to access the new version of the |BOM|. Odoo distinguishes the non-production version of the |BOM| from the current version, by flagging the test |BOM| with a large :guilabel:`Archived` tag."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:87
msgid "After clicking the :guilabel:`Start Revision` button for an |ECO| for the product, `[D_0045 Stool]`, make changes to the product's |BOM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button. Doing so opens the archived |BOM|, marked with a large red :guilabel:`Archived` flag."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Show the archived Bill of Materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:95
msgid "On the new |BOM|, in the :guilabel:`Components` tab, proceed to modify the components list, by changing the :guilabel:`Quantity` of existing components, adding new components using the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, and removing components with the :guilabel:`🗑️ (trash)` icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:102
msgid "In version two of the |BOM| for a keyboard, the component quantities are reduced, and an additional component, `Stabilizers`, is added."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Make changes to components by going to the new BoM with the *Revision* smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:110
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:153
msgid "Compare changes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:112
msgid "Once the changes are complete, navigate back to the |ECO|, by clicking `ECO00X` in the breadcrumbs located in the top-left corner. On the |ECO| form, a new :guilabel:`BoM Changes` tab displays the differences between the current |BOM| and the new version."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:116
msgid "Blue text indicates new components added to the revised |BOM| that are not in the production |BOM|. Black text represents updates shared by both |BOMs|, while red text indicates components removed in the revised |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:120
msgid "Changes and tests are encapsulated in the revised |BOM|, and do **not** affect the |BOM| currently used in production. That is, until the :ref:`changes are applied <plm/eco/apply-changes>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:124
msgid "View the summary of the differences between the current and revised keyboard |BOMs| in the :guilabel:`BoM Changes` tab of the |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "View summary of component changes in the *BoM Changes* tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:132
msgid "Change operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:134
msgid "To modify the operations in a |BOM|, click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button on an |ECO| to access the archived, new version of the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:137
msgid "In the new |BOM| version, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab to view and edit |BOM| operations. To make changes, select each operation, which opens the corresponding :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:142
msgid "The :guilabel:`Operations` tab is *not* available by default. To enable it, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and check the :guilabel:`Work Orders` box."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:146
msgid "Make changes to any of the fields in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, then click :guilabel:`Save` once completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:149
msgid "Create new operations by clicking the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, and remove new operations by clicking the :guilabel:`Archive Operation` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:155
msgid "Once the changes are complete, navigate back to the |ECO|, by clicking `ECO00X` in the breadcrumbs located in the top-left corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:158
msgid "On the |ECO| form, a new :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab displays the differences between the current production |BOM| and the new version."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:161
msgid "Blue text indicates new operations added to the revised |BOM| that do not yet exist in the production |BOM|. Black text represents updates shared by both |BOMs|, while red text indicates operations removed in the revised |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:165
msgid "Modifications to the |BOM| in an |ECO| will **not** affect the |BOM| used in production. That is, until the :ref:`changes are applied <plm/eco/apply-changes>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:168
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab, each row of details, beneath the columns in the table, reflect the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:171
msgid ":guilabel:`Operation`: Name of the operation that was modified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:172
msgid ":guilabel:`Step`: specifies the quality control point, visible when the operation includes detailed instructions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:176
msgid "To check for instructions, click the operation line item in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of a |BOM|. Then, in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, look for the :guilabel:`Instructions` smart button displayed at the top."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:181
msgid "The `Assembly` :guilabel:`Operation` includes `10` detailed :guilabel:`Instructions` to complete it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Show *Instructions* smart button to check whether an operation has additional\n"
"instructions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:189
msgid ":guilabel:`Step Type` details the type of quality control for further instructions in the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:191
msgid ":guilabel:`Type` corresponds with the colored text to specify how the revised |BOM| differs from the production |BOM|. Operation change types can be :guilabel:`Add`, :guilabel:`Remove`, or :guilabel:`Update`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:194
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center` specifies the work center at which the operation is performed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:195
msgid ":guilabel:`Manual Duration Change` refers to the change in the :guilabel:`Default Duration` field in the :guilabel:`Open: Operations` pop-up window, which specifies the expected time for completing the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:200
msgid "The :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab compares the production |BOM| with the revised |BOM| in the |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:203
msgid "In the revised |BOM|, a new `Assembly` :guilabel:`Operation` at the :guilabel:`Work Center` `Assembly Line 1` is added. In addition, the expected duration of the operation is `20.00` minutes, as specified by the :guilabel:`Manual Duration Change`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:207
msgid "To supplement the `Assembly` operation, two quality control point instructions are added:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:209
msgid "The first is the :guilabel:`Step` `QCP00039`, a :guilabel:`Step Type` to :guilabel:`Register Production` of components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:211
msgid "The second :guilabel:`Step` is `QCP00034`, an `Instructions` :guilabel:`Step Type` that provides additional assembly details."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Show *Operation Changes* tab in an |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:221
msgid "Apply changes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:223
msgid "After verifying the changes, move the |ECO| to a :ref:`verification stage <plm/eco/stage-config>`, which are stages that require approval before the revised changes can be applied to the production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:227
msgid "Once the approvers accept the changes, the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button becomes available. Click this button, and the |ECO| is automatically moved to a closing stage. The changes are applied, which archives the original production |BOM|, and the revised |BOM| becomes the new production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:232
msgid "Verify changes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:234
msgid "To ensure the changes are live, from the |ECO| where the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button was just pressed, return to the revised |BOM| by clicking the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:237
msgid "On the revised |BOM|, the large red :guilabel:`Archived` flag is removed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:239
msgid "To further verify the changes, check the production |BOM| by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Products` and select the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:242
msgid "Then, on the product form, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button, and select the |BOM| from the list. In the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab of the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Version` field is updated to match the version number shown on the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the latest |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:248
msgid "After applying the changes of the |ECO| for the :ref:`keyboard <plm/eco/example-keyboard>`, view the version of the current keyboard |BOM| in the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab. Here, the :guilabel:`Version` number has been updated to `2`, matching the `V2` that appears in the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button of the |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "View current *BOM* version in the Miscellaneous tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:260
msgid "Create ECO from tablet view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:262
msgid "Operators can directly suggest clearer operation instructions, while performing manufacturing orders (MOs) in the *Manufacturing* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:265
msgid "To create |ECOs| in this manner, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Then, select the desired :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` and switch to the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. Then, click the :guilabel:`📱 (mobile phone)` icon for the desired work order to open the *tablet view* of the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:271
msgid "The :guilabel:`📱 (mobile phone)` icon is **only** available for :abbr:`MOs (Manufacturing Orders)` with a :guilabel:`Confirmed` or :guilabel:`In Progress` status."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Find the tablet icon for each operation, second from the far right."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:278
msgid "Next, add an instructional step, by clicking the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` icon in the tablet view of an operation. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Menu` of action items for a :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`. Then, click the :guilabel:`Add a step` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Open the *Add a Step* pop-up by clicking the three horizontal lines icon in tablet view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:286
msgid "Clicking the button reveals an :guilabel:`Add a step` pop-up window, where the proposed changes are submitted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:289
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Title` field, enter a short step description. Next, in the :guilabel:`Instruction` text field, type the instructions of the step in greater detail. Optionally, add an image to the :guilabel:`Document` field. Once completed, finish by clicking the :guilabel:`Propose Change` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:295
msgid "To propose an additional check for broken components, enter the details in the :guilabel:`Add a Step` pop-up window. Doing so creates an instructional quality control point that will be reviewed in the following section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Fill out the *Add a Step* form to suggest an additional quality control point."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:303
msgid "Based on the inputs from the :guilabel:`Add a Step` pop-up window, an |ECO| is created with the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:306
msgid ":guilabel:`Description` is the name of the operation, followed by the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` number for reference."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:308
msgid "The |ECO| :guilabel:`Type` is automatically assigned to `BOM Changes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:309
msgid ":guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` fields are automatically populated, based on the |BOM| used in the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:311
msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible` is the operator who submitted the feedback."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:314
msgid "View ECO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:316
msgid "To review the proposed changes, navigate to the :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview`. In the `BOM Updates` |ECO| type card, the :guilabel:`X Engineering Changes` button represents the amount of operational changes created from the tablet view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:320
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`X Engineering Changes` button to open the kanban view of the |ECO| type. To view the suggestion, select an |ECO| in the `New` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:323
msgid "On the |ECO|, view a summary of the proposed changes in the :guilabel:`Operation Changes` tab. Click the :guilabel:`Revision` smart button to navigate to the revised |BOM| and look into the proposed changes in greater detail."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:328
msgid "An operator suggested another check for broken components by adding a step from the tablet view, while performing the `Assemble switches` operation for the :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` `WH/MO/00010` for the product, `Keyboard`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:332
msgid "Then, this created |ECO| can be viewed by navigating to the `BOM Changes` ECO type found in :menuselection:`PLM app --> Overview`. By default, |ECOs| created from tablet view are set to spawn in the `New` stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:336
msgid "The :guilabel:`Responsible` field is assigned to the operator who made the suggestion, allowing the employee revising the |BOM| to seek further clarification from the person who proposed the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Find the new ECO in the \"BOM Changes\" ECO type, in the *New* stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:344
msgid "On the revised |BOM|, switch to the :guilabel:`Operations` tab, and select the :guilabel:`☰ (three horizontal lines)` icon. Doing so opens a list of :guilabel:`Steps` to perform the operation, with the newest instruction titled `New Step Suggestion:`, followed by the user-entered title. Click the line item to view the suggested changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:-1
msgid "\"Show Instructions\" icon in the *Operations* tab of a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:353
msgid "On the :ref:`quality control point <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>` form, ensure the following form fields are accurately filled out to give detailed instructions for operators:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:356
msgid ":guilabel:`Title`: rename to give a concise description of the new instruction."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:357
msgid ":guilabel:`Control per`: using the drop-down menu, determine whether this instruction applies broadly for the :guilabel:`Product`, specifically for this :guilabel:`Operation` *only*, or a particular :guilabel:`Quantity` of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:360
msgid ":guilabel:`Type`: categorizes the control point type. From the drop-down menu, select :guilabel:`Instructions` to detail an instruction for the worker. To receive input from the workers, select the :guilabel:`Take a Picture`, :guilabel:`Register Consumed Materials`, :guilabel:`Print Label`, or other :ref:`quality check options <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:367
msgid ":ref:`Configure quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:369
msgid "Once the quality control point is configured, return to the :guilabel:`Steps` list using the breadcrumbs. Finally, drag the last quality control line item to its intended order of instructions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:373
msgid "Drag and reorder the `Check for broken switches` instruction, by clicking and dragging its \"6 dots\" icon to move it from the bottom to the second position."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/engineering_change_orders.rst:0
msgid "Drag and reorder instructions by selecting the \"6 dots\" icon on the far left."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:3
msgid "Version control"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:10
msgid "Use Odoo's *Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)* to manage previous versions of bills of materials (BoMs). Store former assembly instructions, component details, and past product design files while keeping the past details out of the production |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:14
msgid "Easily revert to previous |BOM| versions, when needed. Additionally, use *PLM* to trace which |BOM| version was active on specific dates for recalls or customer complaints."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:17
msgid "Every |BOM| version is stored in an *engineering change order* (ECO) for organized testing and improvements without disrupting normal manufacturing operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:21
msgid ":ref:`Engineering change order <plm/eco>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:24
msgid "Current BoM version"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:26
msgid "To see the current version of the |BOM| used in production, go to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Master Data --> Bill of Materials`, and select the desired |BOM| from the list. Then, switch to the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab, where the currently live :guilabel:`Version` of the |BOM| is displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:32
msgid "|BOMs| can also be accessed from :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bill of Materials`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1
msgid "Show the current version BOM in the Misc tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:40
msgid "Version history"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:42
msgid "To manage all former, current, and future versions of a |BOM|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Products --> Bills of Materials` and click the desired |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:45
msgid "From the |BOM| page, click the :guilabel:`ECO` smart button, and switch to list view by selecting the :guilabel:`≣ (four horizontal lines)` icon on the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:49
msgid "The :guilabel:`ECO` smart button is visible on the |BOM| **only** if the *PLM* app is installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1
msgid "Show ECO smart button on a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:55
msgid "In the list of |ECOs| for the product, navigate to the search bar at the top, and click the :guilabel:`▼ (down arrow)` icon on the right to access a drop-down menu of :guilabel:`Filters`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:58
msgid "Next, filter by :guilabel:`Done` |ECOs| to view: the revision history of the |BOM|, the :guilabel:`Responsible` user who applied the change, and the :guilabel:`Effective Date` of the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:62
msgid "Click each |ECO| to view the past components, operations, and design files associated with the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1
msgid "Display ECO revision history for a BoM for a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:70
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Effective Date` field is empty, the :guilabel:`Effective` date of the |ECO| is automatically set to :guilabel:`As soon as possible` and no dates are recorded in the revision history of the |BOM|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0
msgid "List of BOM effective dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:79
msgid "A workaround for checking when the |BOM| went live is by navigating to the chatter, and hovering over the time the |ECO| was moved to the :ref:`closing stage <plm/eco/stage-config>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:83
msgid "Design files"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:85
msgid "Attach computer-aided design (CAD) files, PDFs, images, or other design material to the |BOM| itself."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:88
msgid "To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Master Data --> Bill of Materials`, and select the desired |BOM|. On the |BOM|, navigate to the *chatter*, and click the :guilabel:`📎 (paperclip)` icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:92
msgid "The files associated with the |BOM| are displayed in the :guilabel:`Files` section. To add more design files, select the :guilabel:`Attach files` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:-1
msgid "Show paperclip icon in the chatter to attach files to a BoM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:100
msgid "Manage design files in an ECO"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:102
msgid "Add, modify, and remove files in an |ECO|. Once the |ECO| is approved and applied, the new files are automatically linked to the production |BOM|. Archived files are removed from the |BOM|, but are still accessible in the |ECO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:106
msgid "To manage the design files in the |ECO|, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`PLM app --> Changes` and choose the desired |ECO|. Next, open the :guilabel:`Attachments` page by clicking the :guilabel:`Documents` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:110
msgid "Hover over each attachment to reveal the :guilabel:`︙ (three vertical dots)` icon. From there, choose whether to :guilabel:`Edit`, :guilabel:`Remove`, or :guilabel:`Download` the file. Any changes made to these files are contained within the |ECO|, and will only apply to the production |BOM| once the :ref:`changes are applied <plm/eco/apply-changes>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:116
msgid "In the `Create 60% keyboard` |ECO|, the design files are from the original `100% keyboard` |BOM|. To replace the keyboard PDF, begin by selecting the :guilabel:`Documents` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0
msgid "Show *Documents* smart button from an active ECO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:123
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Attachments` page, hover over the `100% keyboard manual.pdf` design file, and click the :guilabel:`︙ (three vertical dots)` icon. Then, click the :guilabel:`Remove` option to archive the file."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:127
msgid "Next, on the same :guilabel:`Attachments` page, click the :guilabel:`Upload` button to upload the new design file, named `60% keyboard manual`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0
msgid "View of *Attachments* page from the *Documents* smart button. Displays one archived and\n"
"one newly added attachment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:136
msgid "Archived files are **not** permanently deleted — they can still be accessed in the previous |ECO|, or as an archived file in the latest |ECO|, where the archival occurred."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:140
msgid "Apply rebase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:142
msgid "Odoo simplifies merge conflict resolution for concurrent |ECOs| on the same product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:144
msgid "Conflicts can occur when the production |BOM| is updated while other |ECOs| are modifying the previous version. Differences between the new and previous production |BOMs| are displayed in the :guilabel:`Previous Eco Bom Changes` tab, visible only in this scenario."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:148
msgid "To resolve conflicts and retain |ECO| changes, click the :guilabel:`Apply Rebase` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:151
msgid "Two |ECOs|, `ECO0011` and `ECO0012`, are created when the current |BOM| version is `5`. In `ECO0011`, a new component, `Space stabilizer`, is added, and the changes are applied. This means the current |BOM| version has become `6`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0
msgid "Apply changes to an ECO to update the production BOM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:159
msgid "This means `ECO0012` is modifying an outdated |BOM|. As shown in the :guilabel:`Previous Eco Bom Changes` tab, the |BOM| is missing the `Space stabilizer`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:162
msgid "To ensure the changes applied by `ECO0011` are kept when the changes occur in `ECO0012`, click the :guilabel:`Apply Rebase` button to apply the previous |ECO| changes, without affecting the changes already made to `ECO0012`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/manage_changes/version_control.rst:0
msgid "Click the *Apply Rebase* button to update the BOM to match the production BOM."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management.rst:3
msgid "Project management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:3
msgid "Approvals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:10
msgid "Notify stakeholders and managers automatically by assigning approvers to stages of :ref:`engineering change orders <plm/eco>` (ECOs) under review. Changes can only be applied after the assigned approver accepts them. Approvals ensure reviews by team members, which prevents mistakes and premature actions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:16
msgid ":ref:`Stage configuration <plm/eco/stage-config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:19
msgid "Add approver"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:21
msgid "To add an approver, first go to the :menuselection:`PLM app`, and click on the project card of an ECO type to open the Gantt view of the |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:24
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page, hover over the intended stage, and select the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit` to open a pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:28
msgid "Approvers can be added to any stage, but it's strongly recommended to assign them to the *verification* stage, which comes before the *closing* stage, where |ECOs| are applied, and the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` version is updated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:32
msgid "See the documentation about :ref:`stage types <plm/eco/stage-config>` for more information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:36
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Edit` stage pop-up window, click the :guilabel:`Add a line` button, located under :guilabel:`Approvals`. Then, type in the approver's position (or title) under :guilabel:`Role` (e.g. `Engineering Manager`, `Quality Team`, etc.), and select the relevant :guilabel:`User` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:41
msgid "Next, set the :guilabel:`Approval Type` to :guilabel:`Is required to approve`, :guilabel:`Approves, but the approval is optional`, or :guilabel:`Comments only`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:45
msgid "Assign the `CTO`, \"Mitchell Admin,\" as a required approver for |ECOs| in the `Validated` stage in the `New Product Introduction` ECO type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:48
msgid "Approvals from the quality and marketing teams are **not** required to apply changes to the |ECO| because their :guilabel:`Approval Type` is set to :guilabel:`Approves, but the approval is optional` and :guilabel:`Comments only`, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0
msgid "Set an approver that \"Is required to approve\" ECOs in the \"Validated\" stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:57
msgid "Manage approvals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:59
msgid "Approvers can easily track their to-do approvals by navigating to the :menuselection:`PLM app`, and looking at the card for an ECO type, which shows the count of open tasks assigned to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:62
msgid "Here's what each button on an ECO project card does:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:64
msgid "The :guilabel:`# Engineering Changes` button displays a count of in-progress |ECOs| of this ECO type. Clicking the button opens the Gantt view of the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Orders` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`My Validations` displays a count of |ECOs| the approver must accept or reject. Clicking on this button displays |ECOs| pending approval or rejected (marked with the red :guilabel:`Blocked` state)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:69
msgid "The :guilabel:`All Validations` button shows the count of |ECOs| awaiting approval or rejected by any approver. Clicking it reveals these pending |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:71
msgid ":guilabel:`To Apply` displays a count of |ECOs| to which the user needs to apply changes. Clicking on the button displays all the |ECOs| to approve, and apply changes to, in the verification stage."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:75
msgid "|ECOs| marked with the green :guilabel:`Done` stage have already been approved, and the user just needs to click on the |ECO| to enter the form view, and click the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1
msgid "Display count of validations to-do and buttons to open filtered list of ECOs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:84
msgid "Approve ECOs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:86
msgid "Navigate to an |ECO| in a verification stage, while logged in as the assigned approver, to see the :guilabel:`Approve`, :guilabel:`Reject`, and :guilabel:`Apply Changes` buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:89
msgid "To approve the |ECO|, and apply the changes onto the production :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, click :guilabel:`Approve`, and then :guilabel:`Apply Changes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:92
msgid "Note that the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button will **not** work unless the :guilabel:`Approve` button was clicked first. Additionally, the chatter logs the history of the clicked buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:96
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Approval Type` is **not** set to :guilabel:`Is required to approve`, approval from the associated user is not needed before applying changes with the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button. Thus, the :guilabel:`Apply Changes` button **will work** without requiring the :guilabel:`Approve` button to be clicked first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:102
msgid "Automated activities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:104
msgid "When an |ECO| is moved to a verification stage, a planned activity is automatically created for assigned approvers to review the |ECO|. Approvers receive a notification in their activities inbox, accessible through the :guilabel:`🕘 (clock)` icon at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:108
msgid "In the to-do task list, the :guilabel:`Engineering Change Order (ECO)` notification displays the number of activities marked :guilabel:`Late`, :guilabel:`Today`, and :guilabel:`Future`. Clicking on each of these buttons shows a filtered Gantt view of the respective |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:113
msgid "Scheduled activities are shown as a number on the :guilabel:`🕘 (clock)` icon, with `5` |ECOs| pending approval :guilabel:`Today`. Currently, there are `0` :guilabel:`Late` or :guilabel:`Future` |ECOs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0
msgid "Show scheduled approvals notifications for the user."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:121
msgid "By clicking a pending |ECO|, a *planned activity* for :guilabel:`ECO Approval` is recorded in the chatter. Click on the :guilabel:`i (Info)` icon to view additional information, including the approval's :guilabel:`Created` date, the approver :guilabel:`Assigned to` it, and the due date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1
msgid "Show additional details of the planned ECO approval."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:130
msgid "Follow-up activities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:132
msgid "When |ECOs| are rejected, tasks need to be assigned to project members for required modifications before |ECO| approval. To create tasks with deadlines, navigate to the rejected |ECO| form, and go to the chatter."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:136
msgid "Select the :guilabel:`Mark Done` button in the :guilabel:`Planned Activities` section of the chatter to close the activity, and open a pop-up window for creating tasks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:-1
msgid "Show *Mark Done* window to show *Done & Schedule Next*, *Done*, and *Discard* buttons to\n"
"close the planned activity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:144
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Mark Done` window, click :guilabel:`Done & Schedule Next` to open a new :guilabel:`Schedule an Activity` window. Next, set the :guilabel:`Assigned to` team member and the :guilabel:`Due Date` for completing the changes. Provide task details in the :guilabel:`Summary` field and the text box. Click the :guilabel:`Schedule` button to close the window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:149
msgid "After closing the window, on the |ECO| form, move the |ECO| back one stage. Doing so ensures that when the team member completes the changes, and returns the |ECO| to the verification stage, a new :guilabel:`ECO Approval` task is created for the approver."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:154
msgid "The approver creates an activity for the :guilabel:`Responsible` of the |ECO|, `Laurie Poiret`, that details the changes required for the approver to :guilabel:`Accept` the |ECO|. Clicking the :guilabel:`Schedule` button creates a planned activity for Laurie due on `08/15/2023`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/plm/management/approvals.rst:0
msgid "Create a scheduled activity for follow-up changes to a rejected ECO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:8
msgid "Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Purchase** helps keep track of purchase agreements, quotations, and purchase orders. Learn how to monitor purchase tender, automate replenishment, and follow up on your orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Purchase <https://www.odoo.com/slides/purchase-23>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced.rst:5
msgid "Advanced"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:3
msgid "Analyze the performance of your purchases"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:5
msgid "If your company regularly purchases products, you have several reasons to track and analyze your performance. The insights gathered can help you to better forecast and plan your future orders. For example, you can assess if your business is dependent on particular vendors, and the data can help you negotiate discounts on prices."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:11
msgid "Generate customized reports"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:13
msgid "Go to *Reporting* to access the purchase analysis. Simply by accessing the reporting dashboard, you can get a quick overview of your actual performance. By default, the reporting dashboard displays a line chart presenting the untaxed amount of your purchase orders per day, and below it, key metrics and a pivot table."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting dashboard in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:22
msgid "While the data initially presented is useful, there are several tools and features you can use to get even more insights on your purchases."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:26
msgid "Use filters to select the data you need"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:28
msgid "Odoo offers several default filters you can use and combine by clicking on *Filters*. When you select one or several filters, Odoo looks for all the orders that match at least one of the filters you have chosen and populates the chart, key metrics, and pivot table with the data. The pre-configured filters are:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:33
msgid "All *Requests for Quotation*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:35
msgid "All *Purchase Orders*, except canceled ones"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:37
msgid "*Confirmation Date Last Year* includes all orders that were confirmed the previous year, canceled purchase orders included"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:40
msgid "*Order Date* includes all orders - request for quotations and purchases orders (canceled ones included) - depending on their date of creation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:43
msgid "*Confirmation Date* includes all confirmed orders, canceled ones included, depending on their date of confirmation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:47
msgid "When you have to select a period, you can use multiple years, and, with at least one year selected, multiple quarters and the three most recent months."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:51
msgid "If you use the *Order Date* or *Confirmation Date* filters, the *Comparison* feature appears next to *Filters*. It enables you to compare the period you filtered with the previous one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting filters in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:59
msgid "Add custom filters"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:61
msgid "Thanks to the 31 filtering options to choose from, the possibilities of your customizing your dataset are almost limitless. Go to :menuselection:`Filters --> Add Custom Filter`, specify the condition the filtering option should meet (e.g. *is equal to*, *contains*, etc.), and click on *Apply*. If you want to select orders matching several conditions simultaneously (*and* operator), repeat the process to add another custom filter. If you want to use the *or* operator, don't click on *Apply*, and click on *Add a condition* instead. Once you have added all the desired filtering options, click on *Apply*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Custom reporting filter in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:74
msgid "To avoid having to recreate custom filters every time, save them by clicking on :menuselection:`Favorites --> Save current search --> Save`. The customized search filter can then be accessed by clicking on *Favorites* or can even be set as the default filter when you open the reporting dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:80
msgid "Measure exactly what you need"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:82
msgid "Before selecting what you want to measure, you need to decide whether you prefer using the graph view or the pivot view. By default, the dashboard presents both views. However, the measures you select won't be applied to both views. You can access each view separately by clicking on the icons at the top right of the dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Switch reporting view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:92
msgid "Visualize your data"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:94
msgid "You can transform the main graph in just a click by selecting one of the three charts: bar, line or pie. Fourteen different measures are available, but you can only use one at a time. However, you can group the measure using one or several of the 19 *Groups*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting graph view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:102
msgid "For bar and line charts, the selected measure is your y-axis, and the first group you select is used to create the x-axis. Adding more group adds additional lines (line chart) or transforms your bar chart into a stacked bar chart. For pie charts, the more groups you select, the more slices are displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:108
msgid "Explore your data"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:110
msgid "The pivot table view enables you to explore your data in great detail. Unlike the graph view, the pivot table enables you to add several measures at the same time. By clicking on *Measures* or on the **+** sign in the *Total* column, you can add as many as you want, each assigned to a new column. By clicking on the **+** sign in the *Total* row, you can add *Groups*. If you click on a group's **+** sign, you can add a sub-group, and so on."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Pivot table view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:121
msgid "You can insert your pivot table's data directly in the Spreadsheet app or export it as an Excel file."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:3
msgid "Procurement expenses report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:12
msgid "With the *Purchase* application, users can monitor procurement expenses over time. This report helps companies track and analyze spending, identify cost-saving opportunities, and ensure efficient budget management."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:17
msgid "Create procurement expenses report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:19
msgid "To create a |per|, first navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Reporting --> Purchase` to open the :guilabel:`Purchase Analysis` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:22
msgid "By default, the dashboard displays a line chart overview of the :guilabel:`Untaxed Total` of :guilabel:`Purchase Orders` (POs) with a :guilabel:`Confirmation Date` for the current month, or of Requests for Quotation (RFQs) with a status of *Draft*, *Sent*, or *Cancelled*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:27
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:25
msgid "Add filters and groups"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:29
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:27
msgid "On the top-right, click the :icon:`oi-view-pivot` :guilabel:`(pivot)` icon to switch to pivot view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:32
msgid "While the |per| can also be :ref:`viewed <purchase/view-results>` as a :icon:`fa-bar-chart` :guilabel:`(bar chart)`, :icon:`fa-line-chart` :guilabel:`(line chart)`, or :icon:`fa-pie-chart` :guilabel:`(pie chart)`, the pivot view provides the most detailed view of the data, and is the recommended starting point."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:29
msgid "Remove any default filters from the :guilabel:`Search...` bar. Then, click the |caret| to open the drop-down menu that contains the :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By`, and :guilabel:`Favorites` columns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:42
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:34
msgid "Unless otherwise specified, the report displays data from both |RFQs| and |POs|. This can be changed by selecting either :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` or :guilabel:`Purchase Orders` under the :guilabel:`Filters` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:46
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Filters` column, select a time frame to use for comparison. The report can be filtered by either :guilabel:`Order Date` or :guilabel:`Confirmation Date`. Choose one from the list, and click the |caret| to specify the date range, either by month, quarter, or year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:50
msgid "Next, under the :guilabel:`Group by` column, select :guilabel:`Vendor`. Then, select :guilabel:`Product Category`, which is also located in the :guilabel:`Group By` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:54
msgid "The selections under the :guilabel:`Group By` heading can be altered, depending on the needs of the individual company. For example, selecting :guilabel:`Product`, instead of :guilabel:`Product Category`, provides a more in depth look at the performance of specific items, in place of an entire category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:59
msgid "Next, make a selection under the :guilabel:`Comparison` heading that appears. These options are only available after the date range is selected under the :guilabel:`Filters` column, and vary based on that range. :guilabel:`Previous Period` adds a comparison to the previous period, such as the last month or quarter. :guilabel:`Previous Year` compares the same time period from the previous year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:65
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:60
msgid "While multiple time-based filters can be added at once, only one comparison can be selected at a time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:73
msgid "The drop-down menu of filters, group by and comparison options for the procurement expenses\n"
"report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:73
msgid "The filter for Q2, comparison for **Previous Period**, and group-by for **Vendor** and **Product Category** were selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:77
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:68
msgid "Add measures"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:79
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:70
msgid "After selecting the :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group by`, and :guilabel:`Comparison` settings, click out of the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:82
msgid "By default, the report displays data with the following measures: :guilabel:`Order`, :guilabel:`Total`, :guilabel:`Untaxed Total`, and :guilabel:`Count`. Click :guilabel:`Measures` at the top-left to open the drop-down list of available measures."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:86
msgid "Click the following specific measures to include additional columns for the procurement expenses report:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:89
msgid ":guilabel:`Total` and :guilabel:`Untaxed Total`: can include one or both measures. These are included for overall spending analysis."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:91
msgid ":guilabel:`Average Cost`: included to evaluate cost efficiency."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:92
msgid ":guilabel:`Days to Confirm` and :guilabel:`Days to Receive`: used to assess supplier performance."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:93
msgid ":guilabel:`Qty Ordered` and :guilabel:`Qty Received`: used to understand order efficiency."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:94
msgid ":guilabel:`Qty Billed` and :guilabel:`Qty to be Billed`: used to track order accuracy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:97
msgid "Additional measures can be included in the report, if desired, to provide additional insights. For example, :guilabel:`Gross Weight` and :guilabel:`Volume` may be included for further logistics and management analysis."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:101
msgid "After selecting all necessary measures, click out of the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:106
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:85
msgid "View results"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:108
msgid "After all of the filters and measures have been selected, the report generates in the selected view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:-1
msgid "A sample version of the procurement expenses report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:114
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` to add the pivot view into an editable spreadsheet format within the *Documents* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:118
msgid "The :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` option is **only** available if the *Documents Spreadsheet* module is installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:122
msgid "The |per| is also available in graph view. Click the :icon:`fa-area-chart` :guilabel:`(area chart)` icon to change to graph view. Click the corresponding icon at the top of the report to switch to a :icon:`fa-bar-chart` :guilabel:`(bar chart)`, :icon:`fa-line-chart` :guilabel:`(line chart)`, or :icon:`fa-pie-chart` :guilabel:`(pie chart)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/procurement_expenses_report.rst:128
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:107
msgid "To save this report as a *favorite*, see :ref:`search/favorites`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:3
msgid "Vendor costs report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:10
msgid "With the *Purchase* application, users can track the fluctuation of vendor costs over time. This allows users to identify the most expensive vendors, and track seasonal changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:14
msgid "Create vendor costs reports"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:16
msgid "To create a vendor costs report, first navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Reporting --> Purchase` to open the :guilabel:`Purchase Analysis` dashboard. By default, the dashboard displays a line chart overview of the :guilabel:`Untaxed Total` of POs (Purchase Orders) with a :guilabel:`Confirmation Date` for the current month, or of RFQs (Requests for Quotation) with a status of *Draft*, *Sent, or *Cancelled*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:38
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Filters` column, select a date range to use for comparison. The report can be filtered by either :guilabel:`Order Date` or :guilabel:`Confirmation Date`. Choose one from the list, and click the |caret| to specify the date range, either by month, quarter, or year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:42
msgid "Next, under the :guilabel:`Group by` column, select :guilabel:`Vendor`. Then, select :guilabel:`Product`, which is also located in the :guilabel:`Group By` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:46
msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Product` is **not** required for this report. However, it is recommended, as it provides additional insight into the performance of individual vendors. Additional selections can be made under the :guilabel:`Group by` heading as well, including :guilabel:`Product Category`, :guilabel:`Status`, and :guilabel:`Purchase Representative`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:51
msgid "To ensure the report is generated correctly, make sure that :guilabel:`Vendor` is the **first** selection made under the :guilabel:`Group By` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:54
msgid "Next, make a selection under the :guilabel:`Comparison` heading. These options are only available after the date range is selected under the :guilabel:`Filters` column, and vary based on that range. :guilabel:`Previous Period` adds a comparison to the previous period, such as the last month or quarter. :guilabel:`Previous Year` compares the same time period from the previous year."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:-1
msgid "The drop-down menu of filters, group by and comparison options for the vendor costs report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:73
msgid "By default, the report displays with the following measures: :guilabel:`Order`, :guilabel:`Total`, :guilabel:`Untaxed Total`, and :guilabel:`Count`. Click :guilabel:`Measures` at the top-left to open the drop-down list of available measures. Click :guilabel:`Average Cost` to add it to the report. Select any additional measures to add to the report, or click on any of the already selected measures to remove them, if desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:80
msgid "It is recommended to run the report with at least :guilabel:`Average Cost`, :guilabel:`Total`, or :guilabel:`Untaxed Total` selected from the :guilabel:`Measures` list. Additional measures, such as :guilabel:`Days to Receive`, can be added to provide additional insights."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:87
msgid "After all of the :ref:`filters and measures have been selected <purchase/vender-cost-report-filters>`, the report generates in the pivot view. Click :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` to add the pivot view into an editable spreadsheet format within the *Documents* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:93
msgid "The :guilabel:`Insert in Spreadsheet` option is only available if the *Documents Spreadsheet* module is installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:-1
msgid "A sample of a vendor costs report with the measures set as total and average costs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/vendor_costs_report.rst:101
msgid "The vendor costs report is also available in *graph* view. Click the :icon:`fa-area-chart` :guilabel:`(area chart)` icon to change to graph view. Click the corresponding icon at the top of the report to switch to a :icon:`fa-bar-chart` :guilabel:`(bar chart)`, :icon:`fa-line-chart` :guilabel:`(line chart)`, or :icon:`fa-pie-chart` :guilabel:`(pie chart)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals.rst:5
msgid "Manage deals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:3
msgid "Blanket orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:13
msgid "Blanket orders are long-term purchase agreements between a company and a vendor to deliver products on a recurring basis with predetermined pricing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:16
msgid "Blanket orders are helpful when products are consistently purchased from the same vendor, but in different quantities, and at different times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:19
msgid "By simplifying the ordering process, blanket orders not only save time, they also save money, since they can be advantageous when negotiating bulk pricing with vendors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:23
msgid "Create a new blanket order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:25
msgid "To create blanket orders, enable the *Purchase Agreements* feature from the *Purchase* app settings. Navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Orders` section, click the checkbox for :guilabel:`Purchase Agreements`. Then click :guilabel:`Save` to implement the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:31
msgid "In addition to creating blanket orders, the *Purchase Agreements* setting also allows users to create alternative requests for quotation (RfQs)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase Agreements enabled in the Purchase app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:38
msgid "To create a blanket order, go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Blanket Orders`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a new blanket order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:41
msgid "Configure the following fields in the new blanket order form to establish predetermined rules for the recurring long-term agreement:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:44
msgid ":guilabel:`Purchase Representative`: the user assigned to this specific blanket order. By default, this is the user who created the agreement; the user can be changed directly from the drop-down menu next to this field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`Agreement Type`: the type of purchase agreement this blanket order is classified as. In Odoo, blanket orders are the only official purchase agreement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Vendor`: the supplier to whom this agreement is tied, either once or on a recurring basis. The vendor can be selected directly from the drop-down menu next to this field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Currency`: the agreed-upon currency to be used for this exchange. If multiple currencies have been activated in the database, the currency can be changed from the drop-down menu next to this field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`Agreement Deadline`: the date that this purchase agreement will be set to expire on. If this blanket order should not expire, leave this field blank."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`Ordering Date`: the date that this blanket order should be placed on if a new quotation is created directly from the blanket order form. If a new quotation is created, this value automatically populates the *Order Deadline* field on the |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:59
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Date`: the expected delivery date that the products included in an |RfQ| are expected, if created directly from a blanket order form. If a new quotation is created, this value automatically populates the *Expected Arrival* field on the |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:62
msgid ":guilabel:`Source Document`: the source purchase order (PO) that this blanket order is tied to. If this blanket order should not be tied to any existing |PO|, leave this field blank."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:64
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: the company assigned to this specific blanket order. By default, this is the company that the user creating the blanket order is listed under. If the database is not a multi-company database, this field **cannot** be changed, and defaults to the only company listed in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "New blanket order purchase agreement with added products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:73
msgid "Once all relevant fields have been filled out, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add products under the :guilabel:`Product` column. Then, in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, change the quantity of each product, and set a price in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:78
msgid "When adding products to a new blanket order, the pre-existing prices of products are not automatically added to the product lines. Instead, the prices **must** be manually assigned, by changing the value in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column to an agreed-upon price with the listed vendor. Otherwise, the price will remain `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:83
msgid "To view and change the default purchase agreement settings for blanket orders directly from the blanket order form, click the :guilabel:`➡️ (right arrow)` icon that becomes visible when hovering over the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` field, where :guilabel:`Blanket Order` is listed. This navigates to the blanket order settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Internal link arrow next to Agreement Type field on blanket order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:92
msgid "From here, the settings for blanket orders can be edited. Under the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` section, the name of the :guilabel:`Agreement Type` can be changed, and the :guilabel:`Agreement Selection Type` can be changed, as well. There are two options that can be activated for the type of selection:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:97
msgid ":guilabel:`Select only one RfQ (exclusive)`: when a purchase order is confirmed, the remaining purchase orders are canceled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:99
msgid ":guilabel:`Select multiple RfQ (non-exclusive)`: when a purchase order is confirmed, remaining purchase orders are **not** canceled. Instead, multiple purchase orders are allowed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:102
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Data For New Quotations` section, the :guilabel:`Lines` and :guilabel:`Quantities` fields can be edited. Doing so sets how new quotations should be populated when using this purchase agreement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase Agreement type edit screen for blanket orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:110
msgid "There are two options that can be activated for :guilabel:`Lines`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:112
msgid ":guilabel:`Use lines of agreement`: when creating a new quotation, the product lines pre-populate with the same products listed on the blanket order, if said blanket order is chosen for the new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:115
msgid ":guilabel:`Do not create RfQ lines automatically`: when creating a new quotation, **and** selecting an existing blanket order, the settings carry over to the new quotation, but the product lines do **not** populate."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:119
msgid "And, there are two options that can be activated for :guilabel:`Quantities`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:121
msgid ":guilabel:`Use quantities of agreement`: when creating a new quotation, the product quantities listed on the blanket order pre-populate on the product lines, if said blanket order is chosen for the new quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:124
msgid ":guilabel:`Set quantities manually`: when creating a new quotation, **and** selecting an existing blanket order, the product lines pre-populate, but all quantities are set to `0`. The quantities **must** be manually set by the user."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:128
msgid "Once any desired changes have been made, click :guilabel:`New` (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to the blanket order form. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to save this new purchase agreement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:132
msgid "Once confirmed, the blanket order's stage (in the upper-right corner) changes from :guilabel:`Draft` to :guilabel:`Ongoing`, meaning this agreement can be selected and used when creating new |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:136
msgid "After creating and confirming a blanket order, products, quantities, and prices can still be edited, added, and removed from the purchase agreement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:140
msgid "Create a new |RfQ| from the blanket order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:142
msgid "After confirming a blanket order, new quotations can be created directly from the blanket order form. |RfQs| using this form are pre-populated with information based on the rules set in the form. Additionally, new quotations are automatically linked to this blanket order form, via the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button at the top-right of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:147
msgid "To create a new quotation from the blanket order form, click the :guilabel:`New Quotation` button. This opens a new |RfQ|, that is pre-populated with the correct information, depending on the settings configured on the blanket order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:151
msgid "From the new |RfQ| form, click :guilabel:`Send by Email` to compose and send an email to the listed vendor. Click :guilabel:`Print RFQ` to generate a printable PDF of the quotation; or, once ready, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order` to confirm the |PO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "New quotation with copied products and rules from blanket order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:159
msgid "Once the |PO| has been confirmed, click back to the blanket order form (via the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page). From the blanket order form, there is now one |RfQ| listed in the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button at the top-right of the form. Click the :guilabel:`RFQs/Orders` smart button to see the |PO| that was just created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "RFQs and Orders smart button from blanket order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:171
msgid "Once a blanket order is confirmed, a new vendor line is added under the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab of the products included in the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:174
msgid "This makes blanket orders useful with :doc:`automated replenishment <../../purchase/products/reordering>`, because information about the :guilabel:`Vendor`, :guilabel:`Price`, and the :guilabel:`Agreement` are referenced on the vendor line. This information dictates when, where, and at what price the product should be replenished."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Product form with replenishment agreement linked to blanket order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/blanket_orders.rst:184
msgid ":doc:`calls_for_tenders`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:3
msgid "Alternative RfQs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:12
msgid "Sometimes, companies might want to request offers from multiple vendors at the same time, by inviting those vendors to submit offers for similar goods or services all at once. This helps companies to select the cheapest, fastest vendors, depending on their specific business needs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:16
msgid "In Odoo, this can be done by creating alternative requests for quotation (RfQs) for different vendors. Once a response is received from each vendor, the product lines from each |RfQ| can be compared, and a decision can be made for which products to purchase from which vendors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:21
msgid "Sometimes referred to as a *call for tender*, this process is primarily used by organizations in the public sector, who are legally bound to use it when making a purchase. However, private companies can also use alternative |RfQs| to spend money efficiently."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:28
msgid "To create alternative |RfQs|, the *Purchase Agreements* feature **must** be enabled in the *Purchase* app settings. To enable the feature, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Orders` section, click the checkbox for :guilabel:`Purchase Agreements`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:33
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the change."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:35
msgid "Doing so enables the ability to create alternative |RfQs|, as well as *blanket orders*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:42
msgid "To save time creating alternative |RfQs|, custom vendors, prices, and delivery lead times can be set in the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab of a product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:45
msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product to edit. On the product form, click the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and click :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:49
msgid "From the drop-down menu, choose a vendor to set under the :guilabel:`Vendor` column, then set a :guilabel:`Price` and :guilabel:`Delivery Lead Time`, if necessary. Clicking the :guilabel:`(optional columns drop-down toggle)` icon, at the top right of the header row, provides additional column options to add to the line item."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:57
msgid "Create an |RfQ|"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:59
msgid "To create a new |RfQ|, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:61
msgid "On the blank |RfQ| form, add a vendor from the drop-down menu, next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a product`, in the :guilabel:`Products` tab, to select a product from the drop-down menu in the :guilabel:`Product` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:65
msgid "Then, set the desired quantity to purchase in the :guilabel:`Quantity` column, and change the purchase price in the :guilabel:`Unit Price` column, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:68
msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`(optional columns drop-down toggle)` icon, at the top right of the header row, provides additional column options to add to the line item."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:71
msgid "Repeat these steps to add as many column options in the :guilabel:`Products` tab as desired, including the :guilabel:`UoM` (Units of Measure) to purchase the products in, and the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:75
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send by Email`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:77
msgid "This opens a :guilabel:`Compose Email` pop-up window, wherein the message to the vendor can be customized, and attachments can be added, if needed. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:80
msgid "This sends an email to the vendor listed on the |RfQ| form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Compose and send quotation email pop-up."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:87
msgid "Sending emails to each vendor can be useful when creating alternative |RfQs|, because vendors can confirm if their past prices still hold today, which helps companies choose the best offers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:93
msgid "Create alternative |RfQs|"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:95
msgid "Once a |PO| is created and sent to a vendor, alternative |RfQs| can be created for additional vendors to compare prices, delivery times, and other factors, to help make a decision for the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:98
msgid "To create alternative |RfQs| from the original, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`. When clicked, a :guilabel:`Create alternative` pop-up window appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Calls for tenders pop-up to create alternative quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:106
msgid "From this window, select an alternative vendor from the drop-down menu next to the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, to whom the alternative quotation is assigned."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:109
msgid "Next to this, there is a :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox that is selected by default. When selected, the product quantities of the original |RfQ| are copied over to the alternative. For this first alternative quotation, leave the checkbox checked. Once finished, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`. This opens a new |RfQ| form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:114
msgid "Since the :guilabel:`Create Alternative` checkbox was left checked, the new form is already pre-populated with the same products, quantities, and other details as the previous, original |RfQ|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:118
msgid "When the :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox is selected while creating an alternative quotation, additional products do **not** need to be added, unless desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:121
msgid "However, if a chosen vendor is listed in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column under a specific product form included in the order, the values set on the product form carry over to the |RfQ|, and **must** be changed manually, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:125
msgid "Once ready, create a second alternative quotation by clicking the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab, followed by :guilabel:`Create Alternative`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:129
msgid "An option to :guilabel:`Compare Product Lines` also appears. Clicking this navigates to the :guilabel:`Compare Order Lines` page, where alternative |RfQs| can be compared, side-by-side. For more information on this, refer to the :ref:`Compare Product Lines <purchase/manage_deals/compare-product-lines>` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:134
msgid "This opens the :guilabel:`Create alternative` pop-up window. Once again, choose a different vendor from the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Vendor`. For this particular |RfQ|, however, *uncheck* the :guilabel:`Copy Products` checkbox. Doing so removes all products on the new alternative |RfQ|, leaving it blank. The specific products which should be ordered from this particular vendor can be added in as needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:140
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Create Alternative`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:143
msgid "If an alternative quotation should be removed from the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab, they can be individually removed by clicking on the :guilabel:`X (remove)` icon at the end of their row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:146
msgid "This creates a third, new |RfQ|. But, since the product quantities of the original |RfQ| were **not** copied over, the product lines are empty, and new products can be added as needed by clicking :guilabel:`Add a product`, and selecting the desired products from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:150
msgid "Once the desired number of specific products are added, click :guilabel:`Send by Email`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Blank alternative quotation with alternatives in breadcrumbs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:156
msgid "This opens a :guilabel:`Compose Email` pop-up window, wherein the message to the vendor can be customized, and attachments can be added, if necessary. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Send`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:159
msgid "From this newest form, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab. Under this tab, all three |RfQs| can be seen in the :guilabel:`Reference` column. Additionally, the vendors are listed under the :guilabel:`Vendor` column, and the order :guilabel:`Total` (and :guilabel:`Status`) of the orders are in the rows, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:164
msgid "The date in the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` column is calculated for each vendor, based on any pre-configured lead times in the vendor and product forms."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:170
msgid "Link new |RfQ| to existing quotations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:172
msgid "Even if a quotation is not created directly from the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab of another |RfQ|, it can still be linked to existing |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:175
msgid "To do that, begin by creating a new |RfQ|. Navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> New`. Fill out the |RfQ|, according to the :ref:`previous instructions <purchase/manage_deals/create-rfq>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:178
msgid "Then, once ready, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab. Since this new |RfQ| was created separately, there are no other orders linked yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:181
msgid "However, to link this |RfQ| with existing alternatives, click :guilabel:`Link to Existing RfQ` on the first line in the :guilabel:`Vendor` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Pop-up to link new quotation to existing RFQs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:188
msgid "This opens an :guilabel:`Add: Alternative POs` pop-up window. Select the desired previously-created |RfQs|, and click :guilabel:`Select`. All of these orders are now copied to this |RfQ|, and can be found under the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:193
msgid "If a large number of |POs| are being processed, and the previous |POs| can't be located, click the :guilabel:`⬇️ (down arrow)` icon to the right of the search bar, at the top of the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:197
msgid "Then, under the :guilabel:`Group By` section, click :guilabel:`Vendor`. Vendors are displayed in their own nested drop-down lists, and each vendor's list can be expanded to view open |POs| for that vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:204
msgid "Compare product lines"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:206
msgid "Alternative |RfQs| can be compared side-by-side, in order to determine which vendors offer the best deals on the products included in the orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:209
msgid "To compare alternative |RfQs|, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and select one of the previously-created |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:212
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Alternatives` tab to see all linked |RfQs|. Next, under the :guilabel:`Create Alternative` option, click :guilabel:`Compare Product Lines`. This navigates to the :guilabel:`Compare Order Lines` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Compare Product Lines page for alternative RFQs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:220
msgid "The :guilabel:`Compare Order Lines` page, by default, groups by :guilabel:`Product`. Each product included in any of the |RfQs| is displayed in its own nested drop-down list, and features all of the |PO| numbers in the :guilabel:`Reference` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:224
msgid "Additional columns on this page include the :guilabel:`Vendor` from which products were ordered, :guilabel:`OTD`, the :guilabel:`Reference` number, the :guilabel:`Status` of the quotation (e.g., :guilabel:`RFQ`, :guilabel:`RFQ Sent`, etc.), the product :guilabel:`Description`, the :guilabel:`Expected Arrival` date, the :guilabel:`Quantity` of products ordered from each vendor, the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` used for each product (if any), the :guilabel:`Unit Price` per product, the :guilabel:`Total` price of the order, and the :guilabel:`Currency` applied to the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:233
msgid "To remove product lines from the :guilabel:`Compare Order Lines` page, click :guilabel:`Clear` at the far-right end of that product line's row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:236
msgid "Doing so removes this specific product as a selectable option from the page, and changes the :guilabel:`Total` price of that product on the page to `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:239
msgid "Additionally, on the |RfQ| form, in which that product was included, its ordered quantity is also changed to `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:242
msgid "Once the best offers have been identified, individual products can be selected by clicking the :guilabel:`Choose` button at the end of each corresponding row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:245
msgid "Once all desired products have been chosen, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:251
msgid "Cancel (or keep) alternatives"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:253
msgid "Once the desired products have been chosen from the :guilabel:`Compare Order Lines` page, the remaining |RfQs|, from which no products were chosen, can be canceled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:256
msgid "The cost in the :guilabel:`Total` column for each product that wasn't chosen is automatically set to `0`, indicated at the far-right of each corresponding row."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:259
msgid "Although they haven't been canceled yet, this indicates that each of those orders can be canceled without having an effect on the other live orders, once those orders have been confirmed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Canceled quotations in the Purchase app overview."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:266
msgid "To confirm an |RfQ| for which products were selected, click into one, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:269
msgid "This causes a pop-up window reading :guilabel:`What about the alternative Requests for Quotations?` to appear. From the pop-up window, two options are presented: :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` and :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:273
msgid "If this |PO| should **not** be confirmed, click :guilabel:`Discard`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:275
msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` automatically cancels the alternative |RfQs|. Selecting :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives` keeps the alternative |RfQs| open, so they can still be accessed, if any additional product quantities need to be ordered later."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:279
msgid "Once all products are ordered, :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` can be selected from whichever |PO| is open at that time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:-1
msgid "Keep or cancel pop-up for alternative RFQs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:286
msgid "To view a detailed form of one of the |RfQs| listed, click the line item for that quotation. This opens an :guilabel:`Open: Alternative POs` pop-up window, from which all details of that particular |RfQ| can be viewed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:290
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Close` to close the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:292
msgid "If all alternative |RfQs| should stay open, from the :guilabel:`What about the alternative Requests for Quotations?` pop-up window, click :guilabel:`Keep Alternatives`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:295
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:298
msgid "Click into the remaining |RfQs| that contain products that need to be ordered, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:301
msgid "This opens the :guilabel:`What about the alternative Requests for Quotations?` pop-up window. If desired, and the remaining alternative |RfQs| are no longer needed, click :guilabel:`Cancel Alternatives` to cancel all other alternative |RfQs| linked with this order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:305
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` (in the breadcrumbs, at the top of the page) to navigate back to an overview of all |RfQs|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:308
msgid "The canceled orders can be seen, greyed out and listed with a :guilabel:`Cancelled` status, under the :guilabel:`Status` column at the far-right of their respective rows."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:311
msgid "Now that all product quantities have been ordered, the purchase process can be completed, and the products can be received into the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/calls_for_tenders.rst:315
msgid ":doc:`blanket_orders`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:15
msgid "Bill control policies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:10
msgid "In Odoo's *Purchase* app, the *bill control* policy determines the quantities billed by vendors on every purchase order (PO), for either ordered or received quantities."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:13
msgid "The policy selected in the *Purchase* app settings acts as the default value, and is applied to any new product created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:19
msgid "To configure the *bill control* policy, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Under :guilabel:`Bill Control`, select either :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` or :guilabel:`Received quantities`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Selected bill control policy in Purchase app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:28
msgid ":guilabel:`Ordered quantities`: creates a vendor bill as soon as a |PO| is confirmed. The products and quantities in the |PO| are used to generate a draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:30
msgid ":guilabel:`Received quantities`: a bill is created only *after* part of the total order has been received. The products and quantities received are used to generate a draft bill. An error message appears if creation of a vendor bill is attempted without receiving anything."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:0
msgid "Bill control policy draft bill error message."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:39
msgid "If a specific product should use a different control policy than selected in the *Purchase* app settings, the :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy for that product can be changed from its product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:43
msgid "To do that, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Products --> Products`, and select a product. From the product form, click the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab. Under the :guilabel:`Vendor Bills` section, modify the selection in the :guilabel:`Control Policy` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:48
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:46
msgid "3-way matching"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:50
msgid "The *3-way matching* feature ensures vendor bills are only paid once some (or all) of the products included in the |PO| have been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:53
msgid "To activate *3-way matching*, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Then, tick the checkbox for :guilabel:`3-way matching` to enable the feature, and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled 3-way matching feature in Purchase app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:62
msgid "The :guilabel:`3-way matching` feature **only** works with the :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy set to :guilabel:`Received quantities`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:66
msgid "Pay vendor bills with 3-way matching"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:68
msgid "When *3-way matching* is enabled, vendor bills display a :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field under the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab. When a new vendor bill is created, the field is set to :guilabel:`Yes`, since a bill **cannot** be created until at least some of the products included in a |PO| have been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:73
msgid "To create a vendor bill from a |PO|, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`. From the :guilabel:`Purchase Orders` page, select the desired |PO| from the list. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Bill`. Doing so opens a new draft :guilabel:`Vendor Bill` form, in the :guilabel:`Draft` stage. Click the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab, and locate the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:80
msgid "The |PO| selected from the list **must not** be billed yet, or an :guilabel:`Invalid Operation` pop-up window appears. This occurs for |POs| with a :guilabel:`Received quantities` policy, and a :guilabel:`Fully Billed` :guilabel:`Billing Status`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:0
msgid "Invalid Operation pop-up window for billed Purchase Order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:88
msgid "Click the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` to view the available options: :guilabel:`Yes`, :guilabel:`No`, and :guilabel:`Exception`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Should Be Paid field status on draft vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:96
msgid "If the total quantity of products from a |PO| has not been received, Odoo only includes the products that *have* been received in the draft vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:99
msgid "Draft vendor bills can be edited to increase the billed quantity, change the price of the products in the bill, and add additional products to the bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:102
msgid "If the draft bill's information is changed, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status is set to :guilabel:`Exception`. This means that Odoo notices the discrepancy, but does not block the changes or display an error message, since there might be a valid reason for making changes to the draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:107
msgid "To process the vendor bill, select a date in the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field, and click :guilabel:`Confirm`, followed by :guilabel:`Register Payment`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:110
msgid "This opens a :guilabel:`Register Payment` pop-up window. From this window, accounting information is pre-populated based on the database's accounting settings. Click :guilabel:`Create Payment` to process the vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:114
msgid "Once payment has been registered for a vendor bill, and the bill displays the green :guilabel:`Paid` banner, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status is set to :guilabel:`No`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:118
msgid "The :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` status on bills is automatically set by Odoo. However, the status can be manually changed by clicking the field's drop-down menu inside the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123
msgid "View a purchase order's billing status"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125
msgid "Once a |PO| is confirmed, its :guilabel:`Billing Status` can be viewed under the :guilabel:`Other Information` tab on the |PO| form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:128
msgid "To view the :guilabel:`Billing Status` of a |PO|, navigate to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Orders --> Purchase Orders`, and select a |PO| to view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:131
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Other Information` tab, and locate the :guilabel:`Billing Status` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Billing status field on a purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:137
msgid "The table below details the different values the :guilabel:`Billing Status` field could read, and when they are displayed, depending on the *Bill Control* policy used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:144
msgid "Billing Status"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:145
msgid "On received quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:146
msgid "On ordered quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:147
msgid "Nothing to Bill"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:148
msgid "PO confirmed; no products received"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:149
msgid "*Not applicable*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:150
msgid "Waiting Bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:151
msgid "All/some products received; bill not created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:152
msgid "PO confirmed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:153
msgid "Fully Billed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:154
msgid "All/some products received; draft bill created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:155
msgid "Draft bill created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:158
msgid ":doc:`manage`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:3
msgid "Manage vendor bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:7
msgid "A *vendor bill* is an invoice received for products and/or services that a company purchases from a vendor. Vendor bills record payables as they arrive from vendors, and can include amounts owed for the goods and/or services purchased, sales taxes, freight and delivery charges, and more."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, a vendor bill can be created at different points in the purchasing process, depending on the *bill control* policy chosen in the *Purchase* app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:17
msgid "To view and edit the default bill control policy and make changes to it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:21
msgid "Here, there are two :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy options: :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` and :guilabel:`Received quantities`. After a policy is selected, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1
msgid "Bill control policies in purchase app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:28
msgid "The policy selected will be the default for any new product created. The definition of each policy is as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Ordered quantities`: creates a vendor bill as soon as a purchase order is confirmed. The products and quantities in the purchase order are used to generate a draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Received quantities`: a bill is only created **after** part of the total order has been received. The products and quantities **received** are used to generate a draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:37
msgid "If a product needs a different control policy, the default bill control policy can be overridden by going to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab in a product's template, and modifying its :guilabel:`Control Policy` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1
msgid "Control policy field on product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:48
msgid "*3-way matching* ensures vendor bills are only paid once some (or all) of the products included in the purchase order have actually been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:51
msgid "To activate it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Then, tick the checkbox next to :guilabel:`3-way matching`, and click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:56
msgid ":guilabel:`3-way matching` is **only** intended to work with the :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy set to :guilabel:`Received quantities`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:60
msgid "Create and manage vendor bills on receipts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:62
msgid "When products are received into a company's warehouse, receipts are created. Once the company processes the received quantities, they can choose to create a vendor bill directly from the warehouse receipt form. Depending on the bill control policy chosen in the settings, vendor bill creation is completed at different steps of the procurement process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:68
msgid "With the bill control policy set to ordered quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:70
msgid "To create and manage vendor bills on receipts using the *ordered quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` under :guilabel:`Bill Control`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:75
msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new request for quotation (RFQ). Doing so reveals a blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` detail form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:78
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:140
msgid "On the blank detail form, add a vendor to the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:82
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:144
msgid "Then, confirm the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` by clicking the :guilabel:`Confirm Order` button above the detail form. Doing so turns the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` into a purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:86
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button to create a vendor bill for the purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:88
msgid "Clicking the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button reveals the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` page for the purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:91
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`, click the :guilabel:`Edit` button to modify the bill, and add a bill date in the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field. If needed, add additional products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line` in the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:95
msgid "Next, confirm the bill by clicking the :guilabel:`Confirm` button on the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:99
msgid "Since the bill control policy is set to *ordered quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed as soon as it is created, before any products have been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:102
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:175
msgid "On the new :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`, add a :guilabel:`Bill Reference` number, which can be used to match the bill with additional documents (such as the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`). Then, click :menuselection:`Confirm --> Register Payment`. Doing so causes a pop-up to appear, wherein a payment :guilabel:`Journal` can be chosen; a :guilabel:`Payment Method` selected; and a :guilabel:`Recipient Bank Account` can be selected from a drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:108
msgid "Additionally, the bill :guilabel:`Amount`, :guilabel:`Payment Date`, and :guilabel:`Memo` (:dfn:`Reference Number`) can be changed from this pop-up. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Create Payment` to finish creating the :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`. Doing so causes a green :guilabel:`In Payment` banner to display on the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1
msgid "Vendor bill form for ordered quantities control policy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:118
msgid "Each vendor bill provides the option to either :guilabel:`Add Credit Note` or :guilabel:`Add Debit Note`. A *credit note* is typically issued when a vendor or supplier of goods get some quantity of products back from the customer to whom they were sold, while *debit notes* are reserved for goods returned from the customer/buyer to the vendor or supplier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:124
msgid "With the bill control policy set to received quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:127
msgid "If the creation of a vendor bill is attempted without receiving any quantities of a product (while using the *received quantities* bill control policy), an error message appears, and settings must be changed before proceeding."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:131
msgid "To create and manage vendor bills on receipts using the *received quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase app --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Received quantities` under :guilabel:`Bill Control`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to save changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:136
msgid "Next, go to the :menuselection:`Purchase` app, and click :guilabel:`Create` to create a new :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)`. Doing so reveals a blank :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` detail form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:148
msgid "Finally, click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button to create a bill for the purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:151
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Create Bill` before any products have been received will cause a :guilabel:`User Error` pop-up message to appear. The :guilabel:`Purchase Order` requires the receipt of at least partial quantity of the items included on the order to create a vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:0
msgid "User error pop-up for received quantities control policy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:159
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button to view the warehouse receipt form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:161
msgid "On the warehouse receipt form, click :menuselection:`Validate --> Apply` to mark the :guilabel:`Done` quantities. Then, navigate back to the :menuselection:`Purchase Order` (via the breadcrumbs), and click the :guilabel:`Create Bill` button on the purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:165
msgid "Doing so reveals the :guilabel:`Draft Bill` for the purchase order. On the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`, click the :guilabel:`Edit` button, and add a :guilabel:`Bill Date`. If needed, add additional products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:169
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Confirm` button to confirm the :guilabel:`Draft Bill`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:172
msgid "Since the bill control policy is set to *received quantities*, the draft bill can **only** be confirmed when at least some of the quantities are received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:181
msgid "Additionally, the bill :guilabel:`Amount`, :guilabel:`Payment Date`, and :guilabel:`Memo` (:dfn:`Reference Number`) can be changed from this pop-up. Once ready, click :guilabel:`Create Payment` to finish creating the vendor bill. Doing so causes a green **In Payment** banner to display on the :abbr:`RFQ (request for quotation)` form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:187
msgid "Create and manage vendor bills in Accounting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:189
msgid "Vendor bills can also be created directly from the *Accounting* app, **without** having to create a purchase order first. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Vendors --> Bills`, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Doing so reveals a blank vendor bill detail form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:193
msgid "On this blank vendor bill detail form, add a vendor in the :guilabel:`Vendor` field, and add products to the :guilabel:`Product` lines (under the :guilabel:`Invoice Lines` tab), by clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Then, add a bill date in the :guilabel:`Bill Date` field, and any other necessary information. Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to confirm the bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:198
msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Journal Items` tab to view (or change) the :guilabel:`Account` journals that were populated based on the configuration on the corresponding :guilabel:`Vendor` and :guilabel:`Product` forms."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:202
msgid "Then, click :guilabel:`Add Credit Note` or :guilabel:`Add Debit Note` to add credit or debit notes to the bill. Or, add a :guilabel:`Bill Reference` number (while in :guilabel:`Edit` mode)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:205
msgid "Then, when ready, click :menuselection:`Register Payment --> Create Payment` to complete the :guilabel:`Vendor Bill`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:209
msgid "To tie the draft bill to an existing purchase order, click the drop-down menu next to :guilabel:`Auto-Complete`, and select a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)` from the menu. The bill will auto-populate with the information from the :abbr:`PO (purchase order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:0
msgid "Auto-complete drop-down list on draft vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:218
msgid "Batch billing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:220
msgid "Vendor bills can be processed and managed in batches in the *Accounting* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:222
msgid "To do this, go to :menuselection:`Accounting app --> Vendors --> Bills`. Then, click the :guilabel:`checkbox` at the top left of the page, beside the :guilabel:`Number` column, under the :guilabel:`Create` button. This selects all existing vendor bills with a :guilabel:`Posted` or :guilabel:`Draft` :guilabel:`Status`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:227
msgid "From here, click the :guilabel:`Action` gear icon to export, delete, or send & print the bills; click the :guilabel:`Print` icon to print the invoices or bills; or click :guilabel:`Register Payment` to create and process payments for multiple vendor bills at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:231
msgid "When :guilabel:`Register Payment` is selected, a pop-up appears. In this pop-up window, select the appropriate journal in the :guilabel:`Journal` field, choose a payment date in the :guilabel:`Payment Date` field, and choose a :guilabel:`Payment Method`. There is also the option to :guilabel:`Group Payments` on this pop-up, as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:236
msgid "When ready, click the :guilabel:`Create Payment` button, which creates a list of journal entries on a separate page. This list of journal entries are all tied to their appropriate vendor bills."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:-1
msgid "Batch billing register payment pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:244
msgid "The :guilabel:`Register Payment` option for vendor bills in batches will only work for journal entries whose :guilabel:`Status` is set to :guilabel:`Posted`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:248
msgid ":doc:`control_bills`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products.rst:5
msgid "Products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:3
msgid "Configure reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:5
msgid "For certain products, it is necessary to ensure that there is always a minimum amount available on hand at any given time. By adding a reordering rule to a product, it is possible to automate the reordering process so that a purchase order is automatically created whenever the amount on hand falls below a set threshold."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:11
msgid "The *Inventory* module must be installed to use reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:14
msgid "Configure products for reordering"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:16
msgid "Products must be configured in a specific way before a reordering rule can be added to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:18
msgid "Starting from the :menuselection:`Inventory`, :menuselection:`Manufacturing`, :menuselection:`Purchase`, or :menuselection:`Sales` module, navigate to :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a new product. Alternatively, find a product that already exists in the database and click into it's product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:23
msgid "Next, on the product form, enable reordering by checking the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` option underneathe the :guilabel:`Product Name` field. Finally, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to `Storable Product` under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Configure a product for reordering in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:32
msgid "Add a reordering rule to a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:34
msgid "After properly configuring a product, a reordering rule can be added to it by selecting the now visible :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of that product's form, and then clicking :guilabel:`Create` on the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Access reordering rules for a product from the product page in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:42
msgid "Once created, the reordering rule can be configured to generate purchase orders automatically by defining the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Location` specifies where the ordered quantities should be stored once they are received and entered into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity` sets the lower threshold for the reordering rule while :guilabel:`Max Quantity` sets the upper threshold. If the stock on hand falls below the minimum quantity, a new purchase order will be created to replenish it up to the maximum quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:52
msgid "If :guilabel:`Min Quantity` is set to `5` and :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `25` and the stock on hand falls to four, a purchase order will be created for 21 units of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` can be configured so that products are only ordered in batches of a certain quantity. Depending on the number entered, this can result in the creation of a purchase order that would put the resulting stock on hand above what is specified in the :guilabel:`Max Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:61
msgid "If :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `100` but :guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` is set to order the product in batches of `200`, a purchase order will be created for 200 units of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM` specifies the unit of measurement by which the quantity will be ordered. For discrete products, this should be set to `Units`. However, it can also be set to units of measurement like `Volume` or `Weight` for non-discrete products like water or bricks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Configure the reordering rule in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:74
msgid "Manually trigger reordering rules using the scheduler"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:76
msgid "Reordering rules will be automatically triggered by the scheduler, which runs once a day by default. To trigger reordering rules manually, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`. On the pop-up window, confirm the manual action by clicking :guilabel:`Run Scheduler`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:82
msgid "Manually triggering reordering rules will also trigger any other scheduled actions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:85
msgid "Manage reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:87
msgid "To manage the reordering rules for a single product, navigate to that product page's form and select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:90
msgid "To manage all reordering rules for every product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`. From this dashboard, typical bulk actions in Odoo can be performed such as exporting data or archiving rules that are no longer needed. As well, the :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By` or triple-dotted menu on the form are available to search for and/or organize the reordering rules as desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:3
msgid "Temporary reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:5
msgid "Some businesses require certain products to always have a minimum quantity of stock on-hand at any given time. To avoid stock falling below a certain threshold, companies can create *reordering rules* in Odoo to automate purchase orders for specific products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:9
msgid "Reordering rules keep the forecasted stock levels above a certain threshold, without exceeding a specified upper limit, or maximum amount. When a product with a reordering rule falls below a specified quantity, Odoo generates an order using the specified *route* (e.g. *Buy* or *Manufacture*) to replenish the stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:14
msgid "In certain cases, businesses might opt for *temporary reordering rules* when they do not want specific products to be replenished automatically."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:17
msgid "In Odoo, a \"temporary\" reordering rule is created in the replenishment dashboard when a product:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:19
msgid "is configured with a *Buy* route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:20
msgid "has no reordering rule configured"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:21
msgid "has `0` quantity in stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:22
msgid "is included in a sales order (SO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:24
msgid "This rule is deleted upon confirmation of the purchase order (PO) generated for the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:27
msgid ":doc:`../../inventory/product_management/product_replenishment/reordering_rules`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:33
msgid "To configure a product that triggers temporary reordering rules when its stock reaches `0`, begin by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:37
msgid "The same configurations can also be made on an existing product, by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, and selecting an existing product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:40
msgid "On the product form, enter the product name, and ensure the :guilabel:`Can be Sold` and :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` options are enabled, located beneath the :guilabel:`Product Name` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:44
msgid "Then, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to `Storable Product`, under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:47
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab, and under :guilabel:`Vendor`, click :guilabel:`Add a line` to select a vendor from the drop-down menu. Then, set a purchase price under :guilabel:`Price`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:51
msgid "A vendor **must** be set for temporary reordering rules to work. While a :abbr:`PO (purchase order)` can still be created automatically, attempting to replenish the product from the :guilabel:`Replenishment` dashboard in the *Inventory* app triggers a warning to add a vendor on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:0
msgid "Warning pop-up upon clicking to replenish product with no set vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:60
msgid "Before creating a :abbr:`SO (sales order)` for the product, ensure the :guilabel:`On Hand` smart button on the product form reads `0.00 Units`. Then, ensure that the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button reads `0`, indicating there are no rules applied to this product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Product form smart button row displaying reordering rules and on hand buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:69
msgid "Trigger temporary reordering rule"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:71
msgid "To trigger a temporary reordering rule, create a new sales order for a product by navigating to :menuselection:`Sales app --> New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:74
msgid "Then, add a customer in the :guilabel:`Customer` field, and click :guilabel:`Add a product` under the :guilabel:`Product` column in the :guilabel:`Order Lines` tab. Next, select the desired product from the drop-down menu. Lastly, :guilabel:`Confirm` the :abbr:`SO (sales order)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Sales order for product with no set reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:83
msgid "Check replenishment report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:85
msgid "To see the temporary reordering rule created for the out-of-stock product included in the sales order, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Operations --> Replenishment`. Doing so opens the :guilabel:`Replenishment` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:89
msgid "On this dashboard, locate the product for which the temporary reordering rule was created. On its product line, its :guilabel:`On Hand` quantity, negative :guilabel:`Forecast` quantity, *Buy* :guilabel:`Route`, and :guilabel:`To Order` quantity to replenish can be seen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:93
msgid "Additionally, two replenishment options are located to the far-right of the row: :guilabel:`Order Once` and :guilabel:`Automate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Replenishment report displaying temporary reordering rule and options."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:100
msgid "To use the one-time, temporary reordering rule, click :guilabel:`Order Once`. This action triggers a confirmation pop-up window in the top-right corner, reading :guilabel:`The following replenishment order has been generated`, along with a new purchase order number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:105
msgid "Once the purchase order has been generated after clicking :guilabel:`Order Once`, refresh the page. The temporary reordering rule for the product no longer appears in the :guilabel:`Replenishment` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:110
msgid "Complete purchase order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:112
msgid "To view the purchase order created from the :guilabel:`Replenishment` dashboard, navigate to the :menuselection:`Purchase app`, and select the generated :abbr:`PO (purchase order)` from the :guilabel:`Requests for Quotation` overview."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:116
msgid "From here, click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`, then click :guilabel:`Receive Products`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase order for product ordered with temporary reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:123
msgid "Now, the original sales order can be delivered and invoiced."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:126
msgid "Once the :abbr:`SO (sales order)` is delivered and invoiced, ensure there are no reordering rules on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/temporary_reordering.rst:129
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Products --> Products`, select the product, and confirm that the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button displays `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:3
msgid "Purchase units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:5
msgid "When you purchase a product, it may happen that your vendor uses a different unit of measure than when it is sold. This can cause confusion between sales and purchase representatives. It is also time-consuming to convert measures manually every time. With Odoo, you can configure your product once and let Odoo handle the conversion."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:10
msgid "Consider the following examples:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:12
msgid "You purchase orange juice from an American vendor, and they use **gallons**. However, your customers are European and use **liters**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:15
msgid "You buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls to your customers using **square meters**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:19
msgid "Enable units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:21
msgid "Open your Sales app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under Product Catalog, enable *Units of Measure*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the units of measure option in Odoo Sales"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:29
msgid "Specify sales and purchase units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:32
msgid "Standard units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:34
msgid "A variety of units of measure are available by default in your database. Each belongs to one of the five pre-configured units of measure categories: *Length / Distance*, *Unit*, *Volume*, *Weight* and *Working Time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:39
msgid "You can create your new units of measure and units of measure categories (see next section)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:41
msgid "To specify different units of measures for sales and purchases, open the Purchase app and go to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`. Create a product or select an existing one. Under the product's *General Information* tab, first select the *Unit of Measure* to be used for sales (as well as for other apps such as inventory). Then, select the *Purchase Unit of Measure* to be used for purchases."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:47
msgid "Back to the first example, if you purchase orange juice from your vendor in **gallons** and sell it to your customers in **liters**, first select *L* (liters) as the *Unit of Measure*, and *gal (US)* (gallons) as the *Purchase Unit of Measure*, then click on *Save*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Configure a product's units of measure in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:56
msgid "Create new units of measure and units of measure categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:58
msgid "Sometimes you need to create your own units and categories, either because the measure is not pre-configured in Odoo or because the units do not relate with each other (e.g. kilos and centimeters)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:62
msgid "If you take the second example where you buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls using **square meters**, you need to create a new *Units of Measure Category* in order to relate both units of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:66
msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Units of Measure Categories`. Click on *Create* and name the category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Create a new units of measure category in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:73
msgid "The next step is to create the two units of measures. To do so, click into the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure Category` field and enter a name for the category. Then, under the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` tab, click :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:77
msgid "First, create the unit of measure used as the reference point for converting to other units of measure inside the category. Name the unit, and select the units of measure category you just created. For the *Type*, select *Reference Unit of Measure for this category type*. Enter the *Rounding Precision* you would like to use. The quantity computed by Odoo is always a multiple of this value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:83
msgid "In the example, as you cannot purchase less than 1 roll and won't use fractions of a roll as a unit of measure, you can enter 1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Create a new reference unit of measure in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:90
msgid "If you use a *Rounding Precision* inferior to 0.01, a warning message might appear stating that it is higher than the *Decimal Accuracy* and that it might cause inconsistencies. If you wish to use a *Rounding Precision* lower than 0.01, first activate the :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`, then go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> Database Structure --> Decimal Accuracy`, select *Product Unit of Measure* and edit *Digits* accordingly. For example, if you want to use a rounding precision of 0.00001, set *Digits* to 5."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:97
msgid "Next, create a second unit of measure, name it, and select the same units of measure category as your reference unit. As *Type*, select *Smaller* or *Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure*, depending on your situation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:101
msgid "As the curtain roll equals to 100 square meters, you should select *Smaller*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:103
msgid "Next, you need to enter the *Ratio* between your reference unit and the second one. If the second unit is smaller, the *Ratio* should be greater than 1. If the second unit is larger, the ratio should be smaller than 1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:107
msgid "For your curtain roll, the ratio should be set to 100."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:109
msgid "You can now configure your product just as you would using Odoo's standard units of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Set a product's units of measure using your own units in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:7
msgid "Quality"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:9
msgid "**Odoo Quality** helps ensure product quality throughout manufacturing processes and inventory movements. Conduct quality checks, automate quality inspection frequency, and create quality alerts when issues arise."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Quality Overview <https://www.odoo.com/slides/slide/quality-overview-5590>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types.rst:5
msgid "Quality check types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:3
msgid "Instructions quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:8
msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, an *Instructions* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Instructions* checks consist of a text entry field that allows the creator to provide instructions for how to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:12
msgid "For a full overview of how to configure a quality check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks <quality/quality_management/quality-checks>` and :ref:`quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:17
msgid "Process an Instructions quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:19
msgid "There are multiple ways that *Instructions* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific manufacturing, inventory, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:24
msgid "Process from the quality check's page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:26
msgid "To process an *Instructions* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:30
msgid "If the product passes the check, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button above the quality check form. If the product does not pass the check, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button, instead."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:34
msgid "Process quality check on an order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:36
msgid "To process an *Instructions* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.) for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:43
msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears above the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, from which any quality checks created for the order can be processed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:-1
msgid "The Quality Check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:51
msgid "To complete an *Instructions* quality check, follow the instructions detailed in the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to confirm that the check has been completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:55
msgid "If an issue or defect is found during the quality check, a quality alert may need to be created to notify a quality team. To do so, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check is validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:59
msgid "Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts <quality/quality_management/quality-alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:64
msgid "Process work order quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:66
msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered by a manufacturing order, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, an *Instructions* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the |MO| as a whole."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:71
msgid "Quality checks configured for work orders **must** be completed from the *Shop Floor* module. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an |MO| that includes a work order for which an *Instructions* quality check is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:75
msgid "On the |MO|, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and click the :guilabel:`Open Work Order (square with arrow coming out of it)` button on the line of the work order to be processed. On the resulting :guilabel:`Work Orders` pop-up window, click the :guilabel:`Open Shop Floor` button to open the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:84
msgid "Begin processing the work order's steps until the *Instructions* quality check step is reached. Click on the step to open a pop-up window that details how to complete the quality check. Once completed, click the :guilabel:`Next` button to complete the check, and move on to the next step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:-1
msgid "An Instruction check as it appears in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:92
msgid "Alternatively, an *Instructions* quality check can be completed by clicking the checkbox that appears on the right side of the step's line on the work order card. When using this method, the quality check automatically passes, without a pop-up window appearing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/instructions_check.rst:97
msgid "For a full guide to the *Shop Floor* module, see the :ref:`Shop Floor overview <manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:3
msgid "Measure quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Measure* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Measure* checks prompt users to measure a certain aspect of a product and record the measurement in Odoo. For the quality check to pass, the recorded measurement must be within a certain *tolerance* of a *norm* value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:15
msgid "Create a Measure quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:17
msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Measure* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:21
msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Measure* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks <quality/quality_management/quality-checks>` and :ref:`quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:28
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:28
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:27
msgid "Quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:30
msgid "To create a single *Measure* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:33
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Measure` quality check type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:34
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:35
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:34
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` drop-down field, select the quality team responsible for managing the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:36
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab, enter instructions for how the picture should be taken."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "A quality check form configured for a Measure quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:44
msgid "Quality control point (QCP)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:46
msgid "To create a |QCP| that generates *Measure* quality checks automatically, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:50
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Measure` quality check type. Doing so causes two new fields to appear: :guilabel:`Norm` and :guilabel:`Tolerance`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:53
msgid "Use the first text-entry field of the :guilabel:`Norm` field to record the ideal measurement that the product should conform to. Use the second text-entry field to specify the unit of measurement that should be used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:56
msgid "The :guilabel:`Tolerance` field features two sub-fields: :guilabel:`from` and :guilabel:`to`. Use the :guilabel:`from` field to specify the minimum acceptable measurement, and the :guilabel:`to` field to specify the maximum acceptable measurement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:60
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:55
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` drop-down field, select the quality team responsible for managing the checks created by the |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:62
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how the measurement should be taken."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "A QCP form configured to create Measure quality checks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:70
msgid "Process a Measure quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:72
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:64
msgid "Once created, there are multiple ways that *Measure* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific inventory, manufacturing, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:77
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:69
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:72
msgid "From the check's page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:79
msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to take the measurement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:83
msgid "After taking the measurement, record the value in the :guilabel:`Measure` field on the quality check form. To manually pass or fail the check, click :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` at the top-left corner of the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:87
msgid "Alternatively, if the quality check is assigned to a |QCP| for which *norm* and *tolerance* values have been specified, click :guilabel:`Measure` at the top-left corner of the check instead. Doing so automatically marks the check as *Passed* if the recorded value is within the specified *tolerance*, or *Failed* if the value is outside of it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:93
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:79
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:88
msgid "On an order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:95
msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:102
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:97
msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the page. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:106
msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check, measure the product as instructed, then enter the value in the :guilabel:`Measure` field on the pop-up window. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to register the recorded value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Measure quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:114
msgid "If the value entered is within the range specified in the :guilabel:`Tolerance` section of the |QCP|, the quality check passes and the pop-up window closes. The rest of the manufacturing or inventory order can then be processed as usual."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:118
msgid "However, if the value entered is outside of the specified range, a new pop-up window appears, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed`. The body of the pop-up shows a warning message that states, :guilabel:`You measured # units and it should be between # units and # units.`, as well as the instructions entered in the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab of the |QCP|. At the bottom of the pop-up, two buttons appear: :guilabel:`Correct Measure` and :guilabel:`Confirm Measure`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "The \"Quality Check Failed\" pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:128
msgid "If the measurement was not entered correctly and should be changed, select :guilabel:`Correct Measure`. Doing so re-opens the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. Enter the corrected measurement in the :guilabel:`Measure` field, and then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:133
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:195
msgid "If the measurement was entered correctly, click :guilabel:`Confirm Measure` instead, and the quality check fails. Follow any instructions that were listed on the :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:137
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:100
msgid "If a quality alert must be created, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check fails. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:142
msgid "For a complete guide on how to fill out the quality alert form, view the documentation on :doc:`quality alerts <../quality_management/quality_alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:146
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:109
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:121
msgid "On a work order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:148
msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Measure* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:153
msgid "*Measure* quality checks configured for work orders **must** be completed from the *Shop Floor* module. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an |MO| that includes a work order for which a *Measure* quality check is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:158
msgid "On the |MO|, select the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab, and click the :guilabel:`Open Work Order (external link icon)` button on the line of the work order to be processed. On the resulting :guilabel:`Work Orders` pop-up window, click the :guilabel:`Open Shop Floor` button to open the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:163
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:138
msgid "When accessed from a specific work order, the *Shop Floor* module opens to the page for the work center where the order is configured to be processed, and isolates the work order's card, so no other cards are shown."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:167
msgid "Process the work order's steps until the *Measure* quality check step is reached. Click on the step to open a pop-up window that includes instructions for how the measurement should be taken. After taking the measurement, enter it in the :guilabel:`Measure` field of the pop-up window, and then click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Measure check in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:176
msgid "If the measurement entered is within the range specified in the :guilabel:`Tolerance` section of the |QCP|, the quality check passes, and the pop-up window moves on to the next step of the work order. However, if the measurement entered is outside of the specified range, a new pop-up window appears, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:181
msgid "The body of the :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed` pop-up window shows a message that states, :guilabel:`You measured # units and it should be between # units and # units`, as well as the instructions entered in the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab of the |QCP|. At the bottom of the pop-up window, two buttons appear: :guilabel:`Correct Measure` and :guilabel:`Confirm Measure`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:-1
msgid "The Quality Check Failed pop-up window for a Measure check in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:190
msgid "If the measurement was not entered correctly, and should be changed, select :guilabel:`Correct Measure`. Doing so opens a new pop-up window, titled :guilabel:`Quality Check`. Enter the corrected measure in the :guilabel:`Measure` field, and then click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the check and close the pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:199
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:158
msgid "If a quality alert must be created, exit the pop-up window by clicking the :guilabel:`X (close)` button in the top-right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:202
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:161
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`⋮ (three vertical dots)` button on the bottom-right corner of the work order card to open the :guilabel:`What do you want to do?` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:205
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:164
msgid "On the :guilabel:`What do you want to do?` pop-up window, select the :guilabel:`Create a Quality Alert` button. Doing so opens a blank quality alert form in a new :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/measure_check.rst:210
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:169
msgid "For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :doc:`quality alerts <../quality_management/quality_alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:3
msgid "Pass - Fail quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Pass - Fail* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Pass - Fail* checks consist of a text field that allows the creator to specify a certain criteria that a product must meet to pass the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:15
msgid "Create a Pass - Fail quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:17
msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Pass - Fail* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:21
msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Pass - Fail* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks <quality/quality_management/quality-checks>` and :ref:`quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:30
msgid "To create a single *Pass - Fail* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:34
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:51
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Pass - Fail` quality check type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:37
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab, enter instructions for how to complete the quality check and the criteria that must be met for the check to pass."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1
msgid "A quality check form configured for a Pass - Fail quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:45
msgid "Quality Control Point (QCP)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:47
msgid "To create a |QCP| that generates *Pass - Fail* quality checks automatically, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:54
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how to complete the quality check and the criteria that must be met for the check to pass."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Quality Control Point (QCP) form configured to create a Pass - Fail quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:62
msgid "Process a Pass - Fail quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:71
msgid "To process a *Measure* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:75
msgid "If the criteria for the check is met, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top-left corner of the page. If the criteria is not met, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:81
msgid "To process a *Pass - Fail* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:88
msgid "On the selected manufacturing or inventory order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:92
msgid "To process a *Pass - Fail* quality check, follow the instructions shown on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. If the criteria for the check is met, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the bottom of the window. If the criteria is not met, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Pass - Fail quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:105
msgid "For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts <quality/quality_management/quality-alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:111
msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Pass - Fail* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:116
msgid "*Pass - Fail* quality checks configured for work orders **must** be completed from the *Shop Floor* module. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an |MO| that includes a work order for which a *Pass - Fail* quality check is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:130
msgid "Begin processing the work order's steps until the *Pass - Fail* quality check step is reached. Click on the step to open a pop-up window that details the criteria for whether the check passes or fails. Click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the bottom of the pop-up window if the check passes, or the :guilabel:`Fail` button if it fails."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:135
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Pass` button is clicked, the pop-up window moves to the next step for the work order. If the :guilabel:`Fail` button is clicked, a :guilabel:`Quality Check Failed` pop-up window appears, detailing what should be done next."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Pass - Fail check as it appears in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/pass_fail_check.rst:144
msgid "Alternatively, instead of clicking on the step to open the pop-up window, a *Pass - Fail* quality check can be completed by clicking the checkbox that appears on the right side of the step's line on the work order card. When using this method, the quality check passes automatically, without a pop-up window appearing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:3
msgid "Take a Picture quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo *Quality*, a *Take a Picture* check is one of the quality check types that can be selected when creating a new quality check or quality control point (QCP). *Take a Picture* checks require a picture to be attached to the check, which can then be reviewed by a quality team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:14
msgid "Create a Take a Picture quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:16
msgid "There are two distinct ways that *Take a Picture* quality checks can be created. A single check can be manually created. Alternatively, a |QCP| can be configured that automatically creates checks at a predetermined interval."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:20
msgid "This documentation only details the configuration options that are unique to *Take a Picture* quality checks and |QCPs|. For a full overview of all the configuration options available when creating a single check or a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality checks <quality/quality_management/quality-checks>` and :ref:`quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:29
msgid "To create a single *Take a Picture* quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new quality check form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:33
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:50
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field, select the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` quality check type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "A quality check form configured for a Take a Picture quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:44
msgid "Quality control point"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:46
msgid "To create a |QCP| that generates *Take a Picture* quality checks automatically, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click :guilabel:`New`. Fill out the new |QCP| form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:51
msgid "If the *Maintenance* app is installed, a :guilabel:`Device` field appears after selecting the *Take a Picture* check type. Use this field to specify a device that should be used to take quality check pictures. For information about managing devices in the *Maintenance* app, see the documentation on :ref:`adding new equipment <maintenance/equipment_management/add_new_equipment>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:57
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` text field, enter instructions for how the picture should be taken."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Quality Control Point (QCP) form configured to create a Take a Picture quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:65
msgid "Process a Take a Picture quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:67
msgid "Once created, there are multiple ways that *Take a Picture* quality checks can be processed. If a quality check is assigned to a specific inventory, manufacturing, or work order, the check can be processed on the order itself. Alternatively, a check can be processed from the check's page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:74
msgid "To process a *Take a Picture* quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and then select a quality check. Follow the :guilabel:`Instructions` for how to take the picture."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:78
msgid "After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the quality check (computer, tablet, etc.). Then, click the :guilabel:`✏️ (pencil)` button in the :guilabel:`Picture` section to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "The edit button (pencil) on a Take a Picture quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:90
msgid "To process a *Take a Picture* quality check on an order, select a manufacturing order or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:101
msgid "Follow the instructions detailing how to take the picture, which are shown on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the quality check (computer, tablet, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:105
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` button in the :guilabel:`Picture` section to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window to complete the quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Take a Picture quality check pop-up window on a manufacturing or inventory order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:114
msgid "If a quality alert must be created, click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button that appears at the top of the manufacturing or inventory order after the check is validated. Clicking :guilabel:`Quality Alert` opens a quality alert form on a new page. For a complete guide on how to fill out quality alert forms, view the documentation on :ref:`quality alerts <quality/quality_management/quality-alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:123
msgid "When configuring a |QCP| that is triggered during manufacturing, a specific work order can also be specified in the :guilabel:`Work Order Operation` field on the |QCP| form. If a work order is specified, a *Take a Picture* quality check is created for that specific work order, rather than the manufacturing order as a whole."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:128
msgid "*Take a Picture* quality checks configured for work orders **must** be completed from the *Shop Floor* module. To do so, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Then, select an |MO| that includes a work order for which a *Take a Picture* quality check is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:142
msgid "Process the work order's steps until the *Take a Picture* quality check step is reached. Click on the step to open a pop-up window that includes instructions for how the picture should be taken. After taking the picture, make sure it is stored on the device being used to process the quality check (computer, tablet, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:147
msgid "Then, click the :guilabel:`Take a Picture` button on the pop-up window to open the device's file manager. In the file manager, navigate to the picture, select it, and click :guilabel:`Open` to attach it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:151
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` at the bottom of the pop-up window to complete the quality check. The pop-up window then moves on to the next step of the work order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Take a Picture check in the Shop Floor module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:173
msgid "Review picture attached to quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:175
msgid "After a picture has been attached to a check, it can then be reviewed by quality team members or other users. To do so, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and select a quality check to review."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:179
msgid "The attached picture appears in the :guilabel:`Picture` section of the quality check form. After reviewing the picture, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button if the check passes, or the :guilabel:`Fail` button if the check fails."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_check_types/picture_check.rst:-1
msgid "A Take a Picture check with a picture attached."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management.rst:5
msgid "Quality control basics"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:3
msgid "Quality alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:8
msgid "In the Odoo *Quality* app, *quality alerts* are used to notify quality teams of product defects or other issues. Quality alerts can be created from a manufacturing or inventory order, from a work order in the *Shop Floor* module, or directly within the *Quality* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:13
msgid "Create quality alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:15
msgid "There are multiple ways to create a new quality alert:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:17
msgid "**From the Quality app itself**, by to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Alerts`, and then click :guilabel:`New` to open a quality alert form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:19
msgid "Navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and then select an |MO|. Click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button at the top of the |MO| to open a quality alert form in a new page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:24
msgid "This method can only be used if a quality check has been requested for the |MO|. The :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button will not appear otherwise."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:27
msgid "Open the :menuselection:`Inventory` app, click the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an inventory order type card (Receipts, Delivery Orders, etc.), and then select an order. Click the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button at the top of the order to open a quality alert form in a new page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:33
msgid "This method can only be used if a quality check has been requested for the inventory order. The :guilabel:`Quality Alert` button will not appear otherwise. If the button does not appear, a quality alert can also be created by clicking the :guilabel:`⚙️ (gear)` icon at the top of the page and selecting the :guilabel:`Quality Alert` option from the resulting menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:38
msgid "Open the :menuselection:`Shop Floor` module, and then select a work center from the navigation bar at the top of the page. Then, click the :guilabel:`⋮ (three vertical dots)` button at the bottom-right of a work order card to open the :guilabel:`What do you want to do?` menu. Select the :guilabel:`Create a Quality Alert` option from this menu to open a quality alert in a pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:45
msgid "Depending on how a new quality alert form is opened, certain fields on the form may already be filled in. For example, if a quality alert is created from a work order card in the *Shop Floor* module, the :guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`Work Center` are pre-filled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:50
msgid "Quality alerts form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:52
msgid "After opening a new quality alert form, begin by giving it a short :guilabel:`Title` that summarizes the issue with the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:55
msgid "Then, if the quality alert is referencing:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:57
msgid "**A specific product or product variant**, select it from the :guilabel:`Product` or :guilabel:`Product Variant` drop-down menus."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:59
msgid "**A specific work center**, select it from the :guilabel:`Work Center` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:60
msgid "**A specific picking order**, select it from the :guilabel:`Picking` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:62
msgid "Next in the :guilabel:`Team` field, select the quality team that is responsible for managing the quality alert. If a specific employee should be responsible for the quality alert, select them from the :guilabel:`Responsible` drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:66
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Tags` field, select any tags relevant to the quality alert from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:69
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Root Cause` field to select the cause of the quality issue, if known."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:71
msgid "Lastly, choose a :guilabel:`Priority` level by selecting a :guilabel:`⭐ (star)` number between one and three. Quality alerts with higher priorities appear at the top of the :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` Kanban board in the *Quality* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:75
msgid "At the bottom of the quality alert form are four tabs which aid in adding supplemental information or actions to be taken for the quality alert. They can be filled out as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:78
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Description` tab, enter a description of the quality issue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:79
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Corrective Actions` tab to detail the steps that should be taken to fix the issue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:81
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Preventive Actions` tab to detail what should be done to prevent the issue from occurring in the future."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:83
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab, select the :guilabel:`Vendor` of the product. If using an Odoo database which manages multiple companies, select the relevant company in the :guilabel:`Company` field. Finally, specify when the alert was assigned to a quality team in the :guilabel:`Date Assigned` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:-1
msgid "A quality alert form that has been filled out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:93
msgid "Manage quality alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:95
msgid "To view all existing quality alerts, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Alerts`. By default, alerts are displayed in a Kanban board view, which organizes them into different stages based on where they are in the review process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:99
msgid "To move an alert to a different stage, simply drag and drop it on the desired stage. Alternatively, select a quality alert to open it, and then click the desired stage above the top-right corner of the quality alert form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:103
msgid "To create a new alert within a specific stage, click the :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button to the right of the stage name. In the new alert card that appears below the stage title, enter the :guilabel:`Title` of the alert, and then click :guilabel:`Add`. To configure the rest of the alert, select the alert card to open its form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_alerts.rst:-1
msgid "The Quality Alerts page, displaying alerts in a Kanban view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:3
msgid "Quality checks"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:9
msgid "Quality checks are manual inspections conducted by employees, and are used to ensure the quality of products. In Odoo, a quality check can be conducted for a single product, or multiple products within the same inventory operation or manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:13
msgid "Using a Quality Control Point (QCP), it is possible to create quality checks automatically at regular intervals. When quality checks are created by a |QCP|, they appear on a manufacturing or inventory order, where the employee processing the order will be prompted to complete them. For a full explanation of how to create and configure a |QCP|, see the documentation on :ref:`quality control points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:19
msgid "While quality checks are most commonly created automatically by a |QCP|, it is also possible to manually create a single quality check. Creating a check manually is useful when an employee wants to schedule a quality check that will only occur once, or register a quality check that they conduct unprompted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:25
msgid "Manual quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:27
msgid "To manually create a single quality check, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, and click :guilabel:`New`. On the quality check form, begin by selecting an option from the :guilabel:`Control per` drop-down menu:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Operation` requests a check for an entire operation (ex. delivery order) and all products within it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Product` requests a check for every unit of a product that is part of an operation (ex. every unit of a product within a delivery order)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity` requests a check for every quantity of a product that is part of an operation (ex. one check for five units of a product within a delivery order). Selecting :guilabel:`Quantity` also causes a :guilabel:`Lot/Serial` drop-down field to appear, from which can be selected a specific lot or serial number that the quality check should be conducted for."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:40
msgid "Next, select an inventory operation from the :guilabel:`Picking` drop-down menu or a manufacturing order from the :guilabel:`Production Order` drop-down menu. This is necessary because Odoo needs to know for which operation the quality check is being conducted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:44
msgid "If the quality check should be assigned to a specific |QCP|, select it from the :guilabel:`Control Point` drop-down menu. This is useful if the quality check is being created manually, but should still be recognized as belonging to a specific |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:48
msgid "Select a quality check type from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down field:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:50
msgid ":guilabel:`Instructions` provides specific instructions for how to conduct the quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:51
msgid ":guilabel:`Take a Picture` requires a picture to be attached to the check before the check can be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:53
msgid ":guilabel:`Pass - Fail` is used when the product being checked must meet a certain criteria to pass the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:55
msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Measure` causes a :guilabel:`Measure` input field to appear, in which a measurement must be entered before the check can be completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:57
msgid "Selecting :guilabel:`Worksheet` causes a :guilabel:`Quality Template` drop-down field to appear. Use it to select a quality worksheet that must be filled out to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:60
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` field, select the quality team that is responsible for the quality check. In the :guilabel:`Company` field, select the company that owns the product being inspected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:63
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Notes` tab at the bottom of the form, enter any relevant instructions in the :guilabel:`Instructions` text entry box (ex. 'Attach a picture of the product'). In the :guilabel:`Notes` text entry box, enter any relevant information about the quality check (who created it, why it was created, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:68
msgid "Finally, if the check is being processed immediately, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top left of the screen if the check passes, or the :guilabel:`Fail` button if the check fails."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:-1
msgid "A quality check form filled out for a Pass - Fail check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:76
msgid "Process quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:78
msgid "Quality checks can be processed directly on the quality check's page, or from a manufacturing or inventory order for which a check is required. Alternatively, if a quality check is created for a specific work order operation, the check is processed in the *Shop Floor* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:83
msgid "It is not possible to manually create a single quality check that is assigned to a specific work order operation. Quality checks for work order operations can only be created by a |QCP|. See the documentation on :ref:`Quality Control Points <quality/quality_management/quality-control-points>` for information about how to configure a |QCP| that will create quality checks for a specific work order operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:90
msgid "Quality check page"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:92
msgid "To process a quality check from the check's page, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Quality Checks`, then select the check to process. Follow the instructions for how to complete the check, listed in the :guilabel:`Instructions` field of the :guilabel:`Notes` tab at the bottom of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:97
msgid "If the quality check passes, click the :guilabel:`Pass` button at the top of the page. If the check fails, click the :guilabel:`Fail` button, instead."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:101
msgid "Quality check on order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:103
msgid "To process a quality check on an order, select a manufacturing or inventory order (receipt, delivery, return, etc.), for which a check is required. Manufacturing orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and clicking on an order. Inventory orders can be selected by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory`, clicking the :guilabel:`# To Process` button on an operation card, and selecting an order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:109
msgid "On the selected inventory or manufacturing order, a purple :guilabel:`Quality Checks` button appears at the top of the order. Click the button to open the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window, which shows all of the quality checks required for that order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:113
msgid "Follow the instructions that appear on the :guilabel:`Quality Check` pop-up window. If a Pass - Fail check is being processed, complete the check by clicking :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` at the bottom of the pop-up window. For all other quality check types, a :guilabel:`Validate` button appears instead. Click it to complete the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:-1
msgid "The \"Quality Check\" pop-up window on a manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:123
msgid "Quality check on work order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:125
msgid "To process a quality check for a work order, begin by navigating to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`. Select an |MO| that includes a work order for which a quality check is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:135
msgid "For a full guide to the Shop Floor module, see the :doc:`Shop Floor overview <../../manufacturing/shop_floor/shop_floor_overview>` documentation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:142
msgid "Process the work order's steps until the quality check step is reached. Click on the step to open a pop-up window that details how the check should be completed. After following the instructions, click :guilabel:`Validate` to complete the check. Alternatively, if a *Pass - Fail* check is being processed, click either the :guilabel:`Pass` or :guilabel:`Fail` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:147
msgid "It is also possible to complete a quality check by clicking the checkbox on the right side of the step. Doing so automatically marks the check as *Passed*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:151
msgid "The specific steps for processing a quality check depend upon the type of check being conducted. For information about processing each type of quality check, see the associated documentation:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:154
msgid ":doc:`../quality_check_types/instructions_check`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:155
msgid ":doc:`../quality_check_types/pass_fail_check`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:156
msgid ":doc:`../quality_check_types/measure_check`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_checks.rst:157
msgid ":doc:`../quality_check_types/picture_check`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:3
msgid "Quality control points"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, *quality control points* (QCPs), are used to automatically create :doc:`quality checks <quality_checks>` at predetermined intervals. |QCPs| can be configured to create quality checks for specific operations (manufacturing, delivery, etc.), as well as specific products within those operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:16
msgid "Using |QCPs| allows quality teams to ensure products are being regularly inspected for defects and other issues."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:20
msgid "Configure quality control points"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:22
msgid "To create a new |QCP|, navigate to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and then click :guilabel:`New`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:25
msgid "Begin filling out the new |QCP| by entering a unique :guilabel:`Title` that makes the |QCP| easily identifiable."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:28
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Products` field, select one or more products the |QCP| should apply to. If the |QCP| should apply to an entire product category, select it in the :guilabel:`Product Categories` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:32
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Operations` field, select the operation(s) that should trigger the |QCP|. For example, selecting the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` option in the :guilabel:`Operations` field causes a quality check to be created for new manufacturing orders (MOs)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:37
msgid "When creating a new |QCP|, at least one operation must be listed in the :guilabel:`Operations` field. However, the :guilabel:`Products` and :guilabel:`Product Categories` fields can be left blank. If they are left blank, the |QCP| generates quality checks for every instance of the specified operation(s)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:42
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` operation is selected in the :guilabel:`Operations` field, a new field appears below it, titled :guilabel:`Work Order Operation`. From this field, select a specific work order to generate quality checks for that operation, rather than the manufacturing operation in general."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:47
msgid "For example, a |QCP| could be configured to create quality checks for the `Assembly` work order of the `Coffee Table` product. Then, if a new |MO| is confirmed for a `Coffee Table`, the |QCP| creates a quality check specifically for the `Assembly` operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:51
msgid "The :guilabel:`Control Per` field is set to one of three options that determine *when* a new quality check is created:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:54
msgid ":guilabel:`Operation`: one check is requested for the specified operation, as a whole."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: one check is requested for each *unique* product included in the specified operation. For example, a delivery operation for one table and four chairs would generate two checks, since two *unique* products are included in the operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:58
msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: a check is requested for a certain percentage of items within the specified operation. This percentage is set by enabling the :guilabel:`Partial Transfer Test` checkbox, and then entering a numerical value in the :guilabel:`Percentage` field that appears below. If the checkbox is not enabled, one quality check is created for the full quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:63
msgid "The :guilabel:`Control Frequency` field is set to one of three options that determine *how often* a new quality check is created:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`All`: a quality check is requested every time the conditions of the |QCP| are met."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:67
msgid ":guilabel:`Randomly`: a quality check is randomly requested for a certain percentage of operations, which can be specified in the :guilabel:`Every #% of Transfers` field that appears below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:70
msgid ":guilabel:`Periodically`: a quality check is requested once every set period of time, which is specified by entering a numerical value in the field below, and choosing either :guilabel:`Days`, :guilabel:`Weeks`, or :guilabel:`Months` as the desired time interval."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:74
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` field, specify the type of quality check that should be performed. The method for processing quality checks created by the |QCP| depends upon the type of quality check selected:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:78
msgid ":guilabel:`Instructions` checks provide specific instructions for how to complete the quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:80
msgid ":guilabel:`Take a Picture` checks require a picture of the product be uploaded for later review by the assigned quality team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:82
msgid ":guilabel:`Register Production` checks prompt manufacturing employees to confirm the quantity of the product that was produced during the manufacturing operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Pass - Fail` checks specify a criterion that products must meet for the check to pass."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:85
msgid ":guilabel:`Measure` checks prompt employees to record a measurement of the product that must be within a tolerance of a norm value for the check to pass."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:87
msgid ":guilabel:`Worksheet` checks provide an interactive worksheet that must be filled out by the employee processing the check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:91
msgid "An *Instructions* check is the same as a step on a work order for an MO."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:93
msgid "When a step is added to a work order, Odoo stores it in the Quality app as a |QCP|. It is possible to manually create a |QCP| with the *Instructions* check type, and even assign it to an operation other than manufacturing, like receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:97
msgid "However, when creating a control point specifically for quality control purposes, using a different check type is probably more effective."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:100
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Team` field, specify the quality team that is responsible for managing the |QCP|, and the quality checks it creates. If a specific quality team member is responsible for the |QCP|, select them in the :guilabel:`Responsible` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:104
msgid "The :guilabel:`Step Document` field has two options that specify the location of an instructional document detailing how to complete the quality checks created by the |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:107
msgid "Select :guilabel:`Specific Page of Operation Worksheet` if the document is included with the instructional worksheet for the work order, then enter the page number in the :guilabel:`Worksheet Page` field that appears below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:111
msgid "Select :guilabel:`Custom` if the document should be included in the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab at the bottom of the |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:114
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Instructions` tab at the bottom of the form, enter instructions for how to complete the quality checks created by the |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:117
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Custom` option was selected in the :guilabel:`Step Document` field above, a document can be attached in this tab. To do so, either select the :guilabel:`Upload your file` button to open the device's file manager, and then select a file, or add a link to a Google Slides document in the :guilabel:`Google Slide Link` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:122
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Message If Failure` tab, include instructions for what to do if the quality check fails. For example, instruct the employee processing the quality check to create a :doc:`quality alert <quality_alerts>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:126
msgid "The :guilabel:`Notes` tab is used to provide additional information about the |QCP|, like the reason it was created. The information entered in this tab is **not** shown to employees processing the quality checks created by the |QCP|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/quality/quality_management/quality_control_points.rst:-1
msgid "A QCP configured to create Pass - Fail checks for a work order operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs.rst:8
msgid "Repairs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs.rst:10
msgid "Odoo *Repairs* assists companies in creating and processing repairs for damaged products returned by customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:3
msgid "Process repair orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:10
msgid "Sometimes, products delivered to customers can break or be damaged in transit, and need to be returned for a refund, delivery of a replacement product, or repairs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:13
msgid "In Odoo, repairs for products returned by customers can be tracked in the *Repairs* app. Once repaired, products can be redelivered to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:16
msgid "The return and repair process for damaged products typically follows the below steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:18
msgid ":ref:`Process return order for damaged product <repairs/repair_orders/return-order>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:19
msgid ":ref:`Create repair order for returned product <repairs/repair_orders/repair>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:20
msgid ":ref:`Return repaired product to customer <repairs/repair_orders/return-customer>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:25
msgid "Return order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:27
msgid "Returns can be processed in Odoo via *reverse transfers*, created directly from a sales order (SO) once products have been delivered to a customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:30
msgid "To create a return, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales app`, and click into an |SO| from which a product should be returned. Then, from the |SO| form, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button. Doing so opens the delivery order (DO) form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:34
msgid "From this form, click :guilabel:`Return`. This opens a :guilabel:`Reverse Transfer` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Reverse transfer pop-up window on delivery order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:253
msgid "This pop-up lists the :guilabel:`Product` included in the order, the :guilabel:`Quantity` delivered to the customer, and the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` the product was in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:43
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:256
msgid "Click the value in the :guilabel:`Quantity` field to change the quantity of the product to be returned, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:46
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:259
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`🗑️ (trash)` icon at the far-right of the product line to remove it from the return, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:49
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Return` to confirm the return. This creates a new receipt for the returned products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:52
msgid "Once the product has been returned to the warehouse, receipt of the return can be registered in the database by clicking :guilabel:`Validate` from the reverse transfer form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:56
msgid "Once a reverse transfer for a return is validated, the value in the :guilabel:`Delivered` column on the original |SO| updates to reflect the difference between the original :guilabel:`Quantity` ordered, and the :guilabel:`Quantity` returned by the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:0
msgid "Delivered and Quantity columns on sales order after return."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:67
msgid "Create repair order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:69
msgid "Once products have been returned, their repairs can be tracked by creating a repair order (RO)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:71
msgid "To create a new |RO|, navigate to :menuselection:`Repairs app`, and click :guilabel:`New`. This opens a blank |RO| form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Left-hand side of blank repair order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:78
msgid "On this form, begin by selecting a :guilabel:`Customer`. The customer selected should be for whom the order will be invoiced and delivered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:81
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Product to Repair` field, click the drop-down menu to select the product that needs repair. If necessary, click :guilabel:`Search More...` to open a :guilabel:`Search: Product to Repair` pop-up window, and browse all products in the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:85
msgid "Once a :guilabel:`Product to Repair` is selected, a new :guilabel:`Product Quantity` field appears below it. In that field, enter the quantity (in a `0.00` format) of the product that requires repair."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:89
msgid "To the right of that value, click the drop-down list to select the unit of measure (UoM) for the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:92
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Return` field, click the drop-down menu and select the return order from which the product to be repaired comes from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:95
msgid "Tick the :guilabel:`Under Warranty` checkbox, if the product being repaired is covered by a warranty. If ticked, the :guilabel:`Customer` is not charged for all the parts used in the repair order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:99
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Scheduled Date` field, click the date to reveal a calendar popover window. From this calendar, select a date for the repair, and click :guilabel:`Apply`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Right-hand side of blank repair order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:106
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Responsible` field, click the drop-down menu and select the user who should be responsible for the repair."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:109
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Company` field, if in a multi-company environment, select which company this |RO| belongs to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:112
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Tags` field, click the drop-down menu and select which tags should be applied to this |RO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:116
msgid "Parts tab"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:118
msgid "Add, remove, or recycle parts in the :guilabel:`Parts` tab. To do so, click :guilabel:`Add a line` at the bottom of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:121
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Type` column, click the box to reveal three options to choose from: :guilabel:`Add` (selected by default), :guilabel:`Remove`, and :guilabel:`Recycle`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Type column options or new part under Parts tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:128
msgid "Choosing :guilabel:`Add` adds this part to the |RO|. Adding parts lists components for use in the repair. If the components are used, the user completing the repair can record they were used. If they were not used, the user can indicate that, too, and the components can be saved for another use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:133
msgid "Choosing :guilabel:`Remove` removes this part from the |RO|. Removing parts lists components that should be removed from the product being repaired during the repair process. If the parts are removed, the user completing the repair can indicate they were removed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:137
msgid "Choosing :guilabel:`Recycle` recycles this part from the |RO|, designating it for later use or to be repurposed for another use in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:140
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Product` column, select which product (part) should be added, removed, or recycled. In the :guilabel:`Demand` column, change the quantity, if necessary, to indicate what quantity of this part should be used in the repair process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:144
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Done` column, change the value (in a `0.00` format) once the part has been successfully added, removed, or recycled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:147
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` column, select the |UoM| for the part."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:149
msgid "Finally, in the :guilabel:`Used` column, tick the checkbox once the part has been used in the repair process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:152
msgid "To add additional columns to the line, click the :guilabel:`(optional columns drop-down)` icon, at the far-right of the header row. Select the desired options to add to the line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Optional additional options to add to new part line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:160
msgid "Repair Notes and Miscellaneous tabs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:162
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Repair Notes` tab to add internal notes about this specific |RO|, and anything the user performing the repair might need to know."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:165
msgid "Click the blank text field to begin writing notes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:167
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous` tab to see the :guilabel:`Operation Type` for this repair. By default, this is set to :guilabel:`YourCompany: Repairs`, indicating this is a repair type operation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:171
msgid "Once all desired configurations have been made on the |RO| form, click :guilabel:`Confirm Repair`. This moves the |RO| to the :guilabel:`Confirmed` stage, and reserves the necessary components needed for the repair."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:175
msgid "A new :guilabel:`Forecasted` column appears on the product lines under the :guilabel:`Parts` tab, displaying the availability of all components needed for the repair."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:178
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Start Repair`. This moves the |RO| to the :guilabel:`Under Repair` stage (in the upper-right corner). If the |RO| should be canceled, click :guilabel:`Cancel Repair`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:181
msgid "Once all products have been successfully repaired, the |RO| is completed. To register this in the database, click :guilabel:`End Repair`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:185
msgid "If all parts added to the |RO| were not used, clicking :guilabel:`End Repair` causes an :guilabel:`Uncomplete Move(s)` pop-up window to appear."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Uncomplete Moves pop-up window for unused parts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:192
msgid "The pop-up window informs the user that there is a difference between the initial demand and the actual quantity used for the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:195
msgid "If the :guilabel:`Used` quantity should be changed, click :guilabel:`Discard` or close the pop-up window. If the order should be confirmed, click :guilabel:`Validate`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:198
msgid "This moves the |RO| to the :guilabel:`Repaired` stage. A :guilabel:`Product Moves` smart button also appears above the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:201
msgid "Click the :guilabel:`Product Moves` smart button to view the product's moves history during and after the repair process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Moves history of product included in the repair order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:211
msgid "Return product to customer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:214
msgid "Product is under warranty"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:216
msgid "Once the product has been successfully repaired, it can be returned to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:219
msgid "Product is not under warranty"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:221
msgid "If the product is not under warranty, or should the customer bear the repair costs, click :guilabel:`Create Quotation`. This opens a new |SO| form, pre-populated with the parts used in the |RO|, with the total cost of the repair calculated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:-1
msgid "Pre-populated new quotation for parts included in repair order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:229
msgid "If this |SO| should be sent to the customer, click :guilabel:`Confirm`, and proceed to invoice the customer for the repair."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:233
msgid "If the customer should be charged for a repair service, a service type product can be created and added to the |SO| for a repaired product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:236
msgid "To return the product to the customer, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales app`, and select the original |SO| from which the initial return was processed. Then, click the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:240
msgid "From the resulting list of operations, click the reverse transfer, indicated by the :guilabel:`Source Document`, which should read `Return of WH/OUT/XXXXX`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:243
msgid "This opens the return form. At the top of this form, a :guilabel:`Repair Orders` smart button now appears, linking this return to the completed |RO|."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:246
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Return` at the top of the form. This opens a :guilabel:`Reverse Transfer` pop-up window."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:262
msgid "Once ready, click :guilabel:`Return` to confirm the return. This creates a new delivery for the returned products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:265
msgid "When the delivery has been processed and the product has been returned to the customer, click :guilabel:`Validate` to validate the delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/repairs/repair_orders.rst:269
msgid ":doc:`../../sales/sales/products_prices/returns`"
msgstr ""
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink